GL Operator's Manual

É1665840282jËÍ 1665840282

Order no. 6515 0450 13 Part no. 166 584 02 82 Edition C 2013 GL Operator's Manual Symbols i Practical tips or further information that Publication details Registered trademarks: could be helpful to you. Internet R X Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of This symbol indicates an Bluetooth SIG Inc. instruction that must be followed. Further information about Mercedes-Benz X vehicles and about Daimler AG can be found RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. Several of these symbols in on the following websites: RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks succession indicate an instruction http://www.mbusa.com (USA only) of DOLBY Laboratories. with several steps. (Y page) This symbol tells you where you http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are can find more information about a only) registered trademarks of Daimler AG. topic. RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of YY This symbol indicates a warning or Prince. an instruction that is continued on Editorial office R ® ® iPod and iTunes are registered the next page. trademarks of Apple Inc. Display This font indicates a display in the You are welcome to forward any queries or R Logic7® is a registered trademark of multifunction display/COMAND suggestions you may have regarding this Harman International Industries. display. Operator's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are Parts of the software in the vehicle are address: registered trademarks of Microsoft protected by copyright © 2005 Corporation. Daimler AG, HPC: CAC, Customer Service, The FreeType Project 70546 Stuttgart, Germany RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius http://www.freetype.org. All rights © XM radio Inc. reserved. Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, RHD Radio is a registered trademark of without written permission from Daimler AG. iBiquity Digital Corporation. RGracenote® is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey, LLC. In this Operator's Manual, you will find the following symbols: G WARNING Warning notes draw your attention to hazards that endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others.

H Environmental note Environmental notes provide you with information on environmentally aware actions or disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you to dangers that could lead to damage to your vehicle.

As at 13.08.2012 Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz We urge you to read this Operator's Manual carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehicle before driving. For yourown safety and a longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them could result in damage to the vehicle or personal injury to you or others. Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow instructions is not covered by the Mercedes- Benz Limited Warranty. The equipment or product designationofyour vehicle may vary depending on: RModel ROrder RCountry specification RAvailability Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to introduce changes in the following areas: Rdesign Requipment Rtechnical features The equipment in your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations. The following are integral components of the vehicle: ROperator's Manual RMaintenance Booklet REquipment-dependent supplements Keep printed copies of the documents in the vehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass the documents on to the new owner. The technical documentation team at Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant motoring. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. ADaimler Company

1665840282 É1665840282jËÍ

Contents 3

Index ...... 4 At aglance ...... 31

Introduction ...... 23 Safety ...... 41

Opening and closing ...... 77

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .. 101

Lights and windshield wipers ...... 123

Climate control ...... 141

Driving and parking ...... 161

On-board computer and displays .... 265

Stowage and features ...... 335

Maintenance and care ...... 365

Breakdown assistance ...... 381

Wheels and tires ...... 399

Technical data ...... 437 4 Index

1, 2, 3 ... Adaptive Highbeam Assist Display message ...... 302 115 Vsocket ...... 349 Function/notes ...... 129 12 Vsocket Switching on/off (on-board see Sockets computer) ...... 279 360° camera Additives (engine oil) ...... 444 Cleaning ...... 376 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) Function/notes ...... 229 Function/notes ...... 212 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) .... 71 Airbags 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel Display message ...... 298 drive) ...... 250 Front air bag (driver, front passenger)...... 46 A Important safety notes ...... 44 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Knee bag ...... 47 Display message ...... 287 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Function/notes ...... 66 indicator lamp ...... 48 Important safety notes ...... 66 Safety guidelines ...... 43 Warning lamp ...... 323 Side impact airbag ...... 47 Activating/deactivating cooling Windowcurtain air bag ...... 48 with air dehumidification ...... 151 Air-conditioning system Active BlindSpot Assist see Climate control Activating/deactivating (on- Airfilter (display message) ...... 305 board computer) ...... 277 AIRFLOW ...... 153 Display message ...... 310 AIRMATIC package Function/information...... 241 ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ... 212 Trailer towing ...... 244 Function/notes ...... 212 Active Curve System Level control ...... 213 Display message ...... 307 Airvents Function/notes ...... 213 Glove box ...... 159 Active Driving Assistance package .241 Important safetynotes ...... 158 Active Lane Keeping Assist Rear...... 159 Activating/deactivating (on- Setting ...... 158 board computer) ...... 277 Setting the center air vents ...... 158 Display message ...... 310 Setting the side air vents ...... 159 Function/information...... 245 see Climate control Trailer towing ...... 247 Alarm system Active light function ...... 129 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Active Parking Assist Ambient lighting Display message ...... 311 Setting the brightness (on-board Function/notes ...... 222 computer) ...... 279 Important safety notes ...... 221 Setting the color (on-board Towing atrailer ...... 225 computer) ...... 279 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 73 AMG adaptive sport suspension Adaptive Brake Assist system ...... 216 Display message ...... 294 AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 282 Function/notes ...... 69 Anti-lockbraking system see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Index 5

Anti-theft alarm system Engaging reversegear ...... 170 see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Engaging the parkposition ...... 169 Approach/departure angle ...... 194 Kickdown...... 172 Ashtray ...... 347 Manual drive program ...... 175 Assistance menu (on-board Overview ...... 169 computer) ...... 276 Problem (malfunction) ...... 177 ASSYST PLUS Programselector button ...... 173 Displaying a service message ...... 371 Pulling away ...... 165 Hiding a service message ...... 371 Shift ranges...... 174 Notes ...... 370 Starting the engine ...... 165 Resetting the service interval Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 173 display...... 371 Trailer towing ...... 172 Service message ...... 370 Transmission position display...... 169 Special service requirements ...... 371 Transmissionpositions ...... 171 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) Automatic transmission Activating/deactivating ...... 76 emergency mode ...... 177 Function ...... 76 Axle load, permissible (trailer Switching off the alarm ...... 76 towing) ...... 449 ATTENTIONASSIST Activating/deactivating ...... 277 B Display message ...... 306 Bag hook ...... 342 Function/notes ...... 234 Ball coupling Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 273 Installing ...... 259 Audio system Removing ...... 263 see separate operating instructions Storing ...... 263 Authorized Centers BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 see Qualified specialist workshop BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center PLUS) ...... 67 see Qualified specialist workshop Battery (SmartKey) Authorized workshops Checking ...... 81 see Qualified specialist workshop Important safety notes ...... 81 AUTO lights Replacing ...... 81 Display message ...... 302 Battery (vehicle) see Lights Charging ...... 390 Automatic headlamp mode ...... 124 Display message ...... 304 Automatic transmission Important safety notes ...... 387 Automatic drive program ...... 173 Jump starting ...... 391 Changing gear...... 172 Overview ...... 387 DIRECT SELECT lever...... 169 BlindSpot Assist Display message ...... 316 Activating/deactivating ...... 277 Drive program display...... 169 Display message ...... 310 Driving tips ...... 172 Notes/function ...... 237 Emergency running mode ...... 177 Trailer towing ...... 239 Engaging drive position ...... 171 see Active Blind Spot Assist Engaging neutral...... 170 BlueTEC Engaging parkposition Adding DEF ...... 181 automatically ...... 170 BlueTEC (DEF) ...... 442 6 Index

Brake Assist Paint ...... 373 see BAS (Brake Assist System) Plastic trim ...... 377 Brake fluid Power washer ...... 373 Displaymessage ...... 293 Rearview camera ...... 375 Notes ...... 444 Roof lining ...... 379 Brake lamps Seat belt...... 379 Changing bulbs ...... 136 Seat cover ...... 378 Display message ...... 300 Sensors ...... 375 Brakes Steering wheel ...... 378 ABS ...... 66 Trim pieces ...... 378 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 69 Washing by hand ...... 373 BAS ...... 67 Wheels ...... 374 BAS PLUS ...... 67 Windows ...... 374 Brake fluid (notes) ...... 444 Wiper blades ...... 375 Display message ...... 287 Wooden trim ...... 378 Driving tips ...... 187 Cargo compartment cover High-performance brake system .... 188 Notes/howtouse ...... 342 Important safety notes ...... 187 Cargo compartment enlargement Maintenance ...... 188 Important safety notes ...... 340 Parking brake ...... 184 Cargo compartment floor Warning lamp ...... 322 Opening/closing ...... 343 Breakdown Stowagewell (under) ...... 343 see Flat tire Cargo tie down rings ...... 341 see Towing away Car keys Bulbs see SmartKey see Changing bulbs Car wash (care) ...... 372 CD player/CD changer (on-board C computer) ...... 274 Center console California Lowersection ...... 37 Important notice for retail Uppersection ...... 36 customers and lessees ...... 25 Central locking Calling up a malfunction Automatic locking (on-board see Display messages computer) ...... 280 Car Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 79 see Vehicle Changing bulbs Care Brake lamps ...... 136 360° camera ...... 376 High-beam headlamps ...... 135 Carpets ...... 379 Important safety notes ...... 133 Car wash ...... 372 Low-beam headlamps ...... 134 Display ...... 377 Overview of bulbtypes ...... 133 Exhaustpipe ...... 376 Removing/replacing the cover Exterior lights ...... 375 (front wheel arch) ...... 134 Gearorselectorlever ...... 378 Child-proof locks Interior ...... 377 Important safety notes ...... 65 Matte finish ...... 374 Reardoors ...... 65 NightView Assist Plus ...... 377 Notes ...... 371 Index 7

Children Switching on/off ...... 150 In thevehicle ...... 60 Switching residual heaton/off ...... 157 Restraint systems ...... 60 Switching the rear window Specialseat belt retractor ...... 62 defroster on/off ...... 156 Child seat Switching the ZONE function on/ LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat off ...... 155 anchors ...... 63 Coat hooks ...... 343 Top Tether ...... 63 Cockpit Cigarette lighter ...... 348 Overview ...... 32 Cleaning see Instrument cluster Mirrorturn signal ...... 375 COLLISIONPREVENTION ASSIST Trailer tow hitch ...... 376 Operation/notes ...... 68 Climate control COMAND 3-zone automatic climate control ON&OFFROAD menu ...... 256 with additional rear-compartment see separate operating instructions climate control ...... 148 COMAND display Automatic climate control (3-zone) 146 Cleaning ...... 377 Controlling automatically ...... 152 Combination switch ...... 127 Cooling with airdehumidification .. 151 Compass Defrosting the windows ...... 156 Calling up ...... 363 Defrosting the windshield ...... 155 Consumption statistics (on-board Dual-zone automatic climate computer) ...... 271 control ...... 143 Convenience closing feature ...... 93 Important safety notes ...... 142 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 Indicator lamp ...... 152 Coolant(engine) Information on using 3-zone Checkingthe level ...... 369 automatic climate control ...... 150 Display message ...... 303 Maximum cooling ...... 155 Filling capacity ...... 446 Notes on using automatic climate Important safety notes ...... 445 control ...... 145 Temperature (on-board computer) .282 Overview of systems ...... 142 Temperature gauge ...... 267 Problems with cooling with air Warning lamp ...... 330 dehumidification ...... 152 Cooling Problem with the rear window see Climate control defroster ...... 157 Cornering light function Rearcontrol panel ...... 146 Display message ...... 299 Rear control panel (3-zone Function/notes ...... 129 automatic climate control with Crash-responsive emergency additional rear-compartment lighting ...... 133 climate control) ...... 148 Crosswind driving assistance ...... 73 Setting the airdistribution ...... 154 Cruise control Setting the airflow ...... 154 Activating ...... 196 Setting the airvents...... 158 Activationconditions...... 196 Setting the climate mode (AIR Cruise control lever...... 196 FLOW) ...... 153 Deactivating ...... 198 Setting the temperature ...... 153 Display message ...... 313 Switching air-recirculation mode Driving system ...... 195 on/off ...... 157 8 Index

Function/notes ...... 196 Hiding (on-board computer) ...... 286 Important safety notes ...... 195 KEYLESS-GO ...... 319 Storing and maintaining current Lights ...... 299 speed...... 196 Safety systems ...... 287 Cup holder SmartKey ...... 319 Center console ...... 345 Tires ...... 314 Important safety notes ...... 344 Vehicle ...... 316 Rearcompartment...... 345 Distance display (on-board Temperature controlled...... 345 computer) ...... 276 Third row of seats ...... 346 Distance recorder Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 28 see Trip odometer Customer Relations Department ...... 28 Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 332 Distance warning function D Activating/deactivating ...... 276 Function/notes ...... 68 Dashboard lighting Warning lamp ...... 332 see Instrument cluster lighting DISTRONIC PLUS Data Activating ...... 200 see Technical data Activation conditions ...... 200 Daytime running lamps Cruise control lever...... 200 Display message ...... 301 Deactivating ...... 204 Function/notes ...... 124 Display message ...... 312 Switching on/off (on-board Displays in the multifunction computer) ...... 278 display...... 205 Dealerships Driving tips ...... 206 see Qualified specialist workshop Function/notes ...... 198 Declarations of conformity ...... 27 Important safety notes ...... 198 DEF Setting the specified minimum Adding ...... 181 distance ...... 204 Display message ...... 306 Warning lamp ...... 332 Filling capacity ...... 443 Doors Important safety notes ...... 442 Automatic locking (on-board Delayedswitch-off computer) ...... 280 Exteriorlighting (on-board Automatic locking (switch) ...... 86 computer)...... 279 Central locking/unlocking Interior lighting ...... 280 (SmartKey) ...... 79 Diagnostics connection ...... 27 Control panel ...... 40 Diesel ...... 441 Display message ...... 317 Differential locks (display message) 308 Emergency locking ...... 87 Digital speedometer ...... 271 Emergency unlocking ...... 86 DIRECTSELECT lever Important safety notes ...... 84 see Automatic transmission Opening (from inside) ...... 85 Display messages Overview ...... 84 ASSYSTPLUS ...... 370 Power closing feature ...... 86 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 286 Drinking and driving ...... 186 Driving systems ...... 306 Drive program Engine ...... 303 Automatic ...... 173 General notes ...... 286 Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 169 Index 9

Manual ...... 175 Blind Spot Assist ...... 237 Off-road program (vehicles Cruise control ...... 195 without the ON&OFFROAD Display message ...... 306 package) ...... 252 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 198 Off-road program (vehicles with HOLD function ...... 211 the ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 252 Lane Keeping Assist ...... 239 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 283 Level control (vehicles with see On-road programs AIRMATIC package) ...... 213 Driver's door Level control (vehicles with the see Doors ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 207 Driving abroad On-road programs ...... 247 Mercedes-Benz Service ...... 371 PARKTRONIC...... 217 Symmetrical low beam...... 124 Rearview camera ...... 225 Driving in mountainous terrain Driving tips Approach/departure angle...... 194 Automatic transmission ...... 172 Driving lamps Brakes ...... 187 see Daytime running lamps Break-in period ...... 162 Driving off-road DISTRONICPLUS ...... 206 see Off-road driving Downhill gradient ...... 187 Driving safety systems Drinking and driving ...... 186 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 71 Driving abroad ...... 124 ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ...... 66 Driving in winter ...... 190 ADAPTIVE BRAKE ...... 73 Driving on flooded roads...... 189 Adaptive Brake Assist ...... 69 Driving on sand ...... 193 BAS (Brake Assist System) ...... 67 Driving on wet roads...... 189 BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Driving over obstacles ...... 193 PLUS) ...... 67 Exhaustcheck ...... 186 COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST .... 68 Fuel ...... 186 Distance warning function ...... 68 General ...... 186 Electronic brake force distribution ... 73 Hydroplaning ...... 189 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) .70 Icy road surfaces ...... 190 Important safety information ...... 66 Limited braking efficiency on Overview ...... 66 salted roads...... 188 PRE-SAFE® Brake ...... 73 Off-road driving ...... 191 STEER CONTROL ...... 75 Off-road fording ...... 189 Driving systems Snow chains ...... 403 360°camera ...... 229 Symmetrical low beam...... 124 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 241 Tire ruts ...... 193 Active Curve System ...... 213 Towing atrailer ...... 257 Active Driving Assistance package 241 Traveling uphill ...... 194 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 245 Wet road surface ...... 187 Active Parking Assist ...... 221 DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) ADS ...... 212 Display message ...... 309 AIRMATIC package ...... 212 Function/notes ...... 250 AMG adaptive sport suspension DVD audio system ...... 216 Operating (on-board computer) ..... 274 ATTENTION ASSIST ...... 234 DVD video Operating (on-board computer) ..... 274 10 Index

E Checking the oil level ...... 367 Checking the oil level using the EASY-ENTRY feature dipstick ...... 368 Activating/deactivating ...... 281 Display message ...... 304 Function/notes ...... 117 Filling capacity ...... 444 EASY-EXIT feature Notes about oil grades ...... 443 Crash-responsive ...... 118 Notes on oil level/consumption .... 367 Function/notes ...... 117 Temperature (on-board computer) .282 Switching on/off ...... 281 Viscosity ...... 444 EBD (electronic brake force ESP® (Electronic Stability distribution) Program) Display message ...... 289 4ETS ...... 71 Function/notes ...... 73 AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 283 Electronic Stability Program Deactivating/activating ...... 72 ® see ESP (ElectronicStability Program) Display message ...... 287 Emergencyrelease Function/notes ...... 70 Driver's door ...... 86 Important safety information ...... 71 Vehicle ...... 86 Trailer stabilization ...... 72 Emergency spare wheel Warning lamp ...... 325 Important safety notes ...... 434 Exhaustcheck ...... 186 Points to remember ...... 434 Exhaustpipe (cleaning instructions) 376 Removing ...... 435 Exterior lighting Storage location ...... 435 see Lights Technical data ...... 436 Exterior mirrors Emergency Tensioning Devices Adjusting...... 118 Function ...... 59 Dipping (automatic) ...... 119 Safety guidelines...... 43 Folding in/out(automatically) ...... 119 Emergency unlocking Folding in/out(electrically) ...... 119 Tailgate ...... 91 Folding in whenlocking (on-board Emissions control computer) ...... 281 Service and warranty information .... 24 Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 119 Engine Setting ...... 119 Check Engine warning lamp ...... 329 Storing settings (memory function) 121 Display message ...... 303 Storing the parking position ...... 120 Engine number ...... 439 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 338 Irregularrunning ...... 168 Jump-starting ...... 391 F Starting problems ...... 168 Starting the engine with the Fillercap SmartKey ...... 165 see Fuel filler flap Starting with KEYLESS-GO ...... 165 First-aid kit ...... 382 Switching off ...... 184 Flat tire Tow-starting (vehicle) ...... 396 MOExtended tires ...... 384 Engine electronics Preparing the vehicle ...... 383 Problem (malfunction) ...... 168 TIREFIT kit ...... 385 Engine oil Floormats ...... 363 Adding ...... 368 Folding the rear bench seat Additives ...... 444 forwards/back ...... 340 Index 11

Fording GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) Off-road ...... 189 (definition) ...... 421 On flooded roads...... 189 Fuel H Additives ...... 441 Handbrake inspection Consumption statistics ...... 271 see Parking brake Displaying the current Hazard warning lamps ...... 128 consumption ...... 271 Headlamps Displaying the range ...... 271 Driving tips ...... 186 Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 370 Fuel gauge ...... 33, 267 Cleaning system (function) ...... 129 Grade (gasoline) ...... 440 Cleaning system (notes) ...... 446 Important safety notes ...... 440 Fogging up ...... 131 Low outside temperatures ...... 442 see Automatic headlamp mode Premium-grade unleaded gasoline .440 Head restraints Problem (malfunction) ...... 180 Adjusting ...... 104 Quality (diesel)...... 441 Adjusting (electrically)...... 105 Refueling ...... 177 Adjusting (manually)...... 105 Tank content/reserve fuel ...... 440 Adjusting (rear) ...... 106 Fuel filler flap Installing/removing (rear) ...... 106 Opening/closing ...... 178 Luxury ...... 105 Fuel filter(display message) ...... 305 Heating Fuel level see Climate control High-beam headlamps Calling up the range (on-board computer) ...... 271 Changing bulbs ...... 135 Fuel tank Display message ...... 300 Switching Adaptive Highbeam Capacity ...... 440 Assist on/off ...... 130 Problem (malfunction) ...... 180 Switching on/off ...... 128 Fuses Hill start assist ...... 166 Allocation chart ...... 396 HOLD function Before changing ...... 396 Dashboard fuse box ...... 396 Deactivating ...... 212 Fuse box in the engine Display message ...... 309 compartment ...... 397 Function/notes ...... 211 Fuse box underrear bench seat .... 397 Hood Important safety notes ...... 396 Closing ...... 367 Display message ...... 317 Important safety notes ...... 366 G Opening ...... 366 Garage door opener Hydroplaning ...... 189 Clearing the memory ...... 362 Important safety notes ...... 360 I Opening/closing the garage door .. 362 Programming (button in the rear- Ignition lock view mirror) ...... 360 see Key positions Gear indicator (on-board computer) 282 Immobilizer ...... 75 Genuine parts ...... 23 Indicator lamps Glove box ...... 337 see Warning and indicator lamps 12 Index

Insect protection on the radiator .... 367 Display message ...... 310 Instrument cluster Function/information...... 239 Overview ...... 33, 267 see Active Lane Keeping Assist Warning and indicator lamps ... 34, 320 Lap time (RACETIMER) ...... 283 Instrument cluster lighting ...... 267 LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Interior lighting ...... 131 anchors ...... 63 Automatic control ...... 132 Level control (display message) ...... 307 Delayed switch-off (on-board Level control (vehicles with computer) ...... 280 AIRMATIC package) Emergency lighting ...... 133 Basicsettings ...... 214 Manual control ...... 132 Function/notes ...... 213 Overview ...... 131 Important safety notes ...... 213 Reading lamp ...... 131 Level control (vehicles with the Setting the brightness of the ON&OFFROAD package) ambient lighting (on-board Basicsettings ...... 208 computer) ...... 279 Function/notes ...... 207 Setting the color of the ambient Important safety notes ...... 207 lighting (on-board computer) ...... 279 License plate lamp (display message) ...... 301 J Light function,active Display message ...... 302 Jack Lighting Storage location ...... 382 Lightswitch...... 124 Using ...... 425 Lights Jump starting (engine) ...... 391 Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-off .280 K Active light function ...... 129 KEYLESS-GO Automatic headlamp mode ...... 124 Convenience closing feature ...... 94 Cornering light function ...... 129 Display message ...... 319 Driving abroad ...... 124 Locking ...... 79 Hazard warning lamps ...... 128 Start/Stop button ...... 163 High beam flasher ...... 128 Starting the engine ...... 165 High-beam headlamps ...... 128 Unlocking ...... 79 Low-beam headlamps ...... 125 Keypositions Parking lamps ...... 126 KEYLESS-GO ...... 163 Rearfog lamp ...... 126 SmartKey ...... 163 Setting the brightness of the Kickdown ambient lighting (on-board Driving tips ...... 172 computer) ...... 279 Manual drive program ...... 176 Setting the color of the ambient Knee bag ...... 47 lighting (on-board computer) ...... 279 Standing lamps ...... 127 L Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/off ...... 279 Lamps Switching the daytime running see Warning and indicator lamps lamps on/off (on-board computer) 278 Lane Keeping Assist Activating/deactivating ...... 277 Index 13

Switching the exteriorlighting Downloading routes...... 359 delayed switch-off on/off (on- Emergency call ...... 352 board computer)...... 279 Geo fencing ...... 359 Switching the surround lighting Important safety notes ...... 351 on/off (on-board computer) ...... 279 Locating astolen vehicle...... 358 Turn signals ...... 127 MB info call button ...... 354 see Changing bulbs Remote vehicle locking ...... 357 see Interior lighting Roadside Assistance button ...... 354 Light sensor (display message) ...... 302 Search &Send ...... 356 Loading guidelines ...... 336 Self-test ...... 352 Locking Speed alert ...... 359 see Centrallocking System ...... 352 Locking (doors) Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 360 Automatic ...... 86 Vehicle remote malfunction Emergency locking ...... 87 diagnosis...... 358 From inside (central locking Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 357 button) ...... 85 Mechanical key Locking centrally Function/notes ...... 80 see Centrallocking Locking vehicle ...... 87 Locking verification signal (on- Unlocking the driver's door ...... 86 board computer) ...... 280 Memory card (audio) ...... 274 Low-beam headlamps Memory function ...... 121 Changing bulbs ...... 134 Message memory (on-board Display message ...... 299 computer) ...... 286 Setting for driving abroad Messages (symmetrical) ...... 124 see Display messages Switching on/off ...... 125 Mirrors LOW RANGE see Exterior mirrors Display message ...... 308 see Rear-view mirror Off-road gear...... 254 see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) LOW RANGE off-road gear ...... 254 Mobile phone Lumbar support Menu (on-board computer) ...... 274 Adjusting (on the seat) ...... 112 Modifying the programming Luxury head restraints ...... 105 (SmartKey) ...... 80 MOExtendedtires ...... 384 M Mounting wheels Loweringthe vehicle ...... 428 M+S tires ...... 402 Mounting anew wheel ...... 427 Maintenance Raising the vehicle ...... 425 see ASSYST PLUS Removing awheel ...... 427 Malfunction message Securing the vehicle against see Display messages rolling away ...... 424 Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 374 MP3 mbrace Operation ...... 274 Call priority ...... 355 see separate operating instructions Display message ...... 293 Multifunction display Downloading destinations Function/notes ...... 269 (COMAND) ...... 355 Permanent display...... 278 14 Index

Multifunction steering wheel LOW RANGE off-road gear ...... 254 Operating the on-board computer .268 Off-road 4ETS ...... 71 Overview ...... 35 Off-road ABS ...... 67 Off-road ESP® ...... 72 N Off-road program (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD Navigation package) ...... 252 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 272 Off-road programs (vehicleswith see separate operating instructions the ON&OFFROAD package) ...... 252 Night View Assist Plus Oil Activating/deactivating ...... 235 see Engine oil Cleaning ...... 377 On and Offroad menu (on-board Problem (malfunction) ...... 237 computer) ...... 282 Notes on breaking-in anew vehicle 162 On-board computer AMG menu ...... 282 O Assistance menu ...... 276 Occupant Classification System Audiomenu ...... 273 (OCS) Convenience submenu ...... 281 Faults...... 53 Displaying a service message ...... 371 Operation ...... 48 Display messages ...... 286 System self-test ...... 51 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 205 Occupant safety Factory settings submenu ...... 282 Childreninthe vehicle ...... 60 Important safety notes ...... 266 Important safety notes ...... 42 Instrument cluster submenu ...... 278 OCS Lighting submenu ...... 278 Faults ...... 53 Menu overview ...... 270 Operation ...... 48 Message memory ...... 286 System self-test ...... 51 Navigation menu ...... 272 Off-road driving On and Offroadmenu ...... 282 Checklist after driving off-road...... 192 Operation ...... 268 Checklist before driving off-road .... 192 RACETIMER ...... 283 General information ...... 191 Service menu ...... 277 Important safety notes ...... 191 Settings menu ...... 278 Traveling uphill ...... 194 Standard display...... 270 Off-road program (vehicles Telephone menu ...... 274 without the ON&OFFROAD Trip menu ...... 270 package) Vehicle submenu ...... 280 Function/notes ...... 252 Video DVD operation...... 274 Off-road programs (vehicles with On-road programs the ON&OFFROAD package) AUTO program ...... 248 Displays in the COMAND display... 256 Function/notes ...... 247 Function/notes ...... 252 Snow program ...... 249 Off-road program 1...... 253 SPORT program ...... 248 Off-road program 2...... 253 Trailer program ...... 249 Off-road system Opening and closing the side trim 4MATIC ...... 250 panels ...... 135 DSR ...... 250 Operating system see On-board computer Index 15

Outside temperature display ...... 268 Power closing feature ...... 86 Overhead control panel ...... 39 Power washers ...... 373 Override feature Power windows Rearside windows ...... 65 see Side windows PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant P protection) Display message ...... 293 Paintcode number ...... 438 Operation ...... 54 Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 373 ® Panic alarm ...... 42 PRE-SAFE Brake Panorama roof with power tilt/ Activating/deactivating ...... 276 sliding panel Display message ...... 295 Opening/closing ...... 98 Function/notes ...... 73 Opening/closing the roller Warning lamp ...... 332 sunblind ...... 99 Program selector button ...... 173 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 Protection of the environment Resetting ...... 99 General notes ...... 23 Panorama sliding sunroof Pulling away Important safety notes ...... 96 Trailer ...... 166 Parking ...... 183 Pulling away (automatic Important safety notes ...... 183 transmission) ...... 165 Parking brake ...... 184 Position of exterior mirror, front- Q passenger side ...... 120 Qualifiedspecialistworkshop ...... 28 Rearview camera ...... 225 see PARKTRONIC R Parking aid Active Parking Assist ...... 221 RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 283 see Exterior mirrors Radar sensor system see PARKTRONIC Activating/deactivating ...... 281 Parking brake Display message ...... 309 Display message ...... 290 Radiator cover ...... 367 Electric parking brake ...... 184 Radio Warning lamp ...... 328 Selecting astation ...... 273 Parking lamps see separate operating instructions Switching on/off ...... 126 Radio-controlled devices (installing) 363 PARKTRONIC Reading lamp ...... 131 Deactivating/activating ...... 219 Rear compartment Driving system ...... 217 Exit/entry position (3rd row of Function/notes ...... 217 seats) ...... 108 Important safety notes ...... 217 Setting the airvents...... 159 Problem (malfunction) ...... 221 Rear fog lamp Range of the sensors ...... 218 Switching on/off ...... 126 Trailer towing ...... 220 Rear seats Warning display...... 219 Adjusting ...... 107 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator Display message ...... 318 lamp ...... 48 Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) .377 16 Index

Rear view camera S Cleaning instructions ...... 375 Function/notes ...... 225 Safety Switching on/off ...... 226 Childreninthe vehicle ...... 60 Rear-view mirror Child restraint systems ...... 60 Anti-glare (manual)...... 118 Occupant Classification System Dipping (automatic) ...... 119 (OCS) ...... 48 Rear window defroster Safety system Problem (malfunction) ...... 157 see Driving safety systems Switching on/off ...... 156 Seat belts Rear window wiper Adjusting the driver's and front- Replacing the wiper blade ...... 138 passenger seatbelt ...... 57 Switching on/off ...... 137 Adjusting the height ...... 57 Refueling Belt force limiters ...... 59 Fuel gauge ...... 33, 267 Cleaning ...... 379 Important safety notes ...... 177 Correct usage ...... 55 Refueling process...... 178 Emergency Tensioning Devices ...... 59 see Fuel Fastening ...... 56 Remote control Important safety guidelines ...... 54 Programming (garage door opener) 360 Releasing ...... 58 Reporting safety defects ...... 28 Safety guidelines ...... 43 Reserve (fuel tank) Switching belt adjustment on/off see Fuel (on-board computer) ...... 281 Reserve fuel Warning lamp ...... 321 Warning lamp (function) ...... 58 Display message ...... 305 Seats Warning lamp ...... 329 see Fuel Adjusting (electrically)...... 104 Residual heat (climate control) ...... 157 Adjusting the head restraint ...... 104 Cleaning the cover ...... 378 Restraint system Correct driver's seatposition ...... 102 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Entry position (3rd row of seats) .... 109 System) Exit position (3rd row of seats) ...... 110 Reversing lamps (display message) 301 Folding down/up (third row of Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 25 seats) ...... 107 Roller sunblind Folding the 2nd row of seats Panorama roof with power tilt/ forward electrically ...... 111 sliding panel ...... 98 Folding the 2nd row of seats Rearside windows ...... 347 forward manually ...... 108 Roof carrier ...... 344 Folding the rear bench seat Roof lining and carpets (cleaning forwards/back ...... 340 guidelines) ...... 379 Important safety notes ...... 103 Roof load (maximum) ...... 446 Overview ...... 103 Route (navigation) Seat heating problem ...... 114 see Route guidance (navigation) Seat ventilation problem ...... 115 Route guidance (navigation) ...... 272 Storing settings (memory function) 121 Switching seatheating on/off ...... 112 Switching seat ventilation on/off .. 114 Index 17

Selector lever Mechanical key ...... 80 Cleaning ...... 378 Overview ...... 78 Sensors (cleaning instructions) ...... 375 Positions (ignition lock) ...... 163 Service menu (on-board computer) .277 Problem (malfunction) ...... 83 Service products Starting the engine ...... 165 Brake fluid ...... 444 Snow chains Coolant (engine) ...... 445 Information ...... 403 DEF special additives...... 442 Snow drive program ...... 249 Engine oil ...... 443 Sockets Fuel ...... 440 Center console ...... 349 Important safety notes ...... 439 General notes ...... 348 Washer fluid ...... 446 Luggage compartment ...... 349 Settings Rearcompartment...... 349 Factory (on-board computer) ...... 282 Spare wheel On-board computer ...... 278 see Emergency spare wheel Setting the air distribution ...... 154 Specialist workshop ...... 28 Setting the airflow ...... 154 Special seat beltretractor ...... 62 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 283 Speed,controlling Side impact air bag ...... 47 see Cruise control Side marker lamp (display Speedometer message) ...... 301 Digital ...... 271 Side windows In the Instrument cluster ...... 33, 267 Cleaning ...... 374 Segments ...... 268 Convenience closing feature ...... 93 Selecting the unit of measurement 278 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 see Instrument cluster Hinged sidewindows ...... 93 SRS (Supplemental Restraint Important safety information ...... 91 System) Opening/closing ...... 92 Display message ...... 295 Overview ...... 91 Introduction ...... 43 Problem (malfunction) ...... 96 Warning lamp ...... 328 Resetting ...... 95 Warning lamp (function) ...... 43 Sliding sunroof Standing lamps Important safety notes ...... 96 Display message ...... 301 Opening/closing ...... 97 Switching on/off ...... 127 Problem (malfunction) ...... 100 Starting (engine) ...... 165 Resetting ...... 98 STEERCONTROL ...... 75 see Panorama roof with power Steering (display message) ...... 318 tilt/sliding panel Steering wheel SmartKey Adjusting (electrically)...... 116 Changing the battery ...... 81 Adjusting (manually)...... 115 Changing the programming ...... 80 Button overview ...... 35 Checking the battery ...... 81 Buttons (on-board computer) ...... 268 Convenience closing feature ...... 94 Cleaning ...... 378 Convenience opening feature ...... 93 Important safety notes ...... 115 Display message ...... 319 Paddle shifters ...... 173 Door central locking/unlocking ...... 79 Steering wheel heating ...... 116 Important safety notes ...... 78 Storing settings (memory function) 121 Loss ...... 83 18 Index

Steering wheel heating Opening dimensions ...... 446 Problem (malfunction) ...... 117 Power closing ...... 86 Switching on/off ...... 116 Tail lamps Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 173 Display message ...... 300 Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ...... 283 Tank content Stowage areas ...... 336 Fuel gauge ...... 33, 267 Stowage compartments Technical data Armrest (under) ...... 338 Capacities ...... 439 Center console ...... 338 Emergency spare wheel ...... 436 Cupholders ...... 344 Information ...... 438 Eyeglasses compartment ...... 338 Tires/wheels ...... 428 Glove box ...... 337 Trailer loads ...... 449 Important safety information ...... 337 Vehicle data ...... 446 Stowage net ...... 339 TELEAID Stowage net ...... 339 Call priority ...... 355 Stowage space Downloading destinations Center console (rear) ...... 338 (COMAND) ...... 355 Summer tires ...... 402 Downloading routes...... 359 Sun visor ...... 346 Emergency call ...... 352 Supplemental Restraint System Geo fencing ...... 359 see SRS (Supplemental Restraint Important safety notes ...... 351 System) Locating astolen vehicle...... 358 Surround lighting (on-board MB info call button ...... 354 computer) ...... 279 Remote vehicle locking ...... 357 Suspension tuning Roadside Assistance button ...... 354 AMG adaptive sport suspension Search &Send ...... 356 system ...... 217 Self-test ...... 352 SETUP (on-board computer) ...... 283 Speed alert ...... 359 SUV System ...... 352 (Sport Utility Vehicle) ...... 26 Triggering the vehicle alarm ...... 360 Switching air-recirculation mode Vehicle remote malfunction on/off ...... 157 diagnosis...... 358 Switching off the alarm (ATA) ...... 76 Vehicle remote unlocking ...... 357 Telephone T Accepting acall ...... 275 Display message ...... 318 Tachometer ...... 268 Menu (on-board computer) ...... 274 Tailgate Number from the phone book ...... 275 Display message ...... 317 Redialing ...... 275 Emergency unlocking ...... 91 Rejecting/ending acall ...... 275 Important safety notes ...... 87 Temperature Limiting the opening angle ...... 91 Coolant ...... 267 Opening/closing (automatically Coolant (on-board computer) ...... 282 from inside) ...... 90 Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 282 Opening/closing (automatically Outside temperature ...... 268 from outside) ...... 89 Setting (climate control) ...... 153 Opening/closing (from outside) ...... 88 Index 19

Theft deterrent systems GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)...... 76 (definition) ...... 421 Immobilizer...... 75 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Through-loading ...... 339 (definition) ...... 421 Time GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight see separate operating instructions Rating) (definition) ...... 421 Timing (RACETIMER) ...... 283 Important safety notes ...... 400 TIREFIT kit ...... 385 Increased vehicle weight due to Tire pressure optional equipment (definition) ...... 421 Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 408 Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ...... 421 Checking manually ...... 407 Labeling (overview)...... 417 Display message ...... 314 Load bearing index (definition) ...... 422 Maximum ...... 406 Load index ...... 419 Notes ...... 405 Load index (definition) ...... 422 Not reached (TIREFIT) ...... 386 M+S tires ...... 402 Reached (TIREFIT) ...... 386 Maximum loaded vehicle weight Recommended ...... 404 (definition) ...... 421 Tire pressure loss warning Maximum load on a tire (definition) 422 system Maximum permissible tire Important safety notes ...... 407 pressure (definition) ...... 422 Restarting ...... 408 Maximum tire load...... 419 Tire pressure monitoring system Maximum tire load (definition) ...... 422 Checking the tire pressure MOExtended tires ...... 402 electronically ...... 410 Optional equipment weight Function/notes ...... 408 (definition) ...... 422 Restarting ...... 411 PSI (pounds per square inch) Warning lamp ...... 333 (definition) ...... 422 Warning message ...... 411 Replacing ...... 423 Tires Service life ...... 402 Aspect ratio (definition) ...... 422 Sidewall (definition) ...... 422 Average weight of the vehicle Speed rating (definition) ...... 421 occupants (definition) ...... 421 Storing ...... 424 Bar (definition) ...... 420 Structure and characteristics Changing awheel ...... 423 (definition) ...... 420 Characteristics ...... 420 Temperature ...... 416 Checking ...... 401 TIN (Tire Identification Number) Definition of terms ...... 420 (definition) ...... 422 Direction of rotation...... 424 Tire bead(definition) ...... 422 Display message ...... 314 Tire pressure (definition) ...... 422 Distributionofthe vehicle Tire pressures (recommended)...... 421 occupants (definition) ...... 423 Tire size (data) ...... 428 DOT, Tire Identification Number Tire size designation, load-bearing (TIN) ...... 420 capacity, speed rating ...... 417 DOT (Department of Tire tread ...... 401 Transportation) (definition) ...... 421 Tire tread (definition) ...... 422 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Total load limit (definition) ...... 423 (definition) ...... 421 Traction ...... 416 Traction (definition) ...... 423 20 Index

Tread wear ...... 416 PARKTRONIC...... 220 TWR (permissible trailer drawbar Permissible trailer loads and noseweight) (definition) ...... 423 drawbarnoseweights ...... 263 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Transfer case ...... 177 Standards...... 415 Transmission Uniform Tire Quality Grading see Automatic transmission Standards(definition) ...... 421 Transmission position display ...... 169 Unladen weight (definition) ...... 422 Transmission position display Wearindicator(definition) ...... 423 (DIRECT SELECTlever) ...... 169 Wheelrim (definition)...... 421 Transporting the vehicle ...... 395 see Flat tire Traveling uphill Top Tether ...... 63 Brow of hill ...... 195 Towing Driving downhill ...... 195 Important safety guidelines ...... 393 Maximum gradient-climbing Installing the towing eye ...... 394 capability ...... 195 Removing the towing eye...... 395 Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) .378 Towing atrailer Trip computer (on-board computer) 271 ActiveParking Assist ...... 225 Trip odometer Axle load, permissible ...... 449 Calling up ...... 270 Cleaning the trailer tow hitch ...... 376 Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 272 Coupling up atrailer ...... 260 see Trip odometer Decoupling atrailer ...... 262 Trunk Driving tips ...... 257 see Tailgate ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) .72 Turn signals Important safety notes ...... 257 Display message ...... 299 Installing the ball coupling ...... 259 Switching on/off ...... 127 Mounting dimensions ...... 448 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) Power supply ...... 264 (definition) ...... 423 Pulling away with a trailer ...... 166 Type identification plate Removing the ball coupling ...... 263 see Vehicle identification plate Shift range ...... 172 Storing the ball coupling ...... 263 U Trailer drive program ...... 249 Trailer loads ...... 449 Unlocking Towing away Emergency unlocking ...... 86 With both axles on the ground ...... 395 From inside the vehicle (central Tow-starting unlocking button) ...... 85 Emergency engine starting ...... 396 Important safety notes ...... 393 V Trailer coupling Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ...... 346 see Towing atrailer Vehicle Trailer loads and drawbar Correct use ...... 28 noseweights ...... 263 Data acquisition ...... 29 Trailer towing Display message ...... 316 Active Blind Spot Assist ...... 244 Equipment ...... 24 Active Lane Keeping Assist ...... 247 Individualsettings ...... 278 Blind Spot Assist ...... 239 Limited Warranty ...... 29 Index 21

Loading ...... 412 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF Locking (in an emergency) ...... 87 indicator lamp ...... 48 Locking (SmartKey) ...... 79 Reserve fuel ...... 329 Lowering ...... 428 Seat belt...... 321 Maintenance ...... 25 SRS ...... 328 Parking for a long period ...... 186 Tire pressure monitor ...... 333 Pulling away ...... 165 Warranty ...... 438 Raising ...... 425 Washer fluid Reporting problems ...... 28 Display message ...... 318 Securing from rolling away ...... 424 Wheel bolttightening torque ...... 428 Towing away ...... 393 Wheel chock ...... 424 Transporting ...... 395 Wheels Unlocking (in an emergency) ...... 86 Changing awheel ...... 423 Unlocking (SmartKey) ...... 79 Checking ...... 401 Vehicle data ...... 446 Cleaning ...... 374 Vehicle battery Cleaning (warning) ...... 424 see Battery (vehicle) Emergency spare wheel ...... 434 Vehicle data ...... 446 Important safety notes ...... 400 Vehicle dimensions ...... 446 Interchanging/changing ...... 423 Vehicle emergency locking ...... 87 Mounting anew wheel ...... 427 Vehicle identification number Mounting awheel ...... 424 see VIN Overview ...... 400 Vehicle identification plate ...... 438 Removing awheel ...... 427 Vehicle level Storing ...... 424 AMG adaptive sport suspension Tightening torque ...... 428 system ...... 216 Wheelsize/tiresize ...... 428 Vehicle level (display message) ...... 306 Window curtain air bag Vehicle maintenance Display message ...... 296 see ASSYST PLUS Operation ...... 48 Vehicle tool kit ...... 382 Windows Video see Side windows Operating the DVD ...... 274 Windshield VIN ...... 438 Defrosting ...... 155 Infrared reflective ...... 363 W Windshieldwasher fluid see Windshield washer system Warning and indicator lamps Windshieldwasher system ABS ...... 323 Adding washer fluid ...... 370 Brakes ...... 322 Notes ...... 446 Check Engine ...... 329 Windshieldwipers Coolant ...... 330 Problem (malfunction) ...... 139 Distance warning ...... 332 Rearwindow wiper ...... 137 DISTRONICPLUS ...... 332 Replacing the wiper blades ...... 137 ® ESP ...... 325 Switching on/off ...... 136 ® ESP OFF ...... 326 Winterdriving Fuel tank ...... 329 Slippery roadsurfaces...... 190 Overview ...... 34, 320 Snow chains ...... 403 22 Index

Winter operation Generalnotes ...... 402 Overview ...... 402 Radiator cover ...... 367 Snow drive program ...... 249 Winter tires M+S tires ...... 402 Wiper blades Cleaning ...... 375 Important safety notes ...... 137 Replacing ...... 137 Replacing (rearwindow) ...... 138 Replacing (windshield)...... 137 Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 378 Workshops see Qualified specialist workshop Introduction 23

Protection of the environment Rchange gear in good time and use each gear only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed. General notes Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic. H Environmental note Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel Daimler's declared policy is one of consumption. comprehensive environmental protection. The objectives are for the natural resources that form the basis of our existence on this Environmental concerns and planet to be used sparingly and in a manner recommendations that takes the requirements of both nature Wherever the operating instructions require and humanity into account. you to dispose of materials, first try to You too can help to protect the environment regenerate or re-use them. Observe the by operating your vehicle in an relevant environmental rules and regulations environmentally responsible manner. when disposing of materials. In this way you Fuel consumption and the rate of engine, will help to protect the environment. transmission, brake and tire wear are affected by these factors: Roperating conditions of your vehicle Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts Ryour personal driving style H Environmental note You can influence both factors. You should bear the following in mind: Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major assemblies and parts which are of the same Operating conditions: quality as new parts. They are covered by the Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel same Limited Warranty entitlements as new consumption. parts. Ralways make sure that the tire pressures are correct. ! Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight. Devices, as well as control units and sensors for these restraint systems, may be Rremove roof racks once you no longer need installed in the following areas of your them. vehicle: Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. You should Rdoors therefore adhere to the service intervals. Rdoor pillars Ralways have service work carried out at a Rdoor sills qualified specialist workshop. Rseats Personal driving style: Rcockpit Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when Rinstrument cluster starting the engine. Rcenter console Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle Do not install accessories such as audio is stationary. systems in these areas. Do not carry out Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance repairs or welding. You could impair the from the vehicle in front. operating efficiency of the restraint Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration and systems. braking.

Z 24 Introduction

Have aftermarketaccessories installed at Vehicle equipment a qualified specialist workshop. This Operator's Manual describes all models You could jeopardize the operating safety of and all standard and optional equipmentof your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels your vehicle available at thetime of going to as well as accessories relevant to safety print. Country-specific differences are which have not beenapproved by Mercedes. possible.Please note that your vehicle may This could lead to malfunctions in safety- not be equipped with all features described. relevant systems, e.g. the brake system.Use This also applies to safety-related systems only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of and functions.The equipment in your vehicle equal quality. Only use tires, wheels and may therefore differ from some of the accessories that have been specifically descriptions or illustrations. approved for your vehicle. The original purchase agreement lists all Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to systems installed in your vehicle. strict quality control. Every part has been Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter specifically developed, manufactured or if you have any questions about equipment or selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz operation. vehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used. The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Booklet are important documents and should More than 300,000 different genuine be kept in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz parts are available for Mercedes-Benz models. All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers Service and vehicle operation maintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for necessary service and repair work. Service and literature In addition, strategically located parts Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the delivery centers provide quick and reliable warranties printed in the Service and parts service. Warranty Information booklet. Your Always specify the vehicle identification authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter will number (VIN) (Y page 438) and the engine exchange or repair any defective parts number (Y page 439) when ordering genuine originally installed in the vehicle in Mercedes-Benz parts. accordance with the termsofthe following warranties: Operator's Manual RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission Systems Warranty General notes REmission Performance Warranty Before you first drive off, read this Operator's RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, Manual carefully and familiarize yourselfwith Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, your vehicle. Rhode Island and Vermont Emission For your own safety and a longer vehicle life, Control Systems Warranty follow the instructions and warning notices in RState warranty enforcement laws (lemon this manual. Disregarding themmay lead to laws) damage to the vehicle or personal injury. Vehicle damage resulting from the disregard of the instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty. Introduction 25

Information for customers in Maintenance California The Service and Warranty Booklet describes Under California law you may be entitled to a all the necessary maintenance work which replacementofyour vehicle or a refund of the should be done at regular intervals. purchase price or lease price, if after a Always have the Service and Warranty reasonable number of repair attempts Booklet with you when you bring the vehicle Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service advisor will record every service for one or more substantial defects or you in the Service and Warranty Booklet. malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered by its express warranty. During the period of 18 months from original delivery of the Roadside Assistance vehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the odometer The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a Program offers technical help in the event of reasonable number of repair attempts is a breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or Assistance Hotline are answered by our more of the following occurs: agents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (1) the same substantial defect or (USA) malfunction results in a condition that is likely to cause death or serious bodily 1-800-387-0100 (Canada) injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information, refer to the or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (USA) or the "Roadside notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Assistance" section in the Service and writing of the need for its repair, Warranty booklet (Canada).You will find both (2) the same substantial defect or in your vehicle literature portfolio. malfunction of a less serious nature than category (1) has been subject to repair four or more times and you have directly Change of address or change of notified us in writing of the need for its ownership repair, or In the event of a change of address, please (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of send us the "Notification of Address Change" repair of the same or different substantial in the Service and Guarantee booklet or defects or malfunctions for a cumulative simply call the Mercedes-Benz Customer total of more than 30 calendar days. Assistance Center (USA) at the hotline number Please send your written notice to: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Customer Service Center (Canada) at Customer Assistance Center 1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in One Mercedes Drive contacting you in a timely manner should the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 need arise. If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire literature in the vehicle so that it is available to the next owner.

Z 26 Introduction

If you have purchased a used car, please send perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel us the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in drive passenger cars are not intended. This the Service and Guarantee booklet or simply vehicle will handle and maneuver differently call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance from conventional passenger cars in driving Center (USA) at the hotline number conditions which may occur on streets, 1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or highways and off-road use. Customer Service (Canada) at This vehicle has a higher ground clearance 1-800-387-0100. and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you make sharp turns at excessive Vehicle operation outside the USA speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may and Canada roll over or may go out of control and crash. If you planto operate your vehicle in foreign Utility vehicles have a significantly higher countries, please be aware that: rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may Rservice facilities or replacement parts may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, not be readily available. and severe or fatal injury. Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the converter may not be available. Leaded fuel Operator's Manual. Take time to become may cause damage to the catalytic familiar with the driving characteristics of this converter. vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause handles on different road surfaces. Do not engine damage. attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or Some Mercedes-Benz models are available abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving for delivery in Europe through our European actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Delivery Program. For details, consult an When driving off-road or working the vehicle authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to hard, do not overload it. And, always wear one of the following addresses. your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, In the USA an unbelted person is significantly more likely Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC to die than a person wearing a seat belt. European Delivery Department One Mercedes Drive Operating safety Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 In Canada Important safety notes Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. G WARNING European Delivery Department Work improperly carried out on electronic 98 Vanderhoof Avenue components and associated software could Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 cause them to cease functioning. Because the vehicle's electronic components are interconnected, any modifications made may Sports Utility Vehicle produce an undesired effect on other systems. Electronic malfunctions could G WARNING seriously impair the operating safety of your This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both vehicle. on-road and off-road use. It can go places and Introduction 27

Contactanauthorized Mercedes-BenzCenter the user’s authority to operate the for repairs or modifications to electronic equipment." components. Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle Other improper work or modifications on the comply with Industry Canada license-exempt vehicle could also have a negative impact on RSS standard(s). Operation is subjectto the the operating safety of the vehicle. following two conditions: (1) These devices Some safety systems only function when the may not cause interference, and (2) These engine is running. You should therefore never devices must accept any interference, turn off the engine while driving. including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device." G WARNING Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or Diagnostics connection tires/wheels may cause serious damage and impair the operating safety of your vehicle. The diagnostics connection is only intended Such blows can be caused, for example, by for the connection of diagnostic equipment at running over an obstacle, road debris or a a qualified specialist workshop. pothole. G WARNING If you feel a sudden significant vibration or If you connect equipment to the diagnostics ride disturbance, or you suspect that damage connection in the vehicle, it may affect the to your vehicle has occurred: operation of the vehicle systems. As a result, Rturn on your hazard warning flashers. the operating safety of the vehicle could be Rslow down carefully. affected. There is a risk of an accident. Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe Do not connect any equipment to a distance from the road. diagnostics connection in the vehicle. Inspectthe vehicle underbody and tires/ wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle G WARNING appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Objects in the driver's footwell can restrictthe authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or other pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal. qualified maintenance or repair facility for The operating and road safety of the vehicle further inspection or repairs. is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter Declarations of conformity the driver's footwell. Install the floormats securely and as specified in order to ensure Vehicle components which receive sufficientclearance for the pedals. Do not use and/or transmit radio waves loose floormats. USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle ! comply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. If the engine is switched off and Operation is subject to the following two equipmentonthe diagnostics connection conditions:1) These devices may not cause is used, the starter battery may discharge. harmful interference, and 2) These devices Connecting equipment to the diagnostics must accept any interference received, connection can lead to emissions monitoring including interference that may cause information being reset, for example. This undesired operation. Changes or may lead to the vehicle failing to meet the modifications not expressly approved by the requirements of the next emissions test party responsible for compliance could void during the main inspection.

Z 28 Introduction

Qualified specialist workshop Customer Assistance Center Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a qualified specialist workshop. It has the One Mercedes Drive necessary specialist knowledge, tools and Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 qualifications to correctly carry out the work In Canada required on your vehicle. This is especially the Customer Relations Department case for work relevant to safety. Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc. Observe the notes in the Maintenance 98 Vanderhoof Avenue Booklet. Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 Always have the following work carried out at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center: Rwork relevant to safety Reporting safety defects Rservice and maintenance work USA only: Rrepair work The following text is published as required of Ralterations, installation work and manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. modifications Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuantto the Rwork on electronic components "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". If you believe that your vehicle has a defect Correct use which could cause a crash or could cause If you remove any warning stickers, you or injury or death, you should immediately others could fail to recognize certain dangers. inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Leave warning stickers in position. Administration (NHTSA)in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Observe the following information when driving your vehicle: If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds thata Rthe safety notes in this manual safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it Rthe Technical Data section in this manual may order a recall and remedy campaign. Rtraffic rules and regulations However, NHTSA cannot become involved in Rlaws and safety standards pertaining to individual problems between you, your motor vehicles dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at Problems with your vehicle 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: If you should experience aproblemwith your Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, vehicle, particularly one that you believe may SW., Washington, DC 20590. affectits safe operation, we urge you to contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about immediately to have the problem diagnosed motor vehicle safety from and rectified. If the problem is not resolved to http://www.safercar.gov your satisfaction, please discuss the problem againwith a Mercedes-BenzCenter or contact us at one of the following addresses. In the USA Introduction 29

Limited Warranty Information on copyright ! Follow the instructions in this manual General information about the proper operationofyour vehicle as well as about possible vehicle damage. You can find information on licenses for free Damage to your vehicle that arises from and open-source software used in your culpable contraventions against these vehicle and its electronic components on the instructions is not covered either by the following website: Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by the http://www.mercedes-benz.com/ New or Used-Vehicle Warranty. opensource

Data stored in the vehicle Information about electronic data acquisition in the vehicle (Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951) Your vehicle records electronic data. If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event of an accident. This information helps, for example, to test vehicle systems after an accident and to continually improve vehicle safety. Daimler AG can access this data and submit it: Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes Rwith the consentofthe vehicle owner Ron the instruction of prosecuting authorities Rfor use in arbitration of disputes that involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its sales and service organizations Ras otherwise required or permitted by law. Please check your mbrace (Canada:TELE AID) purchase agreement to find out more aboutdata that can be recorded and transmitted by this system.

Z 30 31

Dashboard ...... 32 Instrument cluster ...... 33 Multifunction steering wheel ...... 35 Center console ...... 36 Overheadcontrol panel ...... 39 Door control panel ...... 40 At a glance 32 Dashboard

Dashboard At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Steering wheel paddle F Adjusting the steering shifters 173 wheel manually 115 ; Combination switch 127 G Adjusting the steering wheel electrically 115 = Instrument cluster 33 Steering wheel heating 116 ? Horn H Cruise control lever 196 A DIRECT SELECT lever 169 I Opening the hood 366 B PARKTRONIC warning J display 217 Diagnostics connection 27 K C Overhead control panel 39 Electric parking brake 184 L D Climate control systems 142 Light switch 124 M E Ignition lock 163 Night View AssistPlus 235 Start/Stop button 163 Instrument cluster 33

Instrumentcluster Displays and controls At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Speedometer with ? Coolant temperature 267 segments 268 A Multifunction display 269 ; Fuel gauge B Instrument lighting 267 = Tachometer 268 34 Instrument cluster

Warning and indicator lamps At a glance

Function Page Function Page : L Low-beam F 6 SRS 328 headlamps 125 G ü Seat belt 321 ; T Parking lamps 126 H % Diesel engine: = ÷ ESP® 325 preglow 165 ? K High-beam I ? Coolant 330 headlamps 128 J R Rearfog lamp 126 A Electric parking brake (red) 328 K ; Check Engine 329 F (USA only) ! (Canada only) L 8 Reserve fuel 329 B ! Electric parking brake M å ESP® OFF 325 (yellow) 328 N ! ABS 323 C · Distance warning 332 O Braking 322 D #! Turn signals 127 $ (USA only) J (Canada only) E h Tire pressure monitor 333 Multifunction steering wheel 35

Multifunction steering wheel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Multifunction display 269 A =; ; COMAND display; see the Selects a menu 268 separate Operating 9: Instructions Selects a submenu or scrolls through lists 268 = ? a Switches on the Voice Confirms yourselection 268 Control System; see the separate operating Hides display messages 286 instructions B % ? ~ Back 268 Rejects or ends a call 274 Switches off the Voice Exits phone book/redial Control System; see the memory separate operating 6 instructions Makes or accepts a call Switches to the redial memory WX Adjusts the volume 8 Mute 36 Center console

Center console Center console, upper section At a glance

Function Page Function Page : COMAND; see the separate A £ Hazard warning operating instructions lamps 128 ; c Seat heating 112 B 45 Indicator lamp 48 = s Seat ventilation 114 C å ESP® 71 ? c PARKTRONIC 217 Center console 37

Center console, lower section At a glance

i Vehicles with ON&OFFROAD menu Function Page Function Page J Á Level control 207 F Cup holder 344 K Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Ashtray 347 Regulation) 250 Cigarette lighter 348 L p Manual drive program 175 Socket 348 M Selector wheel for on-road G COMAND controller; see programs 247 the separate operating instructions Selector wheel for off-road programs 252 H d ON&OFFROAD menu N Stowage compartment 338 button 256 I + LOW RANGE off-road gear 254 38 Center console At a glance

i Vehicles without ON&OFFROAD menu Function Page and AMG vehicles I Á Level control 213 Function Page J e Adaptive Damping F Cup holder 344 System 212 Ashtray 347 à Adjusts the AMG Cigarette lighter 348 adaptive damping system Socket 348 (AMG vehicles) 217 G COMAND controller; see K Stowage compartment 338 the separate operating instructions H Ã DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) 250 Overhead control panel 39

Overheadcontrol panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : p Switches the left- C Eyeglasses compartment 338 hand reading lamp on/off 131 D F Roadside Assistance ; c Switches the front call button (mbrace interiorlighting on 132 system) 354 = u Switches the rear E G SOS button (mbrace interior lighting on/off 132 system) 352 ? | Switches the front F ï MB Info call button interior lighting/automatic (mbrace system) 354 interior lighting control off 132 G Rear-view mirror 118 A p Switches the right- H Buttons for the garage door hand reading lamp on/off 131 opener 362 B 2 Opens/closes the I Microphone for mbrace sliding sunroof 97 (emergency call system) 3 Opens/closes the telephone and the Voice panorama roof with power Control System1 tilt/sliding panel with roller sunblinds 98

1 Voice Control System only available together with COMAND. Observe the additional operating instructions. 40 Doorcontrol panel

Door control panel At a glance

Function Page Function Page : Opens the door 85 B W Opens/closes the side windows 92 ; %& Unlocks/locks the vehicle 85 C ± Opens/closes the hinged power side windows 93 = r45= Stores settings forthe seat, D q Opens/closes the exterior mirrors and tailgate 90 steering wheel (memory function) 121 E n Activates/ deactivates the override ? Adjusts the seats 103 feature for the side windows in the rear A 7Zö\ compartment 65 Adjusts and folds the exterior mirrors in/out electrically 118 41

Useful information ...... 42 Panic alarm ...... 42 Occupant safety ...... 42 Children in the vehicle ...... 60 Driving safetysystems ...... 66 Theft deterrent locking system ...... 75 Safety 42 Occupant safety

Useful information Occupant safety

i This Operator's Manual describes all Important safety notes models and all standard and optional G WARNING equipment of your vehicle available at the Modifications to or work improperly time of publication of the Operator's conducted on restraint system components Manual. Country-specific differences are or their wiring, as well as tampering with possible. Please note that your vehicle may interconnected electronic systems, can lead Safety not be equipped with all features to the restraint systemsno longer functioning described. This also applies to safety- as intended. related systems and functions. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices i Read the information on qualified (ETDs), for example, could deploy specialist workshops: (Y page 28). inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents although the deceleration threshold for air bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore, Panic alarm never modify the restraint systems. Do not tamper with electronic components or their software.

In this section, you will learn the most important facts about the restraint system components of the vehicle. The restraint system consists of: Rseat belts Rchild restraint systems RLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors Additional protection is provided by: X To activate: press ! button : for at RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System) least one second. R ® An alarm sounds and the exterior lighting PRE-SAFE flashes. Rair bag system components with: X To deactivate: press ! button : - PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp again. - front-passenger seat with Occupant or Classification System (OCS) X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The different air bag systems work independently of each other. The protective or functions of the system work in conjunction X Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button. with each other. Not all air bags are always The KEYLESS-GO key must be in the deployed in an accident. vehicle. i See "Children in the vehicle" for information on infants and children traveling with you in the vehicle restraint systems for infants and children (Y page 60). Occupant safety 43

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) for details. USA only: for further information, contact our Customer Assistance Center at Introduction 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372). SRS consists of: SRS functions are checked regularly when R6 SRS warning lamp you switch on the ignition and when the RAir bags engine is running. Therefore, malfunctions RThe air bag control unit with crash sensors can be detected in good time. REmergency Tensioning Devices for the The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrument Safety front seat belts and the outer seat belts in cluster lights up when the ignition is switched the rear on. It goes out no later than a few seconds RBelt force limiters after the engine is started. SRS reduces the risk of occupants coming The SRS components are in operational into contact with the vehicle's interior in the readiness when the 6 SRS warning lamp event of an accident. It can also reduce the goes out while the engine is running. effect of the forces to which occupants are subjected during an accident. Safety guidelines for seat belts, Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) SRS warning lamp and air bags G WARNING G WARNING The SRS self-checkhas detected a RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have malfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp: been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced. Their anchoring points R does notlight up at all must also be checked. Only use seat belts Rdoes not go out after approximately four installed or supplied by an authorized seconds after the engine is started Mercedes-Benz Center. Rlights up after the engineis started or while RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency the vehicle is in motion Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain For your safety, Mercedes-Benz strongly perchlorate material, which may require recommends that you have the system special handling and regard for the checked as soon as possible at a qualified environment.Check your national disposal specialist workshop. SRS may otherwise fail guidelines. California residents, see to activate when it is needed in the event of www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ an accident, which could lead to serious or Perchlorate/index.cfm. fatal injuries. SRS might also be activated RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function unexpectedly and unnecessarily, which could on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD also result in injury. that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- In addition, work carried out improperly on SAFE® has electrically operated reversible SRS may render SRS inoperative or cause belt tensioners in addition to the unintended air bag deployment. Work on the pyrotechnic ETDs. SRS system should only be carried out by RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. qualified specialist personnel. Consult a They could tear. qualified specialist workshop. RDo not make any modification that could If it is necessary to modify an air bag system change the effectiveness of the seat belts. to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

Z 44 Occupant safety

RDo not bleach or dye seatbelts as this may followed. These instructions are available severely weaken them. In a crash they may from any authorized Mercedes-Benz not be able to provide adequate protection. Center. RNo modifications of any kind may be made RGiven the considerable deployment speed, to any components or wiring of the SRS. required inflation volume, and the material RDo not change or remove any component of the air bags, there is the possibility of or part of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious R injuries resulting from air bag deployment. Safety Do not install additional trim material, seat covers, badges, etc.to the: If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benz - padded steering wheel boss strongly recommends that you inform the - knee bag covers subsequent owner that the vehicle is - front-passenger air bag cover equipped with SRS. Also, refer them to the - outer side of front seat bolsters applicable section in the Operator's Manual. - outer side of rear bench seat backrest seat bolsters Air bags - roof lining trim RDo not install additional electrical/ Important safety notes electronic equipment on or near SRS G WARNING components and wiring. Air bags are designed to reduce the incidence RKeep area between air bags and occupants of injuries and fatalities in certain situations: free of objects (e.g. packages, purses, umbrellas, etc.). Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front- RDo not hang items such as coat hangers passenger front air bags and driver's knee from the coat hooks or handles over the bag) door. These items may be thrown around in Rside impacts (side impact air bags and the vehicle and cause head and other window curtain air bags) injuries when the window curtain air bag is Rrollover (window curtain air bags) deployed. However, no system available today can RAir bag system components will be hot after completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them. When the air bags are deployed, a small RNever place your feet on the instrument amount of powder is released. The powder panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always generally does not constitute a health hazard keep both feet on the floor in front of the and does not indicate that there is a fire in the seat. vehicle. In order to prevent potential RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a breathing difficulties, you should leave the risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If you causing unintended air bag deployment. have any breathing difficulty but cannot get Work on the SRS must therefore only be out of the vehicle after the air bag inflates, performed by qualified technicians. then get fresh air by opening a window or Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz door. Center. RFor your protection and the protection of G WARNING others, when scrapping the air bag unit or In order to reduce the potential danger of ETD, our safety instructions must be injuries caused during the deployment of the front air bags, the driver and front passenger Occupant safety 45 must always be correctly seated and wear properly and use an appropriately sized their seat belts. infant restraint, toddler restraint or booster For maximum protection in the event of a seat recommended for the size and weight collision, you must always be in the normal of the child. seat position with yourback against the Failure to follow these instructions can result backrest. Fastenyour seat belt and make sure in severe injuries to you or other occupants. that it is correctly positioned on your body. If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you As the air bag inflates with considerable make the buyer aware of this safety Safety speed and force, a proper seating position information. Be sure to give the buyer this and correct positioning of the hands on the Operator's Manual. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe distance from the air bag. Occupants who are G WARNING not wearing their seat belt, are not seated Accident research shows that the safest place properly or are too close to the air bag can be for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. seriously injured or killed by an air bag, as it Aside impact air bag related injury may occur inflates with great force instantaneously: if occupants, especially children, are not Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly and properly seated or restrainedwhen next to a in a position that is as upright as possible side impact air bag which needs to deploy with your back against the backrest. rapidly in a side impact in order to do its job. Rmove the driver's seat as far back as To help avoid the possibility of injury, please possible, still permitting proper operation follow these guidelines: of vehicle controls. The distance from the (1) Always sit as upright as possible center of the driver's chest to the center of and use the seat belts properly. the air bag cover on the steering wheel Make sure that children 12 years must be at least 10 inches (25 cm). You old and under use an appropriately should be able to accomplish this by sized child restraint, infant adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If restraint, or booster seat you have any difficulties, please contact an recommended for the size and authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. weight of the child. Rdo not lean your head or chest close to the (2) Always wear seat belts properly. steering wheel or dashboard. Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside. If the air bags are deployed, you will hear a Placing hands and arms inside the rim can bang, and a small amount of powder may also increase the risk and potential severity of be released. Only in rare cases will the bang hand/arm injury if the driver front air bag affect your hearing. The powder that is inflates. released generally does not constitute a Radjust the front-passenger seat as far back health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp as possible from the dashboard when the lights up. seat is occupied. The air bags are deployed if the air bag control Roccupants, especially children, should unit detects the need for deployment. Only in never place their bodies or lean their heads the event of such a situation will the air bags in the area of the door where the side provide their supplemental protection. impact air bag inflates. This could result in If the driver and front passenger do not wear serious or fatal injuries should the side their seat belts, it is not possible for the air impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as bags to provide their supplemental upright as possible, wear the seat belt protection.

Z 46 Occupant safety

In the event of other types of impacts and Rdepending on whether the seat belt is being impacts below air bag deployment used thresholds, the air bags will not deploy. The Rindependently of other air bags in the driver and passengers will then be protected vehicle to the extent possible by a properly fastened If the vehicle overturns, the front air bags are seat belt. Aproperly fastened seat beltis also generally not deployed. If the system detects needed to provide the best possible high vehicle deceleration in alongitudinal protection in a rollover. direction, the front air bags are deployed. Safety Air bags provide additional protection; they When a child restraint system is installed on are not, however, a substitute for seat belts. the front-passenger seat and the 4 All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp in belts regardless of whether your vehicle is the center console does not light up: equipped with air bags or not. It is important for your safety and that of your Ra child restraint system without a passengers to have deployed air bags transponder for the air bag deactivation replaced and to have any malfunctioning air system is installed or bags repaired. This will help to make sure the Ra child restraint system with a transponder air bags continue to perform their protective has not been installed properly. function for the vehicle occupants in the Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front air event of a crash. bags. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit evaluates the vehicle Front air bags deceleration. In the first deployment stage, the front air bag is filled with enough propellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed if a second deployment threshold is exceeded within a few milliseconds. The deployment of front-passenger front air bag ; is also influenced by the weight category of the front passenger, which is determined by the Occupant Classification System (OCS) (Y page 48). The lighter the passenger side occupant, the Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required steering wheel; front-passenger front air (predicted at the start of the impact) for bag ; deploys in front of and above the glove second-stage inflation of the front-passenger box. front air bag. In the second stage, the front air bags are inflated with the maximum The front air bags increase protection for the amount of propellant gas available. driver's and front-passenger's head and chest. The front air bags are not deployed in situations where a low impact severity is They are deployed: predicted. You will then be protected by the Rin the event of certain frontal impacts fastened seat belt. Rif the system determines that air bag deployment can offer additional protection to that provided by the seat belt Occupant safety 47

Front-passenger front air bag ; will only authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for deploy if: availability. Rthe system, based on the OCS weight sensorreadings, has detected that the G WARNING front-passenger seat is occupied. The pressure sensors for side impact air bag Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center control are located in the doors. Do not modify any components of the doors or door console is not lit (Y page 48). trim panels including, for example, the

Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high Safety addition of door speakers. impact severity. Improper repair work on the doors or the Driver's knee bag modification or addition of components to the doors create a risk of rendering the side impact air bags inoperative or causing unintended air bag deployment. Work on the doors must therefore only be performed by qualified technicians. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering column. The driver's knee bag is always deployed along with the driver's front air bag. The driver's knee bag is designed to operate together with the frontair bags in frontal impacts if certain thresholds are exceeded. The driver's knee bag operates Frontside impactair bags : and side impact best in conjunction with correctly positioned air bags in the 2nd row of seats ; inflate next and fastened seat belts. to the outer seat cushion. The driver's knee bag increases protection of When deployed, the side impactair bags offer the driveragainst: additional protection for the thorax and, on the front seats, the pelvis of the vehicle Rknee injuries occupants on the side of the vehicle on which Rthigh injuries the impactoccurs.However, they do not Rlower leg injuries protect the: R Side impact air bags head Rneck G WARNING Rarms Only use seat covers which have been tested The side impact air bags are deployed: and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your Ron the side on which an impact occurs vehicle model. Using other seat covers may interfere with or prevent the deployment of Rat the start of an accident with a high rate the side impact air bags. Contact an of lateral vehicle deceleration or acceleration, e.g. in aside impact

Z 48 Occupant safety

Rregardless of whetherthe seat belt on the Window curtain air bags : enhance the level driver's seat and the outer seats of the 2nd of protection for the head, but not chest or row of seats is used arms, of the vehicle occupants on the side of Rindependently of the front air bags the vehicle on which the impact occurs. Rindependently of the ETDs The window curtain air bags are integrated If the vehicle rolls over, the side impact air into the side of the roof frame and deploy in bags are generally not deployed. side impact the area extending from the front door (A- air bags are deployed if the system detects pillar) to the rear side window (D-pillar). Safety high vehicle deceleration or acceleration in a Window curtain air bags are deployed: lateral direction, or also if the vehicle rolls Rat the start of an accident with a high rate over, and the system determines that side of lateral vehicle deceleration or impact air bag deployment can offer acceleration, e.g. in aside impact additional protection to that provided by the Ron the side on which an impactoccurs seat belt. Ron the driver's side and passenger side, in Side impact air bags will not deploy in side the event of a vehicle rollover and if the impacts which do not exceed the system's system determines that airbag deployment preset deployment thresholds for lateral can offer the vehicle occupants additional acceleration/deceleration. You will then be protection to that provided by the seat belt protected by the fastened seat belt. Rindependently of the use of the seat belt The side impact air bag on the front- passenger side is not deployed in the Rregardless of whether the front-passenger following situations: seat is occupied Rindependently of the frontair bags Rthe OCS system detects that the front- passenger seat is not occupied, and Window curtain air bags : will not deploy in the eventofimpacts which do not exceed the Rthe front-passenger seat belt is not system's preset deployment thresholds for fastened. vehicle acceleration/deceleration. You will The side impact air bag on the front- then be protected by the fastened seat belt. passenger side will deploy if the front- passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied Occupant Classification System or not. (OCS) Window curtain air bags Method of operation G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates when an adult or someone larger than a small individual is in the front passenger seat, have the front passenger reposition himselfor herself in the seat until the 45 indicator lamp goes out. In the event of a collision, the air bag control unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deployment when the OCS has classified the front passenger seat occupant as weighing as much as or less than a typical 12-month-old Occupant safety 49 child in a standard child restraint or if the front If the 45 indicator lamp is not passenger seatis classified as being empty. illuminated, the front passenger front air bag When the OCS senses that the front is activated and will be deployed passenger seat occupant is classified as Rin the event of certain frontal impacts being up to or less than the weight of a typical Rif the impact exceeds a predetermined 12-month-old child in a standard child triggering threshold restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will Rindependent of the side impact air bag or illuminate when the engine is started and pelvis air bag Safety remain illuminated. This indicates that the front passenger front air bag is deactivated. If the front passenger front air bag is deployed, the rate of inflation will be When the OCS senses that the front influenced by passenger seat is classified as being empty, the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessed when the engine is started and remain by the air bag control unit illuminated. This indicates that the front Rthe front passenger's weight category as passenger front air bag is deactivated. identified by the OCS When the OCS senses that the front passenger seat occupant is classified as G WARNING being heavier than the weight of a typical 12- According to accident statistics, children are month-old child seated in astandard child safer when properly restrained on the rear restraint or as being a small individual (such seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, as a young teenager or asmall adult), the we strongly recommend that children be 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for placed in the rear seats whenever possible. approximately 6seconds when the engine is Regardless of seating position, children 12 started. Depending on occupant weight years old and under must be seated and sensor readings from the seat, it will then properly secured in an appropriate infant remain illuminated or go out. With the restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat 45 indicator lamp illuminated, the recommended for the size and weight of the frontpassenger frontair bag is deactivated. child. With the 45 indicator lamp out, the The infant or child restraint must be properly front passenger front air bag is activated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat When the OCS senses that the front belt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchors passenger seat occupant is classified as an and Top Tether strap, fully in accordance with adult or someone larger than a small the child seat manufacturer's instructions. individual, the 45 indicator lamp will Occupants, especially children, should always illuminate for approximately six seconds sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt when the engine is started and thengo out. properly and use an appropriately sized infant This indicates that the front passenger front restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat air bag is activated. recommended for the size and weight of the If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, child. the front passenger front air bag is deactivated and will not be deployed.

Z 50 Occupant safety

Children can be killed or seriously injured by RIf you place a child in a forward-facing child an inflating air bag. Note the following restraint on the front-passenger seat: important information when circumstances - move the seat as far back as possible require you to place a child in the front- - use the proper child restraint passenger seat: recommended for the age, size and RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag weight of the child technology designed to deactivate the - secure child restraint with the vehicle's front-passenger frontair bag in your vehicle

Safety seat belt according to the child seat when the system senses the weight of a manufacturer's instructions typical 12-month-old child or less along RFor children larger than the typical 12- with the weight of a standard appropriate month-old child, the front-passenger front child restraint on the front-passengerseat. air bag may or may not be activated. RAchild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously G WARNING injured or even killed if the front-passenger If the red 6 SRS warning lamp in the front air bag inflates in a collision which instrument cluster and the 45 could occur under some circumstances, indicator lamp light up simultaneously, the even with the air bag technology installed OCS is malfunctioning. The front passenger in your vehicle. The only means to eliminate front air bag will be deactivated in this case. this risk completely is never to place a child Have the system checked by qualified in a rear-facing child restraint in the front- technicians as soon as possible. Contact an passenger seat. We therefore strongly authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. recommend that you always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint on the rear Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an seat. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint on In order to ensure proper operation of the air the front-passenger seat, make sure the bag system and OCS: 45 indicator lamp is illuminated, RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a indicating that the front-passenger front air position that is as upright as possible with bag is deactivated. Should the 45 your back against the seat backrest. indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while RWhen seated, a passenger should not the restraint is installed, please check position him/herself in such a way as to installation. Periodically check the cause the passenger's weight to be lifted 45 indicator lamp while driving to from the seat cushion as this may result in make sure that the 45 indicator the OCS being unable to correctly lamp is illuminated. If the 45 approximate the passenger's weight indicator lamp goes out or remains out, do category. not transport a child on the front-passenger RRead and observe all warnings in this seat until the system has been repaired. chapter. Achild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front-passenger seat will be seriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates. Occupant safety 51

Both the driver and the front passenger should always observe the 45 indicator lamp to determine whether or not the front passenger is positioned correctly. Also observe the air bag display messages, which appearinthe instrumentcluster (Y page 298). If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not mean that the front-passenger front air bag Safety will also deploy. The OCS may have detected that the seat: If the SmartKey has been removed from the ignition lock or is in position 0, Ris empty or occupied by the weight of a 45 indicator lamp : does not light typical child up to twelve months old, up. seated in a child restraint system The Occupant Classification System (OCS) Ris occupied by a small individual, such as a categorizes the occupant on the front- young teenager or a small adult passenger seat using a weight sensor. The Ris occupied by a child in a child restraint front-passenger front air bag is deactivated system whose weight is greater than that automatically for certain weight categories. of a typical twelve month old child. 45 indicator lamp : shows you the These are examples of when the OCS current status. If deactivates the front-passenger front air bag. 45 indicator lamp : lights up, the Deactivation takes place although the front-passenger air bag is disabled. collision fulfills the criteria for deploying the The system does not deactivate: driver's air bag.

Rthe side impact air bag System self-test Rthe window curtain air bag Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices G WARNING To be classified correctly, the front passenger If the 45indicator lamp does not must sit: illuminate, the system is not functioning. You must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Rwith the seat belt fastened correctly Center before seating any child on the front Rin a positionthat is as upright as possible passenger seat. with their back against the seat backrest Rwith their feet on the floor G WARNING The OCS weight sensor reading is affected if Never place anything betweenseat cushion the occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. by and child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reduces leaning on the armrest. the effectiveness of the OCS. The underside If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or and rear side child restraint system must be the seat cushion are damaged, have the placed entirely on the seat cushion and the necessary repair work carried out at a backrest of the front-passenger seat qualified specialist workshop. backrest. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger recommends that you only use seat seat backrest. accessories that have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z 52 Occupant safety

An incorrectly mounted child seatcould cause injuries to the child in case of an accident, instead of increasing protection for the child. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation of child restraint systems.

The 45 indicator lamp lights up: Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock Safety to position 1 or 2 Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button once or twice on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO Rif an adult is seated properly on the front- passenger seat and the OCS classifies the occupant as an adult The 45 indicator lamp goes out after approximately six seconds. If the seat is not occupied and the OCS detects that the front-passenger seat is empty, the 45 indicator lamp will continue to light up. The 45 indicator lamp will not go out. For more information about the OCS, see "Problems with the Occupant Classification System" (Y page 53). Occupant safety 53

Problems with the occupant classification system G WARNING If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typical adult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

G WARNING

If the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical Safety 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passenger seat, do not transport achild on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp lights up X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualified and stays on. specialist workshop. The person on the X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display front-passenger seat: (Y page 298). Rhas the weight of a typical adult Rhas been determined by the system not to be a child

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The 45 The OCS is malfunctioning. indicator lamp does not X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the light up and/or does child seat. not stay on. X Check the installation of the child restraint system. The front-passenger X Make sure that no objectsare applying additional weight onto seat is: the seat. Runoccupied X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCS Roccupied with a checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. weight up to that of a Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as typical twelve- the OCS is not functioning. month-old child in a X Observe the additional messages in the multifunction display standard child (Y page 298). restraint system

Z 54 Occupant safety

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupant Rvehicles with a multicontour seat: the air protection system) pressure in the side bolsters of the seat backrest is increased. G WARNING Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/ The PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact of panorama roof with power tilt/sliding an accident on vehicle occupants, as long as panel and the side windows are closed so their seat belts have been fastened correctly. that only a small gap remains. Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE- If the hazardous situation passes without Safety SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in the resulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackens event of an accident cannot be ruled out. You the belt pretensioning. In vehicles with should therefore always drive carefully and multicontour seats, the air pressure in the adapt your driving style to the prevailing road, side bolsters is reduced again. All settings weather and traffic conditions. made by PRE-SAFE® can then be reversed. If the seat belts are not released: G WARNING Make sure that nobody can become trapped X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, but as you adjust the seat. only when the vehicle is stationary. The belt pretensioning is reduced and the ! Make sure that there are no objects in the locking mechanism is released. footwell or behind the seats when resetting More information about seat belt adjustment, the seats. There is a risk that the seats a convenience function integrated into PRE- and/or the objects could be damaged. SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat belt PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures to adjustment" section (Y page 57). protect occupants in certain hazardous situations. PRE-SAFE® intervenes: Seat belts Rif BAS intervenes, e.g. in emergency Important safety notes braking situations G WARNING Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully — on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Always make sure all of your passengers are R if, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, the properly restrained. You and your passengers radar sensor system detectsanimminent should always wear seat belts. dangerofcollision in certain situations Failure to wear and properly fasten and R in critical driving situations, e.g. when position your seat belt greatly increases your physical limits are exceeded and the risk of injuries and their likely severity in an vehicle understeers or oversteers severely accident. ® PRE-SAFE takes the following measures If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can depending on the hazardous situation be considerably more severe without your detected: seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned. belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit Rvehicles with the memory function: the the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in an it. You can be seriously injured or killed. unfavorable position. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or death is lessened if you are properly wearing your seat belt. The air bags can only protect Occupant safety 55 as intended if the occupants are properly The use of seat belts and infant and child wearing their seat belts. restraint systems is required by law in: Rall 50 states WARNING G RU.S. territories Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Rthe DistrictofColumbia backrestinanexcessively reclined position as Rall Canadianprovinces this can be dangerous. You could slide under the seatbelt in a collision. If you slide under Even where this is not required by law, all it, the seat belt would apply force at the vehicle occupants should correctly fasten Safety abdomen or neck.That could cause serious their seat belts before starting the journey. or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and i See "Children in the vehicle" seat belt provide the best restraint when the (Y page 60) for further information on wearer is in a position that is as upright as infants and children traveling in the vehicle possible and the seat belt is properly as well as on child restraint systems. positioned on the body. Correct use of the seat belts G WARNING Never let more people ride in the vehicle than G WARNING there are seat belts available. Make sure USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly RSeat belts can only work when used restrained with a separate seat belt. Never properly.Never wear seat belts in any other use a seat belt for more than one person at a way than as described in this section, as time. that could result in serious injuries in the event of an accident. G WARNING REach occupant should wear their seat belt Always have damaged seat belts or seat belts at all times, because seat belts help reduce that have been subjected to a load in an the likelihood of and potential severity of accident replaced and the anchorages injuries in accidents, including rollovers. checked. The integrated restraint system includes Only use seat belts that have been approved SRS (driver frontair bag, driver's side knee by Mercedes-Benz. bag, front-passengerfront air bag, side Never tamper with seat belts. This can result impact air bags, window curtain air bags for in the unintended deployment of the the side windows), Emergency Tensioning Emergency Tensioning Devices or the failure Devices, seat belt force limiters, and front to deploy when necessary. seat knee bolsters. Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this may The system is designed to enhance the severely weaken them. In the event of a protection offered to properly belted collision, they may be unable to provide occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, adequate protection. driver's side knee bag and ETDs) and side Have all work carried out only by qualified (side impact air bags, windowcurtain air technicians. Consult a qualified specialist bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed workshop. preset deploymentthresholds and in certain rollovers (window curtain air bags and ETDs). RNever wear the shoulder belt under your arm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

Z 56 Occupant safety

In a frontal crash, yourbody would move RNever place your feet on the instrument too far forward. That would increase the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always chance of head and neck injuries. The seat keep both feet on the floor in front of the belt would also apply too much force to the seat. ribs or abdomen, which could severely RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant injure internal organs such as your liver or restraints, toddler restraints, or children in spleen. booster seats, always follow the child seat Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder manufacturer's instructions. Safety section is located as close as possible to the middle of the shoulder. It should not G WARNING touch the neck.Never pass the shoulder Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They portion of the seat belt under your arm. For could tear. this purpose, you can adjust the height of Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the the seat belt outlet. door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on This could damage the seat belt. your hips and not across the abdomen. If Never attempt to make modifications to seat the lap belt is positioned across your belts. This could impair the effectiveness of abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in the seat belts. a crash. RNever wear seat belts over rigid or Fastening seat belts breakable objects in or on your clothing, such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as G WARNING these might cause injuries. According to accident statistics, children are RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted safer when properly restrained on the rear snugly. Take special care of this when seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, wearing loose clothing. we strongly recommend that children be RNever use a seat belt for more than one placed in the rear seat whenever possible. person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt Regardless of seating position, children 12 around a person and another person or years old and under must be seated and other objects at the same time. properly secured in an appropriately sized RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a child restraint system or booster seat crash, you would not have the full width of recommended for the size and weight of the the seat belt to distributeimpact forces. child. For additional information, see the The twisted seat belt against yourbody "Children in the vehicle" section. could cause injuries. Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is RPregnant women should also always use a significantly increased if the child restraints lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ should be positioned as low as possible on or the child is not properly secured in the child the hips to avoid any possible pressure on restraint. the abdomen. RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is as upright as possible. RCheck your seat belt during travel to make sure it is properly positioned. Occupant safety 57

Seat belt adjustment The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts the driver's and front-passenger seat belt to the upper body of the occupants. The belt strap is tightened slightly when: Ryou engage the belt tongue in the belt buckle and you then turn the SmartKey to

position 2 in the ignition lock. Safety Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock and you then engage the belt tongue in the buckle. The seat-belt adjustment will apply a retraction force if any slack is detected between the occupant and the seat belt. Do not hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is X Adjust the seat and move the backrest to adjusting. You can switch the seat-belt an almostvertical position (Y page 102). adjustment on and off in the on-board X Pull the seat belt smoothly through belt computer (Y page 281). sash guide :. The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of X Without twisting it, guide the shoulder the PRE-SAFE® convenience function. More section of the seat belt across the middle information about PRE-SAFE® can be found of your shoulder and the lap section across under "PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupant your pelvis. protection)" (Y page 54). X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =. Seat-belt adjustment:ifnecessary, the Belt height adjustment driver's and front-passenger seat belts automatically adjust to the upper body (Y page 57). X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height (Y page 57). X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder section of the seat belt to tighten the belt across your body. All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are equipped with a special seat belt retractor to securely fasten child restraint systems in the vehicle. Further information can be found You can adjust the seat belt height on the under "Special seat belt retractor" frontseats. Adjust the belt to a height that (Y page 62). allows the upper part of the seat belt to be For more information about releasing the seat routed across the center of your shoulder. belt with release button ?, see "Releasing X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards. seat belts" (Y page 58). The belt sash guide engages in various positions. X To lower: press and hold belt sash guide release :.

Z 58 Occupant safety

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards. lights up for six seconds each time the engine X Release belt sash guide release : and is started. It then goes out if the driver and make sure thatthe belt sash guide has the front passenger have already fastened engaged. their seat belts. If the driver's seat belt is not fastened when Releasing seat belts the engine is started, an additional warning tone will sound. This warning tone stops after ! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled a maximum of six seconds or once the Safety up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue driver's seat belt is fastened. will be trapped in the door or in the seat If after six seconds, the driver or front mechanism. This could damage the door, passenger have not fastened their seat belts the door trim panel and the seat belt. and the doors are closed: Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfill their protective function and must be Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains lit replaced. Visit a qualified specialist as long as the driver's or front-passenger's workshop. seat belt is not fastened and Rif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) is exceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lamp begins to flash. Awarning tone also sounds with increasing intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds or until the driver or front passenger have fastened their seat belts. If the driver/front passenger unfasten their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the 7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and a warning tone sounds again. The warning tone ceases evenifthe driver or front-passenger seat belt has still not been fastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat belt warning lamp stops flashing but remains illuminated. : Belt sash guide After the vehicle comes to a standstill, the ; Seat belt tongue warning tone is reactivated and the seat belt = Buckle warning lamp 7 flashes again if the vehicle ? Release button speed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goes X Press release button ? and guide belt out if: tongue ; back towards belt sash guide : . Rboth the driver and the front passenger have fastened their seat belts. Belt warning for the driver and front or passenger Rthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open. Regardless of whether the driver's and front- i For more information on the 7 seat passenger seat belts have already been belt warning lamp, see "Warning and fastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamp Occupant safety 59

indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, The belt force limiters for the front seats are seat belts" (Y page 321). synchronized with the frontair bags, which take on a part of the deceleration force. This Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat results in the force exerted on the occupant belt force limiters being distributed over a greater area. The ETDs can only be activated when: G WARNING Rthe ignition is switched on. Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices R that have been deployed must be renewed. the restraint systems are operational; see Safety "SRS warning lamp" (Y page 43). For your safety, when disposing of Emergency Tensioning Devices, always observe the Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on safety instructions.These are available from each of the lap-shoulder belts in the front. any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The belt tensioners on the outside seats in the The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically second row and on the seats in the third row operated reversible pre-tensioners that do are triggered independently of the lock status not require replacement after activation. of the seat belts. The ETDs are triggered depending on the type ! If the front-passenger seat is not and severity of an accident: occupied, do not engage the seat belt Rif, in the event of a head-on or rear-end tongue in the buckle on the front- collision, the vehicle decelerates or passenger seat. Otherwise, the Emergency accelerates rapidly in a longitudinal Tensioning Device could be triggered in the direction during the initial stages of the event of an accident. impact X In order to ensure that the pyrotechnic Rif, in the eventofaside impact, on the side Emergency Tensioning Devices have not opposite the impact the vehicle been triggered, always have the seat belts decelerates or accelerates rapidly in a checked after an accident. lateral direction If the Emergency Tensioning Devices have Rif, in certain situations where the vehicle been triggered, they must be replaced. overturns, the system determines that it The seat belts on the following seats have can provide additional protection Emergency Tensioning Devices and belt force If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang, limiters: and a small amount of powder may also be Rdriver's and front-passenger seat released.Only in rare cases will the bang Rthe outer seats in the second row affect your hearing.The powder that is released generally does not constitute a Rthe seats in the third row health hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamp The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident, lights up. pulling them close against the body. The ETDs do not correct incorrect seat positions or incorrectly fastened seat belts. The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants back towards the backrest. If the seat belt is also equipped with a seat belt force limiter and this is triggered, the force exerted by the seat belt on the vehicle occupant is reduced.

Z 60 Children in the vehicle

Children in the vehicle RAchild in a rear-facing child restraint on the front passenger seat will be seriously Child restraint systems injured or even killed if the front passenger Important safety notes front air bag inflates in a collision which could occur under some circumstances, G WARNING even with the air bag technology installed According to accident statistics, children are in your vehicle. The only means to saferwhen properly restrained in the rear completely eliminate this risk is to never Safety seating positions than in the front seating place a child in a rear-facing child restraint position. Thus, we strongly recommend that in the front seat. We therefore strongly children be placed in the rear seats whenever recommend that you always place a child possible. Regardless of seating position, in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. children 12 years old and under must be RIf you must install a rear-facing child seated and properly secured in an appropriate restraint on the front passenger seat infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster because circumstances require you to do seat recommended for the size and weight of so, make sure the 45indicator the child. lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front The infant or child restraint must be properly passenger front air bag is deactivated. secured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seat Should the 45indicator lamp not belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and illuminate or go out while the restraint is top tether strap, fully in accordance with the installed, please checkinstallation. child seat manufacturer's instructions. Periodically check the 45indicator Occupants, especially children, should always lamp while driving to make sure the 4 sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt 5 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the properly and use an appropriately sized infant 45indicator lamp goes out or restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat remains out, do not transport a child on the recommended for the size and weight of the front passenger seat until the system has child. been repaired. Children can be killed or seriously injured by Achild in a rear-facing child restraint on the an inflating air bag. Note the following front passenger seat will be seriously important information when circumstances injured or even killed if the front passenger require you to place a child in the front front air bag inflates. passenger seat: RIf you have to place a child in a forward- RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag facing child restraint on the front passenger technology designed to deactivate the front seat, move the seat as far back as possible, passenger front air bag in your vehicle use the proper child restraint when the system senses the weight of a recommended for the age, size and weight typical 12-month-old child or less along of the child, and secure child restraint with with the weight of a standard appropriate the vehicle's seat belt according to the child restraint on the front passenger seat. child seat manufacturer's instructions. RFor children larger than the typical WARNING 12-month-old child, the front passenger G front air bag may or may not be activated. If the child restraint system is not fitted Always make sure the 45indicator correctly on a suitable seat, it may not fulfil lamp is illuminated, indicating that the front its protective function. In the event of an passenger front air bag is deactivated. accident, sharp braking or a sudden change Children in the vehicle 61 in direction, the child may not be held G WARNING securely. The child could thus be seriously or When leaving the vehicle, always remove the even fatally injured. For this reason, when SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take fitting a child restraint system, observe the the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. manufacturer's installation instructions and Do not leave children unattended in the the correct use of the child restraint system. vehicle, even if they are secured in a child Child restraint systems should preferably be restraint system, or with access to an fitted on the rear seats.The child is generally unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised better protected there. access to a vehicle could result in an accident Safety The entire base of the child restraint system and/or serious personal injury. The children must always rest on the seat cushion. could: Therefore, never place objects, e.g. a cushion, Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle under the child restraint system. Rbe seriously or fatally injured through Only use child restraint systems with the excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold original cover designed for them. Only replace Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with damaged covers with genuine covers. vehicle equipment that can be operated We recommend that you use the child even if the SmartKey is removed from the restraint systems which have been ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, recommended for Mercedes-Benz. such as seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment, or the memory function G WARNING If children open a door, they could injure other Infants and small children should never share persons or get out of the vehicle and injure a seat belt with another occupant. In the event themselves or be injured by following traffic. of an accident, they could be crushed Do not expose the child restraint system to between the occupant and seat belt. direct sunlight. The child restraint system's Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is metal parts, for example, could become very significantly increased if the child restraints hot, and the child could be burned on these are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ parts. or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the must travel in seats using normal seat belts. passenger compartment or cargo Position the shoulder belt across the chest compartmentunless they are firmly secured and shoulder, not face or neck.Abooster seat in place. may be necessary to achieve proper seat belt Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until increases a child's risk of injury in the event they reach a height where a lap-shoulder belt of fits properly without a booster. Rstrong braking maneuvers When the child restraint is not in use, remove it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat Rsudden changes of direction belt to prevent the child restraint from Ran accident becoming a projectile in the event of an accident. Further informationonsecure stowage of loads can be found under "Loading guidelines".

Z 62 Children in the vehicle

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle: Special seat belt retractor RSecure the child with a child or infant seat G WARNING restraint system appropriate to the age and If you release the seat belt when driving, the weight of the child. special seat belt retractor is deactivated. RMake sure that the infant or child is The released seat belt cannot be engaged properly secured at all times while the again while driving, because the inertia reel vehicle is in motion. pulls in the seat belt a small distance. The

Safety Mercedes-Benz recommends that you always child restraint system is no longer properly properly secure all infants and childrenwith secured. There is an increased risk of serious a child or infant seat restraint system for the injury or even fatal injury. trip. Always keep the seat belt of the activated The use of seat belts and infant and child special seat belt retractor engaged when restraint systems is required by law in: driving. Rall 50 states All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are RU.S. territories equipped with a special seat belt retractor. R the DistrictofColumbia When activated, the special seat belt Rall Canadianprovinces retractor ensures that the seat belt will not Infants and children must always be seated in slacken once the child restraint system has an appropriate infant or child restraint system been secured. recommended for the size and weight of the Installing a child restraint system: child.The infant or child restraint system must be properly secured in accordance with X Always comply with the manufacturer's the manufacturer's instructions. installation instructions. All infant or child restraint systems must meet X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat the following standards: belt retractor. X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety buckle. Standards 213 and 225 RCanadianMotor Vehicle Safety Standards Activating the special seat belt retractor: 213 and 210.2 X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat An information label on the child restraint belt retractor retract it again. system indicates whether it meets these While the seat belt is retracting, you should standards. This information is also provided hear a ratcheting sound. The special seat in the installation instructions supplied with belt retractor is activated. the child restraint system. X Push down on the child restraint system to Always read and follow the manufacturer's take up any slack. instructions when using an infant or child Removing a child restraint system/ restraint system or booster seat. deactivating the special seat belt retractor: Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior or on the infant or child restraint. X Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. X Press the seat belt release button and guide the belt tongue to the belt outlet. The special seat belt retractor is deactivated. Children in the vehicle 63

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors in the rear G WARNING Children that are too large for a child restraint must travel in seats usingnormal seat belts. Position shoulder belt across the chest and shoulder, not face or neck.

Abooster seat may be necessary to achieve Safety proper seat belt positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a Securing rings for the third row of seats booster. Securing rings : and ; for two LATCH-type Install the child restraint system in (ISOFIX) child restraint systems can be found accordance with the manufacturer's on the left and right: instructions. Ron the rear seat backrests of the outer Attach the child restraint system to both seats in the second row securing rings. Ron the backrests of the seats in the third An incorrectly installed child restraint system row of seats could come loose during an accident and Before installing a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seriously or even fatally injure the child. restraint system in the second row: Child restraint systems or child seat securing X Move the rear seat backrests in the second rings that are malfunctioning or damaged as row to an upright position (Y page 107). the result of a collision must be replaced. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions when installing. Secure child restraint systems without a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat securing system using the seat belts in the vehicle. When installing child restraint systems, you must observe the manufacturer's installation instructions.

Securing rings for the outer seats in the second row Top Tether

Top Tether anchorages G WARNING Always lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position when the rear seats are occupied by passengers. Lock the rear seat backrests in their upright position before installing the Top Tether straps or when the cargo compartment is not in use. Make sure that rear seat backrestsare secured properly

Z 64 Children in the vehicle

by pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. X Route Top Tether belt B under head If the seat backrest is not locked properly, the restraint = between the two head restraint seat backrest could fold forward. The child bars. restraint system is no longer supported X Guide Top Tether belt B downwards properly or held in position and can no longer between cargo compartmentcover : and fulfill its function.This could cause serious or rear seat backrest ;. even fatal injuries. X Hook Top Tether hook A of Top Tether belt

Safety B into Top Tether anchorage ?. Ensure that: RTop Tether hook A is hooked into Top Tether anchorage ? as shown. RTop Tether belt B is not twisted. RTop Tether belt B is routed between rear seat backrest ; and cargo compartment cover : if cargo compartment cover is installed. RTop Tether belt B is routed between the rear seat backrest ; and the cargo net if the cargo net is installed. X Tension Top Tether belt B.Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. X Move head restraint = back down again slightly if necessary (Y page 106). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correctrouting of Top Tether belt B. Top Tether provides an additional connection between a child restraint system, secured with a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount, and the rear seat. This helps reduce the risk of injury even further. The Top Tether anchorages for the second row of seats are located on the rear of the rear seat backrests. For the third row of seats, use the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor. X Move head restraint = upwards. X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint system with Top Tether. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions when doing so. Children in the vehicle 65

Child-proof locks Important safety notes G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the SmartKey with you and lockthe vehicle.

Do not leave children unattended in the Safety vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised You secure each door individually with the access to a vehicle could result in an accident child-proof locks on the rear doors. Adoor and/or serious personal injury. The children secured with a child-proof lock cannot be could: opened from inside the vehicle. When the Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle vehicle is unlocked, the door can be opened Rbe seriously or fatally injured through from the outside. excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold X To activate: press the child-proof lock Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with lever down in the direction of arrow ;. vehicle equipment that can be operated X Make sure that the child-proof locks are even if the SmartKey is removed from the working properly. ignition lock or removed from the vehicle, X To deactivate: press the child-proof lock such as seat adjustment, steering wheel lever up in the direction of arrow :. adjustment, or the memory function If children open a door, they could injure other Override feature for the rear side persons or get out of the vehicle and injure windows themselves or be injured by following traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to G WARNING direct sunlight. The child restraint system's When children ride on the vehicle's rear seats, metal parts, for example, could become very activate the override switch. Otherwise, the hot, and the child could be burned on these children could be injured, e.g. by trapping parts. themselves in the rear side window.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors G WARNING Children could open a rear door from inside the vehicle. This could result in serious injuries or an accident. Therefore, when children ride in the rear always secure the rear doors with the child-proof locks.

X To activate/deactivate: press button :. If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of the rear side windows is disabled. Operation is

Z 66 Driving safety systems

only possible using the switches in the attention to the noteson tires, driver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off, recommended minimumtire tread depths, operation is possible using the switches in etc. (Y page 400). the rear compartment. In wintry driving conditions, always use winter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains. Only in this way will the Driving safety systems driving safety systems described in this section work as effectively as possible.

Safety Overview of driving safety systems In this section, you will find information about the following driving safety systems: ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) RABS (Anti-lock Braking System) Important safety notes (Y page 66) i Observe the "Importantsafety notes" RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 67) section(Ypage 66). RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus) (Y page 67) G WARNING RCOLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST If ABSis faulty, the wheels could lock when (Y page 68) braking. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely impaired. RESP® (Electronic Stability Program) Additionally, further driving safety systems (Y page 71) are deactivated. There is an increased danger REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution) of skidding and accidents. (Y page 73) Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked RADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 73) immediately at a qualified specialist RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) workshop. RSTEER CONTROL (Y page 75) When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems, including driving safety systems, will also Important safety notes become inoperative. Observe the information on the ABS warning lamp (Y page 322) and If you fail to adapt your driving style or display messages which may be shown in the become distracted, the driving safety instrument cluster (Y page 287). systems can neither reduce the risk of ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way accident nor override the laws of physics. that the wheels do not lock when you brake. Driving safety systems are merely aids This allows you to continue steering the designed to assist driving. You are vehicle when braking. responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph good time. Always adapt your driving style to (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces, conditions and maintain asafe distance from even if you only brake gently. the vehicle in front. Drive carefully. The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the ignition i The driving safety systems described only is switched on. It goes out when the engine is work as effectively as possible when there running. is adequate contact between the tires and the road surface. Please pay special Driving safety systems 67

Braking The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated. X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the brake pedal vigorously until the braking situationis over. BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System X To make a full brake application: PLUS) depress the brake pedal with full force. i Observe the "Important safety notes" If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel section (Y page 66). a pulsing in the brake pedal. Safety The pulsating brake pedal can be an BAS PLUS is only available in vehicles indication of hazardous road conditions, and equipped with DISTRONIC PLUS. functions as a reminder to take extra care For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the while driving. radar sensor system must be: Ractivated (Y page 281) Off-road ABS Roperational An ABS system specifically suited to off-road With the help of the radar sensor system, BAS terrain is activated automatically once the off- PLUS can detect obstacles that are in the road program is activated on: path of yourvehicle for an extended period of time. Rvehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 252) If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning, BASPLUS will not be available. The brake Rvehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package system is still available with complete brake (Y page 252) boosting effect and BAS. At speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the front BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in wheels lock cyclically during braking. The hazardous situations at speeds greater than digging-in effect achieved in the process 4 mph (7 km/h). reduces the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This limits steering capability. At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also detect stationary objects. Examples of stationary BAS (Brake AssistSystem) objects are stopped or parked vehicles. To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUS i Observe the "Important safety notes" calculates the brake force necessary if: section (Y page 66). Ryou approach an obstacle, and WARNING G RBAS PLUS has detected arisk of collision If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance At aspeedless than 20 mph(30 km/h): if in an emergency braking situation is you depress the brake pedal, BASPLUS is increased. There is a risk of an accident. activated. The increase in brake pressure will In an emergency braking situation, depress be carried out at the last possible moment. the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents At a speed greater than 20 mph the wheels from locking. (30 km/h):ifyou depress the brake pedal BAS operates in emergency braking sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the situations. If you depress the brake pedal brake pressure to a value adapted to the quickly, BAS automatically boosts the braking traffic situation. force, thus shortening the stopping distance. If BAS PLUS demands particularly high braking force, preventative passenger

Z 68 Driving safety systems

protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are As aresult, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all activated simultaneously. critical situations. There is a risk of an X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the accident. emergency braking situation is over. Always pay careful attention to the traffic ABS prevents the wheels from locking. situation and be ready to brake. BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes Following damage to the frontend of the function as usual, if: vehicle, have the configurationand operation Safety Ryou release the brake pedal. of the radarsensors checked at a qualified Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end specialist workshop. This also applies to collision. collisions at low speeds where there is no Rno obstacle is detected in frontofyour visible damage to the frontofthe vehicle. vehicle. If you have activated DSR (Y page 250), BAS COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is likewise deactivated. G WARNING General notes BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST consists of objects and complex traffic situations. BAS Adaptive Brake Assist and the distance PLUS cannot intervene in these cases. There warning function, which are described in the is a risk of an accident. following. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake. Distance warning function

In particular, the detection of obstacles can Important safety notes be impaired if: i Observe the "Important safety notes" Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else section (Y page 66). covering the sensors. G WARNING Rsnow or heavy rain The distance warning function does not react: Rinterference by other radar sources Rto people or animals Rthere are strong radar reflections, for Rto oncoming vehicles example in parking garages Rto crossing traffic Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a motorbike Rwhen cornering Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Thus, the distance warning function cannot relative to the center of your vehicle provide a warning in all critical situations. There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING Always pay careful attention to the traffic BAS PLUS does not react: situation and be ready to brake. Rto people or animals The distance warning function cannot always Rto oncoming vehicles clearly identify objects and complex traffic Rto crossing traffic situations. Rwhen cornering Driving safety systems 69

In such cases, the distance warning function Due to the nature of the system, particularly may: complicated driving conditions may cause the Rgive an unnecessary warning system to display unnecessary warnings. Rnot give a warning With the help of the radar sensor system, the distance warning function can detect Always pay careful attention to the traffic obstacles that are in the path of your vehicle situation and do not rely solely on the for an extended period of time. distance warning function. At speeds up to 40 mph (70 km/h), the Function distance warning function may also detect Safety X To activate/deactivate: activate or stationary obstacles, for example stopped or deactivate the distance warning function in parked vehicles. the on-board computer (Y page 276). If you approach an obstacle and the distance When the distance warning function is warning function detects a risk of a collision, activated, the multifunction display shows the system will initially alert you both visually the Ä symbol, as long as the HOLD and acoustically. function is not switched on (Y page 211). On In particular, the detection of obstacles can vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the be impaired if: Ä symbol is displayed when P is engaged Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else or you are driving faster than 22 mph covering the sensors (35 km/h). Rsnow or heavy rain The distance warning function can help you Rinterference by other radar sources to minimize the risk of a front-end collision Rthere are strong radar reflections, for with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of example in parking garages such a collision. If the distance warning function detects that there is a risk of a Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a collision, you will be warned visually and motorbike acoustically. The distance warning function Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line cannot prevent a collision withoutyour relative to the center of your vehicle intervention. Following damage to the front end of the Starting at a speed of around 20 mph vehicle, have the configuration and operation (30 km/h), this function warns you if you of the radar sensor checked at a qualified rapidly approach a vehicle in front.An specialist workshop. This also applies to intermittentwarning tone will then sound and collisions at low speeds where there is no the · distance warning lamp will light up visible damage to the front of the vehicle. in the instrument cluster. Adaptive Brake Assist X Brake immediately in order to increase the distance from the vehicle in front. i Observe the "Important safety notes" or section (Y page 66). X Take evasive action, provideditis safe to G WARNING do so. Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly For the distance warning function to assist identify objects and complex traffic you when driving, the function must be situations. In these cases, Adaptive Brake activated in the on-board computer and be Assist may not intervene. There is a risk of an operational (Y page 276). accident.

Z 70 Driving safety systems

Always pay careful attention to the traffic If Adaptive Brake Assist requires particularly situationand be ready to brake. high brake pressure, preventive passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are G WARNING deployed simultaneously. Adaptive Brake Assist does not react: Up to vehicle speeds of around 155 mph (250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable Rto people or animals of reacting to moving objects that have Rto oncoming vehicles already been recognized as such at least once Safety Rto crossing traffic over the period of observation. Adaptive Rto stationary obstacles Brake Assist does not react to stationary Rwhen cornering obstacles. As a result, Adaptive Brake Assist may not If Adaptive Brake Assist is not available due intervene in all critical conditions. There is a to a malfunction in the radar sensor system, risk of an accident. the brake system remains available with full Always pay careful attention to the traffic brake boosting effect and BAS. situationand be ready to brake. In particular, the detection of obstacles can be impaired if there is: Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking Rdirt on the sensors or anything else assistance in hazardous situations at speeds covering the sensors greater than 20 mph (30 km/h) and uses Rsnow or heavy rain radarsensor technology to assess the traffic situation. Rinterference by other radar sources With the help of Adaptive Brake Assist, the Rthere are strong radar reflections, for distance warning signal can detectobstacles example in parking garages that are in the path of your vehicle for an Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a extended period of time. motorbike Should you approach an obstacle and Ra vehicle traveling in front on a different line Adaptive Brake Assist has detected a risk of relative to the center of your vehicle collision, Adaptive Brake Assist calculates the Following damage to the front end of the braking force necessary to avoid a rear-end vehicle, have the configuration and operation collision. Should you apply the brakes of the radar sensor checked at a qualified vigorously, Adaptive Brake Assist will specialist workshop. This also applies to automatically increase the braking force to a collisions at low speeds where there is no level suitable for the traffic conditions. visible damage to the front of the vehicle. X Keep the brake pedal depressed until the emergency braking situation is over. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) The brakes will work normally again if: General notes Ryou release the brake pedal. i Observe the "Important safety notes" Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end section (Y page 66). collision. ESP® monitors driving stability and traction, Rno obstacle is detected in frontofyour i.e. power transmission between the tires and vehicle. the road surface. Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated. If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviating from the direction desired by the driver, one Driving safety systems 71 or more wheels are braked to stabilize the ! Only operate the vehicle for a maximum vehicle. The engine output is also modified to of ten seconds on a brake test keep the vehicle on the desired course within dynamometer. Switch off the ignition. physical limits. ESP® assists the driver when Application of the brakes by ESP® may pulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP® otherwise destroy the brake system. can also stabilize the vehicle during braking. ! A function or performance test should 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) only be carried out on atwo-axle

dynamometer. Before you operate the Safety 4ETS traction control is part of ESP®. vehicle on such a dynamometer, please Traction control brakes the drive wheels consult a qualified workshop.You could individually if they spin. This enables you to otherwise damage the drive train or the pull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, brake system. for example if the road surface is slippery on ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lamp one side. In addition, more drive torque is in the instrument cluster lights up transferred to the wheel or wheels with continuously when the engine is running. traction. If the ÷ warning lamp and the å Traction control remains active, even if you warning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is not ® deactivate ESP . available due to a malfunction. In appropriate driving situations, activate the Observe the information on warning lamps off-road program: (Y page 325) and display messages which X Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD may be shown in the instrument cluster package (Y page 252) (Y page 287). X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package i Only use wheels with the recommended (Y page 252) tire sizes. Only then will ESP® function properly. Off-road 4ETS (Electronic Traction System) Characteristics of ESP®

A4ETS systemspecifically suited to off-road General information terrain is activated automatically once the off- ® road program is activated on: ESP is activated automatically when the engine is started. RVehicles without the ON&OFFROAD If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warning package (Y page 252) lamp flashes in the instrument cluster. RVehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage ® (Y page 252) If ESP intervenes: X Do not deactivate ESP® under any Important safety notes circumstances. G WARNING X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary when pulling away. If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable to X Adapt your driving style to suit the stabilize the vehicle.Additionally, further prevailing road and weather conditions. driving safety systems are deactivated. This increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 72 Driving safety systems

Deactivating/activating ESP® X To switch on: press button :. The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the Important safety notes instrument cluster goes out. You can selectbetween the following states of ESP®: Characteristics when ESP® is deactivated RESP® is activated. If ESP® is deactivated and one or more wheels ® RESP® is deactivated. start to spin, the ÷ ESP warning lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. In such Safety G WARNING situations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle. If you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longer If you deactivate ESP®: stabilizes the vehicle. There is an increased R ® risk of skidding and an accident. ESP no longer improves driving stability. Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and Only deactivate ESP® in the situations the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of described in the following. the wheels results in a cutting action, which It may be best to deactivate ESP® in the provides better grip. following situations: R4ETS is still active. R ® Rwhen using snow chains ESP still provides support when you brake. Rin deep snow Ron sand or gravel Off-road ESP® i Activate ESP® as soon as the situations An ESP® system specifically suited to off-road described above no longer apply. ESP® will terrain is activated automatically once the off- otherwise not be able to stabilize the road program is activated on: vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. RVehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package (Y page 252) ! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an RVehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package extended period with ESP® deactivated. (Y page 252) You could otherwise damage the drivetrain. Off-road ESP® intervenes with a delay if there Deactivating/activating ESP® is oversteering or understeering, thus improving traction.

ESP® trailer stabilization G WARNING If road and weather conditions are poor, trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent the vehicle/trailer combination from swerving.Trailers with a high center of gravity can tip over before ESP® can detect this. There is a risk of an accident. X To switch off: press button :. Always adapt yourdriving style to the The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in the prevailing road and weather conditions. instrument cluster lights up. Driving safety systems 73

If yourvehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer the brake system checked at a qualified combination) begins to lurch, you can only specialist workshop. stabilize the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing the brake firmly. Observe information regarding indicator and In this situation, ESP® assists you and can warning lamps (Y page 323) as well as detectifthe vehicle/trailer combination display messages (Y page 289). begins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle down EBD monitors and controls the brake by braking and limiting the engine output until pressure on the rear wheels to improve the vehicle/trailer combination has driving stability while braking. Safety stabilized. Trailer stabilization is active above speeds of about 37 mph (60 km/h). ADAPTIVE BRAKE Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® is ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety deactivated because of a malfunction. and offers increased braking comfort. In addition to the braking function, ADAPTIVE Crosswinddriving assistance BRAKE also has the HOLD function (Y page 211) and hill start assist Strong crosswinds cancause your vehicle to (Y page 166). deviate from a straightcourse. The crosswind driving assistance function integrated into ESP® significantly reduces these effects. PRE-SAFE® Brake ESP® intervenes automatically according to i Observe the "Important safety notes" the direction and intensity of the crosswinds section (Y page 66). affecting your vehicle. When driving on straight roads or gentle PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicles bends, your vehicle is kept safely on course with DISTRONIC PLUS. by a stabilizing brake intervention. If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radar Crosswind driving assistance is active above sensor system must be: a vehicle speed of 80 km/h. Ractivated (Y page 281) Crosswind driving assistance does not work Roperational ® if ESP is deactivated or disabled because of With the help of the radar sensor system, a malfunction. PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an extended period of time. EBD (electronic brake force ® distribution) PRE-SAFE Brake can help you to minimize the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or i Observe the "Important safety notes" reduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE- section (Y page 66). SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision, G WARNING you will be warned visually and acoustically as well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE® If EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels can Brake cannot prevent a collision without your still lock, e.g. under full braking. This intervention. increases the risk of skidding and an accident. Starting at a speed of around You should therefore adapt your driving style 4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you if to the different handling characteristics. Have you very quickly approach a vehicle in front.

Z 74 Driving safety systems

An intermittent warning tone will then sound activated (Y page 54). If, at speeds over and the · distance warning lamp will light 20 mph (30 km/h), a risk of collision remains up in the instrument cluster. and you do not brake, take evasive action or X Brake immediately in order to increase the significantly accelerate, automatic braking distance from the vehicle in front. may be performed up to alevel of automatic emergency braking. Automatic emergency or braking is not performed until immediately X Take evasive action provided it is safe to do prior to an accident that can no longer be

Safety so. avoided. From a speed of approximately G WARNING 4 mph (7 km/h), if the driver and front passengerhave fastened their seat belts, PRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake your PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicle vehicle by a partial application of the brakes automatically at speeds up to approximately if a danger of collision is detected. There may 124 mph (200 km/h). be a collision unless you also brake. Automatic emergency brakingcannot prevent Due to the nature of the system, particularly a collision.There is a risk of an accident. complicated driving conditionsmay cause unnecessary warnings or theunnecessary Always apply the brakes yourself and try to intervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake. take evasive action. You can prevent the intervention of the PRE- G WARNING SAFE® Brake at any time by: PRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearly Rdepressing the accelerator pedalfurther identify objects and complex traffic Ractivating kickdown conditions. Rreleasing the brake pedal In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may: ® The braking action of PRE-SAFE Brake is Rgive an unnecessary warning and then ended automatically if: brake the vehicle Ryou maneuverto avoid the obstacle. Rnot give a warning or intervene Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-end There is a risk of an accident. collision. Always pay particular attention to the traffic Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected in situation and be ready to brake, especially if front of your vehicle. PRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate the If you have activated DSR (Y page 250), PRE- intervention in a non-critical driving situation. SAFE® Brake is deactivated. In particular, the detection of obstacles can At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph be impaired if: (70 km/h),PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detect stationary objects.Examples of stationary Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything else objects are stopped or parked vehicles. covering the sensors If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE® Rsnow or heavy rain Brake detects a riskofacollision, the system Rinterference by other radar sources will alert you both visuallyand acoustically. If Rthere are strong radar reflections, for you do not brake or take evasive action, the example in parking garages system will warn you by automatically braking the vehicle gently.Ifthere is an increased risk of collision, preventative passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE®) are Theft deterrent locking system 75

Ra narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a This steering assistance is provided in motorbike particular if: Ra vehicle traveling in frontonadifferent line Rboth right wheels or both left wheels are on relative to the center of your vehicle a wet or slippery road surface when you G WARNING brake Rthe vehicle starts to skid PRE-SAFE® Brake does not react: If ESP® is malfunctioning, you will not receive Rto people or animals

steering support from STEER CONTROL. Safety Rto oncoming vehicles Power steering will, however, continue to Rto crossing traffic function. Rwhen cornering As a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neither give warnings nor intervene in all critical Theft deterrent locking system situations. There is a risk of an accident. Immobilizer Always pay careful attention to the traffic X To activate with the SmartKey: remove situation and be ready to brake. the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to maintain an appropriate distance X To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the from the vehicle in front and thus prevent a ignition off and open the driver's door. collision, you must apply the brakes yourself. X To deactivate: switch on the ignition. X To activate/deactivate: activate or The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from deactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on- being started without the correct SmartKey. board computer (Y page 276). When leaving the vehicle, always take the When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Ä symbol appears in the multifunction Anyone can start the engine if a valid display as long as the HOLD function is SmartKey has been left inside the vehicle. deactivated (Y page 211). On vehicles with Active Parking Assist, the Ä symbol is i The immobilizer is always deactivated displayed when P is engaged or you are when you start the engine. driving faster than 22 mph (35 km/h). In the event that the engine cannot be started when the starter battery is fully Following damage to the frontend of the charged, the immobilizer may be faulty. vehicle, have the configurationand operation Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz of the radarsensors checked at a qualified Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the specialist workshop. This also applies to USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). collisions at low speeds where there is no visible damage to the frontofthe vehicle.

STEER CONTROL i Observe the "Important safety notes" section (Y page 66). STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.

Z 76 Theft deterrent locking system

ATA (anti-theft alarm system) X To stop the alarmusing KEYLESS-GO: grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey must be outside the vehicle. The alarm is switched off. or X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. Safety The alarm is switched off. The alarm is not switched off, even if you close the open door that has triggered it, for example. X To arm: lockthe vehicle with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. i If the alarm stays on for more than Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm 30 seconds, the mbrace (USA only) or TELE system is armed after approximately AID (Canada only) emergency call system 15 seconds. initiates a call to the Customer Assistance Center automatically. The emergency call X To switch off using the SmartKey: system initiates the call provided that: unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey. Ryou have subscribed to the mbrace/ or TELEAID Service. X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rthe mbrace/TELEAID Service has been X To switch off using KEYLESS-GO: unlock activated properly. the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO. Rthe required mobile phone, power supply or and GPS are available. X Press the Start/Stop button on the dashboard. The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle. Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the alarm system is armed and you open: Ra door Rthe vehicle with the mechanical key Rthe tailgate Rthe hood X To turn the alarm off with the SmartKey: press the % or & button on the SmartKey. The alarm is switched off. or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. The alarm is switched off. 77

Useful information ...... 78 SmartKey ...... 78 Doors ...... 84 Cargo compartment ...... 87 Side windows ...... 91 Sliding sunroof ...... 96 Opening and closing 78 SmartKey

Useful information G WARNING When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i This Operator's Manual describes all SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take models and all standard and optional the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. equipment of your vehicle available at the Do not leave children unsupervised in the time of publication of the Operator's vehicle, even if they are secured in a child Manual. Country-specific differences are restraint system, and do not give them access possible. Please note that your vehicle may to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised not be equipped with all features access to a vehicle could result in an accident described. This also applies to safety- and/or serious personal injury. They could: related systems and functions. Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts i Read the information on qualified Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme specialist workshops: (Y page 28). heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in SmartKey operation even after the SmartKey has Important safety notes been removed from the ignition, such as the Opening and closing seat adjustment, steering wheel G WARNING adjustment or memory function. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, If children open a door, they could cause they could: severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if Ropen the doors, thus endangering other they get out of the vehicle, they could injure people or road users. themselves when doing so or be seriously or even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to Roperate the vehicle's equipment. direct sunlight. The child restraint system's Additionally, children could set the vehicle in metal parts, for example, could become very motion if, for example, they: hot, and a child could be burned on these Rrelease the parking brake. parts. Rshift the automatic transmission out of parking position P. G WARNING Rstarting the engine. If you attach heavy or large objects to the There is a risk of an accident and injury. SmartKey, the SmartKey could be unintentionally turned in the ignition lock. This When leaving the vehicle, always take the could cause the engine to be switched off. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never There is a risk of an accident. leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Do not attach any heavy or large objects to reach of children. the SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strong magnetic fields. Otherwise, the remote control function could be affected. SmartKey 79

Strong magnetic fields can occur in the When unlocking, the turn signals flash once. vicinity of powerful electrical installations. When locking, they flash three times. RDo not keep the SmartKey: You can also set an audible signal to confirm that the vehicle has been locked. The audible - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone or another SmartKey signal can be activated and deactivated using the on-board computer (Y page 280). - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes on if it is activated in the on-board - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case computer (Y page 279). This can affect the functionality of the SmartKey. Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the KEYLESS-GO temperature-controlled cup holder. Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be General notes recognized. Bear in mind that the engine can be started by any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle. SmartKey functions Opening and closing Locking/unlocking centrally You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the SmartKey with you. You can combine the functions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the & button on the SmartKey. When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance between the SmartKey and the : & To lock the vehicle corresponding door handle must not be ; F To open/close the tailgate greater than 3 ft (1 m). = % To unlock the vehicle KEYLESS-GO checks whether a valid SmartKey is in the vehicle by periodically X To unlockcentrally: press the % establishing a radio connection between the button. vehicle and the SmartKey. This happens: If you do not open thevehicle within Rwhen the external door handles are approximately 40 seconds of unlocking: touched Rthe vehicle is locked again. Rwhen starting the engine Rthe theft deterrent locking system is Rwhile the vehicle is in motion armed again.

X To lock centrally: press the & button. The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks: Rthe doors Rthe tailgate Rthe fuel filler flap

Z 80 SmartKey

The SmartKey now functions as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: press the % button once. X To unlock centrally: press the % button twice. X To lock centrally: press the & button. The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as follows: X To unlock the driver's door: touch the X To unlockthe vehicle: touch the inner inner surface of the door handle on the surface of the door handle. driver's door. X To lockthe vehicle: touch sensor X To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface :. surface of the door handle on the front- passenger door or the rear door. X Convenience closing feature: touch recessed sensor surface ; for an X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor surface on one of the door handles

Opening and closing extended period. (Y page 79). Further information on the convenience X closing feature (Y page 93). To restore the factory settings: press and hold down the % and & buttons If you pull on the handleofthe tailgate, only the cargo compartment of the vehicle is simultaneously for approximately six unlocked. seconds until the battery check lamp flashes twice (Y page 81).

Changing the settings of the locking system Mechanical key You can change the settings of the locking General notes system. This means that only the driver's door If the vehicle can no longer be locked or and the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the unlocked with the SmartKey, use the vehicle is unlocked. This is useful if you mechanical key. frequently travel on your own. If you use the mechanical key to unlock and X To change the setting: press and hold open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm down the % and & buttons system will be triggered (Y page 76). simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the battery check lamp There are several ways to turn off the alarm: flashes twice (Y page 81). X To turn the alarm off with the i If the setting of the locking system is SmartKey: press the % or & button changed within the signal range of the on the SmartKey. vehicle, pressing the & or % button: or Rlocks or X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Runlocks the vehicle or X To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS- GO: press the Start/Stop button in the SmartKey 81

ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in the Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you have vehicle. the batteries replaced at a qualified specialist or workshop. X Lockorunlock the vehicle using KEYLESS- GO.The SmartKey must be outside the Checking the battery vehicle. If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked automatically. X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Press the & or % button.

The battery is working properly if battery Opening and closing checklamp : lights up briefly. The battery is discharged if battery check lamp : does notlight up briefly. X Change the battery (Y page 81). i If the SmartKey battery is checked within the signal receptionrange of the vehicle, : Release catch pressing the & or % button: ; Mechanical key Rlocks or R X Push release catch : in the direction of unlocks the vehicle the arrow and at the same time remove i You can get a battery at any qualified mechanical key ; from the SmartKey. specialist workshop.

Replacing the battery SmartKey battery You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery. Important safety notes X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). G WARNING Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal injury. Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention immediately.

Z 82 SmartKey

X Insert the front tabs of battery compartment cover : into the housing first and then press to close it. X Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey. X Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on the vehicle.

: Battery compartment cover ; Mechanical key

X Press mechanical key ; into the opening in the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow until battery compartment cover : opens. Do not hold battery compartment

Opening and closing cover : closed while doing so. X Remove battery compartment cover :.

= Battery

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your palm until battery = falls out. X Insertthe new battery with the positive terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so. X Make sure that the surface of the battery is free from lint, grease and all other forms of contamination. SmartKey 83

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions You cannot lock or The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged. unlock the vehicle X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control using the SmartKey. function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. If this does not work:

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.

X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key. Opening and closing X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lock There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. or unlock the vehicle X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of using KEYLESS-GO. the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO. X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from close range and press the % or & button. X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop. If this does not work:

X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 81) and replace it if necessary (Y page 81). X Lock (Y page 86) or unlock (Y page 87) the vehicle using the mechanical key.

You have lost a X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist SmartKey. workshop. X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost the X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers. mechanical key. X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

Z 84 Doors

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The engine cannot be The on-board voltage is too low. started using the X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior SmartKey. lighting, and try to start the engine again. If this does not work: X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 390). or X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 391). or X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot be Adoor is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected as started using KEYLESS- easily. GO. The SmartKey is in X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

Opening and closing the vehicle. There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves. X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors G WARNING Important safety notes When leaving the vehicle, always remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take G WARNING the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, Do not leave children unsupervised in the they could: vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access Ropen the doors, thus endangering other to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised people or road users. access to a vehicle could result in an accident Rget out and disrupt traffic. and/or serious personal injury. They could: R operate the vehicle's equipment. Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Additionally, children could set the vehicle in Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme motion if, for example, they: heat or cold Rrelease the parking brake. Rinjure themselves or have an accident with Rshift the automatic transmission out of vehicle equipment that may still be in parking position P. operation even after the SmartKey has Rstarting the engine. been removed from the ignition, such as the There is a risk of an accident and injury. seat adjustment, steering wheel adjustment or memory function. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never If children open a door, they could cause leave children or animals unattended in the severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of they get out of the vehicle, they could injure reach of children. Doors 85

themselves when doing so or be seriously or X Front door: pull door handle ;. evenfatally injured by any passing traffic. If the door is locked, locking knob : pops Do not expose the child restraint system to up. The door is unlocked and can be direct sunlight.The child restraint system's opened. metal parts, for example, could become very X Rear door: pull up locking knob : on the hot, and a child could be burned on these relevant rear door. parts. The rear door is unlocked and can be opened. G WARNING Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the passenger compartment or cargo Centrally locking and unlocking the compartmentunless they are firmly secured vehicle from the inside in place. You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo from the inside. The buttons are located on increases a child's risk of injury in the event both frontdoors. of Rstrong braking maneuvers Opening and closing Rsudden changes of direction Ran accident

Unlocking and opening doors from the inside You can open a door from inside the vehicle evenifithas been locked. You can only open the rear doors from inside the vehicle if they : To unlock are notsecured by the child-proof locks ; To lock (Y page 65). X To unlock: press button :. If the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening a X To lock: press button ;. door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft If the front-passenger door is closed, the alarm system. Switch off the alarm vehicle locks. (Y page 76). Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked or unlocked. You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally from the inside if the vehicle has been locked with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO. You can open a front door from inside the vehicle even if it has been locked.

Z 86 Doors

If the vehicle has been locked using the Power closing feature locking button for the central locking, or has been locked automatically, and a door is Power closing pulls the doors and trunk lid opened from the inside: into their locks automatically even if they are only partly closed. Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had X To power-close adoor: push the door into previously been fully unlocked the lock up to the first detent position. Ronly the door which has been opened form Power closing will pull the door fully closed. the inside is unlocked if only the driver's X To power-close the tailgate: lightly press door had been previously unlocked the tailgate downwards. Power closing will pull the tailgate fully Automatic locking feature closed.

Unlocking the driver's door (mechanical key) If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked with

Opening and closing the SmartKey, use the mechanical key. If you use the mechanical key to unlockand open the driver's door, the anti-theftalarm system will be triggered (Y page 76). X Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey (Y page 80). : To deactivate X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of ; To activate the driver's door as far as it will go. X To deactivate: press and hold button : for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds. X To activate: press and hold button ; for about five seconds until a tone sounds. i If you press one of the two buttons and do not hear a tone, the relevant setting has already been selected. The vehicle is locked automatically when the ignition is switched on and the wheels are turning. You could therefore be locked out if: 1 To unlock Rthe vehicle is being pushed. X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise to position 1. Rthe vehicle is being towed. The door is unlocked. Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer. X Turn the mechanical key back and remove You can also switch the automatic locking it. function on and off using the on-board X Insert the mechanical key into the computer (Y page 280). SmartKey. Cargo compartment 87

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key) Cargo compartment If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the Important safety notes SmartKey, use the mechanical key. G WARNING X Open the driver's door. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust X Close the front-passenger door, the rear gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate doors and the tailgate. is open when the engine is running, X Press the locking button (Y page 85). particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust X Checkwhether the locking knobs on the fumes could enter the passenger front-passenger door and the rear doors compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. are still visible. Press down the locking Turn off the engine before opening the knobs manually, if necessary (Y page 85). tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. X Close the driver's door. X Take the mechanical key out of the G WARNING SmartKey (Y page 80). When leaving the vehicle, always remove the X Insert the mechanical key into the lock of SmartKey from the ignition lock. Always take the driver's door as far as it will go. the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unsupervised in the Opening and closing vehicle, even if they are secured in a child restraint system, and do not give them access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised access to a vehicle could result in an accident and/or serious personal injury. They could: Rinjure themselves on vehicle parts Rbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme heat or cold Rinjure themselves or have an accident with vehicle equipment that may still be in 1 To lock operation even after the SmartKey has X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far been removed from the ignition, such as the as it will go to position 1. seat adjustment, steering wheel X Turn the mechanical key back and remove adjustment or memory function. it. If children open a door, they could cause X Make sure that the doors and the tailgate severe or even fatal injury to other persons; if are locked. they get out of the vehicle, they could injure themselves when doing so or be seriously or X Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey. even fatally injured by any passing traffic. Do not expose the child restraint system to i If you lock the vehicle as described above, direct sunlight. The child restraint system's the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti- metal parts, for example, could become very theft alarm system is not armed. hot, and a child could be burned on these parts.

Z 88 Cargo compartment

G WARNING Opening/closing from outside Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the Opening passenger compartment or cargo compartment unless they are firmly secured in place. Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo increases a child's risk of injury in the event of Rstrong braking maneuvers Rsudden changes of direction Ran accident

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened.Therefore, make sure X Press the % button on the SmartKey. that there is sufficient clearance above and X Pull handle : and release it. behind the tailgate. The tailgate opens automatically.

Opening and closing i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 446). Closing Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo compartment. You could otherwise lock G WARNING yourself out. To prevent possible personal injury, always You can: keep hands and fingers away from the cargo compartmentopening when closing the Rclose the tailgate manually from outside tailgate. Be especially careful when small Ropen and close the tailgate automatically children are around. from outside Ropen and close the tailgate automatically from inside Rlimit the opening angle of the tailgate Runlock the tailgate from inside with the emergency release

X Pull the tailgate down using recess :. X Allow the tailgate to drop into the lock. X Lock the vehicle if necessary with the & button on the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO. i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the cargo compartment, the tailgate will not lock. Cargo compartment 89

Opening/closing automatically from Opening the tailgate automatically outside You can open the tailgate automatically with Important safety notes the SmartKey or the handle in the tailgate. X Press and hold the F button on the G WARNING SmartKey until the tailgate opens. Parts of the body could become trapped or during automatic closing of the tailgate. X If the tailgate is unlocked, pull the handle Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be and let it go again immediately. standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process.There is a risk of injury. Closing the tailgate automatically Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the G WARNING closing area during the closing process. Parts of the body could become trapped Use one of the following options to stop the during automatic closing of the tailgate. closing process: Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There Rpress the remote operating switch on the Opening and closing driver's door. is a risk of injury. Rpress the closing or locking button on the Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the tailgate. closing area during the closing process. Rpull the handle on the tailgate. Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: G WARNING Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Rpress the remote operating switch on the gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate driver's door. is open when the engine is running, Rpress the closing or locking button on the particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust tailgate. fumes could enter the passenger Rpull the handle on the tailgate. compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. Turn off the engine before opening the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open.

! The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear when opened. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions (Y page 446). i The tailgate is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object Closing and locking button (example: vehicle with blocks or restricts the tailgate during the KEYLESS-GO) closing process, the tailgate opens again : Closing button automatically. ; Locking button

Z 90 Cargo compartment

X To close: press closing button : on the Rpress the closing or locking button on the tailgate. tailgate. or Rpull the handle on the tailgate. X Press and hold the F button on the SmartKey until the tailgate closes. G WARNING Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:you can Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust simultaneously close and lock the tailgate. gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate is open when the engine is running, X Press locking button ; on the tailgate. particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected outside fumes could enter the passenger the vehicle, the tailgate closes and locks. compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. All the doors must be shut and the Turn off the engine before opening the SmartKey located in the vicinity of the tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. tailgate. i The tailgate cannot be opened and closed ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the with the SmartKey if there is a SmartKey in rear when opened. Therefore, make sure the ignition. that there is sufficient clearance above and

Opening and closing If the tailgate touches an object while behind the tailgate. closing, the closing procedure is i Tailgate opening dimensions interrupted and the tailgate reopens. (Y page 446). i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in the i The tailgate is equipped with an cargo compartment, the tailgate will not automatic reversing feature. If an object lock. blocks or restricts the tailgate during the closing process, the tailgate opens again automatically. Opening/closing automatically from inside Opening and closing Important safety notes G WARNING Parts of the body could become trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate. Moreover, people, e.g. children, may be standing in the closing area or may enter the closing area during the closing process. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area during the closing process. Use one of the following options to stop the You can open and close the tailgate from the closing process: driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. Rpress the F button on the SmartKey. Rpress the remote operating switch on the driver's door. Side windows 91

X To open: pull remote operating switch : Tailgate emergency release for the tailgate until the tailgate opens. Important safety notes X To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. ! The tailgate swings upwards and to the X Press remote operating switch for rear when opened. Therefore, make sure tailgate : until the tailgate is closed. that there is sufficient clearance above and behind the tailgate. i Tailgate opening dimensions Limiting the opening angle of the (Y page 446). tailgate If the tailgate can no longer be opened from Important safety notes outside the vehicle, use the emergency release on the inside of the tailgate. ! Make sure there is sufficient clearance to open the tailgate fully when setting the Opening opening angle.The tailgate could otherwise be damaged. Ideally, set the opening angle outside. Opening and closing Activating You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate. This is possible in the top half of its opening range, up to approximately 4in (10 cm) before the stop. This could be useful, for example, if there is insufficientspace above the tailgate. X To open the tailgate: pull the handle on X Take the mechanical key out of the the tailgate. SmartKey (Y page 80). X To stop the opening procedure at the X Insert mechanical key ; into the opening desired position: press the closing button in paneling :. (Y page 89) in the tailgate or pull the handle X Turn mechanical key ;90° clockwise. on the outside of the tailgate again. X Push mechanical key ; in the direction of X To store the position: press and hold the the arrow and open the tailgate. closing button in the tailgate until you hear a short tone. The opening angle limiter is activated. The Side windows tailgate will now stop in the stored position when opening. Important safety notes G WARNING Deactivating While opening the side windows, body parts X Press and hold the closing button could become trapped between the side (Y page 89) in the tailgate until you hear window and the door frame as the side two short tones. window moves. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that nobody touches the side window during the opening procedure. If

Z 92 Side windows

somebody becomes trapped, release the Opening and closing the side switch or pull the switch to close the side windows window again. The switches for all side windows are located on the driver's door. There is also a switch on WARNING G each door for the corresponding side window. While opening the side windows, body parts The switches on the driver's door take in the closing area could become trapped. precedence. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If somebody becomes trapped, release the switch or press the switch to open the side window again.

G WARNING If children operate the side windows they could become trapped, particularly if they are

Opening and closing left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. Activate the override feature for the rear side : Front left windows. When leaving the vehicle, always ; Front right take the SmartKey with you and lock the = Rear right vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. ? Rear left X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the The side windows are equipped with an ignition lock. automatic reversing feature. If an object X To open: press the corresponding switch. blocks or restricts a side window during the closing process, the side window opens again X To close: pull the corresponding switch. automatically. i If you press the switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ G WARNING closing process is started in the The reversing feature does not react: corresponding direction. You can stop Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small automatic operation by operating the fingers switch again. Rover the last 4mmofthe closing movement i You can continue to operate the side Rduring resetting windows after you switch off the engine or Rwhen closing the side window again remove the SmartKey. This function is manually immediately after automatic available for up to five minutes or until the reversing driver's or front-passenger door is opened. This means that the reversing feature cannot i The side windows cannot be operated prevent someone being trapped in these from the rear when the override feature for situations. There is a risk of injury. the side windows is activated (Y page 65). Make sure that no body parts are in close proximity during the closing procedure. If someone becomes trapped, press the switch to open the side window again. Side windows 93

Opening and closing the hinged side Convenience opening windows General notes Important safety notes You can ventilate the vehicle before you start G WARNING driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to Make sure that nobody can become trapped carry out the following functions as you close the hinged side windows. If there simultaneously: is a risk of somebody becoming trapped, Runlock the vehicle release the switch or push the switch again to Ropen the side windows reopen the side window. Ropen the hinged side windows Ropen the sliding sunroof or the panorama Opening/closing roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the The hinged side windows are operated roller sunblinds electrically from the from the driver's seat. Rswitch on the seat ventilation for the driver's seat i The convenience opening feature can only be operated using the SmartKey. The Opening and closing SmartKey must be close to the driver's door handle.

Convenience opening

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle. X Press and hold the % button until the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position side windows and the sliding sunroof or the 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. panorama roof with power tilt/sliding X To open fully: press switch : and release. panel are in the desired position. If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof X To close fully: pull switch : and release. with power tilt/sliding panel are closed, the X To stop the closing procedure: press roller sunblinds are opened first. switch : again. X Press and hold the % button again until Both hinged side windows open fully. the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding i If the hinged side windows are blocked panel is in the desired position. when closing, the closing procedure is X To interrupt convenience opening: interrupted and the hinged side windows release the % button. open again fully.

Convenience closing feature Important safety notes G WARNING When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window

Z 94 Side windows

and the sliding sunroof. There is a risk of panorama roof with power tilt/sliding injury. panel are fully closed. Observe the complete closing procedure X Make sure that all the side windows and the when the convenience closing feature is sliding sunroof or panorama roof with operating. Make sure that no body parts are power tilt/sliding panel are closed. in close proximity during the closing On vehicles with a panorama roof with power procedure. tilt/sliding panel: When you lockthe vehicle, you can X Press and hold the & button again until simultaneously: the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close. Rclose the side windows Rclose the hinged side windows X To interrupt convenience closing: release the & button. Rclose the sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel On vehicles with a panorama roof with power Using KEYLESS-GO tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the The KEYLESS-GO key must be outside the roller sunblinds. vehicle. All the doors must be closed. Opening and closing Proceed as follows if someone is trapped: RRelease the & button to interrupt the closing procedure. RPress and hold the % button to open. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: RRelease the sensor surfaces on the exterior door handle to interrupt the closing procedure. RTo open, pull the same door handle immediately and hold it firmly. The door windows and the sliding sunroof will open X Touch recessed sensor surface : on the for as long as the door handle is held but door handle until the side windows and the the door is not opened. sliding sunroof or the panorama roof with i Notes on the automatic reversing feature power tilt/sliding panel are fully closed. for: i Make sure you only touch recessed sensor surface :. Rthe side window (Y page 91) X Rthe sliding sunroof (Y page 96) Make sure that all the side windows and the sliding sunroof or panorama roof with Using the SmartKey power tilt/sliding panel are closed. On vehicles with a panorama roof with power The SmartKey must be close to the driver's tilt/sliding panel: door handle. X X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's Touch recessed sensor surface : on the door handle. door handle again until the roller sunblinds of the panorama roof with power tilt/ X Press and hold the & button until the sliding panel close. side windows and the sliding sunroof or the Side windows 95

X To interrupt convenience closing: release recessed sensor surface : on the door handle.

Resetting the side windows If a side window can no longerbe closed fully, you must reset it. X Close all the doors. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed. (Y page 92) X Hold the switch for an additional second. If the side window opens again slightly: Opening and closing X Immediately pull the corresponding switch on the door control panel until the side window is completely closed (Y page 92). X Hold the switch for an additional second. X If the corresponding side window remains closed after the button has been released, the side window has been reset correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Z 96 Sliding sunroof

Problems with the side windows G WARNING Closing the side windows with increased force or without the anti-entrapment feature could lead to serious or even fatal injury. Make sure that nobody can become trapped when closing the side windows.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Aside window cannot X Remove the objects. be closed because it is X Close the side window. blocked by objects, e.g. leaves in the window guide.

Aside window cannot If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again be closed and you slightly: cannot see the cause. X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding Opening and closing switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed with increased force. If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again slightly: X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch again until the side window has closed. The side window is closed without the anti-entrapmentfeature.

Sliding sunroof If somebody becomes trapped: Important safety notes Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding switch briefly in any direction sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/ sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding The opening or closing procedure will be sunroof" refers to both types of sliding stopped. sunroof. G WARNING G WARNING If children operate the sliding sunroof they While opening and closing the sliding sunroof, could become trapped, particularly if they are body parts in close proximity could become left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury. trapped. There is a risk of injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Make sure that no body parts are in close SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never proximity during the opening and closing leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. procedures. The sliding sunroof is equipped with an automatic reversing feature. If an object blocks or restricts the sliding sunroof during Sliding sunroof 97 the closing process, the sliding sunroofopens Operating the sliding sunroof again automatically. Opening and closing G WARNING The reversing feature does not react: Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fingers Rover the last 4mmofthe closing movement Rduring resetting Rwhen closing the sliding sunroof again manually immediately after automatic reversing This means that the reversing feature cannot prevent someone being trapped in these Overhead control panel situations. There is a risk of injury. : To raise Make sure that no body parts are in close ; To open proximity during the closing procedure.

= To close/lower Opening and closing If somebody becomes trapped: X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the Rrelease the switch immediately, or ignition lock. Rduring automatic operation, push the X Press or pull the 2 switch in the switch briefly in any direction corresponding direction. The closing process is stopped. i If you press the 2 switch beyond the ! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free point of resistance, an automatic opening/ of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions closing process is started in the may occur. corresponding direction. You can stop Do not allow anything to protrude from the automatic operation by operating the sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could switch again. be damaged. When opening and raising the roof, automatic operation is only available if the i Resonance noises can occur in addition sliding sunroof is in the closed position. to the usual airflow noises when the sliding The sun protection cover automatically opens sunroof is open. They are caused by minor along with the sliding sunroof. You can open pressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior. or close the sun protection cover manually Change the position of the sliding sunroof when the sliding sunroof is raised or closed. or open a side window. The noise will be reduced or eliminated. i You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof after switching off the engine or removing the SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function is available for up to five minutes or until the driver's or front- passenger door is opened.

Z 98 Sliding sunroof

Resetting closing process is started in the corresponding direction.You can stop ! If the sliding sunroof still cannotbe automatic operation by operating the opened or closed fully after resetting, switch again. contact a qualified specialist workshop. The automatic raising feature is available Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move only when the sliding sunroof is closed. smoothly. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. Operating the roller sunblinds for the X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear panorama roof with power tilt/sliding (Y page 97). panel X Keep the 2 switch pressed for another Important safety notes second. X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be G WARNING fully opened and closed again (Y page 97). When opening or closing the roller sunblind, X If this is not the case, repeat the steps parts of the body could be trapped between above again. the roller sunblind and the frame or sliding

Opening and closing sunroof. There is a risk of injury. When opening or closing make sure that no Operating the panorama roof with parts of the body are in the sweep of the roller power tilt/sliding panel sunblind. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The opening or closing procedure will be stopped.

The roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interior from sunlight. The two roller sunblinds can only be opened and closed together when the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Overhead control panel is closed. : To raise ; To open = To close/lower The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel can only be operated when the roller sunblind is open (Y page 99). X To open and close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press or pull the 2 switch in the corresponding direction. i If you press the 2 switch beyond the point of resistance, an automatic opening/ Sliding sunroof 99

Opening and closing the roller sunblinds

Overhead control panel : To open Overhead control panel ; To open : To open = To close ; To open Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/ = To close sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if the

panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel Opening and closing X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the or the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly. ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the X Press or pull the 2 switch in the ignition lock. corresponding direction. X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point i If you press the 2 switch beyond the of resistance in the direction of arrow = point of resistance, an automatic opening/ closing process is started in the until the panorama roof with power tilt/ corresponding direction. You can stop sliding panel is fully closed. automatic operation by operating the X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an switch again. additional second. X Pull the 2 switch repeatedly to the point Resetting the panorama roof with of resistance in the direction of arrow = power tilt/sliding panel and the roller until the roller sunblinds are fully closed. sunblinds X Keep the 2 switch pulled for an ! If the panorama roof with power tilt/ additional second. sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannot X Make sure that the panorama roof with be fully opened or closed after resetting, power tilt/sliding panel (Y page 98) and the contact a qualified specialist workshop. roller sunblinds (Y page 99) can be fully opened again. X If this is not the case, repeat the steps above again.

Z 100 Sliding sunroof

Problems with the sliding sunroof G WARNING If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If somebody becomes trapped: Rrelease the switch immediately, or Rduring automatic operation, push the switch briefly in any direction The closing process is stopped.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Your vehicle may be equipped with a sliding sunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In this section, the term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types of sliding sunroof. Opening and closing Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The sliding sunroof If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens cannot be closed and again slightly: you cannot see the X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 cause. switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then reopens slightly: X Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 2 switch in the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold it until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature. 101

Useful information ...... 102 Correct driver's seat position ...... 102 Seats ...... 103 Steering wheel ...... 115 Mirrors ...... 118 Memory function ...... 121 Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 102 Correct driver's seat position

Useful information X Observe the safety guidelines on seat adjustment (Y page 103). i This Operator's Manual describes all X Make sure that seat = is adjusted models and all standard and optional properly. equipment of your vehicle available at the Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 104) time of publication of the Operator's When adjusting the seat, make sure that: Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag not be equipped with all features as possible. described. This also applies to safety- Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position. related systems and functions. Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly. i Read the information on qualified Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost specialist workshops: (Y page 28). vertical position. Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that your thighs are gently supported. Correct driver's seat position Ryou can depress the pedals properly. X Check whether the head restraint is G WARNING adjusted properly. You could lose control of your vehicle if you When doing so, make sure that you have do the following while driving: adjusted the head restraint so that the back Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, of your head is supported at eye level by steering wheel or mirrors the center of the head restraint.Also make Rfastenthe seat belt sure that you have adjusted the head restraint so that the back of your head is as There is a risk of an accident. close to the head restraint as possible.This Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, will be the case if the head restraint is

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors steering wheel and mirror and fasten your adjusted correctly (Y page 105). seat belt before starting the engine. X Observe the safety guidelines on steering wheel adjustment (Y page 115). X Make sure that steering wheel : is adjusted properly. Adjusting the steering wheel manually (Y page 115) Adjusting the steering wheel electrically (Y page 116) When adjusting the steering wheel, make sure that: Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent. Ryou can move your legs freely. Ryou can see all the displays in the instrumentcluster clearly. X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts (Y page 54). Seats 103

X Checkwhether you have fastened seat accidentally press the electrical seat belt ; properly (Y page 56). adjustment buttons and become trapped. The seat belt should: There is a risk of injury. Rfit snugly across your body While moving the seats, make sure that your hands or other body parts do not get under Rbe routed across the middle of your the lever assembly of the seat adjustment shoulder system. Rbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip joints G WARNING X Before starting off, adjust the rear-view When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle mirror and the exterior mirrors in such a occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the way that you have a good view of road and seat guide rail. There is arisk of injury. traffic conditions(Ypage 118). Make sure when adjusting aseat that no one X Vehicles with a memory function: save has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror settings with the memory function G WARNING (Y page 121). If head restraints are not installed and adjusted correctly, they cannot provide protection as intended. There is an increased Seats risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. Important safety notes in the event of an accident or when braking. Always drive with the head restraints G WARNING installed. Before driving off, make sure for Children could become trapped if they adjust every vehicle occupant that the center of the the seats, particularly when unattended. head restraint supports the back of the head There is a risk of injury. at about eye level.

When leaving the vehicle, always take the Seats, steering wheel and mirrors SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never G WARNING leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. The seat belt does not offer the intended level of protection if the backrest is not in the G WARNING upright position.When braking or in the event You could lose control of your vehicle if you of an accident, you could slide underneath the do the following while driving: seat belt and sustain abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This poses an increased Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, risk of injury or even fatal injury. steering wheel or mirrors Adjust the seat properly before beginning Rfasten the seat belt your journey. Always make sure that the seat There is a risk of an accident. is in the upright position. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your G WARNING seat belt before starting the engine. According to accident statistics, children are safer when properly restrained on the rear G WARNING seats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus, If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or we strongly recommend that children be other vehicle occupants could be trapped and placed in the rear seat whenever possible. thereby injured. Children in particular could Regardless of seating position, children 12

Z 104 Seats

years old and under mustbe seated and i Further related subjects: properly secured in an appropriately sized RImportant safety notes on air bags child restraint system or booster seat (Y page 44) recommended for the size and weight of the RCargo compartment enlargement child. For additional information, see the (folding down the rear bench seat) "Children in the vehicle" section. (Y page 340) Achild's risk of serious or fatal injuries is RSecuring children in the vehicle significantly increased if the child restraints (Y page 60) are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ or the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. Adjusting the seats electrically ! To avoid damage to the seats and the seat heating, observe the following information: Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as soon as possible. Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not switch on the seat heating. The seat heating should also not be used to dry the seats. Rclean the seat covers as recommended; see "Interior care". : Head restraint height Rdo not transport heavy loads on the ; Seat cushion angle seats. Do not place sharp objects on the = Seat height seat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. ? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors The seats should only be occupied by passengers, if possible. A Backrest angle Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do i Vehicles with memory function: if PRE- not cover the seats with insulating SAFE® has been triggered, the front- materials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, passenger seat will be moved to a better seat covers, child seats or booster seats. position if it was previously in an ! Make sure that there are no objects in the unfavorable position. footwell or behind the seats when resetting i You can store the seat settings using the the seats. There is a risk that the seats memory function (Y page 121). and/or the objects could be damaged. i It is not possible to remove the head restraints from the front seats. The rear- Adjusting the head restraints compartmenthead restraints, however, General notes can be removed (Y page 106). For more information, contact a qualified Pay attention to the important safety notes specialist workshop. (Y page 103). Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust Seats 105 the height and angle of the head restraints to There are several notches. the correct position. X To move backwards: press and hold release button : and push the head Adjusting the head restraints manually restraint backwards. Adjusting the head restraint height X When the head restraint is in the desired position, release the button and make sure that the head restraint is engaged in position. i Adjust the head restraint so that the back of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraints electrically

X To adjust the head restraint height: slide the switch for head restraint adjustment X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the (Y page 104) up or down in the direction of desired position. the arrow. X To lower: press release catch : in the directionofthe arrow and push the head Adjusting the luxury head restraints restraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the fore/aft position of the head restraint Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left- hand side bolster : into the desired position. With this function you can adjust the distance between the head restraint and the back of X To adjust the fore/aft position of the the seat occupant's head. head restraint: push or pull the head restraint in the direction of arrow ;. X To adjust forwards: pull the head restraint forwards in the direction of the arrow until i Adjust the head restraint so that the back it engages. of your head is as close to the head restraint as possible.

Z 106 Seats

Rear seat head restraints Rear seats (2nd and 3rd row of seats) Adjusting the rear seat head restraint Important safety notes height G WARNING If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident. RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. RAchild restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would X Once the head restraint is fully lowered, not be able to perform its required function. press release catch :. RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects X To raise: pull the head restraint up to the or loads in the cargo compartment. desired position. There is an increased risk of injury. X To lower: press release catch : and push Always make sure that the seat and backrest the head restraint downuntil it is in the are engaged as described: desired position. Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat Removing and installing the rear seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature head restraints Rafter you have adjusted the seat Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

G WARNING The seat does not engage in the entry/exit position. The seat could fold back suddenly, e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat X To remove: pull the head restraint up to could become trapped. There is a risk of the stop. injury. X Press release catch : and pull the head Always fold back a seat which has been folded restraint outofthe guides. forwards before you pull away.Make sure that X To re-install: insert the head restraint so the seat and backrestengage fully. that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. G WARNING X Push the head restraint down until you hear Childrencould become trapped if they adjust it engage in position. the seats, particularly when unattended. There is a risk of injury. Seats 107

When leaving the vehicle, always take the cargo compartmentcould otherwise be SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never damaged. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Make sure that the seats in the third row are empty and not blocked before folding G WARNING them down. When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle The 3rd row of seats consists of two occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the electrically foldable individual seats, which seat guide rail. There is arisk of injury. can be lowered into the cargo compartment. Make sure when adjusting aseat that no one If the seat is not correctly locked in position, has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. the display message: 3rd Seat Row, Right Not Locked appears in the Adjusting the backrest angle (second multifunction display. row of seats) If you fold the seat back until it engages, the display message disappears. Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully engaged. The switches for folding the left or right-hand seats up and down are marked: L for the left- hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel, R for the right-hand seat when viewed in the direction of travel. Folding forwards/back in the rear compartment You can adjust the angle of the backrests in the second row of seats. There are ten detent positions to choose from. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Pull the left or right release lever ; upwards in the direction of the arrow until the relevant backrest : is fully released. X Pull the backrest : forwards in the direction of the arrow and allow it to engage. X To ensure that the backrest has engaged, lean firmly against backrest :. Example: R switch X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer seat in the second row of seats forwards Folding the seats up/down (thirdrow of (Y page 109). seats) X Briefly pull switch :. General notes The seat folds up. ! Make sure that there is nothing on the X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull folded-down seats in the cargo switch : again. compartment. The cargo compartment must be empty for thethird row of seats to be folded up. The seats or the objects in the

Z 108 Seats

X To fold down: briefly press switch :. The seatfolds down. X To stop the automatic folding: briefly press switch : again.

Folding down/up in the cargo compartment

If you drop objects underneath the seats in the 3rd row, you can remove the panel in order to reach beneath the seat. X To open: fold the corresponding seat up or down (Y page 107). X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, briefly press the button again to stop the Example: L switch automatic movement. X To fold down: fold the right-hand outer X Grasp the panel recess. seat in the second row of seats forwards X Pull the panel in the direction of the arrow (Y page 109). and remove it. X Briefly press switch :. X To close: fold the corresponding seat up or The seat folds up. down (Y page 107). X To stop the automatic folding: briefly X Once the seat is folded halfway up or down, press switch : again. briefly press the button again to stop the

Seats, steering wheel andX mirrors To fold down: briefly pull switch :. automatic movement. The seat folds down. X Attach the panel using the guide pins. X To stop the automatic folding: briefly pull X Push the panel downwards until it engages. switch : again. X Fold the seat up and down fully to check that the panel is seated correctly. Detachable panel (third row of seats) ! If there are objects underneath the seat, Folding down the seats in the 2nd row the seat can no longer be folded up or down manually fully. The seat could be damaged. Important safety notes Only drive with the panel completely installed. G WARNING If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident. RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat Seats 109

belt can no longer offer the intended level i Further related subjects: of protection and could even cause injuries. RCargo compartmentenlargement RAchild restraint system would no longer be (folding the 2nd row of seats forwards) anchored or positioned correctly and would (Y page 340) not be able to perform its required function. RFolding the seats in the 3rd row RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects forwards/back (Y page 107) or loads in the cargo compartment. Entry position There is an increased risk of injury. Always make sure that the seat and backrest are engaged as described: Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Rafter you have adjusted the seat Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has been used Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards

G WARNING The release handle for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is located on the entry side on the The seat does not engage in the entry/exit back of each outer seat in the 2nd row of position. The seat could fold back suddenly, seats. e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing direction suddenly or in the event of an X Move the head restraint to the lowest accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat position(Ypage 106). could become trapped. There is a risk of X Pull release handle ; in the direction of

injury. the arrow to the pressure point and hold it Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Always fold back a seat which has been folded in this position. forwards before you pull away.Make sure that The backrest folds forwards. the seat and backrestengage fully. You have two options for folding the seat down fully. General notes X Pull release handle ; again in the direction To enter or exitthe 3rd row of seats: the outer left and right seats of the 2nd row can be of the arrow to the pressure point and hold folded down. it in this position. One of the outer seats of the 2nd row is in the or entry/exit position: the multifunction display X Pull on release loop : in the direction of shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not the arrow and hold in this position. Locked display message. X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards. If you fold the seat back until it engages, the i Vehicles with memory function: display message disappears. The corresponding frontseat moves Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully slightly forwards. engaged.

Z 110 Seats

X Pull on release loop : in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position. The backrest folds forwards. X Pull on release loop : again in the direction of the arrow and hold in this position. X Lift up the seat until it folds forwards. i Vehicles with memory function: The corresponding frontseat moves slightly forwards. Entry position Exit position G WARNING Whenyou adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. There is arisk of injury. Make sure when adjusting aseat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

i Further related subjects: RImportant safety notes on air bags Exit position (Y page 44) i Vehicles with memory function: RSecuring children in the vehicle Call up the programmed seat setting using (Y page 60) the memory buttons in order to return the frontseat to the saved position. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Moving the outer seats back to the normal position (2nd row of seats) G WARNING If the seat and backrest are not engaged, they can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden braking or an accident. RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be forced into the seat belt by a seat or backrest which is not engaged. The seat If you wish to exit the 3rd row of seats, fold belt can no longer offer the intended level down the outer seat on the right-hand side as of protection and could even cause injuries. follows. RAchild restraint system would no longer be The release loop for the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT anchored or positioned correctly and would feature is located at the bottom on the back not be able to perform its required function. of each outer seat in the 2nd row. RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment. There is an increased risk of injury. Seats 111

Always make sure thatthe seat and backrest There is an increased risk of injury. are engaged as described: Always make sure that the seat and backrest Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat are engaged as described: with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Rbefore traveling with a passenger on a seat Rafter you have adjusted the seat with the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has Rafter you have adjusted the seat been used Rafter the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature has Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement been used has been folded forwards Rafter the cargo compartment enlargement has been folded forwards G WARNING The seat does not engage in the entry/exit G WARNING position. The seat could fold back suddenly, The seat does not engage in the entry/exit e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing position. The seat could fold back suddenly, d mirrors direction suddenly or in the event of an e.g. when accelerating, braking, changing accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat direction suddenly or in the event of an could become trapped. There is a risk of accident. Persons in the sweep of the seat injury. could become trapped. There is a risk of Always fold back a seat which has been folded injury. wheel an forwards before you pull away.Make sure that Always fold back a seat which has been folded the seat and backrestengage fully. forwards before you pull away.Make sure that the seat and backrestengage fully. X To lock the seat: fold back the seatuntil it engages. General notes X Fold back the backrestuntil it engages. To enter or exitthe 3rd row of seats: the outer left and right seats of the 2nd row can be Folding down the seats in the 2ndrow folded down electrically. Seats, steering electrically One of the outer seats of the 2nd row is in the entry/exit position: the multifunction display Important safety notes shows, e.g. the 2nd Seat Row, Right Not G WARNING locked display message. If the seat and backrestare not engaged, they If you fold the seat back until it engages, the can fold forwards, e.g. in the event of sudden display message disappears. braking or an accident. Pull the backrest firmly to ensure that it is fully RThis will cause the vehicle occupants to be engaged. forced into the seat belt by a seat or i Further related subjects: backrest which is not engaged. The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level RCargo compartmentenlargement of protection and could even cause injuries. (folding the 2nd row of seats forwards) (Y page 340) RAchild restraint system would no longer be anchored or positioned correctly and would RFolding the seats in the 3rd row not be able to perform its required function. forwards/back (Y page 107) RThe seat backrests cannot restrain objects or loads in the cargo compartment.

Z 112 Seats

Folding down the seats You can adjust the contour of the front seat The seats can be folded down electrically if backrests individually to provide optimum the vehicle is stationary and the respective support for your back. rear door is open. Switching the seat heating on/off Activating/deactivating G WARNING Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to become very hot. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to excessively high temperatures may be affected or they may X Press button :. even suffer burn-like injuries. There is a risk The head restraint retracts, the backrest of injury. folds forwards and the seat folds forwards. Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on The seat can be manually returned to its repeatedly. initial position.(Y page 108)

Adjusting the multicontour seat You can set the multicontour seat using COMAND.See the separate COMAND Operating Instructions. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

Driver's and front-passenger seat

: To raise the backrest contour ; To soften the backrest contour Rear seats = To lower the backrest contour The three red indicator lamps in the button ? To harden the backrest contour indicate the heating level you have selected. Seats 113

The system automatically switches down from level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight minutes. The system automatically switches down from level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten minutes. The system automatically switches off approximately 35 minutes after it is set to level 1. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired heating level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat heating may switch off. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors

Z 114 Seats

Problems with the seat heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat heating has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical switched off consumers are switched on. prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch back on automatically.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off Activating/deactivating

The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons

Seats, steering wheel andindicate mirrors the ventilation level you have selected. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on: press button : repeatedly until the desired ventilation level is set. X To switch off: press button : repeatedly until all the indicator lamps go out. i If the battery voltage is too low, the seat ventilation may switch off. i You can open the side windows and the sliding sunroof using the "Convenience opening" feature (Y page 93). The seat ventilation of the driver's seat automatically switches to the highest level. Steering wheel 115

Problems with the seat ventilation

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The seat ventilation has The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical switched off consumers are switched on. prematurely or cannot X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting. Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat ventilation will switch back on automatically.

Steering wheel Before starting off, make sure the steering wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering Important safety notes wheel while the vehicle is in motion. G WARNING You could lose control of your vehicle if you do the following while driving: Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel or mirrors Rfasten the seat belt There is a risk of an accident. Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt before starting the engine. : Release lever WARNING Seats, steering wheel and mirrors G ; To adjust the steering wheel height Children could injure themselves if they = To adjust the steering wheel position adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of (fore-and-aft adjustment) injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the X Push release lever : down completely. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never The steering column is unlocked. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. X Push release lever : up completely. Adjusting the steering wheel The steering column is locked. manually X Check if the steering column is locked. When doing so, try to push the steering G WARNING wheel up or down or try to move it in the If the steering wheel is unlocked while the fore-and-aft direction. vehicle is in motion, it could change position unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 116 Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO:when you electrically remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the steering wheel heating is deactivated. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off the ignition and open the driver's door, the steering wheel heating is deactivated.

: To adjust the steering wheel height ; To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-and-aft adjustment) The steering wheel can also be adjusted when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition lock. i Further related subjects: REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 117) RStoring settings (Y page 121)

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors Steering wheel heating Activating/deactivating

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direction of arrow : or ;. Indicatorlamp = lights up or goes out. Steering wheel 117

Problems with the steering wheel heating

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The steering wheel The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical heating has switched consumers are switched on. off prematurely or X Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as cannot be switched on. the rear window defroster or interior lighting.

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. Important safety notes The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting G WARNING in and out of your vehicle easier. When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts You can activate and deactivate the EASY- the steering wheel, you and other vehicle ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board occupants –particularly children–could computer (Y page 281). become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is Position of the steering wheel when the making adjustments, make sure that no one EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureis active has any body parts in the sweep of the steering wheel. The steering wheel swings upwards when If somebody becomes trapped: you: Rpress one of the memory function position Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock buttons, or Ropen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO in Rmove the switch for steering wheel position 1 adjustmentinthe opposite direction to that Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey is Seats, steering wheel and mirrors in which the steering wheel is moving. in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock The adjustment process is stopped. i The steering wheel only moves upwards if it has not already reached the upper end G WARNING stop. If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature, they can become trapped, Position of the steering wheel for particularly when unattended. There is a risk driving of injury. The steering wheel is moved to the last When leaving the vehicle, always take the selected position when: SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. Rthe driver's door is closed Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition G WARNING lock If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT or feature is making adjustments, you could lose Ryou press the Start/Stop button once on control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an vehicles with KEYLESS-GO accident. When you close the driver's door with the ignition switched on, the steering wheel is

Z 118 Mirrors

also automatically moved to the previously This means that you could misjudge the set position. distance fromroad users traveling behind, The last positionofthe steering wheel is e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of an stored when you switch off the ignition or accident. when you store the settingwith the memory For this reason, always make sure of the function (Y page 121). actual distance from the road users traveling behind by glancing over your shoulder. Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is triggered in an accident, the steering column will move upwards when the driver's door is opened. This occurs irrespective of the position of the SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it easier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants. The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is activated in the on-board computer (Y page 281). X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. X Press button : for the left-hand exterior Mirrors mirror or button ; for the right-hand Rear-view mirror exterior mirror. The indicator lamp in the corresponding button lights up in red. The indicator lamp goes out again after Seats, steering wheel and mirrors some time. You can adjust the selected mirror using adjustment button = as long as the indicator lamp is lit. X Press adjustmentbutton = up, down, or to the left or right until you have adjusted the exterior mirror to the correct position. You should have a good overview of traffic conditions. X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : The convex exteriormirrors provide a larger forwards or back. field of vision. The exterior mirrors are heated automatically if the rear window defroster is switched on Exterior mirrors and the outside temperature is low. Adjusting the exterior mirrors G WARNING The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side reduces the size of the image. Visible objects are actually closer than they appear. Mirrors 119

Folding the exterior mirrors in or out Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as electrically soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside. Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again automatically as soon as you unlock the vehicle and then open the driver's or front- passenger door.

Exterior mirror pushed out of position If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of position, proceed as follows: X Vehicles without electrically folding exterior mirrors: move the exterior mirror X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock. into the correct position manually. X Vehicles with electrically folding X Briefly press button :. exterior mirrors: press and hold button for Both exterior mirrors fold in or out. folding the mirrors :(Y page 119) until you i Make sure that the exterior mirrors are hear a click and then the mirror engage in always folded out fully while driving.They position. could otherwise vibrate. The mirror housing is engaged again and i If you are driving faster than you can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual 30 mph (47 km/h), you can no longer fold (Y page 118). in the exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors Automatic anti-glare mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected or The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror Seats, steering wheel and mirrors completely discharged, the exterior mirrors on the driver's side automatically go into anti- must be reset. The exterior mirrors will glare mode if the following conditions are met otherwise not fold in when you select the simultaneously: "Fold in mirrors when locking" function in the Rthe ignition is switched on and on-board computer (Y page 281). Rincident light from headlamps strikes the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in sensor in the rear-view mirror. position 1 in the ignition lock. i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode X Briefly press button :. if reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting is switched on. Folding the exterior mirrors in or out automatically If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is activated in the on-board computer: (Y page 281)

Z 120 Mirrors

Parking position for the exterior Using the memory button mirror on the front-passenger side Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ; Button for the front-passenger side exterior mirror = Adjustment button : Button for the driver's side exterior mirror ? Memory button M ; Button for the front-passenger side You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror exterior mirror in such a way that you can see = Adjustment button the rear wheel on that side as soon as you ? Memory button M engage reverse gear. This setting can be stored using memory button M ?. You can position the front-passenger side exterior mirror in such a way that you can see X Make sure that the SmartKey is in the rear wheel on that side as soon as you position 2 in the ignition lock. engage reverse gear. You can store this X With the exterior mirror on the front- position. passenger side activated, use adjustment Seats, steering wheel and mirrors X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the the exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the ignition lock. curb should be visible. X Press button ; for the exterior mirror on X Press memory button M ? and one of the the front-passenger side. arrows on adjustment button = within X Engage reverse gear. three seconds. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The parking position is stored if the exterior side moves to the preset parking position. mirror does not move. X X Use adjustment button = to adjust the If the mirror moves out of position, repeat exterior mirror to a position that allows you the steps. to see the rear wheel and the curb. The parking position is stored. i If you shift the transmission to another position, the exterior mirror on the front- passenger side returns to the driving position. Memory function 121

Calling up a stored parking position G WARNING setting When the memory function adjusts the seat or steering wheel, you and other vehicle occupants –particularly children–could become trapped. There is a risk of injury. While the memory function is making adjustments, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat or steering wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, immediately release the memory function position button.The adjustment process is stopped.

: Buttonfor the driver's side exterior mirror G WARNING ; Button for the front-passenger side Children could become trapped if they exterior mirror activate the memory function, particularly = Adjustment button when unattended. There is arisk of injury. ? Memory button M When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front- With the memory function, you can store up passenger side using button ;. to three different settings, e.g. for three X Engage reverse gear. differentpeople. The exterior mirror on the front-passenger The following settings are stored as a single side moves to the stored parking position. memory preset:

The exterior mirror on the front-passenger Rposition of the seat, backrest and head Seats, steering wheel and mirrors side moves back to its original position: restraint Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9mph Rdriver's side: steering wheel position (15 km/h) Rdriver's side: position of the exterior Rif you press button : for the exterior mirrors on the driver's and front-passenger mirror on the driver's side sides

Memory function Storing settings G WARNING If you use the memoryfunctiononthe driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. There is a risk of an accident. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary.

Z 122 Memory function

X Adjust the seat(Ypage 104). X On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel (Y page 116)and the exteriormirrors (Y page 118). X Press the M memory button and thenpress one of the storage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds. The settings are stored in the selected preset position. Atone sounds when the settings have been completed. The memory function can still be used if the SmartKey has been removed.

Calling up astoredsetting

X Press the button for storage position 1, 2 or 3.Keep pressing until the seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsare in the stored position. i The setting procedure is interrupted as soon as you release the storage position buttons. Seats, steering wheel and mirrors 123

Useful information ...... 124 Exterior lighting ...... 124 Interior lighting ...... 131 Replacing bulbs ...... 133 Windshield wipers ...... 136 Lights and windshield wipers 124 Exterior lighting

Useful information Setting the exterior lighting

i This Operator's Manual describes all Setting options models and all standard and optional Exterior lighting can be set using: equipment of your vehicle available at the Rthe light switch time of publication of the Operator's Manual. Country-specific differences are Rthe combination switch (Y page 127) possible. Please note that your vehicle may Rthe on-board computer (Y page 278) not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety- Light switch related systems and functions. Operation i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 28).

Exterior lighting General notes For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you drive with the lights switched on even during the daytime. In some countries, operation of the headlamps varies due to legal requirements and self-imposed 1W Left-hand standing lamps obligations. 2X Right-hand standing lamps 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Driving abroad instrumentclusterlighting Lights and windshield wipers 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, Conversion to symmetrical low beam controlled by the light sensor Switch the headlamps to symmetrical low 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps beam in countries in which traffic drives on BR Rear fog lamp the opposite side of the road from the country If you hear a warning tone when you leave the where the vehicle is registered. This prevents vehicle, the lights may still be switched on. glare to oncoming traffic. When using symmetrical lights, the edge of the road is not X Turn the light switch to Ã. lit as widely and as far ahead as normal. The exterior lighting (except the parking/ Have the headlamps converted at a qualified standing lamps) switches off automatically if specialist workshop as close to the border as you: possible before driving in these countries. Rremove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock Ropen the driver's door with the SmartKey Conversion to asymmetrical low beam in position 0. after returning Have the headlamps converted back to Automatic headlamp mode asymmetrical low-beam headlamps at a G WARNING qualified specialist workshop as soon as When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- possible after crossing the border again. beam headlamps may not be switched on Exterior lighting 125

automatically if there is fog, snow or other X To switch on automatic headlamp causes of poor visibility due to the weather mode: turn the light switch to Ã. conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an Only for Canada: accident. The daytime running lamps improve the In such situations, turnthe light switch to visibility of your vehicle during the day. The L. daytime running lamps function is required by law in Canada. It cannot therefore be The automatic headlamp feature is only an deactivated. aid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle's When the engine is running and the vehicle is lighting at all times. stationary: if you move the selector lever from a drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/low-beam headlamps go out after three minutes. When the engine is running, the vehicle is stationary and in high ambient light: if you turn the light switch to T, you turn on the daytime running lamps and parking lamps. If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to L, the manual settings take precedence over the daytime running lamps. 1W Left-hand standing lamps USA only: 2X Right-hand standing lamps The daytime running lamps improve the 3T Parking lamps, license plate and visibility of your vehicle during the day. To do instrumentcluster lighting this, the daytime running lamps function must 4à Automatic headlamp mode, be switched on using the on-board computer controlled by the light sensor (Y page 278). Lights and windshield wipers 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps If the engine is running and you turn the light switch to T or L, the manual settings BR Rear fog lamp take precedence over the daytime running à is the favored light switch setting. The lamps. light setting is automatically selected i according to the brightnessofthe ambient In the USA, the daytime running lamps are light (exception: poor visibility due to weather deactivated upon delivery from the factory. conditions such as fog, snow or spray): Low-beam headlamps RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: G WARNING the parking lamps are switched on or off When the light switch is set to Ã, the low- automatically depending on the brightness beam headlamps may not be switched on of the ambient light. automatically if there is fog, snow or other RWith the engine running: if you have causes of poor visibility due to the weather activated the daytime running lamps conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an function via the on-board computer, the accident. daytime running lamps or the low-beam In such situations, turn the light switch to headlamps and parking lamps are switched L. on or off automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.

Z 126 Exterior lighting

3T Parking lamps, license plate and instrumentclusterlighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick fog. Please take note of the country- specific regulations for the use of rear fog 1W Left-hand standing lamps lamps. 2X Right-hand standing lamps X To switch on the rearfog lamps: turn the 3T Parking lamps, license plate and SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 instrument cluster lighting or start the engine. ipers 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. controlled by the lightsensor dw X Press the R button. 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps The yellow R indicator lamp in the BR Rear fog lamp instrumentcluster lights up. Even if the light sensor does not detectthat X To switch off therear fog lamp: press the it is dark, the parking lamps and low-beam R button. headlamps switch on when the ignition is The yellow R indicator lamp in the switched on and the light switch is set to the instrumentcluster goes out. L position. This is a particularly useful function in the event of rain and fog. Parking lamps X To switch on the low-beam headlamps: ! If the battery has been excessively

Lights and windshiel turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to discharged, the parking lamps or standing position 2 or start the engine. lamps are automatically switched off to enable the nextengine start. Always park X Turn the light switch to L. your vehicle safely and sufficiently lit The green L indicator lamp in the according to legal standards.Avoid the instrumentcluster lights up. continuous use of the T parking lamps Rear fog lamp for several hours.Ifpossible, switch on the X right or the W left standing lamp.

1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps Exterior lighting 127

Switching on the standing lamps ensures the corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated. X To switch on the standing lamps: the SmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it is in position 0. X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the vehicle).

1W Left-hand standing lamps 2X Right-hand standing lamps Combination switch 3T Parking lamps, license plate and Turn signal instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the lightsensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp

X To switch on: turn light switch to T. The green T indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.

Standing lamps

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right Lights and windshield wipers = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left

X To indicate briefly: press the combination switch briefly to the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. The corresponding turn signal flashes three times. 1W Left-hand standing lamps X To indicate: press the combination switch 2X Right-hand standing lamps beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow ; or ?. 3T Parking lamps, license plate and instrument cluster lighting 4Ã Automatic headlamp mode, controlled by the light sensor 5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps BR Rear fog lamp

Z 128 Exterior lighting

High-beam headlamps High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps : High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left ? Turn signal, left

X To switch on the high-beam headlamps: X To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start the position 2 or start the engine. engine. X Turn the light switch to L or Ã. X Pull the combination switch in the direction X Press the combination switch beyond the of arrow =. pressure point in the direction of arrow :. In the à position, the high-beam Hazard warning lamps headlamps are only switched on when it is dark and the engine is running. Lights and windshield wipers The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up when the high- beamheadlamps are switched on. X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switch back to its normal position. The blue K indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out. i Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: when Adaptive Highbeam Assist is active, X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: it controls activation of the high-beam press button :. headlamps (Y page 129). All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a turn signal using the combination switch, only the turn signal lamp on the corresponding side of the vehicle will flash. X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :. Exterior lighting 129

The hazard warning lamps automatically Cornering light function switch on if: Ran air bag is deployed. Rthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) and comes to a standstill. The hazard warning lamps switch off automatically if the vehicle reaches a speed of over 6mph (10km/h) again after a full brake application. i The hazard warning lamps still operate if the ignition is switched off. The cornering light function improves the illumination of the road over a wide angle in the direction you are turning, enabling better Headlamp cleaning system visibility in tight bends, for example. It can The headlamps are cleaned automatically if only be activated when the low-beam the "Wipe with washer fluid" function is headlamps are switched on. operated five times (Y page 136) while the Active: lights are on and the engine is running. When Rif you are driving at speeds below you switch off the ignition, the automatic 25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turn headlamp cleaning system is reset and signal or turn the steering wheel counting is resumed from 0. Rif you are driving at speeds between 25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h) Active light function and turn the steering wheel Not active: if your speed exceeds

25mph (40 km/h) or if you switch off the turn Lights and windshield wipers signal or turn the steering wheel to the straight-ahead position. The cornering light function may remain lit for a short time, but is automatically switched off after no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Important safety notes The active light function is a system that moves the headlamps according to the G WARNING steering movements of the front wheels. In Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize this way, relevant areas remain illuminated road users: while driving. This allows you to recognize Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestrians pedestrians, cyclists and animals. Rwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists Active: whenthe lights are switched on. Rwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier

Z 130 Exterior lighting

In very rare cases, Adaptive HighbeamAssist Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognize other road users that on/off have lights, or may recognize them too late. In this or similar situations, the automatic high-beam headlamps will not be deactivated or activated regardless. There is a risk of an accident. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and switch off the high-beam headlamps in good time.

: High-beam headlamps ; Turn signal, right = High-beam flasher ? Turn signal, left

X To activate: activate the Adaptive Highbeam Assist function using the on- board computer (Y page 279). X Turn the light switch to Ã. X Press the combination switch beyond the pressure point in the direction of arrow : (Y page 127). The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction display lights up if it is dark

Lights and windshield wipers You can use this function to set the headlamps to change between low beam and and the light sensor activates the low-beam high beam automatically. The system headlamps. recognizes vehicles with their lights on, either If you are driving at speeds above approaching from the opposite direction or approximately 28 mph (45 km/h): traveling in front of your vehicle, and the headlamp range is set automatically consequently switches the headlamps from depending on the distance between the high beam to low beam. vehicle and other road users. The system automatically adapts the low- If you are driving at speeds above beam headlamp range depending on the approximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and no distance to the other vehicle. Once the other road users have been detected: system no longer detects any other vehicles, the high-beam headlamps are switched on it reactivates the high-beam headlamps. automatically. The K indicator lamp in The system's optical sensor is located behind the instrument cluster also lights up. the windshield near the overhead control If you are driving at speeds below panel. approximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or other road users have been detected or the roads are adequately lit: Interior lighting 131

The high-beam headlamps are switched off ? | To switch the frontinterior lighting/ automatically. The K indicator lamp in automatic interiorlighting control off the instrument cluster goes out. The _ A p To switch the right-handfront indicator lamp in the multifunction display reading lamp on/off remains lit. B To switch the automatic interior lighting X To deactivate: move the combination control on switch back to its normal position. The _ indicator lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the inside The headlamps may fog up on the inside if there is high atmospheric humidity. X Switch on the lights and drive off. The level of moisture diminishes, depending on the length of the journey and Rearoverhead control panel (second row of seats) the weather conditions (humidity and : Switches the reading lamp on/off temperature). If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting Lights and windshield wipers

Rearoverhead control panel (third row of seats) : Reading lamp

Interior lighting control General notes In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from discharging, the interior lighting functions are Overhead control panel automatically deactivated after some time : p To switch the left-hand frontreading except for when the SmartKey is in position lamp on/off 2 in the ignition lock. ; c To switch the front interior lighting The color and brightness of the ambient on lighting can be adjusted using the on-board = v To switch the rear interior lighting computer (Y page 279). on/off

Z 132 Interior lighting

Automatic interior lighting control Manual interior lighting control

Overhead control panel Overhead control panel : p To switch the left-hand frontreading : p To switch the left-hand front reading lamp on/off lamp on/off ipers ; c To switch the front interior lighting ; c To switch the front interior lighting

dw on on = v To switch the rear interior lighting = v To switch the rear interior lighting on/off on/off ? | To switch the frontinterior lighting/ ? | To switch the front interior lighting/ automatic interiorlighting control off automatic interior lighting control off A p To switch the right-handfront A p To switch the right-hand front reading lamp on/off reading lamp on/off B To switch the automatic interior lighting B To switch the automatic interior lighting control on control on X To switch on: set the switch to center X To switch the front interior lighting on:

Lights and windshiel position B. set the switch to the c position. X To switch off: set the switch to the | X To switch the interior lighting off: set the position. switch to the | position or (if the door The interior lighting automatically switches is closed) to the center position. on if you: X To switch the rear interior lighting on/ off: press the u button. Runlock the vehicle X To switch the reading lamps on/off: Ropen a door press the p button. Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The interior light is activated for a short while when the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock. You can activate this delayed switch-off using the on-board computer (Y page 280). Replacing bulbs 133

Crash-responsive emergency lighting Allow these components to cool down before changing a bulb. The interiorlighting is activated automatically if the vehicle is involved in an accident. There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbs X To switch off the crash-responsive that you cannot replace. Replace only the emergency lighting: press the hazard bulbs listed (Y page 133). Have the bulbs that warning lamp button. you cannot replace yourself changed at a or qualified specialist workshop. X Lockand then unlock the vehicle using the If you require assistance changing bulbs, SmartKey. consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs with your bare hands. Even minor contamination Replacing bulbs can burn into the glass surface and reduce the service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint- Important safety notes free cloth or only touch the base of the bulb Xenon bulbs when installing. Only use bulbs of the correcttype. G DANGER If the new bulb still does notlight up, consult Xenonbulbs carry a high voltage. You can get a qualified specialist workshop. an electric shock if you remove the cover of Bulbs and lamps are an importantaspect of the Xenon bulb and touch the electrical vehicle safety. You must therefore make sure contacts. There is a risk of fatal injury. that these function correctly at all times. Never touch the parts or the electrical Have the headlamp setting checked regularly. contacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have work on the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. Overview:changing bulbs/bulb types

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs, You can change the following bulbs. The bulb Lights and windshield wipers you can recognize this by the following: the type can be found in the legend. cone of light from the Xenon bulbs moves from the top to the bottom and back again when you start the engine. For this to be observed, the lights must be switched on before starting the engine. Bulbs and lamps are an important aspectof vehicle safety.You must therefore make sure that these function correctly at all times. Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs Halogen headlamps G WARNING : Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W Bulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hot ; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W when operating. If you change a bulb, you could burn yourself on these components. There is a risk of injury.

Z 134 Replacing bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogen headlamps) G WARNING These bulbs are pressurized. They can explode when being changed if: Rthey are still hot Rthey hit an object when being removed Rthey are dropped There is a risk of injury. Tail lamp You should wear eye protection and clean : Brake lamp: P 21 W-L gloves when you are changing a bulb. If necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Changing the front bulbs Removing and installing the cover in the front wheel housing You must remove the cover from the front wheel housing before you can change the front bulbs.

X Remove the cover in the front wheel Lights and windshield wipers housing (Y page 134). X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and pull it out. X Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and pull it out. X To remove: switch off the lights. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Turn the front wheels inwards. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;. X Remove securing pin ; using a suitable X Insert bulb holder ; into the lamp and turn tool. it clockwise. X Slide cover : up and remove it. X Align housing cover : and turn it X To install: insert cover : again and slide clockwise until it engages. it down until it engages. X Replace the cover in the front wheel X Insert securing pin ;. housing (Y page 134). Replacing bulbs 135

High-beam headlamps (halogen Changing the rear bulbs headlamps) Opening and closing the service flap G WARNING These bulbs are pressurized. They can explode when being changed if: Rthey are still hot Rthey hit an object when being removed Rthey are dropped There is a risk of injury. You should weareye protection and clean gloves when you are changingabulb. If necessary, have bulbs changed at a qualified specialist workshop. Left-hand service flap

Right-hand service flap X Switch off the lights. You must open the service flap in the cargo Lights and windshield wipers X Open the hood. compartment before you can change the X Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise bulbs in the brake lamp. and pull it out. X To open: release service flap : at the top, X Pull lever = upwards and remove bulb e.g. with a screwdriver, and swing it holder ;. downward in the direction of the arrow. X Take the bulb out of bulb holder ;. X Right side: remove the first-aid kit X Insertthe new bulb into bulb holder ;. beforehand and pull the parcel net down. X Simultaneously press bulb holder ; and X To close: reinsert service flap :. pull lever = downwards. X Align housing cover : and turn it clockwise until it engages.

Z 136 Windshield wipers

Brake lamp ! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to optical influences and the windshield becoming dirty in dry weather conditions, the windshield wipers may be activated inadvertently. This could then damage the windshield wiper blades or scratch the windshield. For this reason, you should always switch off the windshield wipers in dry weather.

X Switch off the lights. X Open the cargo compartment. X Openthe service flap (Y page 135). X Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and remove it. X Take bulb out of bulb holder :. X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :. Combination switch X Insert bulb holder : into the lamp and turn 1 $ Windshield wiper off it clockwise. 2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor X Close the service flap (Y page 135). set to low sensitivity) 3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor Windshield wipers set to high sensitivity) 4 ° Continuous wipe, slow Lights and windshield wipers Switching the windshield wipers on/ 5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fast off B í Single wipe ! Do not operate the windshield wipers C î To wipe with washer fluid when the windshield is dry, as this could damage the wiper blades. Moreover, dust X Switch on the ignition. that has collected on the windshield can X Turn the combination switch to the scratch the glass if wiping takes place when corresponding position. the windshield is dry. In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate If it is necessary to switch on the windshield wiping frequency is set automatically wipers in dry weather conditions, always according to the intensity of the rain. In use washer fluid when operating the the Å position, the rain sensor is more windshield wipers. sensitive than in the Ä position, causing ! If the windshield wipers leave smears on the windshield wipers to wipe more the windshield after the vehicle has been frequently. washed in an automatic car wash, wax or If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield other residues may be the reason for this. will no longer be wiped properly. This could Cleanthe windshield using washer fluid prevent you from observing the traffic after washing the vehicle in an automatic conditions. Replace the wiper blades twice a car wash. year, ideally in spring and fall. Windshieldwipers 137

Switching the rear window wiper on/ Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when off you change the wiper blade. If you release the wiper arm without a wiper blade and it falls onto the windshield/rear window, the windshield/rear window may be damaged by the force of the impact. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the wiper blades changed at aqualified specialist workshop. ! To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the wiper.

Combination switch Changing the windshield wiper blades : è Rear window wiper switch 2 b To wipe with washer fluid Removing the wiper blades 3 I To switch on intermittent wiping X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition 4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping lock. 5 ô To wipe with washer fluid X Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield. X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 163). X Turn switch : on the combination switch to the corresponding position. When the rear window wiper is switched on, the icon appears in the instrumentcluster. Lights and windshield wipers

Replacing the wiper blades Important safety notes G WARNING X Firmly press release knob : and pull wiper If the windshield wipers begin to move while blade ; upwards from the wiper arm in the you are changing the wiper blades, you could direction of the arrow. be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of injury. Always switch off the windshield wipers and ignition before changing the wiper blades.

! Neveropen the hood/tailgate if a wiper arm has been folded away from the windshield/rear window. Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade back onto the windshield/ rear window.

Z 138 Windshield wipers

Installing the wiper blades Installing awiper blade X Place new wiper blade ; onto wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the opposite direction to the arrow until it engages. X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated correctly. X Position wiper blade ; parallel to wiper arm :. X Fold wiper arm : back onto the rear X Positionnew wiper blade : in the retainer window. on the wiper arm and slide it into place in the direction of the arrow. The wiper blade audibly engages. X Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. X Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade

Removing awiper blade Lights and windshield wipers

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear window until it engages. X Position wiper blade ; at a right angle to wiper arm :. X Hold wiper arm : and press wiper blade ; in the direction of the arrow until it releases. X Remove wiper blade ;. Windshield wipers 139

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The windshield wipers Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield are jammed. wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated. X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. or X Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the driver's door. X Remove the cause of the obstruction. X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning. fail completely. X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch. X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Lights and windshield wipers

Z 140 141

Useful information ...... 142 Overview of climate control sys- tems ...... 142 Operating the climate control sys- tems ...... 150 Setting the air vents ...... 158 Climate control 142 Overview of climate control systems

Useful information i The integrated filter can filter out most particles of dust, and completely filters out i This Operator's Manual describes all pollen. Aclogged filter reduces the amount models and all standard and optional of air supplied to the vehicle interior.For equipment of your vehicle available at the this reason, you should always observe the time of publication of the Operator's interval for replacing the filter, which is Manual. Country-specific differences are specified in the Maintenance Booklet.As it possible. Please note that your vehicle may depends on environmental conditions, e.g. not be equipped with all features heavy air pollution, the interval may be described. This also applies to safety- shorter than stated in the Maintenance related systems and functions. Booklet. i Read the information on qualified i It is possible that the dehumidification specialist workshops: (Y page 28). function of the climate control system may be activated automatically an hour after the SmartKey has been removed. The vehicle Overview of climate control systems is ventilated for 30 minutes. Important safety notes Observe the settings recommended on the following pages. The windows could otherwise fog up. To preventthe windows from fogging up: Climate control Rswitch off climate control only briefly Rswitch on air-recirculation mode only briefly Rswitch on the cooling with air dehumidification function Rswitch on the defrost windshield function briefly, if required Climate control regulates the temperature and the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters undesirable substances out of the air. Climate control is only operational when the engine is running. The system only works optimally when the side windows and the roof are closed. The residual heat function can only be activated or deactivated with the ignition switched off (Y page 157). i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during warm weather, e.g. using the convenience opening feature (Y page 93). This will speed up the cooling process and the desired vehicle interior temperature will be reached more quickly. Overview of climate control systems 143

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

USA only Frontcontrol panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) = Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 155) Climate control ? Switches cooling with air dehumidificationon/off (Y page 151) A Switches the rearwindow defroster on/off (Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 157) D Sets the air distribution (Y page 154) E Increases the airflow (Y page 154) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 150) H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152) 144 Overview of climate control systems

Canada only Frontcontrol panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 155) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification(Ypage 151) or activates/

Climate control deactivates the residual heatingfunction (Y page 157) A Switches the rear window defrosteron/off (Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 157) D Sets the airdistribution (Y page 154) E Increases the airflow (Y page 154) F Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) G Switches climate control on/off (Y page 150) H Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152)

Rear control panel : Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic ; Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off Overview of climate control systems 145

= Directs the airflow through the rear air vents ? Directs the airflow throughthe footwell vents

Information about using dual-zone automatic climate control The following contains notes and recommendations on optimum use of dual- zone automatic climate control. RActivate climate control using the à and ¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps in the à and ¿/Á buttons light up. RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" function briefly until the windshield is clear again. ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or when in a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

RUse the ZONE function to adopt the Climate control temperature settings on the driver's side for the front-passenger side as well. The indicator lamp above the á button goes out. 146 Overview of climate control systems

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

USA only Frontcontrol panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) = Switches maximum cooling on/off (Y page 155) Climate control ? Switches cooling with air dehumidificationon/off (Y page 151) A Switches the rearwindow defroster on/off (Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 155) D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 150) E Sets the air distribution (Y page 154) F Increases the airflow (Y page 154) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) H Display I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 153) J Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 157) K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152)

Rear control panel L Increases the airflow (Y page 154) M Sets the temperature (Y page 153) N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 152) O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 154) P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 154) Overview of climate control systems 147

Q Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 150) R Reduces the airflow (Y page 154)

Canada only Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) Climate control = Switches the residual heatfunction on/off (Y page 157) ? Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 151) A Switches the rear window defrosteron/off (Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 155) D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 150) E Sets the airdistribution (Y page 154) F Increases the airflow (Y page 154) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) H Display I Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 153) J Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 157) K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152)

Rear control panel L Increases the airflow (Y page 154) M Sets the temperature (Y page 153) N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 152) O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 154) P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 154) 148 Overview of climate control systems

Q Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 150) R Reduces the airflow (Y page 154)

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control with additional rear- compartment climate control

Climate control Canada only Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) = Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 155) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with airdehumidification (Y page 151) or activates/ deactivates the residual heating function (Y page 157) A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off D Switches climate control on/off (Y page 150) E Sets the air distribution (Y page 154) F Increases the airflow (Y page 154) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) H Display I Adjusts the climate control settings (Y page 153) J Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode(Y page 157) K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152)

Rear control panel L Increases the airflow (Y page 154) Overview of climate control systems 149

M Sets the temperature (Y page 153) N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 152) O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 154) P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 154) Q Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 150) R Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) Climate control USA only Front control panel : Sets the temperature, left (Y page 153) ; Defrosts the windshield (Y page 155) = Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 155) ? Activates/deactivates cooling with airdehumidification (Y page 151) or activates/ deactivates the residual heating function (Y page 157) A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 156) B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 153) C Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 155) D Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 150) E Sets the air distribution (Y page 154) F Increases the airflow (Y page 154) G Reduces the airflow (Y page 154) or switches off climate control H Display I Adjusts the climate control settings (Y page 153) J Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode(Y page 157) K Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 152)

Rear control panel 150 Operating the climate control systems

L Increases the airflow (Y page 154) M Sets the temperature (Y page 153) N Sets rear-compartment climate control to automatic (Y page 152) O Directs the airflow through the rear air vents (Y page 154) P Directs the airflow through the footwell vents (Y page 154) Q Switches rear-compartment climate control on/off (Y page 150) R Reduces the airflow (Y page 154)

Information about using 3-zone Operating the climate control automatic climate control systems The following contains instructions and Switching climate control on/off recommendations to enable you to get the most out of your automatic climate control. Points to observe before use RActivate climate control using the à and When the climate controlis switched off, the ¿/Á buttons. The indicator lamps air supply and air circulation are also above the à and ¿/Á buttons switched off. The windows could fog up. lightup. Therefore, switch off climate control only RIn automatic mode, you can also use the briefly ñ button to set a climate mode i Switch on climate control primarily using (FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). The Climate control the à button (Y page 152). MEDIUM level is recommended. In the rear compartment, you can also switch RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †). climate control on and off using the à and ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting" ^ buttons. function briefly until the windshield is clear again. Activating/deactivating ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors or X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the when in a tunnel. The windows could ignition lock (Y page 163). otherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawn X To activate: press the à button. into the vehicle in air-recirculation mode. The indicator lamp in the à button lights RUse the ZONE function to adopt the up. Airflow and air distribution are set to temperature settings on the driver's side automatic mode. for the front-passenger side and the rear or compartment as well. The indicator lamp X Press the ^ button. above the á button goes out. The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes RUse the residual heat function if you want out. The previously selected settings are to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior restored. when the ignition is switched off. The X To deactivate: press the ^ button. residual heat function can only be activated The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights or deactivated with the ignition switched off. up. Operating the climate control systems 151

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification Points to observe before use If you deactivate the "Cooling with air- dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will notbe cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air- dehumidification" function briefly. The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running. The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

Activating/deactivating Climate control

Example: ¿ button X To activate: press the ¿/Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á button lights up. X To deactivate: press the ¿/Á button. The indicator lamp in the ¿/Á button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function has a delayed switch-off feature. 152 Operating the climate control systems

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The indicator lamp in Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a the ¿/Á button malfunction. flashes three times or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. remains off. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function cannot be switched on.

Setting climate control to automatic Activating/switching Points to observe before use If you deactivate the "Cooling with air- dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more quickly. Therefore, only deactivate the "Cooling with air- Climate control dehumidification" function briefly. In automatic mode, the set temperature is maintained automatically at a constant level. The system automatically regulates the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the temperature of the dispensed air, the airflow ignition lock (Y page 163). and the air distribution. X Set the desired temperature. Automatic mode will achieve optimal X To activate: press the à button. operation if cooling with air dehumidification The indicator lamp in the à button lights is also activated. If necessary, cooling with air up. Automatic air distribution and airflow dehumidification can be deactivated. are activated. In the rear compartment, you can also switch X To switch to manual mode: press the climate control for the rear seats to automatic _ button. mode using the à button. or X Press the I or K button. The indicator lamp in the à button goes out. 3-zone automatic climate control: when automatic mode is activated, you can select a climate mode (Y page 153). Operating the climate control systems 153

Adjusting the climate mode settings 3-zone automatic climate control You can select the followingclimate mode settings in automatic mode: FOCUShigh airflow that is set slightly cooler MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting DIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly warmer and with less draft

Automatic climate control zones You can selectdifferenttemperature settings for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well as for the rear compartment. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 163). X To increase/reduce the temperature in the front: turn control : or B clockwise X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the or counter-clockwise (Y page 146). ignition lock (Y page 163). Only change the temperature setting in X Press the à button. small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). Climate control X Press the ñ button repeatedly until the X To increase/reduce the temperature in desired climate mode appears in the the rear compartment using the front display. control panel: press the á button. The indicator lamp in the á button goes out. Setting the temperature X Turn control : clockwise or counter- Dual-zone automatic climate control clockwise (Y page 146). Only change the temperature setting in Different temperatures can be set for the small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). driver's and front-passenger sides. The temperature setting for the driver's X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the side is adopted for the rear compartment ignition lock (Y page 163). and the front-passenger side. X To increase/reduce: turn control : or X To increase/decrease the rear B clockwise or counter-clockwise compartment temperature using the (Y page 143). rear control panel: turn control M Only change the temperature setting in clockwise or counter-clockwise on the rear small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). control panel (Y page 146). Only change the temperature setting in small increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †). 154 Operating the climate control systems

Setting the air distribution Adjusting Air distribution settings Front control panel P Directs the airflow through the center vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents S Directs the airflow through the center and footwell vents ¯ Directs air through the defroster vents b Directs the airflow through the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the defroster and center vents (Canada ignition lock (Y page 163). only) X Press the _ button repeatedly until the a Directs air through the defroster and desired symbol appears in the display. footwell vents _ Directs the airflow through the defroster, center and footwell air vents Setting the airflow (Canada only) Rear control panel M Directs the airflow through the rear Climate control center and rear side air vents O Directs air through the footwell air vents i Using the rear control panel, you can also activate both air distribution positions simultaneously.Inorder to do this, press both air distributionbuttons. The air is then routed through all rear air vents. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 163). i Regardless of the air distribution setting, airflow is always directed through the side X To increase: press the K button. air vents.The side air vents can only be X To reduce: press the I button. closed when the controls on the side air i You can use 3-zone automatic climate vents are turned downwards. control to set the airflow in the rear compartmentseparately. Operating the climate control systems 155

Switching the ZONE function on/off The climate control system switches to the following functions: Rhigh airflow Rhigh temperature Rair distribution to the windshield and front side windows Rair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Air-recirculation mode remains X To activate: press the á button. deactivated. The indicator lamp above the á button or lights up. X Press the à button. Dual-zone automatic climate control: the The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes temperature setting for the driver's side is out. Airflow and air distribution are set to not adopted for the front-passenger side. automatic mode. 3-zone automatic climate control: the or temperature setting for the driver's side is X Turn controls : or B clockwise or not adopted for the front-passenger side counter-clockwise: and the rear compartment. Dual-zone automatic climate control X To deactivate: press the á button. Climate control (Y page 143) The indicator lamp above the á button 3-zone automatic climate control goes out. (Y page 146) Dual-zone automatic climate control: the or temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side. X Press the K or I button. 3-zone automatic climate control: the temperature setting for the driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side and MAX COOL maximum cooling the rear compartment. The MAX COOL function is only available in vehicles for the USA.

Defrosting the windshield You can use this function to defrost the windshield or to defrost the inside of the windshield and the side windows. Switch off the "defrosting" function as soon as the windshield is clear again. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 163). X To activate: press the ¬ button. The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights MAX COOL is only operational when the up. engine is running. 156 Operating the climate control systems

X To activate: press the Ù button. Rear window defroster The indicator lamp in the button lights up. Activating/deactivating X To activate: press off-road button Ù again. The indicator lamp goes out. The previously selected settings are restored. Whenyou activate MAX COOL, climate control switches to the following functions: Rmaximum cooling Rmaximum airflow Rair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows The rear window defroster has a high current draw. You should therefore switch it off as Windows fogged up on the inside soon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, X Activate the ¿ / Á cooling with air the rear window defroster switches off dehumidification function. automatically after several minutes. X Activate automatic mode Ã. If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window defroster may switch off. X If the windows continue to fog up, activate the defrosting function (Y page 155). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

Climate control ignition lock (Y page 163). i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. X Press the ¤ button. The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights Windows fogged up on the outside up or goes out.

X Press the _ button repeatedly until the P or O symbol appears in the display. i You should only select this setting until the windshield is clear again. Operating the climate control systems 157

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The rear window The battery has not been sufficiently charged. defroster has X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading deactivated lamps or interior lighting. prematurely or cannot When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window be activated. defroster is activated again automatically.

Activating/deactivating air- high outside temperatures, air- recirculation mode recirculation mode is automatically activated. When air-recirculation mode is Points to observe before use activated automatically, the indicator lamp You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if in the d button is not lit. unpleasant odors are enteringthe vehicle Outside air is added after about from outside. The air already inside the 30 minutes. vehicle will then be recirculated. X To deactivate: press the d button. If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the The indicator lamp in the d button goes windows can fog up more quickly, in out. particular at low temperatures. Only use air- i Air-recirculation mode deactivates recirculation mode briefly to prevent the automatically: Climate control windows from fogging up. Rafter approximately five minutes at Activating/deactivating outside temperatures below approximately 41 ‡ (5 †) Rafter approximately five minutes if cooling with air dehumidification is deactivated Rafter approximately 30 minutes at outside temperatures above approximately 41 ‡(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is activated

Activating/deactivating the residual The operation of air-recirculation mode is the heat function same for all control panels. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the The "residual heat" function is only available ignition lock (Y page 163). in Canada. X To activate: press the d button. The indicator lamp in the d button lights up. i In the event of high pollution levels (3- zone automatic climate control only) or at 158 Setting the air vents

the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance to the air outlets. If necessary, redirectthe airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air through the air vents into the vehicle interior, please observe the following notes:

It is possible to make use of the residual heat Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and in of the engine to continue heating the the engine compartment on the front- stationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes after passenger side free of blockages, such as the engine has been switched off. The heating ice, snow or leaves. time depends on the temperature that has Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles been set. in the vehicle interior. X To activate: press the Ì/Á button. i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjust The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á the sliders of the air vents to the center button lights up. position. i The blower will run at a low speed regardless of the airflow setting. Setting the center air vents Climate control i If you activate the residual heat function at high temperatures, only the ventilation will be activated. The blower runs at mediumspeed. X To deactivate: press the Ì/Á button. The indicator lamp in the Ì/Á button goes out. Residual heat is deactivated automatically: Rafter approximately 30 minutes Rwhen the ignition is switched on : Center air vent, left Rif the battery voltage drops ; Center air vent, right Rwhen the auxiliary heating is activated = Center vent thumbwheel, right ? Center vent thumbwheel, left Setting the air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheels = and ? to the right or left. Important safety notes G WARNING Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in Setting the air vents 159

Setting the side air vents X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment air vents Setting the center vents in the rear compartment

: Side window defroster vent ; Side air vent = Control for side air vent

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel = up or down.

Setting the glove box air vent Example: center vents with rear control panel : Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel ! Close the air vent when heating the ; Rear-compartment air vent, right vehicle. Climate control = Rear control panel At high outside temperatures, open the air vent and activate the "cooling with air ? Rear-compartment air vent, left dehumidification" function. Otherwise, X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up or temperature-sensitive items stored in the down. glove box could be damaged. Setting the rear-compartment side air vents

2nd row of seats

: Air vent thumbwheel ; Air vent When automatic climate control is activated, the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to cool its contents. The level of airflow : B-pillar air vent depends on the airflow and air distribution ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent settings.

Z 160 Setting the air vents

X To open/close: turnthumbwheel ; to the left or right.

B-pillar air vent in the headliner : B-pillar air vent ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; up or down.

3rd row of seats Climate control

B-pillar air vent in the headliner : B-pillar air vent ; Thumbwheel for B-pillar air vent

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel ; up or down. 161

Useful information ...... 162 Notes on breaking-in anew vehicle 162 Driving ...... 162 Automatic transmission ...... 169 Refueling ...... 177 Parking ...... 183 Driving tips ...... 186 Driving systems ...... 195 Towing atrailer ...... 257 Driving and parking 162 Driving

Useful information After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase the engine speed gradually and i This Operator's Manual describes all accelerate the vehicle to full speed. models and all standard and optional Additional breaking-in notes for AMG equipment of your vehicle available at the vehicles: time of publication of the Operator's RDo not drive faster than 85 mph Manual. Country-specific differences are (140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles possible. Please note that your vehicle may (1,500 km). not be equipped with all features ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum described. This also applies to safety- engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly. related systems and functions. RChange gear in good time. i Read the information on qualified RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km), specialist workshops: (Y page 28). drive in program C.

Driving and parking i You should also observe these notes on Notes on breaking-in anew vehicle breaking in if the engine or parts of the drive train on your vehicle have been replaced. Important safety notes i Always observe the respective speed New and replaced brake pads and discs only limits. reach their optimum braking effect after several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force Driving to the brake pedal. Important safety notes

The first 1,000miles (1,500 km) G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrictthe The more you look after the engine when it is pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal. new, the more satisfied you will be with its The operating and road safety of the vehicle performance in the future. is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. RYou should therefore drive at varying Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are vehicle and engine speeds for the first stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter 1,000 miles (1,500 km). the driver's footwell. Install the floormats RAvoid heavy loads, e.g.driving at full securely and as specified in order to ensure throttle, during this period. sufficientclearance for the pedals. Do not use RChange gearingood time, before the loose floormats. tachometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area of the tachometer. G WARNING RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to Unsuitable footwear can hindercorrect usage brake the vehicle. of the pedals, e.g.: RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator Rshoes with thick soles pedal past the point of resistance Rshoes with high heels (kickdown). Rslippers ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when There is a risk of an accident. driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain. Driving 163

Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct Key positions usage of the pedals. SmartKey G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functions are only available with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect.You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING g To remove the SmartKey If the parking brake has not been fully Driving and parking 1 Power supply for some consumers, such released when driving, the parking brake can: as the windshield wipers Roverheat and cause a fire 2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers) Rlose its hold function. and drive position There is a risk of fire and an accident.Release 3 To start the engine the parking brake fully before driving off. i The SmartKey can be turned in the ! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not use ignition lock even if it is not the correct the engine's full performance until it has SmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is not reached operating temperature. switched on. The engine cannot be started. Only shift the automatic transmission to the desired drive position when the vehicle KEYLESS-GO is stationary. General notes Where possible, avoid spinning the drive RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key: wheels when pulling away on slippery roads. You could otherwise damage the - with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile drive train. phone or another SmartKey - with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal ! AMG vehicles: at low engine oil foil temperatures below 68 ‡(+20 †), the - inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case maximumengine speed is restricted in order to protect the engine.To protectthe This can impair the functionality of the engine and maintain smooth engine KEYLESS-GO key. operation, avoid driving at full throttle when Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key in the the engine is cold. temperature-controlled cup holder (Y page 345). Otherwise, the KEYLESS-GO key will not be recognized. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with aSmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS- GO function and a detachable Start/Stop button.

Z 164 Driving

The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the starting the engine or lights up while driving, ignition lock and the SmartKey with the see (Y page 322). integrated KEYLESS-GO function must be in X Insert Start/Stop button : into ignition the vehicle. lock ;. Pressing the Start/Stop button several times i When you insert Start/Stop button : in succession corresponds to the different key positions in the ignition lock. This is only into ignition lock ;, the system needs the case if you are not depressing the brake approximately two seconds recognition pedal. time. You can then use Start/Stop button :. If you depress the brake pedal and press the Start/Stop button, the engine starts Activating power supply immediately. X If Start/Stop button : has not yet been The Start/Stop button can be removed from pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey the ignition lock. Then, you can insert the being removed from the ignition. Driving and parking SmartKey into the ignition lock. X Press Start/Stop button : once. i You do not have to remove the Start/Stop The power supply is switched on. You can button from the ignition lock when you now activate the windshield wipers, for leave the vehicle. You should, however, example. always take the SmartKey with you when i The power supply is switched off again if: leaving the vehicle. As long as the Rthe driver's door is opened and SmartKey is in the vehicle: Ryou press Start/Stop button : twice Rthe vehicle can be started using the Start/Stop button and when in this position. Relectrically powered equipment can be Switching on the ignition operated. X Press Start/Stop button : twice. i The engine can be turned off while the The ignition is switched on. vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding i The power supply is switched off again if: the Start/Stop button for approximately Rthe driver's door is opened and three seconds. Ryou press Start/Stop button : once Key positions with KEYLESS-GO when in this position.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the Start/Stop button indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light = USA only up. If an indicator lamp does not go out after ? Canada only Driving 165

Starting the engine Starting procedure with the SmartKey Important safety notes X To startagasoline engine: turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition lock G WARNING (Y page 163) and release it as soon as the If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, engine is running. they could: X To start adiesel engine: turn the Ropen the doors, thus endangering other SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock people or road users. (Y page 163). The % preglow indicator lamp in the Rget out and disrupt traffic. instrumentcluster lights up. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. X When the % preglow indicator lamp Additionally, children could set the vehicle in goes out, turnthe SmartKey to position motion if, for example, they: 3(Y page 163) and release it as soon as the Rrelease the parking brake. engine is running. Driving and parking Rshift the automatic transmission out of i You can start the engine without preglow parking position P. if the engine is warm. Rstarting the engine. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Using KEYLESS-GO to startthe engine When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never X Depress the brake pedal and keep it leave children or animals unattended in the depressed. vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of X To start agasoline engine: press the reach of children. Start/Stop button (Y page 163) once. The engine starts. G WARNING X To start adiesel engine: press the Start/ Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust Stop button (Y page 163) once. gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Preglow is activated and the engine starts. these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There i The Start/Stop button can be used to is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave startthe vehicle without inserting the the engine running in enclosed spaces SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/ without sufficient ventilation. Stop button must be inserted in the ignition i Vehicles with agasoline engine: the lock and the SmartKey must be in the catalytic converter is preheated for up to vehicle. 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of the engine may change during this time. Pulling away Automatic transmission Automatic transmission X Shift the transmission to position G WARNING P(Y page 169). If the engine speed is above the idling speed The transmission position displayinthe and you engage transmission position D or multifunction display shows R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There P(Y page 169). is a risk of an accident. i You can also start the engine when the transmission is in position N.

Z 166 Driving

When engaging transmission position D or R, Pulling away with a trailer always firmly depress the brake pedal and do not simultaneously accelerate.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. X Shift the transmission to position D or R(Y page 169). X Release the brake pedal. X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal. The electric parking brake (Y page 184) is automatically released. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada To ensure that you do not roll backwards only) indicator lamp in the instrument when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage Driving and parking cluster goes out. the electric parking brake. X Press and hold handle :. i It is only possible to shift the transmission The electric parking brake continues to from position P to the desired position if brake and prevent the vehicle from rolling you depress the brake pedal. Only then is backwards. the parking lock released. If you do not The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada depress the brake pedal, you can move the only) indicator lamp in the instrument DIRECT SELECT lever but the parking lock cluster remains on. remains engaged. X Depress the accelerator pedal. i The vehicle locks centrally once you have X As soon as the vehicle/trailer combination pulled away.The locking knobs in the doors is held by the driving force of the engine, drop down. release lever :. You can open the doors from the inside at The electric parking brake is released. any time. The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada You can also deactivate the automatic only) indicator lamp in the instrument locking feature (Y page 280). cluster goes out. i Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds after a cold start. This helps the Hill startassist catalytic converter to reach its operating temperature more quickly. G WARNING After a short time, hill start assist will no longer brake your vehicle and it could roll away. There is a risk of an accident and injury. Therefore, quickly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start assist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal. The vehicle is then held for about a second. X Pull away. Driving 167

Hill start assist helps you whenpulling away forwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds the vehicle for a short time after you have removed your footfrom the brake pedal. This gives you enough time to move yourfoot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to depress it before the vehicle begins to roll. Hill start assist will not function if: Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on a downhill gradient. Rthe transmission is in position N. Rthe electric parking brake is applied. R ®

ESP is malfunctioning. Driving and parking

Z 168 Driving

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does not RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics. start. The starter motor RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply. can be heard. X Try to start the engine again (Y page 165). Avoid excessively long and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the battery. If the engine does not start after several attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak start. You cannot hear or discharged. Driving and parking the starter motor. X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 391). If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high. X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes. X Try to start the engine again. If the engine still does not start: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is not There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical running smoothly and component of the engine management system. is misfiring. X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly. X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter and damage it.

The coolant The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine temperature gauge is no longer being cooled sufficiently. shows a value above X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant 248 ‡ (120 †). to cool down. X Check the coolant level (Y page 369). Observe the warning notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary. Automatic transmission 169

Automatic transmission transmission position P, R, N or D appears in the transmission position display Important safety notes (Y page 169) in the multifunction display. G WARNING Transmission position and drive If the engine speed is above the idling speed program display and you engage transmission position D or R, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There ! If the transmission position display in the is a risk of an accident. multifunction display is not working, you When engaging transmission position D or R, should pull away carefully to check whether always firmly depress the brake pedal and do the desired transmission position is notsimultaneously accelerate. engaged. Ideally, you should select transmission position D and, in AMG G WARNING vehicles, drive program C or S. Do not The automatic transmission switches to restrict the shift range. Driving and parking neutral position N when you switch off the engine. The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an accident. After switching off the engine, always switch to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle fromrolling away by applying the parking brake. Transmission position and drive program display : Transmission position display DIRECT SELECTlever ; Drive program display Overview of transmission positions The current transmission position and drive program appearinthe multifunction display. i The arrows in the transmission position display show how and into which transmission positions you can change using the DIRECT SELECT lever.

Engaging parkposition P ! If the engine speed is toohigh or the vehicle is moving, do not shift the automatic transmission directly from D to R, from R to D or directly to P.The j Park position with parking lock automatic transmission could otherwise be k Reverse gear damaged. i Neutral h Drive The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the rightofthe steering column. i The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its original position. The current

Z 170 Automatic transmission

Engaging reverse gear R ! Only shift the automatic transmission to R when the vehicle is stationary. X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first point of resistance.

Shifting to neutral N j Park position with parking lock G WARNING k Reverse gear If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle, i Neutral they could:

Driving and parking h Drive Ropen the doors, thus endangering other X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the people or road users. direction of arrow P. Rget out and disrupt traffic. Roperate the vehicle's equipment. i The automatic transmission shifts into park position P automatically: Additionally, children could set the vehicle in motion if, for example, they: Rif you open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary in transmission Rrelease the parking brake. position D or R Rshift the automatic transmission out of Rif you open the door while traveling at parking position P. very low speeds in transmission position Rstarting the engine. D or R There is a risk of an accident and injury. When leaving the vehicle, always take the Engaging parkposition P automatically SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never Park position P is automatically engaged if: leave children or animals unattended in the vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of Ryou switch off the engine using the reach of children. SmartKey and remove the SmartKey. Ryou switch off the engine using the Start/ X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the Stop button and open one of the front brake pedal. doors. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down Rthe HOLD (Y page 211) or DISTRONIC to the first point of resistance. PLUS (Y page 198) function brake your If the engine has been switched off, the vehicle until it is stationary and at least one automatic transmission automatically shifts of the following conditions is fulfilled: to N. - there is a system malfunction. If you want the automatic transmission to - the vehicle is on a steep uphill or downhill remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the gradient.The electric parking brake is vehicle cleaned in an automatic car wash with then also applied. a towing system, observe the following notes: Automatic transmission 171

Using the SmartKey: Transmission positions RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. B Parkposition RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal and keep it depressed. Do not shift the transmission into position P(Y page 183) unless the RShift to neutral N. vehicle is stationary. The parking RRelease the brake pedal. lock should not be used as a brake RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, when parking.Always apply the release it. electronic parking brake in RSwitch off the ignition and leave the additionto the parking lock in order SmartKey in the ignition lock. to secure the vehicle. Using KEYLESS-GO: If the vehicle electronics are malfunctioning, the transmission RMake sure that the ignition is switched on. may be locked in position P. Have RWhen the vehicle is stationary, depress the the vehicle electronics checked Driving and parking brake pedal and keep it depressed. immediately at a qualified REngage park position P. specialist workshop. RRelease the brake pedal. The automatic transmission shifts RRemove the Start/Stop button from the to P automatically if you: ignition lock. Rremove the SmartKey RInsert the SmartKey into the ignition lock. Rswitch off the engine when in R RSwitch on the ignition. or D and open one of the front RDepress the brake pedal and keep it doors depressed. C Reverse gear RShift to neutral N. Only shift the transmission to R RRelease the brake pedal. when the vehicle is stationary. RIf the electric parking brake is engaged, release it. RSwitch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Engaging drive position D

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the brake pedal. X Push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance.

Z 172 Automatic transmission

A Neutral Driving tips Do not shift the transmission to N Kickdown while driving. Otherwise, the automatic transmission could be Use kickdown for maximum acceleration: damaged. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the No power is transmitted from the pressure point. engine to the drive wheels. The transmission shifts to a lower gear Releasing the brakes will allow you depending on the engine speed. to move the vehicle freely, e.g.to X Ease off the accelerator pedal once the push it or tow it. desired speed is reached. If ESP® is deactivated or faulty: The automatic transmission shifts back up. only shift the transmission to position N if the vehicle is in danger Rocking the vehicle free

Driving and parking of skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Shifting the transmission repeatedly between If you switch off the engine using gears D and R may help to free the vehicle if the SmartKey or the Start/Stop it has become stuck in slush or snow. The button, the automatic transmission vehicle's engine management restricts shifts to neutral N automatically. repeated shifting between gears up to a ! Rolling in neutral N can damage maximum speed of 5 mph (9 km/h). To shift the drive train. back and forth between transmission positions D and R, move the selector lever up 7 Drive and down beyond the pressure point. The automatic transmission changes gear automatically. All Towing atrailer forward gears are available. X Drive in the middle of the engine speed range on uphill gradients. Changing gear X Shift down to shift range 3 or 2(Y page 174) depending on the uphill or The automatic transmission shifts to the downhill gradient, evenifcruise control, individual gears automatically when it is in cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is transmission position D.This automatic activated. gearshifting behavior is determined by: Ra possible limitation of the shift range Rthe position of the accelerator pedal Rthe road speed Automatic transmission 173

Program selector button you must select the drive program again after starting the engine. General notes Drive programs on AMG vehicles

C Controlled Comfortable, economical Efficiency driving S Sport Sporty driving style M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automatic drive program, see (Y page 173).

Program selector button on vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package Steering wheel paddle shifters Driving and parking X Briefly press program selector button :. The letter M appears in the multifunction display.The manual drive program M is activated.

In the automatic drive program, you can restrict or derestrict the shift range by using steering wheel paddle shifters : and ; (Y page 174). Program selector button on AMG vehicles In the manual drive program you can change X Press program selector button : gears manually using steering wheel paddle repeatedly until the letter for the desired shifters : and ;(Y page 175). gearshift program appears in the i You can only change gear with the multifunction display. steering wheel paddle shifters when the The program selector button allows you to transmission is in position D. choose between different driving characteristics. Automatic drive program (AMG i AMG vehicles: the automatic vehicles) transmission switches to automatic drive program C each time the engine is started. Drive program C is characterized by the following: i Drive program M is not saved after the engine has been switched off. If required,

Z 174 Automatic transmission

Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatic Driving situations transmissionsettings = You can use the engine's braking Roptimal fuel consumption resulting from the automatic transmission shifting up effect. sooner 5 The braking effect of the engine can Rthe vehicle pulling away more gently in be utilized on downhill gradients or forward and reverse gears, unless the when driving: accelerator pedal is depressed fully Ron steep mountain roads R increased sensitivity. This improves driving Rin mountainous terrain stability on slippery road surfaces, for Rin arduous conditions example Rthe automatic transmission shifting up 4 The braking effect of the engine can sooner.This results in the vehicle being be utilized on extremely steep driven at lower engine speeds and the downhill gradients and long Driving and parking wheels being less likely to spin downhill stretches. Drive program S is characterized by the following: Restricting the shift range

Rsporty engine and transmission settings X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle Rthe automatic transmission shifting up shifter. later The automatic transmission shifts down Rthe fuel consumption possibly being higher one gear and restricts the shift range to the as a result of the later automatic relevant gear. transmission shift points i If the engine exceeds the maximum engine speed when shifting down, the automatic transmission protects against Shift ranges engine damage by not shifting down. Introduction i If the maximum engine speed for the shift In transmission position D, you can use the range is reached and you continue to steering wheel paddle shifters to restrict or accelerate, the automatic transmission derestrict the shift range for the automatic shifts up, even if the shift range is transmission (Y page 173). restricted. This prevents the engine from The shift range selected is shown in the overrevving. multifunction display. The automatic transmission shifts only as far as the selected Derestricting the shift range gear. X Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter. The shift range is derestricted. Automatic transmission 175

Clearing the shiftrange restriction Shifting up (all vehicles except AMG vehicles) X Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel paddle shifteruntil D is shown againinthe X Pull the right-hand steeringwheel paddle multifunction display. shifter (Y page 173). The automatic transmission shifts from the The automatic transmission shifts up to the current shift range directly to D. next gear. or X Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to shift the Shifting up (AMG vehicles) transmission to position D. ! In manual drive program M, the automatic The automatic transmission shifts from the transmission does not shift up current shift range directly to D. automatically even when the engine limiting speed for the current gear is Selecting the ideal shift range reached. When the engine limiting speed is

reached, the fuel supply is cut to prevent Driving and parking X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter and hold it in position. the engine from overrevving. Always make The automatic transmission shifts to the sure that the engine speed does not reach gear which allows optimum acceleration the red area of the tachometer. There is and deceleration. To do this, the automatic otherwise a risk of engine damage. transmission shifts down one or more gears.

Manual drive program Switching on the manual drive program : Gear indicator In manual drive program M, you can change gear using the steering wheel paddle shifters ; Upshift indicator if the transmission is in position D.You can Before the engine speed reaches the red area, see the currently selected drive program and an upshift indicator will be shown in the which gear is engaged in the multifunction multifunction display. display. X If the color in the speedometer X AMG vehicles: press the program selector multifunction display changes to red and button (Y page 173) until M appears in the the UP display message is shown, shift up multifunction display. a gear. X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: press the program selector Downshifting button (Y page 173). The letter M appears in the multifunction X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle display. shifter (Y page 173). The automatic transmission shifts down to the next gear.

Z 176 Automatic transmission

Maximum acceleration X Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the transmission selects the optimum gear according to the speed. i If you slow down or stop without shifting down, the automatic transmission automatically shifts down.

Kickdown You can also use kickdown for maximum acceleration in manual drive program M. X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point. Driving and parking The automatic transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on the engine speed. X Shift back up once the desired speed is reached. i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): if you apply full throttle, the automatic transmission shifts up to the next gear when the maximum engine speed is reached. This prevents the engine from overrevving. i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to use kickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off the manualdrive program

X AMGvehicles: press the program selector button (Y page 173) repeatedly until C or S appears in the multifunction display. X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: press the program selector button (Y page 173). The M message in the multifunction display goes out. Refueling 177

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The transmission has The transmission is losing oil. problems shifting gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

The acceleration ability The transmission is in emergency mode. is deteriorating. It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear. The transmission no X Stop the vehicle. longer changes gear. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Switch off the engine. X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine. Driving and parking X Shift the transmission to position D or R. If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear. X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Transfer case Refueling ! Performance tests may only be carried Important safety notes out on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brake system or transfer case could otherwise be G WARNING damaged. Contact a qualified specialist Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel workshop for a performance test. incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. ! Because ESP® is an automatic system, the engine and ignition must be switched You must avoid fire, open flames, creating off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before electric parking brake is being tested on a refueling. brake dynamometer (maximum 10 seconds). G WARNING Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. Braking triggered automatically by ESP® There is a risk of injury. may seriously damage the brake system. You must make sure that fuel does not come ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing with either the front or the rear axle raised, and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel as doing so will damage the transmission. vapors. Keep fuel away from children. This section is only valid for vehicles with 4- wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is always transmitted to both axles.

Z 178 Refueling

If you or others come into contact with fuel, ! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the observe the following: fuel system. RWash away fuel from skin immediately ! Take care not to spill any fuel on painted using soap and water. surfaces. You could otherwise damage the RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, paintwork. immediately rinse them thoroughly with ! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can. clean water. Seek medicalassistance Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection without delay. system could be blocked by particles from RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical the fuel can. assistance without delay.Donot induce Do not get into the vehicle again during the vomiting. refueling process. Otherwise, electrostatic RImmediately change out of clothing which charge could build up again. has come into contact with fuel. If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray

Driving and parking out when the fuel pump nozzle is removed. G WARNING For further information on fuel and fuel quality Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and (Y page 440). ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and explosion. Always touch the vehicle body before opening Refueling the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is Opening/closing the fuel filler flap thereby discharged.

G WARNING Vehicles with a diesel engine: If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. When the engine is running, exhaust system components could overheat without being noticed. There is a risk of fire. Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline with diesel fuel. : To open the fuel filler flap ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with ; To insert the fuel filler cap a diesel engine. Do not use diesel to refuel = Fuel type to be used vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not ? Tire pressure table switch on the ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked fuel will enter the fuel system. Even small automatically when you open or close the amounts of the wrong fuel could result in vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- damage to the fuel system and the engine. GO. The repair costs are high. Notify a qualified The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed specialist workshop and have the fuel tank 8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow and fuel lines drained completely. next to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle. Refueling 179

Opening

X Switch the engine off. X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door. This corresponds to key position 0: "key removed". The driver’s door can be closed again. X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of arrow :. The fuel filler flap swings up. X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwise and remove it.

X Insertthe fuel filler cap into the holder Driving and parking bracket on the inside of filler flap ;. X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel pump nozzle into the tank, attach and refuel. X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle switches off. i Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak out.

Closing

X Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn clockwise until it engages audibly. X Close the fuel filler flap. i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehicle. i If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the 8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up (Y page 329). Amessage appears in the multifunction display (Y page 305). For further information on warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster, see (Y page 329).

Z 180 Refueling

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Fuel is leaking from the The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty. vehicle. G WARNING Risk of explosion or fire. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it immediately (Y page 163). X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does not The fuel tank of a vehicle with a diesel engine has been run start. completely dry. Driving and parking X Refuel the vehicle with at least 5.3 US qt (5 liters) of diesel. X Turn the ignition on for approximately ten seconds (Y page 163). X Start the engine continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start: X Turn the ignition on again for approximately ten seconds (Y page 163). X Start the engine again continuously for up to ten seconds until it runs smoothly. If the engine does not start after three attempts: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flap The fuel filler flap is not unlocked. cannot be opened. or The SmartKey battery is discharged.

X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 79). or X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 80).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Refueling 181

DEF (BlueTEC vehicles only) Important safety notes on the refilling procedure Important notes on use DEF is a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust To function properly, BlueTEC exhaustgas gas aftertreatment of diesel engines. It is: aftertreatment must be operated with the Rnot poisonous reducing agent DEF. Rcolorless and odorless When the supply of DEFis almost used up, the Check Additive See Operator's Rnot flammable Manual message is shown in the When you open the DEF container, small multifunction display. amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. When the DEF supply drops to a minimum, the Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Remaining Starts: 16 message is shown particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous in the multifunction display. membranes and to the eyes. You may If the Remaining Starts: 16 message experience a burning sensation in youreyes, appears in the multifunction display, you can nose and throat. Coughing and watering of Driving and parking start the engine another 16 times. If DEF is the eyes are possible. not refilled, you will subsequently be unable Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF to start the engine.Refill the DEFtank with tank only in well-ventilated areas. approximately 1gal (3.8l) DEF. Have the DEF DEF must not come into contact with your tankrefilled at a qualified specialist skin, eyes or clothing and mustnot be workshop. swallowed. Keep DEFaway fromchildren. i If you drive the vehicle faster than If you or other persons come into contact with 10 mph (16 km/h), the Check Additive DEF, observe the following: See Operator's Manual message goes RRinse DEF from your skin immediately with out after approximately one minute. soap and water. If the outside temperature is below 12 ‡ RIf DEF comes into contact with your eyes, (Ò11 †) it may be difficult to top up. If DEF is immediately rinse them thoroughly with frozen and there is an active warning clean water. Seek medical assistance indicator, it may not be possible to add DEF. without delay. Park the vehicle in a warmer place, e.g. in a RIf DEF has been swallowed, rinse your garage, until DEF has become fluid again. It mouth out immediately. Drink plenty of will then be possible to add DEF again. water. Seek medical assistance without Alternatively, have the DEF tank refilled at a delay. qualified specialist workshop. RChange out of clothing contaminated with Further information about BlueTEC exhaust DEF immediately. gas aftertreatment and DEF is available at any ! Only use DEF in accordance with authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. ISO 22241. Do not mix any additives with DEF, and do not dilute DEF with water. This may destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment system. ! The vehicle must be parked on level ground to fill the DEF tank. The DEF tank can only be filled as intended with the vehicle parked on a level surface. This avoids false level readings. Filling the tank

Z 182 Refueling

is not permitted if the vehicle is not parked DEF refill bottle on a level surface. There is a danger of ! Only screw on the DEFrefill bottle hand- overfilling, which could result in damage to tight.Itcould otherwise be damaged. components of the BlueTECexhaustgas aftertreatment. ! Rinse surfaces that have come into contact with DEFimmediately with water or remove DEF using a damp cloth and cold water. If the DEF has already crystallized, use a sponge and cold water to cleanit. DEF residues crystallize after time and contaminate the affected surfaces. ! DEF is not a fuel additive and must not be added to the fuel tank. If DEF is added to Driving and parking the fuel tank, this can lead to engine X Unscrew the protective cap from DEF refill damage. bottle :. For further information on DEF, see X Place DEFrefill bottle : on the filler neck (Y page 442). as shown and screw it on clockwise until hand-tight. Opening the DEF filler cap X Press DEFrefill bottle : towards the filler neck. The DEFtank is filled. This may take up to one minute. i When DEFrefill bottle : is no longer pressed, filling stops and the bottle may be taken off again after being only partially emptied. X Release DEFrefill bottle :. X Turn DEFrefill bottle : counter-clockwise and remove it. The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked X Screw the protective cap onto DEF refill automatically when you open or close the bottle : again. vehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS- DEFrefill bottles can be obtained at many gas GO. stations or at an authorized Mercedes-Benz X Switch the ignition off. Center.Refill bottles without a threaded cap X Press the fuel filler flap in the directionof do not provide overfill protection. DEF may arrow :. leak if overfilled. Mercedes Benzoffers The fuel fillerflap swings up. special refill bottles with a threaded seal. These are available at any authorized X Turn blue DEFfiller cap ; counter- Mercedes-Benz Center. clockwise and remove it. DEF filler cap ; is secured with a plastic strip. Parking 183

Closing the DEF filler cap boosting effect.You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk of an accident. Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNING If you leave children unsupervised in the vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for example: Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of the parking position P X Mount DEF filler cap ; on the filler neck and turn it clockwise. Rstarting the engine.

X To close the fuel fillerflap, press it in the They could also operate the vehicle's Driving and parking direction of arrow :. equipment. There is a risk of an accident and injury. X Drive faster than 10 mph (16 km/h). The Check Additive See Operator's When leaving the vehicle, always take the Manual message goes out after SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never approximately one minute. leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. i If the Check Additive See ! Always secure the vehicle correctly Operator's Manual message continues against rolling away.Otherwise, the vehicle to be shown in the multifunction display, or its drivetraincould be damaged. you must add more DEF. To ensure that the vehicle is secured against rolling away unintentionally: Parking Rthe electric parking brake must be applied. Rthe transmission must be in position P and Important safety notes the SmartKey must be removed from the G WARNING ignition lock. If flammable materials such as leaves, grass Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turn or twigs are exposed to prolonged contactto the front wheels towards the curb. parts of the exhaust system that heat up, they Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the could ignite. There is a risk of fire. front axle of an empty vehicle must be Park the vehicle so that no flammable secured, for example with awheel chock. materials come into contact with parts of the Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, the vehicle which are hot. Take particular care not rear axle of a laden vehicle must be to park on dry grassland or harvested grain additionally secured, for example with a fields. wheel chock.

G WARNING If you switch off the ignition while driving, safety-relevant functionsare only available with limitations, or not at all.This could affect, for example, the power steering and the brake

Z 184 Parking

Switching off the engine motion by pressing and holding the Start/ Stop button for three seconds. Important safety notes

G WARNING Electric parking brake The automatic transmission switches to neutral position N when you switch off the General notes engine. The vehicle may roll away.There is a risk of an accident. G WARNING After switching off the engine, always switch If you leave children unsupervised in the to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehicle, they could set it in motion by, for vehicle from rolling away by applying the example: parking brake. Rreleasing the parking brake Rshifting the automatic transmission out of the parking position P

Driving and parking Using the SmartKey Rstarting the engine. X Apply the electric parking brake. They could also operate the vehicle's X Shift the transmission to position P. equipment. There is a risk of an accident and X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the injury. ignition lock and remove it. When leaving the vehicle, always take the The immobilizer is activated. SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never i If you turn off the engine with the leave children unsupervised in the vehicle. SmartKey and then remove it from the ignition lock or open a front door, the i The electric parking brake performs a automatic transmission shifts to P function test at regular intervals while the automatically. engine is switched off. The sounds that can be heard while this is occurring are normal. If you shift the automatic transmission to N before switching off the engine, the automatic transmission remains in N even Applying/releasing manually if a door is opened.

Using KEYLESS-GO

X Apply the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 163). The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster go out. i If you use the Start/Stop button to switch off the engine, the automatic transmission X To engage: push handle :. shifts to N automatically. If you thenopen When the electric parking brake is one of the frontdoors, the automatic engaged, the F (USA only) or ! transmission shifts to P. i In the event of an emergency, the engine can be turned off while the vehicle is in Parking 185

(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights up Rthe seat belt has been fastened. in the instrument cluster. Ryou depress the accelerator pedal. i The electric parking brake can also be If the transmission is in position R, the trunk applied when the SmartKey is removed. lid must be closed. X To release: pull handle :. If your seat belt is not fastened, the following The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada conditions must be fulfilled to automatically only) indicator lamp in the instrument release the electric parking brake: cluster goes out. Rthe driver's door is closed. i The electric parking brake can only be Ryou have shifted out of transmission released: position P or you have previously driven Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in the faster than 2 mph (3 km/h) ignition lock or Rif the ignition was switched on using the Emergency braking

Start/Stop button. Driving and parking To ensure that you do not roll backwards when pulling away on an uphill slope, engage the electric parking brake (Y page 166).

Applying automatically The electric parking brake is applied automatically: Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to a standstill or Rif the HOLDfunction is keeping the vehicle X While driving, push handle : of the electric stationary parking brake. In addition, at least oneofthe following The vehicle can also be braked during an conditions must be fulfilled: emergency by using the electric parking Rthe engine is switched off. brake. Rthe driver's door is open and the seat belt i The vehicle is braked for as long as the is not fastened. handle of the electric parking brake is Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthy pressed. The longer the electric parking period. brake handle is depressed, the greater the The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada braking force. only) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster During braking: lights up. Ra warning tone sounds. Releasing automatically Rthe Release Park. Brake message appears The electric parking brake is released Rthe red F (USA only) or ! (Canada automatically when all of the following only) indicator lamp in the instrument conditions are fulfilled: cluster flashes. Rthe engine is running. When the vehicle has been braked to a Rthe transmission is in position D or R. standstill, the electric parking brake is engaged.

Z 186 Driving tips

Parking the vehicle for along period when the traffic situation permits. If you are unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than before operating the telephone. four weeks, the battery may be damaged by Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph exhaustive discharging. (approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers X Connecting a trickle charger. a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) i You can obtain information about trickle per second. chargers from a qualified specialist workshop. Drive sensibly –save fuel If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than Observe the following tips to save fuel: six weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a result of lack of use. X The tires should always be inflated to the recommended tire pressure. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek advice. X Remove unnecessary loads.

Driving and parking X Remove roof carriers whenthey are not needed. Driving tips X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds. X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking. General notes X Have all maintenance work carried out as Important safety notes indicated by the service intervals in the Maintenance Booklet or by the service G WARNING interval display. If you switch off the ignitionwhile driving, Fuel consumption also increases when safety-relevant functions are only available driving in cold weather, in stop-start traffic with limitations, or not at all. This could affect, and in hilly terrain. for example, the power steering and the brake boosting effect.You will require considerably more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk Drinking and driving of an accident. G WARNING Do not switch off the ignition while driving. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and driving are very dangerous combinations. G WARNING Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can If you operate mobile communication affect your reflexes, perceptions and equipment while driving, you will be judgment. distracted from traffic conditions. You could The possibility of a serious or even fatal also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk accident are greatly increased when you drink of an accident. or take drugs and drive. Only operate this equipment when the vehicle Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow is stationary. anyone to drive who has been drinking or taking drugs. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a Emission control mobile phone while driving a vehicle. G WARNING If you make a call while driving, always use Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling Driving tips 187

these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There drive train. This type of damage is not is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty. the engine running in enclosed spaces Do not depress the brake pedal continuously withoutsufficient ventilation. while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the brakes to rub by constantly applying light Certain engine systems are designed to keep pressure to the pedal. This results in the level of poisonous components in exhaust excessive and premature wear to the brake fumes within legal limits. pads. These systems only work at peak efficiency if they are serviced exactly in accordance with Heavy and light loads the manufacturer's specifications. For this reason, all work on theengine must be carried G WARNING outby qualified and authorized Mercedes- If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while Benz technicians. driving, the braking system can overheat. This

The engine settings mustnot be changed increases the stopping distance and can even Driving and parking under any circumstances. Furthermore, all cause the braking system to fail. There is a specific service work must be carried out at risk of an accident. regular intervals and in accordance with the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never Mercedes-Benz service requirements. Details depress the brake pedal and the accelerator can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. pedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantly Braking results in excessive and premature wear to the brake pads. Important safety notes If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy G WARNING load, do not stop the vehicle immediately. If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Drive on for a short while. This allows the an attempt to increase the engine's braking airflow to cool the brakes more quickly. effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. There is an increased danger of skidding and Wet roads accidents. If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain Do not shift down for additional engine without braking, there may be a delayed braking on a slippery road surface. reaction from the brakes when braking for the first time. This may also occur after the Downhill gradients vehicle has been washed or driven through deep water. ! On long and steep gradients, you must reduce the load on the brakes by shifting You then have to depress the brake pedal early to a lower gear. This allows you to take more firmly. Maintain a greater distance from advantage of the engine braking effect and the vehicle in front. helps avoid overheating and excessive After driving on a wet road or having the wear of the brakes. vehicle washed, brake firmly while paying When you take advantage of the engine attention to the traffic conditions. This will braking effect, a drive wheel may not turn warm up the brake discs, thereby drying them for some time, e.g. on a slippery road more quickly and protecting them against surface. This could cause damage to the corrosion.

Z 188 Driving tips

Limited braking performance on salt- All checks and maintenance work on the treated roads brake system must be carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.Consult a If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt qualified specialist workshop to arrange this. residue may formonthe brake discs and brake pads. This can result in a significantly Have brake pads installed and brake fluid longer braking distance. replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. RBrake occasionally to remove any possible If the brake system has only been subject to salt residue. Make sure that you do not moderate loads, you should test the endanger other road users when doing so. functionality of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so, press firmly on the brake RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the pedal when driving at a high speed. This beginning and end of a journey. improves the grip of the brake pads. RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle You can find a description of Brake Assist ahead. (BAS) on (Y page 67) or of BAS PLUS on

Driving and parking (Y page 67). Servicing the brakes Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only ! If the red brake warning lamp lights up in have brake pads/linings installed on your the instrumentcluster and you hear a vehicle which have been approved for warning tone while the engine is running, Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspond the brake fluid level may be too low. to an equivalent quality standard. Brake Observe additional warning messages in pads/linings which have not been approved the multifunction display. for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are not The brake fluid level may be too low due to of an equivalent quality could affect your brake pad wear or leaking brake lines. vehicle's operating safety. Have the brake system checked Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only immediately. This work should be carried use brake fluid that has been specially out at a qualified specialist workshop. approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which corresponds to an equivalent quality ! A function or performance test should standard. Brake fluid which has not been only be carried out on a2-axle approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles or dynamometer. If you are planning to have which is not of an equivalent quality could the vehicle tested on such a dynamometer, affect your vehicle's operating safety. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to obtain further information first. High-performance brake system for Otherwise, you could damage the drive AMG vehicles train or the brake system. The high-performance brake system is ! ® Because ESP is an automatic system, designed for heavy loads. This may lead to the engine and ignition must be switched noise when braking. This will depend on: off (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 or Start/ Stop button in position 0 or 1) when the RSpeed electricparking brake is being tested on a RBraking force brake dynamometer(maximum REnvironmental conditions, such as 10 seconds). temperature and humidity Braking triggered automatically by ESP® The wear of individual components of the may seriously damage the brake system. brake system, such as the brake pads/linings Driving tips 189 or brake discs, depends on the individual water. Otherwise, water may enter the driving style and operating conditions. vehicle interior or the engine compartment. For this reason, it is impossible to state a This can damage the electronic mileage that will be valid under all components in the engine or the automatic circumstances. An aggressive driving style transmission. Water can also be drawn in will lead to high wear. You can obtain further by the engine's air suction nozzles and this information about this from your authorized can cause engine damage. Mercedes-Benz Center. i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: New and replaced brake pads and discs only set the raised level before driving through reach their optimum braking effect after standing water. several hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for this by applying greater force Off-road fording to the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and braking accordingly ! Under no circumstances should you

during this break-in period. accelerate before entering the water. The Driving and parking Excessive heavy braking results in bow wave could cause water to enter and correspondingly high brake wear. Observe damage the engine and other assemblies. the # brake wear warning lamp in the ! Do not open any of the vehicle's doors instrument cluster and note any brake status while fording. Otherwise, water could get messages in the multifunction display. into the vehicle interior and damage the Especially for high performance driving, it is vehicle's electronics and interior important to maintain and have the brake equipment. system checked regularly.

Driving on wet roads Hydroplaning If water has accumulated to a certain depth on the road surface, there is a danger of hydroplaning occurring, even if: Ryou drive at low speeds. Rthe tires have adequate tread depth. : Fording depth For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in conditions in which hydroplaning may Fording occur, you must drive in the following depth manner: Vehicles without the Rlower your speed. ON&OFFROAD package Ravoid ruts. Raised level 20 in Rbrake carefully. (50 mm) Driving on flooded roads Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package ! Do not drive through flooded areas. Check the depth of any water before driving Off-road level 3 23.6 in through it. Drive slowly through standing (60 cm)

Z 190 Driving tips

Fording G DANGER depth If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases Off-road level 2 20 in such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the (50 cm) vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle Off-road level 1 20 in becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of (50 cm) fatal injury. If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating AMG vehicles 20 in running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area (50 cm) around the vehicle are clear of snow. To ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open REstablish how deep the wateris and the a window on the side of the vehicle that is not characteristics of the body of water before facing into the wind. fording.

Driving and parking RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package: Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified select the highest possible vehicle level. specialist workshop at the onset of winter. RRestrict the shift range to 1 or 2. i Vehicles with adiesel engine: do not RAvoid high engine speeds. cover the radiator, e.g. with a protective REnter and exit the water at a flat place and cover. The measuring function of the at a steady walking pace. onboard diagnosis systemmay otherwise provide inaccurate values.Some of these RDrive slowly and at an even speed through values are required by law and must the water. therefore always be accurate. RDo not stop. Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" RWater offers a high degree of resistance, section (Y page 402). and the ground is slippery and in some cases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult and dangerous to pull away in the water. Driving with summer tires REnsure that a bow wave does not form as Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" you drive. section (Y page 402). RClean any mud from the tire tread after fording. Slippery road surfaces RApply the brakes to dry them after fording. G WARNING If you shift down on a slippery road surface in Winter driving an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. General notes There is an increased danger of skidding and accidents. WARNING G Do not shift down for additional engine If you shift down on a slippery road surface in braking on a slippery road surface. an attempt to increase the engine's braking effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip. If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be There is an increased danger of skidding and stopped when moving at low speed: accidents. X Shift the transmission to position N. Do not shift down for additional engine braking on a slippery road surface. Driving tips 191 i For more information on driving with material ingressing the brakes. Cleanthe snow chains, see (Y page 403). brakes after driving off-road. If you detect a Drive particularly carefully on slippery road reduced braking effect or grinding noises, surfaces. Avoid suddenacceleration, steering have the brake system checked in a qualified and braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise specialist workshop as soon as possible. control or DISTRONIC PLUS. Adapt your driving style to the different braking characteristics. The outside temperature indicator is not designed to serve as an ice-warning device Driving off-road increases the likelihood of and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. damage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can lead Changes in the outside temperature are to failure of the mechanical assembly or displayed afterashort delay. systems. Adapt your driving style to suit the terrain conditions. Drive carefully. Have Indicated temperatures just above the damage to the vehicle rectified immediately freezing point do not guarantee that the road at a qualified specialist workshop. surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in wooded areas or on bridges. You Do not switch to transmission position N Driving and parking should pay special attention to road when driving off-road. You could lose control conditions when temperatures are around of the vehicle if you attempt to brake using freezing point. the service brake. If the gradient is too steep, drive backwards in reverse gear.

Off-road driving General notes Important safety notes Read this section carefully before driving your vehicle off-road. Practice by driving over more G WARNING gentle off-road terrain first. If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or Familiarize yourself with the characteristics turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle of your vehicle and the gear shift operation could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is before driving through difficult terrain. a risk of an accident. The following driving systems are specially Always drive on a steep incline in the line of adapted to off-road driving: fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the ROff-road ABS (Y page 67) vehicle. RAIRMATIC package (vehicle level) (Y page 212) G WARNING RDSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) If the vehicle level is high, the vehicle center (Y page 250) of gravity is raised. This could cause the vehicle to tip over more easily on uphill or Observe the following notes: downhill gradients. There is arisk of an RStop the vehicle before starting to drive accident. along an off-road route. Selectthe lowest possible vehicle level. RFor vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select a vehicle level that is When driving off-road, sand, mud and water, suitable for the off-road terrain. To avoid possibly mixed with oil, for example, could get damaging the vehicle, make sure there is into the brakes. This could result in a reduced always sufficient ground clearance. braking effect or in total brake failure and also RCheck that items of luggage and loads are in increased wear and tear. The braking stowed safely and are well secured characteristics change depending on the (Y page 341).

Z 192 Driving tips

RAlways keep the engine running and in gear X Engine oil level: check the engine oil level when driving on a downhill gradient. and add oil if necessary. Activate DSR (Y page 250). When driving on steep gradients, the RAlways keep the doors, tailgate, windows engine oil level must be sufficiently high to and sliding sunroofclosed while driving. ensure a correctoil supply in the vehicle. RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The X DEF tank (BlueTEC vehicles): check the rougher, steeper or more ruts on the fluid level and, if necessary, refill to the terrain, the slower your speed should be. maximum (13 l) (Y page 181). RDrive slowly and at an even speed through X Wheel-changing tool kit: check that the the water.Ensure thatabow wave does not jackis working and make sure you have the form as you drive. lug wrench, a robust tow cable and a folding RDrive with extreme care on unfamiliar off- spade in the vehicle. road routes where visibility is poor. For X Wheels and tires: check the tire tread safety reasons, get out of the vehicle first depth and tire pressure. Driving and parking and survey the off-road route. X Check for damage and remove any foreign RLook out for obstacles, such as rocks, objects, e.g. small stones, from the holes, tree stumps and furrows. wheels/tires. RCheck the depth of water before fording X Replace any missing valve caps. rivers and streams. X Replace dented or damaged wheels. RWhen fording, do not stop and do not X Rims: dented or bent rims can result in a switch off the engine. loss of tire pressure and damage the tire ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the bead. Therefore, check your rims before rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's driving off-road and replace them as wheels could become stuckinloose required. ground. RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will Checklist after driving off-road interrupt the vehicle's propulsion. ! If you detect damage to the vehicle after RAlways keep the engine running and in gear driving off-road, have the vehicle checked when driving on a slope. immediately at a qualified specialist RDo not shift the automatic transmission to workshop. transmission position N. X Deactivate DSR (Y page 250). i Do not use the HOLD function when X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill lower the vehicle to a ride height suitable gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. for the road conditions, e.g. to the The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle highway/high-speed level. on such surfaces. X Cleanthe headlamps and rear lights and check for damage. Checklist before driving off-road X Cleanthe front and rear license plates. ! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up X Cleanthe wheels/tires with a water jet and while the vehicle is in motion, stop the remove any foreign objects. vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. X Cleanthe wheels, wheel housings and the Check the engine oil level. The engine oil vehicle underside with a water jet; check warning lamp warning must not be ignored. for any foreign objects and damage. Continuing the journey while the symbol is displayed could lead to engine damage. Driving tips 193

X Checkwhether twigs or other parts of Tire ruts and gravel roads plants have become trapped. These ! Check that the ruts are not too deep and increase the risk of fire and can damage that your vehicle has sufficient clearance. fuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubber Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged bellows of the axle joints and propeller or bottom out and get stuck. shafts. X After the trip, examine without fail the Observe the following rules when driving entire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, along ruts in off-road terrain or on roads with bodywork structure, steering, chassis and loose gravel: exhaust system for damage. Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package: X After driving for extended periods across select a raised vehicle level. sand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirty Ravoid high engine speeds. conditions, have the brake discs, wheels, Rselect shift range 1. brake pads/linings and axle joints checked Rdrive slowly.

and cleaned. Driving and parking Rwhere ruts are too deep, drive with the X If you detect strong vibrations after off-road wheels of one side on the center grassy travel, check for foreign objects in the area, if possible. wheels and drive train and remove them if necessary. Foreign objects can disturb the Driving over obstacles balance and cause vibrations. ! Driving over rough terrain places greater Obstacles could damage the floor of the demands on your vehicle than driving on vehicle or components of the chassis. Ask normal roads. After driving off-road, check passengers for guidance when driving over the vehicle. This allows you to detect damage large obstacles. The passenger should promptly and reduce the risk of an accident always keep a safe distance from the to yourself and other road users. vehicle when doing so in order to avoid injury as a result of unexpected vehicle movements. After driving off-road or over Driving on sand obstacles, check the vehicle for possible Observe the following rules when driving on damage, especially to the underbody and sand: the components of the chassis. Rvehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select a raised vehicle level. Ravoid high engine speeds. Rselect a shift range appropriate to the terrain. Rdrive quickly to overcome the rolling resistance. Otherwise the vehicle's wheels could become stuck in loose ground. Rdrive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that: - the tire ruts are not too deep. Observe the following rules when driving over - the sand is sufficiently firm. tree stumps, large stones and other - the ground clearance of the vehicle is obstacles: sufficient. RRaise the vehicle level. RAvoid high engine speeds.

Z 194 Driving tips

RSelect shift range 1. Vehicles with AMG bodystyling RDrive very slowly. : ; RDrive straight overthe center of obstacles. Vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package Traveling uphill Highway level 20° 20° Approach/departure angle Raised level 24° 24° G WARNING Vehicles with the If you drive on a steep incline at an angle or ON&OFFROAD package turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is Highway level 20° 20° a risk of an accident. Off-road level 1 22° 22° Always drive on a steep incline in the line of Driving and parking fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the Off-road level 2 24° 24° vehicle. Off-road level 3 26° 26°

AMG vehicles : ; Highway level (in sports 19° 19° mode with the AMG adaptive suspension system activated) Raised level 23° 22°

All vehicles (except AMG vehicles and RObserve the rules on off-road driving. vehicles with AMG bodystyling) RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines : ; or gradients, but instead follow the direct line of fall. The maximum gradient-climbing Vehicles without the capability of your vehicle is 100%, which ON&OFFROAD package corresponds to an approach/departure angle of 45°. Note that the climbing ability Highway level 25° 20° of your vehicle depends on the terrain Raised level 30° 25° conditions. RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, Vehicles with the select shift range 1. ON&OFFROAD package RDrive slowly. Highway level 25° 20° RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at appropriate engine speeds (maximum Off-road level 1 28° 23° 3000 rpm). Off-road level 2 30° 25° Off-road level 3 33° 27° Driving systems 195

RWhen driving down an incline, make use of Driving downhill the engine's braking effect. Observe the RDrive slowly. engine speed; do not overrev the engine. RDo not drive at an angle down steep RCheck the brakes after prolonged off-road inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drive driving. with the front wheels aligned straight. i Hill start assist will aid you when pulling Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways, away on a hill. tip and rollover. For more information, see "Hill start assist" RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients, (Y page 166). select shift range 1. Do not switch to transmission position N RActivate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake when driving off-road. If you try to brake the gently. When doing so, make sure that the vehicle using the service brake, you could vehicle is facing in the direction of the line lose control of the vehicle. If the gradient is of fall. R too steep for your vehicle, drive back down in Check that the brakes are working normally Driving and parking reverse gear. after a long downhill stretch. i The special off-road ABS setting enables Maximum gradient-climbing capability a precise, brief and repeated locking of the On good road surfaces the maximum front wheels. This causes them to dig into gradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is loose earth. Be aware that the front wheels 100%, which corresponds to an approach/ easily skid across the ground surface if departure angle of 45°. Note that the completely braked and therefore lose their vehicle's gradient-climbing capability ability to steer. depends on the off-road conditions. Accelerate carefully and make sure that the wheels do not spin when driving on steep Driving systems terrain. Cruise control i If the load on the front axle is reduced Important safety notes when pulling away on a steep uphill slope, the frontwheels have a tendency to spin. If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise 4ETS recognizes this and brakes the control can neither reduce the risk of an wheels accordingly. The rear wheel torque accident nor override the laws of physics. is increased, making it easier to drive off. Cruise control cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Cruise Hilltops control is only an aid. You are responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle When driving up an uphill gradient, slightly speed, for braking in good time and for reduce pressure on the accelerator staying in your lane. immediately before reaching the brow of the hill. Use the vehicle's own impetus to drive Do not use cruise control: over the top of the hill. Rin road and traffic conditions which do not This style of driving prevents: allow you to maintain a constant speed e.g. in heavy traffic or on winding roads Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the brow of a hill Ron slippery road surfaces. Braking or accelerating could cause the drive wheels Rthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down the other side

Z 196 Driving systems

to lose tractionand the vehicle could then for five seconds. In the multifunction display, skid the segments between the stored speed and Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g.due to fog, the maximum speed light up. heavy rain or snow If there is a change of drivers, advise the new Activation conditions driver of the speed stored. To activate cruise control, all of the following activation conditions must be fulfilled: General notes Rthe electric parking brake must be Cruise control maintains a constant road released. speed for you. It brakes automatically in order Ryou are driving faster than 20mph to avoid exceeding the set speed. On long and (30 km/h). steep downhill gradients, especially if the RESP® must be active, but not intervening. vehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you must select shiftrange 1, 2 or 3 in good time. By Rthe transmission must be in position D. Driving and parking doing so, you will make use of the braking RDSR must be deactivated. effect of the engine, which relieves the load Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated on the brake system and prevents the brakes (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). from overheating and wearing too quickly. Use cruise control only if road and traffic Storing, maintaining and calling up a conditions make it appropriate to maintain a speed steady speed for a prolonged period. You can store any road speed above 20 mph Storing and maintaining aspeed (30 km/h). i Cruise control should notbeactivated during off-road driving.

Cruise control lever

X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. X Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ;. X Remove your foot from the accelerator : To activate or increase speed pedal. Cruise control is activated. The vehicle ; To activate or reduce speed automatically maintains the stored speed. = To deactivate cruise control You can accept the current speed if you are ? To activate at the current speed/last driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h). stored speed i Cruise control may be unable to maintain Whenyou activate cruise control, the stored the stored speed on uphill gradients. The speed is shown in the multifunction display Driving systems 197

stored speed is resumed when the gradient Setting aspeed evens out. Cruise control maintains the stored speed on downhill gradients by automatically applying the brakes. Storing or calling up aspeed G WARNING If you call up the stored speed and it differs from the current speed, the vehicle accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or brake unexpectedly. There is a riskofan accident. Keep in mind thatitmay take a briefmoment Pay attention to the road and traffic until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to

conditions before calling up the stored speed. the speed set. Driving and parking If you do notknow the stored speed, store the X Press the cruise control lever up : for a desired speed again. higher speed or down ; for a lower speed. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ; the last speed stored is increased or reduced. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : or down ; to the pressure point. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Every time the cruise control lever is you :. pressed up : or down ; the last speed X Remove your footfrom the accelerator stored is increased or reduced. pedal. The first time cruise control is activated, it i Cruise control is not deactivated if you stores the current speed or regulates the depress the accelerator pedal. For speed of the vehicle to the previously example, if you accelerate briefly to stored speed. overtake, cruise control adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Z 198 Driving systems

Deactivating cruise control As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. There is a risk of an accident. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and be ready to brake.

G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly identify other road users and complextraffic situations. In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:

There are several ways to deactivate cruise Rgive an unnecessary warning and then control: brake the vehicle R Driving and parking neither give a warning nor intervene X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. Raccelerate unexpectedly There is a risk of an accident. or Continue to drive carefully and be ready to X Brake. brake, in particular when warned to do so by Cruise control is automatically deactivated if: DISTRONIC PLUS. Ryou engage the electric parking brake. WARNING Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph G (30 km/h). DISTRONIC PLUS brakes yourvehicle with up to 40% of the maximum braking force. If this RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®. braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUS Ryou activate DSR. warns you visually and audibly.There is a risk Ryou shift the transmissionto position N of an accident. while driving. In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear try to take evasive action. a warning tone. You will see the Cruise Control Off message in the multifunction ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function display for approximately five seconds. is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in certain situations. To i When you switch off the engine, the last prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate speed stored is cleared. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similar situations: DISTRONIC PLUS Rwhen towing the vehicle Rin the car wash Important safety notes If you fail to adapt your driving style, G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the risk DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to: of accident nor override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into account Rpeople or animals the road, traffic and weather conditions. Rstationary obstacles on the road, e.g. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You are stopped or parked vehicles responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Roncoming and crossingtraffic Driving systems 199 front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so time and for staying in yourlane. that the set speed is not exceeded. Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS: On long and steep downhill gradients, Rin road and traffic conditions which do not especially if the vehicle is laden or towing a allow you to maintain a constantspeed e.g. trailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in heavy traffic or on winding roads in good time. By doing so, you will make use of the braking effect of the engine, This Ron slippery road surfaces.Braking or relieves the load on the brake system and accelerating could cause the drive wheels prevents the brakes from overheating and to lose traction and the vehicle could then wearing too quickly. skid If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-moving Rwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, vehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in order heavy rain or snow to maintain the preset distance to the vehicle DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow in front. vehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk Driving and parking vehicles driving on a different line. of a collision, you will be warned visually and In particular, the detection of obstacles can acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot be impaired if: prevent a collision without your intervention. Rdirt on the sensors or anything else An intermittent warning tone will then sound covering the sensors and the distance warning lamp will light up in Rsnow or heavy rain the instrument cluster. Brake immediately in order to increase the distance to the vehicle Rinterference by other radarsources in front or take evasive action provided it is Rstrong radar reflections, for example, in safe to do so. parking garages For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you when If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a driving, the radar sensor system must be: vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS may unexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to the Ractivated (Y page 281) stored speed. Roperational This speed may: If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter lane control in the speed range between 20 mph or an exit lane (Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada: Rbe so high when driving in the right-hand 200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front of lane that you overtake vehicles in the left- you, it operates in the speed range between hand lane 0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada: Rbe so high when driving in the left-hand lane 200 km/h). that you overtake vehicles in the right-hand Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on lane roads with steep gradients. If there is a change of drivers, advise the new As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, driver of the speed stored. it can resemble the radar detectors of the responsible authorities. You can refer to the General notes relevant chapter in the Operator's Manual if DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and questions are asked about this. automatically helps you maintain the i USA only: distance to the vehicle detected in front.

Z 200 Driving systems

This device has been approved by the FCC Activating DISTRONIC PLUS as a "Vehicular RadarSystem". The radar sensor is intended foruse in an automotive Activation conditions radar system only. Removing, tampering In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the with, or altering the device will void any following conditions must be fulfilled: warranties, and is not permitted by the Rthe engine must be started. It may take up FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in to two minutes after pulling away before any non-approved way. DISTRONIC PLUS is operational. Any unauthorized modification to this Rthe electric parking brake must be device could void the user’s authority to released. operate the equipment. RESP® must be active, but not intervening. i Canada only: This device complies with Rthe transmission must be in position D. RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is Rthe driver's door must be closed when you subject to the following two conditions: shift from P to D or your seat belt must be Driving and parking 1. This device may not cause harmful fastened. interference, and Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors 2. this device must accept any interference must be closed. received, including interference that may Roff-road program 2 must be deactivated cause undesired operation of the device. (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Removal, tampering, or altering of the RDSR must be deactivated. device will void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use Rthe vehicle must not skid. in any non-approved way. Activating while driving Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly : To activate or increase speed press the cruise control lever up : to the ; To activate or reduce speed = To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS ? To activate at the current speed/last stored speed A To set the specified minimum distance Driving systems 201

pressure point for a higher speed or down pressure point for a higher speed or down = for a lower speed. = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. is increased or reduced. or or X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever briefly press the cruise control lever up : past the pressure point for a higher up : past the pressure point for a higher speed or down = for a lower speed. speed or down = for a lower speed. Every time the cruise control lever is Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up or down, the last speed stored pressed up or down, the last speed stored is increased or reduced. is increased or reduced. X Remove your foot from the accelerator If the vehicle in frontofyou is stationary, you Driving and parking pedal. can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle is stationary as well. vehicle in front, but only up to the desired stored speed. i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated at under 20 mph (30km/h) if a vehicle in front If the vehicle in front has been detected and has been detected. Therefore, the is shown in the multifunction display, you can DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when driving instrumentcluster should be activated at speeds below 20 mph (30km/h). If the (Y page 276). vehicle in front is no longer detected and displayed, for example because it has i You can use the cruise control lever to set changed lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS is the stored speed and the control on the deactivated. You will hear awarning tone if cruise control lever to set the specified this is the case. minimum distance (Y page 204). i If you do notfully release the accelerator Activating at the current speed/last pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passive stored speed message appears in the multifunction G WARNING display. The set distance to a slower- If you call up the stored speed and it differs moving vehicle in front will then not be from the current speed, the vehicle maintained. You will be driving at the speed accelerates or decelerates. If you do not know you determine by the position of the the stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate acceleratorpedal. or brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an Activating when driving towards a accident. stationary vehicle Pay attention to the road and traffic X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards conditions before calling up the stored speed. you ; or press it up : or down =. If you do not know the stored speed, store the DISTRONIC PLUS is selected. desired speed again. X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control lever up : to the

Z 202 Driving systems

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in fronthas slowed down, it brakes your vehicle.Inthis way, the distance you have selected is maintained. If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed. However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to the speed you have stored. If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards Changing lanes you :. If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC X Remove your foot from the accelerator PLUS supports you when:

Driving and parking pedal. Ryou are driving faster than 40mph DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first (60 km/h) time it is activated, the current speed is RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruise distance to a vehicle in front speed to the previously storedvalue. Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of collision Pulling awayand driving If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if changing lanes takes too long or if the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle in front becomes too small. i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS monitors the left lane on left-hand drive vehicles and the right lane on right-hand drive vehicles. Vehicles with COMAND

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: remove your foot from the brake pedal. X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards you ; or press it up : or down =. or X Accelerate briefly. Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front. If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS operates in the same way as cruise Example: traffic circle control. i The following function is not operational in all countries. Driving systems 203

DISTRONIC PLUSuses additional information If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off from your navigation system so that it can DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle react appropriately to certain traffic against rolling away. situations. This is the case if, while following a vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS is active and you: If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle Rapproach or drive through a traffic circle in front is stopping, it brakes yourvehicle until it is stationary. Rapproach a T-intersection Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains Rturn off at a highway exit stationary and you do not need to depress the Even if the vehicle in front leaves the brake. detection range, DISTRONIC PLUS After a time, the electric parking brake temporarily maintains the current driving secures the vehicle and relieves the service speed and does not accelerate. This is based brake. on the current map data in the navigation system. Depending on the specified minimum distance, your vehicle will come to a standstill Driving and parking The current speed is maintained: at a sufficientdistance behind the vehicle in Rapproximately 10 seconds before the front.The specified minimum distance is set traffic circle/T intersection and using the control on the cruise control lever. approximately 1.5 secondswhen driving on The electric parking brake automatically a traffic circle. secures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS is Rapproximately 12 seconds before reaching activated and: a highway exit and approximately Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's 4seconds after the highway exit. seat belt is unfastened. Afterwards, the vehicle accelerates back to Rthe engine is switched off, unless it is the set speed you specified. automatically switched off by the ECO Stopping start/stop function. G WARNING Ra system malfunction occurs. When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked Rthe power supply is not sufficient. only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if: On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in automatically be shifted into position P. the voltage supply. RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated Setting aspeed with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehicle occupantorfrom outside the vehicle. Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have been tampered with. Rthe battery is disconnected. Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. There is a risk of an accident.

Z 204 Driving systems

Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment see this distance in the multifunction display until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to (Y page 205). the speed set. X To increase: turn control ; in direction X Press the cruise control lever up : for a =. higherspeed or down ; for a lower speed. DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph distance between your vehicle and the increments (1 km/h increments): briefly vehicle in front. press the cruise control lever up : or X To decrease: turn control ; in down ; to the pressure point. direction :. Every time the cruise control lever is DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter pressed up : or down ; the last speed distance between your vehicle and the stored is increased or reduced. vehicle in front. X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph i Make sure that you maintain a sufficiently increments (10 km/h increments): Driving and parking safe distance from the vehicle in front. briefly press the cruise control lever Adjust the distance to the vehicle in frontif up : or down ; to the pressure point. necessary. Every time the cruise control lever is pressed up : or down ;, the last speed Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS stored is increased or reduced. i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished overtaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance

There are several ways to deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS: X Briefly press the cruise control lever forwards :. or X Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary. Whenyou deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message You can set the specified minimum distance in the multifunction display for approximately for DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span five seconds. between one and two seconds. With this i The last speed stored remains stored until function, you can set the minimum distance you switch off the engine. that DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front, dependentonvehicle speed. You can i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you Driving systems 205

accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUS Displays in the instrument cluster adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last speed stored after you have finished Displays in the speedometer overtaking. DISTRONIC PLUSis automatically deactivated if: Ryou engage the electric parking brake or if the vehicle is automatically secured with the electric parking brake Ryou are driving slower than 15 mph (25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front, or if the vehicle in front is no longer detected R ® ® Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the

ESP intervenes or you deactivate ESP Driving and parking speedometer Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or Ryou switch off the radar sensor system two segments ; in the set speed range light (Y page 281) up. Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards If DISTRONIC PLUS detects avehicle in front, you in order to pull awayand the front- segments ; between speed of the vehicle in passengerdoor or one of the rear doors is open front : and stored speed = light up. Ryou activate DSR i For design reasons, the speed displayed Ryou activate off-road program 2onvehicles in the speedometer may differ slightly from with the ON&OFFROAD package the speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS. Rthe vehicle has skidded Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will deactivated hear a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off message in the multifunction display for approximately five seconds.

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated : Vehicle in front, if detected ; Distance indicator, current distance to the vehicle in front = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Own vehicle

Z 206 Driving systems

In the Assistance menu (Y page 276) of the Rother vehicles changing lanes on-board computer, you can select the Rnarrow vehicles distance display. Robstructions and stationary vehicles X Select the Distance display function Rcrossing vehicles using the on-board computer . In such situations, brake if necessary. In the Assistance menu of the on-board DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated. computer, you can also activate or deactivate Cornering, going into and coming out of a PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 276). bend Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated Driving and parking

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehicles when cornering is limited. Your Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activated vehicle may brake unexpectedly or late. in the multifunction display : DISTRONIC PLUS activated Vehicles traveling on adifferent line ; Own vehicle = Specified minimum distance to the vehicle in front; adjustable ? Vehicle in front, if detected

In the Assistance menu (Y page 276)of the on-board computer, you can select the distance display. X Select the Distance display function using the on-board computer . You will see the stored speed for aboutfive seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS. DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles traveling on a different line. The distance to the vehicle in frontwill be too short. Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notes Pay particular attention in the following traffic situations: Rcornering, going into and coming out of a bend Rvehicles traveling on a differentline Driving systems 207

Other vehicles changing lanes example, the detected vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these. Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle cutting in yet. The distance to this

vehicle will be too short. Driving and parking Narrow vehicles DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Level control (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package) Important safety notes G WARNING DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the When the vehicle is being lowered, people vehicle in frontonthe edge of the road, could become trapped if their limbs are because of its narrow width. The distance to between the vehicle body and the wheels or the vehicle in front will be too short. underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of Obstructions and stationary vehicles injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered.

G WARNING When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The vehicle could rollover more easily, for example on a bend. There is a risk of an accident. DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for Always select as low a vehicle level as obstacles or stationary vehicles. If, for possible and adjust your driving style.

Z 208 Driving systems

G WARNING vehicle level is lower; with an increase in When you drive with the chassis lowered or temperature, the vehicle level rises. raised, the vehicle's braking and driving If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the characteristics can be significantly impaired. vehicle begins to compensate for load You could also exceed the permissible vehicle discrepancies while still parked. However, for height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk significant level changes, such as after the of an accident. vehicle has been stationary for a long period, Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are G WARNING closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is opened, and it continues once the door has Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle been closed. may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when For information about driving off-road, see the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road (Y page 191). Driving and parking conditions. There is a risk of an accident. Basic settings Always adapt yourspeed and driving style to the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the The extentto which the vehicle is raised or prevailing road and weather conditions. lowered depends on the basic setting selected. ! When driving on extremely rough terrain, Select: select a high vehicle level in good time. Make sure there is always sufficientground Rhighway/high-speed level for driving on clearance. You will otherwise damage the normal roads vehicle. Roff-road level 1for driving on easily negotiable off-road terrain RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Roff-road level 2 for driving on normal off- road terrain Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, Roff-road level 3for freeing the vehicle in and severe or fatal injury. particularly rough terrain at low speeds only RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a The individual vehicle levels differ from person wearing a seat belt. highway level as follows: You and all vehicle occupants should Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm) always wearyour seat belts. Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm) Level control adapts the vehicle level Roff-road level 1: + 1.2 in (+30 mm) automatically to the current operating and Roff-road level 2: + 2.3 in (+60 mm) driving situation. This results in reduced fuel Roff-road level 3: + 3.6 in (+ 90 mm) consumption and improved handling. Make changes to the vehicle level while the Highway/high-speed level vehicle is in motion.This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as ! Make sure that there is enough ground possible. clearance when the vehicle is being The vehicle level may change visibly if you lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, park the vehicle and the outside temperature damaging the underbody. changes. If the temperature drops, the Driving systems 209

will disappear. Once highway level has been reached, all indicator lamps = go out. The vehicle automatically selects highway level if you are driving at a speed above 70 mph (115 km/h) or if you drive at a speed between 62 mph (100 km/h) and 70 mph (115 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds. The vehicle is lowered to high-speed level if you are traveling at higher speeds.

: Selector wheel Off-road levels ; To raise the level General notes = Indicatorlamps ROnly select off-road level 3 for driving off-

? To lower the level road in particularly rough terrain. Driving and parking R X Start the engine. Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selectorwheel :. RDo not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h). Selector wheel : extends. If one or more indicator lamps = are on:

X Turn selector wheel : counter- clockwise ? until all indicator lamps = that are lit start to flash. The vehicle is lowered to highway level. As soon as the next lowest level is reached, the indicator lamp stops flashing and goes out.

Only select an off-road level when this is appropriate for road conditions. Otherwise, fuel consumption increases and handling may be affected. X Start the engine. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. X To raise: turn selector wheel : During the adjustment, the Lowering clockwise ;. message, for example, appears in the The vehicle is raised. multifunction display. or If you press the % or a button on the X To lower: turn selector wheel : counter- multifunction steering wheel, the message clockwise ?. The vehicle is lowered.

Z 210 Driving systems

Indicator lamps = for the desired off-road The Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h) level flash: message draws your attention to the maximum speed permitted for off-road ROff-road level 1: the lowerindicatorlamp level 3. flashes Once off-road level 3has been reached, you ROff-road level 2: the lower and center will see a message shown in white in the indicator lamps flash multifunction display, for example: Max. ROff-road level 3: all three indicator lamps Speed 12 mph (20 km/h). flash If you drive above20 km/h at off-road level The vehicle adjusts to the off-road level 3, you will see the following message in red selected. As soon as an off-road level is in the multifunctiondisplay: Vehicle reached, the corresponding indicator lamp Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h). stops flashing and lights up constantly. i You cannot clear these messages. Raising the vehicle

Driving and parking You also hear a warning. The vehicle is During the adjustment, the Vehicle lowered and off-road level 3is canceled. rising message, for example, appears in the multifunction display. If you continue to increase your speed, the red message continues to be shown in the The vehicle rises from highway level to off- multifunction display. The newly set level is road level 1. not displayed until the vehicle has been set If you press the % or a button on the to a level suitable for the current speed. multifunction steering wheel,the message will disappear. Lowering the vehicle i Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the messages using the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel. Once off-road level 2has been reached, the lower and centerindicatorlamps of the selectorwheel are on.

If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will see a message in white in the display while the vehicle is being lowered, such as the following: Vehicle Lowering Max. Speed 12 mph (20 km/h). The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2. If you select an off-road level when driving at While the adjustment from off-road level 2to too high a speed, the Please reduce off-road level 3is taking place, you will see a speed message appears in the multifunction message such as the following in the display. multifunction display: Vehicle rising Max. speed 12 mph (20 km/h). Driving systems 211

You can selectfrom the following: If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off ROff-road level 1atspeeds up to 60 mph the HOLD function and secure the vehicle (100 km/h) against rolling away. ROff-road level 2atspeeds up to 40 mph ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function (65 km/h) is activated, the vehicle brakes ROff-road level 3atspeeds up to 12 mph automatically in certain situations. To (20 km/h) prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate If you are driving above 50 mph (80 km/h) or DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in drive between 40 mph (65 km/h) and the following or other similar situations: 50 mph (80 km/h) for longer than Rwhen towing the vehicle 20 seconds, off-road level 2will be canceled. The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 1. Rin the car wash You will see a message in the multifunction Deactivate the HOLD function (Y page 212). display, for example: Lowering. Driving and parking If you are driving above 70 mph (115 km/h) General notes or drive between 62 mph (100 km/h) and The HOLD function can assist the driver in the 70 mph (115 km/h) for longer than following situations: 20 seconds, off-road level 1will be canceled. Depending on the vehicle's speed and the Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep slopes ADSmode selected (Y page 212), the vehicle is automatically lowered to highway or high- Rwhen maneuvering on steep slopes speed level. Rwhen waiting in traffic You will see a message in the multifunction The vehicle is kept stationary without the display, for example: Lowering. driver having to depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD function deactivated when you depress the HOLD function accelerator pedal to pull away. Important safety notes i Do not use the HOLD function when driving off-road, on steep uphill or downhill G WARNING gradients or on slippery or loose surfaces. When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicle despite being braked by the HOLD function if: on such surfaces. Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in the voltage supply. Activation conditions Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by You can activate the HOLD function if: pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake R pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. the vehicle is stationary Rthe engine is running Rthe electrical system in the engine compartment, the battery or the fuses have Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt been tampered with. is fastened Rthe battery is disconnected Rthe electric parking brake is released There is a risk of an accident. Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Z 212 Driving systems

Activating the HOLD function AIRMATIC package X Make sure that the activation conditions General notes are met. AIRMATIC regulates the level of your vehicle. X Depress the brake pedal. As well as level control (Y page 213), your X Quickly depress the brake pedal further vehicle can be equipped with ADS (Adaptive until ë appears in the multifunction Damping System) (Y page 212) and ACTIVE display. CURVE SYSTEM (Y page 213). The HOLD function is activated. You can release the brake pedal. Observe the notes on driving with a trailer (Y page 257). i If depressing the brake pedal the first time does not activate the HOLD function, ADS (Adaptive Damping System) wait briefly and then try again. General notes

Driving and parking Deactivating the HOLD function ADS adapts the damping characteristics to the current operating and driving situation. The HOLD function is deactivated This depends on: automatically if: Ryour driving style Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in position D or R Rthe road surface conditions Ryou shiftthe transmission to position P Rthe ADS setting Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a Rthe vehicle level setting certain amount of pressure until ë Your selection remains stored even if you disappears from the multifunction display remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. Ryou secure the vehicle using the electric Sports tuning parking brake Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS i After a time, the electric parking brake secures the vehicle and relieves the service brake. The electric parking brake automatically secures the vehicle if the HOLD function is activated and: Rthe driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt is unfastened. Rthe engine is switched off. Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD package Ra system malfunction occurs. : Suspension tuning button Rthe power supply is not sufficient. ; Indicator lamp for sports tuning On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if there is a malfunction, the transmission may also = Indicator lamp for comfort tuning be automatically shifted into position P. X Start the engine. Driving systems 213

X Press button :. If you select ADS comfort mode: Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports Rrolling movement is reduced in the event of suspension tuning is selected. The vehicle changing surface undulations is lowered by 0.6 in (15 mm). Rthe roll angle when cornering is reduced The firmer suspension tuninginSport mode Rthe driving style is agile ensures even better contact with the road. If you select ADS sport mode: Select this mode when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. Rthe roll angle is reduced significantly Rthe driving style is even more agile Comfort tuning Level control

Important safety notes G WARNING When the vehicle is being lowered, people Driving and parking could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the wheels or underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of injury. Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle Example: vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel package arches when the vehicle is being lowered. : Suspension tuning button ; Indicator lamp for sports tuning G WARNING = Indicator lamp for comfort tuning When you drive with the vehicle raised, the driving characteristics could be impaired by X Press button :. the vehicle's raised center of gravity. The Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning vehicle could rollover more easily, for is selected. The vehicle is raised by 0.6 in example on a bend. There is a risk of an (15 mm). accident. In comfort mode, the driving characteristics Always select as low a vehicle level as of your vehicle are more comfortable. possible and adjust your driving style. Therefore, select this mode if you favor a more comfortable driving style. Select G WARNING comfort mode also when driving fast on When you drive with the chassis lowered or straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of raised, the vehicle's braking and driving freeway. characteristics can be significantly impaired. You could also exceed the permissible vehicle Active Curve System height if the chassis is raised. There is a risk of an accident. The Active Curve System uses active stabilizers to optimize both driving comfort Adjust the vehicle level before pulling away. and vehicle agility. Depending on the ADS G WARNING mode selected (Y page 212), the Active Curve System also changes the setting. Due to the high center of gravity, the vehicle may start to skid and roll over in the event of an abrupt steering maneuver and/or when

Z 214 Driving systems

the vehicle's speed is not adapted to the road The vehicle level may change visibly if you conditions. There is a risk of an accident. park the vehicle and the outside temperature Always adaptyour speed and driving style to changes. If the temperature drops, the the vehicle's driving characteristics and to the vehicle level is lower; with an increase in prevailing road and weather conditions. temperature, the vehicle level rises. If you unlock the vehicle or open a door, the ! When driving on extremely rough terrain, vehicle begins to compensate for load select a high vehicle level in good time. discrepancies while still parked. However, for Make sure there is always sufficient ground significant level changes, such as after the clearance. You will otherwise damage the vehicle has been stationary for a long period, vehicle. the engine must be on. For safety reasons, the vehicle is only lowered when the doors are ! When you raise the vehicle in such a way closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door is that not all wheels have contact with the opened, and it continues once the door has ground, remove the SmartKey from the

Driving and parking been closed. ignition lock. RUtility vehicles have a significantly higher Basic settings (excluding AMG vehicles) rollover rate than other types of vehicles. The extentto which the vehicle is raised or Failure to operate this vehicle safely may lowered depends on the basic setting result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle, selected. Select raised level for off-road and severe or fatal injury. driving or highway/high-speed level for normal roads. RIn a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a The individual vehicle levels differ from person wearing a seat belt. highway level as follows: You and all vehicle occupantsshould Rhighway level: +/–0 in (+/–0 mm) always wear your seat belts. Rhigh-speed level: –0.6 in (–15 mm) General notes Rraised level: +2.3 in (+60 mm) Further information about "Driving off-road" Basic settings for AMG vehicles (Y page 191). The extentto which the vehicle is raised or Level control adapts the vehicle level lowered depends on the AMG adaptive sport automatically to the current operating and suspension setting selected. Select the driving situation. This results in reduced fuel raised level for off-road driving or highway/ consumption and improved handling. high-speed level for normal roads. If you select ADS comfort mode The raised level corresponds to a vehicle (Y page 212), the vehicle is lowered to high- position raised by 50 mm compared with speed level as the speed increases. As the highway level in comfortmode. vehicle speed decreases, the vehicle is raised back up to highway level. If you select ADS sport mode (Y page 212), the vehicle skips highway level and lowers directly to high-speed level depending on the basic setting (Y page 214). Make changes to the vehicle level while the vehicle is in motion. This enables the vehicle to adjust to the new level as quickly as possible. Driving systems 215

Raised level Slowly message appears in the multifunction display. Highway/high-speed level ! Make sure that there is enough ground clearance when the vehicle is being lowered. It could otherwise hit the ground, damaging the underbody.

Only select raised level if this is appropriate for the road conditions.Otherwise, fuel

consumption may increase and handling may Driving and parking be affected. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is not lit: : Level control button X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle rises ; Level control indicator lamp to raised level. X Start the engine. If indicator lamp ; is lit:

X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle is adjusting to highway/high-speed level.

During the adjustment, the Raising message, for example, appears in the multifunctiondisplay. If you press the % or a button on the multifunction steering wheel, the message will disappear. During the adjustment, the Lowering Once the vehicle has reached raised level, message, for example, appears in the indicator lamp ; remains lit. The Raising multifunction display. message disappears fromthe multifunction If you press the % or a button on the display. multifunction steering wheel, the message If you try to select raised level at a speed will disappear. above 40 mph (64 km/h), the Drive More Once highway level has been reached, indicator lamp ; goes out. The Lowering

Z 216 Driving systems

message disappears from the multifunction ! The vehicle is lowered by approximately display. 10 mm if: The vehicle automatically adjusts to highway Ryou have selected the Sport or Comfort level when you: suspension tuning and Rdrive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h) Ryou switch off the engine and then Rdrive between 40 mph (64 km/h) and Rlock the vehicle 50 mph (80 km/h) for approximately When parking, position your vehicle so that 20 seconds it does not make contact with the curb as Depending on the ADS mode selected the vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could (Y page 212), the vehicle is lowered to high- otherwise be damaged. speed level at high speeds. Vehicle level

AMG adaptive sport suspension Level control adapts the vehicle level Driving and parking system automatically to the current operating and driving situation. Level control ensures the Important safety notes best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. G WARNING This improves driving safety and fuel When the vehicle is being lowered, people consumption. could become trapped if their limbs are The AIRMATIC package and ACTIVE CURVE betweenthe vehicle body and the wheels or SYSTEM are always components of AMG underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of adaptive suspension system (Y page 212). injury. Due to the sportier suspension settings Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle compared to standard vehicles, the levels and or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel speed thresholds for sinking and raising the arches when the vehicle is being lowered. vehicle are different. In Comfort and Sport driving modes, after G WARNING locking the vehicle it lowers to the Sport+ The vehicle is lowered if: level. When locking the vehicle at the raised Ryou have selected the Comfort or Sport level, the vehicle does not lower. suspension tuning and The settings will remain stored after you Rlock the vehicle after switching off the switch off the engine. When starting the engine engine, the selected setting, e.g. AMG Persons in the vicinity of the wheel arch or the adaptive suspension system Comfort, is underbody may thus become trapped. There restored. is a risk of injury. i The vehicle level may change visibly if you Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the park the vehicle and the outside wheel arch or the underbody when you switch temperature changes. If the temperature off the engine. drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an increase in temperature, the vehicle level rises. Driving systems 217

Suspension tuning If indicator lamps = and ; are off:

General notes X Press button : twice. The electronically controlled damping system Indicator lamps = and ; light up. You works continuously.This improves driving have selected Sport +mode. The vehicle is safety and ride comfort. lowered by 10 mm. The damping is tuned individually to each The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message wheel and depends on: appears in the multifunction display. rking Ryour driving style If indicator lamp ; lights up: Rthe road surface conditions X Press button : once. Ryour individual selection of Sport, Sport + Second indicator lamp = lights up. You or Comfort have selected Sport +mode. The vehicle is Your selection remains stored even if you lowered by 10 mm. remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. The AMG Ride Control SPORT + message Driving and pa appears in the multifunction display. Sport mode Comfort mode In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of your vehicle are more comfortable. Select this mode if you prefer a comfortable driving style. Select comfortmode also when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight stretches of freeway. X Press button : repeatedly until indicator lamps = and ; go out. You have selected Comfort mode. The vehicle is raised by 10 mm compared with The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode Sport +suspension tuning. ensures even better contact with the road. Select this mode when employing a sporty The AMG Ride Control COMFORT driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. message appears in the multifunction display. X Press button : once. Indicator lamp ; lights up. You have selected Sport mode. PARKTRONIC The AMG Ride Control SPORT message appears in the multifunction display. Important safety notes

Sport + mode PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with ultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually and The very firm setting of the suspension tuning audibly the distance between your vehicle in Sport +mode ensures the best possible and an object. contact with the road. Select this mode preferably when driving on race circuits. PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking space. When

Z 218 Driving systems

maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a Range of the sensors parking space, make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area in General notes which you are maneuvering. PARKTRONIC does not take objects into consideration that are: ! When parking, pay particular attention to objects above or below the sensors, such Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people, as flower pots or trailer drawbars. animals or objects PARKTRONIC does not detect such objects Rabove the detection range, e.g. when they are in the immediate vicinity of overhanging loads, truck overhangs or the vehicle. You could damage the vehicle loading ramps. or the objects. The sensors may not detect snow and other objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic Driving and parking car wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC to malfunction. PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on uneven terrain. PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when you: Side view Rswitch on the ignition Rshift the transmission to position D, R or N Rrelease the electric parking brake PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above 11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lower speeds. PARKTRONIC monitors the area around your vehicle using six sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper.

Top view The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush. They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them (Y page 375). Front sensors Center Approx. 40in(approx. 100cm) : Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side (example) Corners Approx. 24in (approx. 60cm) Driving systems 219

Rear sensors yellow segments showing operational readiness = light up. Center Approx. 48in (approx. 120cm) The selected transmission position and the direction in which the vehicle is rolling Corners Approx. 32in (approx. determine which warning display is active 80cm) when the engine is running. Minimum distance Transmission Warning display position Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm) D Front area activated Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm) R, N or the vehicle Rear and front areas If there is an obstacle within this range, the is rolling activated relevant warning displays light up and a backwards warning tone sounds. If the distance falls P No areas activated Driving and parking below the minimum, the distance may no longer be shown. One or more segments light up as the vehicle approaches an obstacle, depending on the Warning displays vehicle's distance from the obstacle. From the: Rsixth segmentonwards, you will hearan intermittent warning tonefor approximately two seconds. Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. This indicates that you have now reached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC Warning display for the front area : Segments on the left-hand side of the vehicle ; Segments on the right-hand side of the vehicle = Segments showing operational readiness The warning displays show the distance between the sensors and the obstacle. The warning display for the front area is located on the dashboard above the center airvents. The warning display for the rear area is in the : Indicator lamp roof lamp in the rear compartment. ; Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC The warning display for each side of the vehicle is divided into five yellow and two red If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC is segments. PARKTRONIC is operational if deactivated. Active Park Assist is then also deactivated.

Z 220 Driving systems

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock.

Towing atrailer ! Fold in the ball coupling if the trailer tow hitch is not required.PARKTRONIC measures the minimumdetection range to an obstacle from the bumper, not the ball coupling. PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area when you establish an electrical connection between your vehicle and a trailer. Driving and parking Driving systems 221

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Only the red segments PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off. in the PARKTRONIC X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified warning displays are lit. specialist workshop. You also hear a warning tone for approximately two seconds. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after approximately five seconds, and the indicator lamp in the PARKTRONIC button Driving and parking lights up.

Only the red segments The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.

in the PARKTRONIC X Cleanthe PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 375). warning displays are lit. X Switch the ignition back on. PARKTRONIC is deactivated after The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or approximately five ultrasound waves. seconds. X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Active Parking Assist cancel the Active Parking Assist parking procedure. Important safety notes Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not ! If unavoidable, you should drive over a replacement for your attention to your obstacles such as curbs slowly and not at immediate surroundings. You are always a sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damage responsible for safe maneuvering, parking the wheels or tires. and exiting a parking space. When Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate maneuvering, parking or pulling out of a parking spaces which are not suitable for parking space, make sure that there are no parking, for example: persons, animals or objectsinthe area in Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibited which you are maneuvering. Rin front of driveways or entrances and exits G WARNING Ron unsuitable surfaces The vehicle swings out when parking and in doing so could cross into the opposite lane. This could result in a collision with another road user. There is a risk of an accident. Pay attention to other road users when parking. Stop the vehicle if necessary or

Z 222 Driving systems

Parking tips: If there are objects above the detection range, ROn narrow roads, drive as close to the stop and deactivate Active Parking Assist. parking space as possible. Objects located above the height range of RParking spaces that are littered, overgrown Active Parking Assist will not be detected or partially occupied by trailer drawbars when the parking space is measured. These might be identified incorrectly or not at all. are not taken into account when the parking RSnowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging space being measured inaccurately. loads, tail sections or loading ramps of goods RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC vehicles. In some circumstances, Active (Y page 219) warning messages during the Parking Assist may therefore guide you into parking procedure. the parking space too early. RWhen transporting a load which protrudes from your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Driving and parking RNever use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are installed. RMake sure that the tire pressures are always correct. This has adirectinfluence on the parking characteristics of the : Detected parking space on the left vehicle. ; Parking symbol = Detected parking space on the right General notes Active Parking Assist is switched on Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking automatically when driving forwards. The aid with ultrasound. Ultrasound is used to system is operational at speeds of up to measure the road on both sides of the vehicle. approximately 22 mph (35 km/h).While in Asuitable parking space is indicated by the operation, the system independently locates parking symbol. Active steering intervention and measures parking spaces on both sides can assistyou during parking. of the vehicle. When driving at speeds below You may also use PARKTRONIC 19 mph (30 km/h), you will see the parking (Y page 217). When PARKTRONIC is switched symbol as a status indicator in the instrument off, Active Parking Assist is also unavailable. cluster. By default, Active Parking Assist only Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces: displays parking spaces on the front- passenger side. Parking spaces on the Rthat are parallel to the direction of travel driver's side are displayed as soon as the turn Rthat are on straight roads, not bends signal on the driver's side is activated. To park Rthat are on the same level as the road, e.g. on the driver's side, you must leave the not on the pavement driver's side turn signal switched on. This must remain switched on until you Detecting parking spaces acknowledge the use of Active Parking Assist by pressing the a button on the G WARNING multifunction steering wheel. If there are objects above the detection range, When a parking space has been detected, an Active Parking Assist may turn prematurely. arrow towards the right or the left also You may cause a collision as a result. There is appears. a risk of an accident. Driving systems 223

Active Parking Assist will only detect parking far as possible. When doing so, also spaces: observe the PARKTRONIC messages. Rthatare parallel to the direction of travel X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the Rthat are at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide continuous warning tone, if not before. Rthat are at least 51 in (1.3 m) longer than Maneuvering may be required in tight yourvehicle parking spaces. Aparking space is displayed while you are The Park Assist active Select D driving past it, and until you are Observe surroundings message appears in approximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it. the multifunction display. X Shift the transmission to position D while Parking the vehicle is stationary. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in G WARNING the other direction. Active Parking Assist merely aids you by

The Park Assist active Accelerate Driving and parking intervening actively in the steering. If you do and brake Observe surroundings not brake there is a risk of an accident. message appears in the multifunction Always apply the brakes yourself when display. maneuvering and parking. i You will achieve the best results by waiting for the steering procedure to X Stop the vehicle when the parking space symbol shows the desired parking space in complete before pulling away. the instrument cluster. X Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all X Shift the transmission to position R. times. The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the % message appears in the multifunction continuous warning tone, if not before. display. The Park Assist active Select R X To cancel the procedure: press the Observe surroundings message appears in % button on the multifunction steering the multifunction display. wheel or pull away. Further transmission shiftsmay be or necessary. X To park using Active Parking Assist: As soon as the parking procedure is press the a buttononthe multifunction complete, the Park Assist switched off steering wheel. message appears in the multifunction The Park Assist active Accelerate display. PARKTRONIC is still available. and brake Observe surroundings X Maneuver if necessary. message appears in the multifunction X Always observe the warning messages display. displayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 219). X Let go of the multifunction steering wheel. Parking tips: X Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake RThe way your vehicle is positioned in the at all times. When backing up, drive at a parking space after parking is dependent speed below approximately 6mph on various factors. These include the (10 km/h). Otherwise Active Parking Assist positionand shape of the vehicles parked will be canceled. in front and behind it and the conditions of i In tight parking spaces, you will achieve the location. It may be the case thatActive the best parking results by backing up as Parking Assist guides you too far into a

Z 224 Driving systems

parking space, or not far enough into it. In message appears in the multifunction some cases, it may also lead you across or display. onto the curb. If necessary, you should X Let go of the multifunctionsteering wheel. cancel the parking procedure with Active X Reverse the vehicle or drive forwards, being Parking Assist. ready to brake at all times. Do not exceed RYou can also engage forward gear a maximum speed of approximately prematurely. The vehicle redirects and 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a parking does not drive as far into the parking space. space.Otherwise, Active Parking Assist will Should the gear change occur too soon to be deactivated. achieve a sensible parking position, the X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the parking procedure will be aborted. continuous warning tone, if not before. RYou can intervene in the steering procedure X Shift the transmission to position D or R as to correct it at any time. Active Parking required while the vehicle is stationary. Assist will then be canceled. Active Parking Assist immediately steers in Driving and parking the other direction. Exiting aparking space i You will achieve the best results by G WARNING waiting for the steering procedure to Active Parking Assist doesnot monitor street complete before pulling away. traffic.Insome cases, the vehicle will also If you back up after activation, the steering take you onto sections of the oncoming lane wheel is moved to the straight-ahead when exiting a parking space. position. You are responsible for safety at all times and X Drive forwards or back up the vehicle, being must pay attention to any road users ready to brake at all times. approaching or passing. Stop the vehicle if X Stop as soon as PARKTRONIC sounds the necessary or cancel Active Parking Assist. continuous warning tone, if not before. X Drive forwards and back up as instructed Active Parking Assist can only assist you with by the PARKTRONIC warning displays. exiting a parking space if you have parked the vehicle using Active Parking Assist. Once you have exited the parking space completely, the steering wheelis moved to X Start the engine. the straight-ahead position. You hear a tone X Switch on the turn signal on the side facing and the message Park Assist Finished the street. appears in the multifunction display. You will X Shift the transmission to position D or R. then have to steer and merge into traffic on The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No: your own. PARKTRONIC is still available. % message appears in the multifunction display. Canceling Active Parking Assist X To cancel the procedure: press the % button on the multifunction steering X Stop the movement of the multifunction steering wheel or steer yourself. wheel or pull away. Active Parking Assist will be canceled at or once. The Park Assist Canceled X To exit aparking space using Active Parking Assist: press the a button on the multifunctionsteering wheel. The Park Assist Active Accelerate and Brake Observe Surroundings Driving systems 225

message appears in the multifunction sure that there are no persons, animals or display. objects in the area in which you are or maneuvering. X Press the PARKTRONIC button on the Under the following circumstances, the rear center console (Y page 219). view camera will not function, or will function PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active in a limited manner: Parking Assist is immediatelycanceled. Rthe tailgate is open The Park Assist Canceled message Rin heavy rain, snow or fog appears in the multifunction display. Rat night or in very dark places d parking Active Parking Assist is canceled Rif the camera is exposed to very bright light automatically if: Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Rparking using Active Parking Assist is no lighting (the display may flicker) longer possible. Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,

Ryou are driving faster than 6mph e.g. when driving into a heated garage in Driving an (10 km/h). winter Ra wheel spins, ESP® intervenes or fails.The Rif the camera lens is dirty or obstructed ÷ warning lamp lights up in the Rif the rear of your vehicle is damaged.In instrument cluster. this event, have the camera positionand Awarning tone sounds. The parking symbol setting checked at a qualified specialist disappears and the multifunction display workshop. shows the Park Assist Canceled message. General notes When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you must steer again yourself.

Towing atrailer For vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the minimum length for parking spaces is slightly increased. If you have attached a trailer to your vehicle, you should not use Active Parking Assist. Once the electrical connectionis established between your vehicle and the trailer, Active Parking Assist is no longer available. Rear view camera : is in the handle on the PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear area. tailgate. Rear view camera : is an optical parking and maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind Rear view camera your vehicle with guide lines in the COMAND display. Important safety notes The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not mirror image, as in the rear view mirror. a replacement for your attention to your i The text of messages shown in the immediate surroundings. You are always COMAND display depends on the language responsible for safe maneuvering and setting. The following are examples of rear parking. When maneuvering or parking, make

Z 226 Driving systems

view camera messages in the COMAND Displays in the COMAND display display. The rear view camera may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or Activating/deactivating the rear view not at all. The rear view camera does not show camera objects in the following positions: Rvery close to the rear bumper Runder the rear bumper Rin the area immediately above the tailgate handle ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle

Driving and parking Rthe drawbar of a trailer Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch X To activate: make sure that the SmartKey Rthe rear section of an HGV is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Ra slanted post X Make sure that the function "show rear Use the guidelines only for orientation. view camera display" is selected in Approach objects no further than the COMAND. bottom-most guideline. X Engage reverse gear. The area behind the vehicle is showninthe COMAND display with guide lines.

X To change the function mode for vehicles with trailer tow hitch: using the COMAND controller, select symbol : for the "Reverse parking" function or symbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (see the separate COMAND operating instructions). The symbol of the selected function is : White guide line without turning the highlighted. steering wheel, vehicle width including To deactivate: the rear view camera is the exterior mirrors (static) deactivated if you: ; Yellow guide line at a distance of Rshift the transmission to position P approximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the rear Rdrive forwards 33 ft (10 m) of the vehicle Rshift the transmission from R to another = Red guide line for the vehicle width position (after 15 seconds) including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5mph (10km/h) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving systems 227

active or light up correspondingly in the COMAND display.

Reverse parking function

Backing up straight into a parking space withoutturning the steering wheel

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) Driving and parking C Bumper D Red guide line at a distanceof approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle : White guide line without turning the steering wheel, vehicle width including The guide lines are shown when the the exterior mirrors (static) transmission is in position R. ; Red guide line for the vehicle width The distance specifications only apply to including the exterior mirrors, for current objects that are at ground level. steering wheel angle (dynamic) = Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle ? Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle X Make sure that the rear view camera is switched on (Y page 226). The lane and the guide lines are shown. X With the help of white guide line :, check Additional messages for vehicleswith whether the vehicle will fit into the parking PARKTRONIC space. : Front warning display X Using white guide line : as a guide, ; Additional PARKTRONIC measurement carefully back up until you reach the end operational readiness indicator position. = Rear warning display Red guide line ? is then at the end of the Vehicles with PARKTRONIC: if parking space. The vehicle is almost PARKTRONIC is operational (Y page 219), an parallel in the parking space. additional operational readiness indicator will appear in COMANDdisplay ;. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are active or light up, warning displays : and = are also

Z 228 Driving systems

Reverse perpendicular parking with the X Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly steering wheel at an angle in front of the parking space. The white lane should be as close to parallel with the parking space marking as possible.

Turning the steering wheel :

Driving and parking Red guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) Driving to the final position ; Parking space marking : White guide line at current steering wheel angle X Make sure that the rearview camera is switched on (Y page 226). ; Parking space marking The lane and the guide lines are shown. X Turn the steering wheel to the center X Drive past the parking space and bring the position while the vehicle is stationary. vehicle to a standstill. X While the vehicle is at a standstill, turnthe steering wheel in the direction of the parking space until red guide line : reaches parking space marking ;. X Keep the steering wheel in that position and back up carefully.

: Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the vehicle ; White guide line without turning the steering wheel = End of parking space

X Back up carefully until you have reached Backing up with the steering wheel turned the final position. : Red guide line for the vehicle width Red guide line : is then at end of parking including the exterior mirrors, for current space =.The vehicle is almost parallel in steering wheel angle (dynamic) the parking space. Driving systems 229

"Coupling up a trailer" function ! The following distance specifications refer to trailer tow hitches with ball coupling that have been approved for this vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Distances may differ if you use other ball couplings. In this case, take into account that actual distances will not match the following distance specifications. Otherwise you could damage the trailer and vehicle. : Ball coupling ; Red guide line at a distance of approximately 10 in (0.25 m) from the ball coupling Driving and parking = Trailer drawbar marker assistant ? Trailer drawbar A Symbol for the "Coupling up a trailer" function X Use the COMAND controllerto select symbol A, see the separate operating : Vehicle center point on the yellow guide instructions for COMAND. line at a distance of approximately 3ft The "Coupling up a trailer" function is (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle selected. The distance specifications now ; Trailer drawbar only apply to objects that are at the same = Ball coupling level as the ball coupling. This function is only available on vehicles with X Reverse carefully, making sure that trailer a trailer tow hitch. drawbar marker assistant = points approximately in the direction of trailer X Set the height of trailer drawbar ; so that drawbar ?. it is slightly higher than ball coupling =. X Reverse carefully until trailer drawbar ? X Position the vehicle centrally in frontof reaches red guide line ;. trailer drawbar ;. X Couple up the trailer (Y page 257).

360° camera (surround view) Important safety notes The 360° camera is only an aid. It is not a replacement for your attention to your immediate surroundings. You are always responsible for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneuvering or parking, make sure that there are no persons, animals or

Z 230 Driving systems

objects in the area in which you are General notes maneuvering. The 360° camera is a system consisting of The 360° camera may show a distorted view four cameras. of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at The system analyzes images from the all. It cannot show objects in the following following cameras: areas: Runder the front bumper RRear view camera Rvery close to the front bumper RFront camera Rvery close to the rear bumper RTwo cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors Runder the rear bumper The cameras capture the immediate Rin close range above the handle on the surroundings of the vehicle. The system trunk lid supports you, e.g. when parking or if vision is Rvery close to the exterior mirrors restricted at an exit. Driving and parking You are always responsible for safety, and The 360° camera images can be shown in full must always pay attention to your screen mode or in seven different split-screen surroundings when parking and views on the COMAND display.Asplit-screen maneuvering. This applies to the areas view also includes a top view of the vehicle. behind, in front of and beside the vehicle. You This view is calculated from the data supplied could otherwise endanger yourself and by the installed cameras (virtual camera). others. The seven split-screenviews are: The rear view camera will not function or will Rtop view and picture from the rear view function in a limited manner: camera (130° viewingangle) R if the doors are open Rtop view and picture from the front camera Rif the exterior mirrors are folded in (withoutdisplaying the maximum steering Rif the trunk lid is open wheel angle) Rin heavy rain, snow or fog Rtop view and enlarged rear view Rat night or in very dark places Rtop view and enlarged front view Rif the cameras are exposed to very bright Rtop view and trailer view (vehicles with light trailer tow hitch) Rif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED Rtop view and pictures fromthe rearward lighting (the display may flicker) facing mirror cameras (rear wheel view) Rif you exit a heated garage in winter, Rtop view and pictures from the forward resulting in a rapid change in temperature facing mirror cameras (front wheel view) Rif the camera lenses are dirty or covered i The top view and trailer view are available Rif the vehicle components in which the for vehicles equipped with a trailer tow cameras are installed are damaged. In this hitch. event, have the camera position and setting When the function is active and you shift the checked at a qualified specialist workshop. transmission from position D or R to N, you Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You see the previous view in the COMAND can otherwise injure others or cause damage display. The dynamic guidelines are hidden. to objects or the vehicle. When you change between transmission positions D and R, you see the previously selected front or rear view. Driving systems 231

Activation conditions Activating the 360° camerausing reverse gear The 360° camera imagecan be displayed if: Ryour vehicle is equipped with a 360° The 360° camera images can be camera automatically displayed by engaging reverse gear. RCOMAND is switched on, see the separate COMAND operating instructions X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock. rking Rthe 360° camera function is activated X Make sure that the Activation by R Activating the 360° camera using the gear setting is active in COMAND, see the SYS button separate COMAND operating instructions. X To show the 360° cameraimage: engage X Press and hold the W button for longer reverse gear. than 2seconds, see the separate COMAND The COMAND display shows the area operating instructions.

behind the vehicle in splitscreen: Driving and pa Depending on whether position D or R is Rvehicle with guide lines engaged, the following is shown: Rtop view of the vehicle Rfull screen display with the image from the front camera Selecting the split-screen and full Rfull screen display with the image from screen displays the rear camera X To switchbetween splitscreen views: Activating the 360° camerawith switch to the line with the vehicle icons by COMAND sliding ZV the COMAND controller. X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and X Press the W button, see the separate selectone of the vehicle symbols. COMANDoperating instructions. X Select System by turning cVd the X To switchto full screen mode: select COMAND controller and press W to Full screen by turning cVd the confirm. COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select 360° camera and press W to confirm. Depending on whether position D or R is Displays in the COMAND display engaged, the following is shown: Important safety notes Ra split screen with top view and the image from the front camera or ! Objects not at ground level may appear to be further away than they actually are, e.g.: Ra split screen with top view and the image from the rear view camera Rthe bumper of a parked vehicle For further information about the COMAND Rthe drawbar of a trailer Controller, see the separate COMAND Rthe ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch operating instructions. Rthe rear section of an HGV Ra slanted post Use the guidelines only for orientation. Approach objects no further than the bottom-mostguideline.

Z 232 Driving systems

Top view with picture from the rear view Top view with picture from the front camera camera

: Symbol for the split screen setting with : Symbol for the split screen setting with top view and rearview camera image top view and front camera image Driving and parking ; Yellow guide line at a distance of ; Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear approximately 13 ft (4.0m) from the front of the vehicle of the vehicle = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width including the exterior mirrors, for current including the exterior mirrors, for current steering wheel angle (dynamic) steering wheel angle (dynamic) ? Yellow lane marking tires at current ? Yellow lane marking tires at current steering wheel angle (dynamic) steering wheel angle (dynamic) A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately3ft (1.0m) from the front of the vehicle B Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the front of the vehicle

A Yellow guide line at a distance of approximately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehicle B Vehicle center axle (marker assistance) C Red guide line at a distance of approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle D Bumper The guide lines are shownwhen the transmission is in position R. The distance specifications only apply to objects that are at ground level. Driving systems 233

Top view and enlarged rear view Top view with trailer view

: Symbol for the split screen setting with : Symbol for the trailer view setting top view and rearview camera image ; Trailer drawbar marker assistant enlarged = Red guide line at a distanceof Driving and parking ; Red guide line at a distanceof approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the ball approximately 12 in (0.30 m) from the coupling rear of the vehicle This view assists you in estimating the Display with the PARKTRONIC display distance to the vehicle behind you. i This setting can also be selected as an enlarged frontview. Top view with picture from the mirror camera

Example:full screen mode with PARKTRONIC display : Symbol for the full screen setting with rear view camera image If the vehicle is equipped with PARKTRONIC and the function is active (Y page 219), : Symbol for the top view and forward- warning displays ; in the COMAND display facing mirror camera setting are also active or light up accordingly. ; Yellow guide line for the vehicle width PARKTRONIC appears: including the exterior mirrors (right side of vehicle) Rin split screen view as red or yellow = Yellow guide line for the vehicle width brackets around the vehicle iconinthe top including the exterior mirrors (left side of view, or vehicle) Rin the full screen view, on the right-hand side at the bottom as red or yellow brackets around the vehicle icon

Z 234 Driving systems

i The full screen display can also be Rif you have adopted a sporty driving style selected as frontview. with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration Exiting 360° camera display mode Rif you are predominantly driving slower than 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than As soon as your vehicle exceeds a speed of 112 mph (180 km/h) 19 mph (30 km/h) with the function activated, the function switches off.The Rif you are currently using COMAND or COMAND display switches back to the making a telephone call with it previously selected view. You can also switch Rif the time has been set incorrectly the display by selecting the & symbol in the Rin active driving situations, such as when display and pressing W the COMAND you change lanes or change your speed controller. Warning and display messages in the multifunction display Driving and parking ATTENTION ASSIST Important safety notes ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to the driver. It might not always recognize fatigue or increasing inattentiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on- driver. board computer (Y page 277). ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long, Symbol : appears in the multifunction monotonous journeys, such as on highways. display. It is active in the range between 50 mph (80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h). X The Attention Assist: Take a Break! message appears in the If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typical multifunction display. If necessary, take indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in a break. concentration on the part of the driver, it suggests you take a break. X Press the a or % button to confirm the message. ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level of fatigue or lapses in concentration by taking If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will be the following criteria into account: warned no sooner than 20 minutes after your journey has begun. In addition to the message Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steering shown in the multifunction display, you will characteristics then hear an intermittent warning tone twice. Rjourney details, e.g. time of day and length On long journeys, take regular breaks in good of journey time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is do not take a break and ATTENTION ASSIST restricted and warnings may be delayed or still detects increasing lapses in not occur at all: concentration, you will be warned again after Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if the 15 minutes at the earliest. surface is uneven or if there are potholes Rif there is a strong side wind Driving systems 235

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when you General notes continue your journey and starts assessing your tiredness againif: Ryou switch off the engine. Ryou take off yourseat belt and open the driver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to take a break.

Night View Assist Plus Important safety notes Night View Assist Plus is only an aid and is not In addition to the illumination provided by the a substitute for attentive driving. Do not rely normal headlamps, Night View Assist Plus on the Night View Assist Plus display. You are uses infrared light to illuminate the road. Driving and parking responsible for the distance to the vehicle in Night View Assist Plus camera : picks up front, for vehicle speed and for braking in the infrared light and displays a monochrome good time. Drive carefully and always adapt image in COMAND. The image displayed in your driving style to suit the prevailing road COMAND corresponds to a road lit up by high- and traffic conditions. beam headlamps. This enables you to see the The system may be impaired or may not road's course and any obstacles in good time. function if: If pedestrian recognition is activated, pedestrians recognized by the system are Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, highlighted in the Night View Assist Plus rain, fog or spray display. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up or Light from the headlamps of oncoming covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vehicles does not affect the Night View Assist vicinity of the camera Plus display in the multifunction display.This Ron bends, on uphill gradientsordownhill is also the case if you cannot switch on the gradients high-beam headlamps due to oncoming Pedestrian recognition may be impaired or traffic. inoperative if: i Infrared light is not visible to the human Rpedestrians are partially or entirely eye and therefore does not glare. Night obscured by objects, e.g. parked vehicles View Assist Plus can therefore remain Rthe silhouette of the pedestrian in the Night switched on even if there is oncoming View Assist Plus display is incomplete or traffic. interrupted, e.g. by powerful light reflections Activating Night View Assist Plus Rpedestrians do not contrast adequately from the background Activation conditions You can only activate Night View Assist Plus Rpedestrians are not in an upright position, e.g. sitting, squatting or lying if: Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. Rit is dark.

Z 236 Driving systems

Rthe lightswitch is in the à or L = Framing position. ? Symbol for active pedestrian recognition Rreverse gear has not been engaged. i Animals are not recognized by pedestrian Switching on NightView Assist Plus recognition. Night View Assist Plus is able to recognize pedestrians by typical characteristics, e.g. a silhouette in the shape of aperson. Pedestrian recognition is then switched on d parking automatically if: RNight View Assist Plus is activated Ryou exceed a speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) R

Driving an the surroundings are dark, e.g. when driving outside built-up areas without X Make sure that COMANDis switched on. street lighting X Press button :. If pedestrian recognition is active, The Night View Assist Plus display appears symbol ? appears. If pedestrians are in the COMAND display. detected, they are highlighted with framing You can read abouthow to adjust the =.Ifthe pedestrian recognition system has brightness of the COMAND display in the brought a pedestrian to your attention, look COMAND operating instructions. through the windshield to evaluate the situation. The actual distance to objects and i The infrared headlamps only switch on pedestrians cannot be gaged accurately by when the vehicle is being driven at speeds looking at a screen. of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). This It may be the case that objects are highlighted means that you do not have the full visual as well as pedestrians. range while the vehicle is stationary and cannot check whether Night View Assist Fogged up or dirtywindshield Plus is working. If the windshield in front of the camera is Pedestrian recognition fogged up or dirty on the inside or outside, the Night View Assist Plus display is affected. X To defrost: check the automatic air conditioning settings (Y page 156)and fold down the camera cover (Y page 377). X To defrost the inside of the windshield: fold down the camera cover (Y page 377) and clean the windshield (Y page 374).

: Night View Assist Plus display ; Pedestrian recognized Driving systems 237

Problems with Night View Assist Plus

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The picture quality of The windshield wipers are smearing the windshield.

Night View Assist Plus X Replace the wiper blades (Y page 137). has deteriorated. The windshield is smeared after the vehicle has been cleaned in a car wash.

X Cleanthe windshield (Y page 374).

There is windshield chip damage in the camera's field of vision. X Replace the windshield.

The windshield is fogged up on the inside. Driving and parking X Defrost the windshield (Y page 156).

The windshield is iced up.

X De-ice the windshield (Y page 155).

There is dirt on the inside of the windshield.

X Cleanthe inside of the windshield (Y page 374).

Lane Tracking package Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to detect some vehicles and is no substitute for General notes attentive driving. The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind i USA only: Spot Assist (Y page 237) and Lane Keeping This device has been approved by the FCC Assist (Y page 239). as a "VehicularRadar System". The radar sensor is intended for use in an automotive Blind Spot Assist radar system only. Removing, tampering with, or altering the device will void any Important safety notes warranties, and is notpermitted by the G WARNING FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in Blind Spot Assist does not react to: any non-approved way. Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, Any unauthorized modification to this placing them in the blind spot area device could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a speed difference of more than General notes approximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h) Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give to monitor the areas on both sides of your warnings in such situations. There is a risk of vehicle. It supports you from a speed of an accident. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warning Always observe the traffic conditions display in the exteriormirrors draws your carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance. attention to vehicles detected in the

Z 238 Driving systems

monitored area. If you then switch on the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the corresponding turn signal to change lanes, lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may you will also receive a visual and audible be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not collision warning. Blind Spot Assist uses driving in the middle of their lane. This may sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring be the case if there are vehicles driving at the purposes. inner edge of their lanes. For Blind Spot Assist to assist you when Due to the nature of the system: driving, the radarsensor system must be: Rwarnings may be issued in error when Ractivated (Y page 281) driving close to crash barriers or similar Roperational solid lane borders. Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an Monitoring range of the sensors extended period next to long vehicles, such In particular, the detection of obstacles can as trucks. be impaired if: The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking Rdirt on the sensors or anything else are integrated into the sides of the rear covering the sensors bumper. Make sure that the bumper is free of Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, dirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors. snow or spray The sensors must not be covered, for Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or example by cycle racks or overhanging loads. bicycles Following a severe impact or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have the condition Rthe road has very wide lanes of the radar sensors checked at a qualified Rthe road has narrow lanes specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane otherwise not work properly. Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders Indicator and warning display Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below indicated. approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not indicated.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30km/h). 10 ft (3m) behind your vehicle and directly At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) the nextto your vehicle, as shown in the diagram. Driving systems 239

indicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assist (Y page 277) are activated in the on-board is operational. computer. If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above ignition lock. 20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors corresponding side lights up red. This warning light up red for approximately is always emitted when a vehicle enters the 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. blind spot monitoring rangefrom behind or from the side.When you overtake a vehicle, Towing atrailer the warning only occurs if the difference in When you attach a trailer, make sure you have speed is less than 7mph (12km/h). correctly established the electrical The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse connection. This can be accomplished by gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot checking the trailer lighting. In this event, Assist is no longer active. Blind SpotAssist is deactivated. The indicator

The brightness of the indicator/warning lamp in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow, Driving and parking lamps is adjusted automatically according to and the Blind Spot Assist Currently the ambient light. Unavailable See Operator's Manual message appears in the multifunction Collision warning display. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range i You can deactivate the indicator lamps in of Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the the exterior mirrors. corresponding turn signal, a double warning To do so, switch off Blind Spot Assist when: tone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, vehicles detected Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the are indicated by the flashing of red warning ignition lock lamp :.There are no further warning tones. Rthe engine is not running Rthe electrical connection to the trailer Switching on Blind Spot Assist has been established

Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notes G WARNING Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly recognize lane markings. In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may: Rgive an unnecessary warning Rnot give a warning X Make sure that the radar sensor system There is a risk of an accident. (Y page 281) and Blind Spot Assist Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and stay in lane, in particular if warned by Lane Keeping Assist.

Z 240 Driving systems

G WARNING General notes The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in return the vehicle to the original lane. There front of your vehicle by means of a camera at is a risk of an accident. the top of the windshield. Lane Keeping Assist You should always steer, brake or accelerate detects lane markings on the road and warns yourself, in particular if warned by Lane you before you leave your lane Keeping Assist. unintentionally.

If you fail to adapt yourdriving style, Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor overridethe laws of physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into account the road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an aid. You are

Driving and parking responsible for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehicle in the lane. : Lane Keeping Assist camera The system may be impaired or may not If you select km on the on-board computer in function if: the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to function (Y page 278), Lane Keeping Assist insufficient illumination of the road, or due is active starting at aspeed of 60 km/h. If the to snow, rain, fog or spray miles display unit is selected, the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road A warning may be given if a front wheel surface is wet) passes over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of intermittent vibration in the Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicinity of the camera Switching on Lane Keeping Assist Rthere are no, several or unclear lane markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction work Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too small and the lane markings thus cannot be detected X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. the on-board computer; to do so, select lanes branch off, cross one another or Standard or Adaptive(Y page 277). merge Symbol : appears in the multifunction Rthe road is narrow and winding display. Rthere are strong shadows cast on the lane If you drive at speeds above 40 mph (60 km/h) and lane markings are detected, Driving systems 241

symbol : is shown in green. Lane Keeping Active Driving Assistance package Assist is ready for use. General notes Standard The Active Driving Assistance package If Standard is selected, no warning vibration consists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198), occurs if: Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 241) and Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 245). the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Active Blind SpotAssist Ra driving safety system intervenes, such as ABS, BAS or ESP®. General notes Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor Adaptive system to monitor the side areas of your If Adaptive is selected, no warning vibration vehicle which are behind the driver. Awarning

occurs if: display in the exterior mirrors draws your Driving and parking Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event, attentionto vehicles detected in the the warnings are suppressed for a certain monitored area. If you then switch on the period of time. corresponding turn signal to change lane, you Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. will also receive an optical and audible ABS, BAS or ESP®. warning. If a risk of lateral collision is detected, corrective braking may help you Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. avoid a collision. To support the course- Ryou brake hard. correcting brake application, Active Blind Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar obstacle or change lanes quickly. sensor system. The free space in the direction Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. of travel is then evaluated. In order that you are warned only when Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a necessary and in good time if you cross the speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). lane marking, the system recognizes certain For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist you conditions and warns you accordingly. when driving, the radar sensor system must The warning vibration occurs earlierif: be: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a Ractivated (Y page 281) bend. Roperational Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a Important safety notes highway. Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may Rthe system recognizes solidlane markings. fail to detect some vehicles and is no The warning vibrationoccurs later if: substitute for attentive driving. Rthe road has narrow lanes. G WARNING Ryou cut the corner on a bend. Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to: Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side, placing them in the blind spot area Rvehicles approaching and driving by with a speed difference of more than approximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h)

Z 242 Driving systems

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane neither give warnings nor intervene in such Rthere are barriers or similar lane borders situations. There is a riskofanaccident. Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not Always observe the trafficconditions indicated. carefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only: This device has been approved by the FCC as a "Vehicular RadarSystem". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotive radar system only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will void any warranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved way.

Driving and parking Any unauthorized modification to this device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up interference, and to 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and 2. this device must accept any interference directly nextto your vehicle, as shown in the received, including interference that may diagram. For this purpose, Active Blind Spot cause undesired operation of the device. Assist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper. Removal, tampering, or altering of the If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the device will void any warranties, and is not lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use be indicated, especially if the vehicles are not in any non-approved way. driving in the middle of their lane. This may be the case if there are vehicles at the inner Any unauthorized modification to this edge of your lane. device could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. Due to the nature of the system: Rwarnings may be issued in error when Monitoring area driving close to crash barriers or similar In particular, the detection of obstacles can solid lane borders. be impaired if: Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving Rdirt on the sensors or anything else alongside particularly long vehicles, e.g. covering the sensors trucks, for a prolonged time. Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain, The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are snow or spray integrated into the front and rear bumpers Rnarrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or and behind a cover in the radiator grill. Make bicycles sure that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The Rthe road has very wide lanes rear sensors must not be covered, for Rthe road has narrow lanes example by cycle racks or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact or in the event of Driving systems 243 damage to the bumpers, have the function of Visual and acoustic collision warning the radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assist may otherwise no longer work properly. Indicator and warning display

If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes and a vehicle is detected in the side

monitoring range, you receive a visual and Driving and parking acoustic collision warning.You then hear a double warning tone and red warning : Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp lamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on, Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at detected vehicles are indicated by the speeds below approximately 20 mph flashing of red warning lamp :.There are no (30 km/h). Vehicles in the monitoring range further warning tones. are then not indicated. When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, Course-correcting brake application indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights G WARNING up yellow at speeds of up to Acourse-correcting brake application cannot 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph always prevent a collision. There is a risk of (30km/h), the indicator lamp goes out and an accident. Active Blind Spot Assist is operational. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, If a vehicle is detected within the monitoring especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns range of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above you or makes a course-correcting brake 20 mph (30km/h), warning lamp : on the application. Always maintain a safe distance corresponding side lights up red. This warning at the sides. is always emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot monitoring range from behind or G WARNING from the side. When you overtake a vehicle, Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all the warning only occurs if the difference in traffic situations and road users. In very rare speed is less than 7mph (12km/h). cases, the system may make an inappropriate The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse brake application. There is a risk of an gear is engaged. In this event, Active Blind accident. Spot Assist is no longer active. An inappropriate brake application may be The brightness of the indicator/warning interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in lamps is adjusted automatically according to the opposite direction or accelerate. Always the ambient light. make sure that there is sufficient distance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.

Z 244 Driving systems

Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake. RESP® is switched off. Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles without the ON&OFFROADpackage). Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is detected. Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist Driving and parking

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lateral collision in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is meant to assist you in avoiding a X Make sure that the radar sensor system collision. (Y page 281) and Active Blind Spot Assist If a course-correcting brake application (Y page 277) are activated in the on-board occurs, red warning lamp : flashes in the computer. exterior mirror and a dual warning tone X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the sounds. In addition, display ; appears in the ignition lock. multifunction display. Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors The course-correcting brake application is light up red for approximately available in the speed range between20mph 1.5 seconds and then turn yellow. (30 km/h) and120 mph (200km/h). Towing atrailer Either no braking application, or a course- correcting brake application adapted to the When you attach a trailer, make sure you have driving situation occurs if: correctly established the electrical connection. This can be accomplished by Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash checking the trailer lighting.Active Blind Spot barriers, located on both sides of your Assist is then deactivated. The indicator lamp vehicle. lights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the Active Blind Spot Assist Currently side. Unavailable See Operator's Manual Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with message appears in the multifunction high cornering speeds. display. Ryou clearly brake or accelerate. Driving systems 245

Active Lane Keeping Assist In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist can: General notes Rgive an unnecessary warning and then make a course-correcting brake application to the vehicle Rnot give a warning or intervene There is a risk of an accident. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation and keep within the lane, especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Terminate the intervention in a non-critical driving situation.

Active Lane Keeping Assistmonitors the area The system may be impaired or may not Driving and parking in front of your vehicle by means of function if: camera : at the top of the windshield. Active Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to Lane Keeping Assist detectslane markings on insufficient illumination of the road, or due the road and warns you before you leave your to snow, rain, fog or spray lane unintentionally. If you do notreact to the Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, warning, a lane-correcting application of the the sun or reflections (e.g. when the road brakes can bring the vehicle back into the surface is wet) original lane. Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged If you select km on the on-board computer in or covered, for instance by a sticker, in the the Display Unit Speed-/Odometer vicinity of the camera function (Y page 278), Active Lane Keeping Rthere are no, several or unclear lane Assist is activated starting at a speed of markings for a lane, e.g. in areas with road 60 km/h. If the miles display unit is selected, construction work the assistance range begins at 40 mph. Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark or Important safety notes covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is too Lane Keeping Assist can neither reduce the small and the lane markings thus cannot be risk of accidentnor override the laws of detected physics. Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g. account the road, traffic and weather lanes branch off, cross one another or conditions. Lane Keeping Assist is merely an merge aid. You are responsible for the distance to Rthe road is narrow and winding the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for Rthere are highly variable shade conditions braking in good time and for staying in your on the roadway lane. Rno vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot and there are broken lane markings continuously keep your vehicle in its lane. Warning vibration in the steering wheel G WARNING Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always A warning may be given if a front wheel clearly detect lane markings. passes over a lane marking. It will warn you

Z 246 Driving systems

by means of intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds. In order that you are warned only when necessary and in good time if you cross the lane marking, the system recognizes certain conditions and warns you accordingly. The warning vibration occurs earlier if: Ryou approach the outer lane marking on a bend. Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. a freeway. If a lane-correcting brake application occurs, Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings. display : appears in the multifunction The warning vibration occurs later if: display.

Driving and parking If you leave your lane, under certain Rthe road has narrow lanes. circumstances the vehicle will brake briefly Ryou cut the corner on a bend. on one side. This is meant to assist you in Lane-correcting brake application bringing the vehicle back to the original lane. This function is available in the range between G WARNING 40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and A lane-correcting brake application cannot 200 km/h). always bring the vehicle back into the original lane. There is a risk of an accident. A lane-correcting brake application can only be made after driving over a solid, Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, recognizable lane marking. Before this, a especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns warning must be given by means of you or makes a lane-correcting brake intermittentvibration in the steering wheel. application. In addition, a lane with lane markings on both sides must be recognized. The brake G WARNING application also slightly reduces vehicle Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect speed. traffic conditions or road users. In very rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate i A further lane-correcting brake brake application, e.g. after intentionally application can only occur after your driving over a solid lane marking. There is a vehicle has returned to the original lane. risk of an accident. No lane-correcting brakeapplication occurs An inappropriate brake application may be if: interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake or the opposite direction. Always make sure that accelerate. there is sufficient distance on the side for Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. other traffic or obstacles. Ryou have switched on the turn signal. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. Driving systems 247

RESP® is switched off. Ryou switch on the turnsignals.Inthis Rthe transmission is not in position D. event, the warnings are suppressed for a certain period of time. Ron vehicles with a trailer tow hitch, the electrical connectionto the trailer has been Ra driving safety system intervenes, such correctly established. as ABS, BAS or ESP®. Rthe off-road program is activated (vehicles If Adaptive is selected, no warning without the ON&OFFROAD package). vibration occurs if: Roff-road program 1 or 2 is activated Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). event, the warnings are suppressed for a Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated certain period of time. (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package). Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ® Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire has ABS, BAS or ESP . been detected and displayed. Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown. R Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detect you brake hard. Driving and parking traffic situations or road users. An Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid inappropriate brake application may be an obstacle or change lanes quickly. interrupted at any time if you: Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend. Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction Towing atrailer Rswitch on the turn signal When you attach a trailer, make sure you have Rclearly brake or accelerate correctly established the electrical Alane-correcting brake applicationis connection. This can be accomplished by interrupted automatically if: checking the trailer lighting. Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist. On-road programs (vehicles with the Rlane markings can no longer be recognized. ON&OFFROAD package) Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist General notes The on-road programs assist you during on- road driving and the off-road programs when driving off-road (Y page 252). The following programmessages remain in the multifunction display until the corresponding vehicle level has been set. Up to off-road level 2, you can hide the program X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using messages using the % or a button on the on-board computer; to do so, select the multifunction steering wheel. Standard or Adaptive(Y page 277). Symbol : appears in the multifunction display. If Standard is selected, no warning vibration occurs if:

Z 248 Driving systems

AUTO program SPORT program Driving and parking

Select the AUTO program for a more Selectthe SPORT program for sporty, comfortable ride under all normal driving dynamic handling. conditions. Your selection remains stored even if you Your selection remains storedeven if you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. Selector wheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. indicator lamp ; comes on. SPORT indicator = appears in the AUTO indicator = appears in the multifunction display. multifunction display. RThe high-speed level of –15 mm when RHighway level is set. compared with highway level is set. RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts comfortable damping characteristics to sporty damping characteristics to the the current operating and driving current operating and driving conditions. conditions. RThe automatic transmission selects the RThe automatic transmission selects the automatic drive program for a sporty automatic drive program for a driving style. comfortable driving style that provides RThe sporty accelerator pedal curve is for optimumfuel consumption. selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal no Driving systems 249

longer has to be pressed as far to RHighway level is set. accelerate. RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts RThe sporty steering curve is selected, comfortable damping characteristics to e.g. greater force is required when the current operating and driving steering. conditions. R4ETS and the differential lock are i You cannot selectthe SPORT program if adapted for driving on snow-covered LOW RANGE has been selected. The roads. Drive Program SPORT Not in LOW RANGE message then appears in the RThe automatic transmission selects the multifunction display. automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides Snow program for optimum fuel consumption. RThe soft accelerator pedal curve is selected, e.g. the accelerator pedal must be pressed significantly further to Driving and parking accelerate. RThe optimum gear for pulling away is engaged.

Trailer program

Select the snow program for driving in snow with or without snow chains. X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. Snow indicator = appears in the Select the trailer program when towing a multifunction display. trailer.

Z 250 Driving systems

X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press otherwise damage the drive train or the selector wheel :. brake system. Selector wheel : extends. 4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are X To select: turn selector wheel : until permanently driven. Together with ESP® and indicator lamp ; comes on. 4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehicle Trailer indicator = appears in the whenever a drive wheel spins due to multifunction display. insufficientgrip. RHighway level is set. i In wintry driving conditions, the maximum RADS (Adaptive Damping System) adapts effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if comfortable damping characteristics to you use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow the current operating and driving chains if necessary. conditions. Further information about "Driving off-road" RThe automatic transmission selects the (Y page 191).

Driving and parking automatic drive program for a comfortable driving style that provides DSR (Downhill SpeedRegulation) for optimum fuel consumption, changing gear at optimum points. Important safety notes RWhile pulling away, the differential locks DSR assists you when driving downhill. It are engaged. keeps the speed of travel at the speed set on the on-board computer. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR Off-road driving systems braking effect on the vehicle.When driving on flat stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, 4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive) the DSR braking effect is minimal or If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC nonexistent. can neither reduce the risk of accident nor DSR controls the set speed when it is active override the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot and the automatic transmission is in the D, take account of road, weather and traffic R or N position. By accelerating or braking, conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are you can always drive at a higher or a lower responsible for the distance to the vehicle in speed than that set on the on-board front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good computer. time and for staying in your lane. Further information about "Driving off-road" (Y page 191). ! Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised. This may damage the transfer case. If you fail to adapt your driving style, DSR can Damage of this sort is not covered by the neither reduce the risk of accident nor Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. All override the laws of physics. DSR cannot take wheels must remain either on the ground account of road, weather and traffic or be fully raised. Observe the instructions conditions. DSR is only an aid. You are for towing the vehicle with all wheels in full responsible for the distance to the vehicle in contact with the ground. front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in your lane. ! A function or performance test should You are always responsible for keeping only be carried out on atwo-axle control of the vehicle and for assessing dynamometer. Before you operate the whether the downhill gradient can be vehicle on such a dynamometer, please managed. DSR may not always be able to consult a qualified workshop.You could keep to the set speed, depending on road Driving systems 251 surface and tire conditions. Select a set If the current vehicle speed is too high, the speed suitable for the prevailing conditions à DSR symbol appears in the and when necessary, apply the brakes multifunction display with the Max. Speed manually. 25 mph message (Canada: 40 km/h). G WARNING i You cannot activate DSR if the SPORT on- If the speed driven and the set speed deviate road program is activated. The à DSR and you activate DSR on a slippery road symbol and the Not in Drive Program surface, the wheels may lose traction.Ifthe SPORT message then appearinthe wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no longer multifunction display. be steered. There is an increased danger of Deactivating DSR skidding and accidents. X Press button :. Never activate DSR on slippery road surfaces. Indicator lamp ; goes out. Activating DSR The à DSR symbol appears in the Driving and parking G WARNING multifunction display with the Off If you drive faster than the set speed and message. activate DSR, the vehicle will decelerate on DSR switches off automatically if you drive downhill gradients. If you do not know the set faster than 28 mph (Canada: 45 km/h). The speed, the vehicle could decelerate à DSR symbol appears in the unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. multifunction display with the Off message. Decelerate the vehicle to the set speed before The status indicator in the multifunction activating DSR. If you do not know what the display goes out. You also hear a warning. On stored set speed is, store the desired set vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package, if speed again. you select a different on-road/off-road program, DSR is also deactivated. Changing the set speed

Example: vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package : DSR button ; DSR indicator lamp

X Press button :. Indicator lamp ; lights up. The à DSR symbol appears in the multifunction display. You can only activate DSR when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

Z 252 Driving systems

X To increase or decrease in 1 mph characteristics of the automatic transmission increments (Canada: 1 km/h are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and increments): briefly press the cruise 4ETSprograms especially adapted to off-road control lever up : for a higherset speed driving are activated.Agentle accelerator or down ; for a lower set speed. pedal curve is also selected, i.e. the The set speed appears in the multifunction accelerator pedal must be depressed much display with the à DSR symbol. It is also further in order to accelerate. displayed in status indicator =. Do not use the off-road program on roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you have When DSR is activated, you can change the mounted snow chains on your vehicle. set speed to a value between 1mph and 11 mph (Canada: between 2 km/h and For information about driving off-road, see 18 km/h). (Y page 191).

i The DSR set speed is always changed in Off-road programs (vehicles with the

Driving and parking 1 mph increments (Canada: 1 km/h ON&OFFROAD package) increments). This is regardless of whether you press the cruise control lever to or General notes beyond the pressure point. The off-road programs assist you in driving off-road. The engine’s performance Off-road program (vehicles without the characteristics and the gearshifting ON&OFFROAD package) characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. ABS, ESP® and 4ETS programs especially adapted to off-road driving are activated. An accelerator pedal curve suitable for the terrain is selected, i.e. the accelerator pedal must be depressed further to accelerate. Do not use the off-road programs on roads that are snow-covered or icy or if you have mounted snow chains on your vehicle. For information on driving off-road, see (Y page 191). : Off-road program button The following program messages are shown ; Off-road program indicator lamp in the multifunction display until the X To switch on: press button :. applicable vehicle level is set. Up to off-road Indicator lamp ; lights up. The Ç off- level 2, you can hide the program messages road indicator appears in the multifunction using the % or the a button on the display. multifunction steering wheel.

X To switch off: press button :. Indicator lamp ; and the Ç off-road indicator go out in the multifunction display. The off-road program assists you in driving off-road. The engine’s performance characteristics and the gearshifting Driving systems 253

Off-road program 1 Off-road program 2 Driving and parking

X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press X Selector wheel : engaged: briefly press selector wheel :. selector wheel :. Selector wheel : extends. Selectorwheel : extends. X To select: turn selector wheel : until X To select: turn selector wheel : until indicator lamp ; comes on. indicator lamp ; comes on. Off-road indicator = appears in the Off-road indicator = appears in the multifunction display. multifunction display. Off-road level 1 is set to +1.2 in (+ 30 mm) ROff-road level 1 is set to +2.4 in above the highway level. (+60 mm) above the highway level. If you drive at a speed above 70 mph RDSR is switched on. (110 km/h), off-road program 1 switches to RThe differential lock is closed. AUTO program. Off-road program 2automatically switches to Select off-road program 1 for gentle off-road off-road program 1 if you drive faster than terrain, e.g. for gravel or sand surfaces or 30 mph (45 km/h). tracks. The engine's torque is restricted to a Select off-road program 2 for rough terrain, limited degree and the drive wheels can spin. e.g. for steep and/orrough terrain or driving The spinning wheels produce acutting effect on rocky terrain. for better traction. You can only activate off-road program 1 i Your vehicle has an automatically when driving at speeds below 60 mph activated differential lock for the transfer (100 km/h). The Drive Program OFFROAD case. It controls the balance between the 1 Max Speed 60 mph (100 km/h) message front and rear axles. appears in the multifunction display.

Z 254 Driving systems

The differential lock improves the vehicle’s General notes traction. 4ETS (Y page 71) controls the balance between both wheels on an axle. You can only activate off-road program 2 when driving at speeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

LOW RANGE off-road gear (vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package)

Important safety notes G WARNING : LOW RANGE off-road gear button If you select the LOW RANGE off-road gear on ; LOW RANGE off-road gear indicator lamp a slippery road surface, the wheels could lose Driving and parking traction: HIGH RANGE Position for all normal on- Rif you remove your foot from the road driving conditions accelerator pedal when driving LOW RANGE Off-road position for Rif off road ABS intervenes when braking driving off-road and If the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can no fording longer be steered. There is an increased The transmission ratio danger of skidding and accidents. between the engine and Never select the LOW RANGE off-road gear wheels is only when driving on slippery road surfaces. approximately one third of that in the HIGH RANGE G WARNING road position. Drive torque If you do not wait for the transfer case gear is thus proportionately change process to complete, the transfer higher. case could remain in the neutral position. The Do not use LOW RANGE: power transmission to the driven wheels is Ron slippery road then interrupted. There is a danger of the surfaces, e.g. in the case vehicle rolling away unintentionally. There is of slush a risk of an accident. Ron snow or ice-covered Wait until the transfer case shift process is roads completed. Rif you have mounted Do not turn off the engine while changing gear snow chains to your and do not shift the automatic transmission vehicle to another position. The LOW RANGE off-road gear assists you in driving off-road and when fording. When LOW RANGE is engaged, the engine’s performance characteristics and the gearshifting characteristics of the automatic transmission are adapted for this purpose. Driving systems 255

Further information about "Driving off-road" While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can (Y page 191).You will find information about cancel the gear change by pressing LOW driving safety systems in conjunction with RANGE button : again. LOW RANGE in the "Safety" section (Y page 66). From HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE ! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position N Ryou are driving at a speed below 40 km/h X Press LOW RANGE button :. Driving and parking Indicator lamp ; flashes. When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; lights up. LOW RANGE indicator appears in the multifunction display and in the status indicator. While indicator lamp ; is flashing, you can cancel the gear change by pressing LOW RANGE button : again. i You cannot activate LOW RANGE if the SPORT on-road program is activated. The LOW RANGE Not in Drive Program SPORT message then appears in the multifunction display. From LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE ! Only change from LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE if: Rthe engine is running. Rthe transmission is in position N Ryou are driving at a speed below 70 km/h X Press LOW RANGE button :. Indicator lamp ; flashes. When the gear change is complete, indicator lamp ; goes out. In the multifunction display, the LOW RANGE Off message appears and status indicator = goes out.

Z 256 Driving systems

Messages in the multifunction display If a gearchange process has not been successful, the following messages may be displayed in the multifunction display: Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions LOW RANGE Max. You have been driving faster than 40 km/h. Additionally, the Speed 40 km/h indicator lamp on the button in the center console blinks. X Drive more slowly to carry out the gear change process.

LOW RANGE Shift to The transmission is in position D and you are driving at below Position N Briefly 40 km/h. X Shift the transmission to N to complete the gear change process.

Driving and parking LOW RANGE Shifting The gear change process was not carried out. Canceled Please X Ensure that all gear change conditions are fulfilled and carry out Reactivate the gear change process again.

LOW RANGE Stop Awarning tone also sounds. The gear change processhas notbeen Apply Parking Brake completed. LOW RANGE is in the neutral position.There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels. ! Do not drive any further. You could otherwise damage the vehicle's drive train. X Stop the vehicle. Take into account the road and traffic conditions when doing this. X Depress the electric parking brake (Y page 184). X Carry out the gear change process again. If the gear change process has been carried out, the LOW RANGE Stop Apply Parking Brake message disappears.

ON&OFFROAD menu in the COMAND You can display some driving systems, driving display (vehicles with the programs and additional information in the ON&OFFROAD package) COMAND display. X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X Make sure that COMAND is activated, see the separate COMAND operating instructions. X Press function button :. The corresponding displays appearinthe COMAND display: Rlevel control Rsteering angle Rvehicle's angle of inclination Towing atrailer 257

Ruphill or downhill gradientinpercentage cause the braking system to fail. There is a Ron-road/off-road program selected risk of an accident. Rcondition of the differential lock for the Never use the brake pedal as a footrest.Never transfer case depress the brake pedal and the accelerator Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is selected pedal at the same time. Rcondition of the LOW RANGE off-road gear G WARNING Rthe on-road trailer program is selected When the vehicle/trailer combination begins to lurch, you could lose control of it. The vehicle/trailer combination could even d parking rollover. There is a risk of an accident. Towing atrailer On no account should you attempt to Notes on towing atrailer straighten up the vehicle/trailer combination by increasing the speed. Reduce vehicle Important safety notes speed and do not countersteer.Apply the Driving an G WARNING brake as necessary. If you install a ball coupling other thanthe one ! Depressing the brake pedal constantly delivered with the vehicle, the trailer tow hitch results in excessive and premature wear to and the rear axle may be overloaded. This the brake pads. applies especially if the ball coupling in question is longer or angled differently. This Please observe the manufacturer's operating could seriously impair the driving instructions for the trailer coupling if a characteristics and the trailer can come detachable trailer coupling is used. loose. There is a risk of an accident. Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. If Only install the ball coupling delivered with you do not couple the trailer to the towing the vehicle or a ball coupling that is designed vehicle correctly, the trailer could become to meet your trailer towing requirements. Do detached. not modify the ball coupling or the trailer tow Make sure that the following values are not hitch. exceeded: Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweight G WARNING Rthe permissible trailer load If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or Rthe permissible rear axle load of the towing not secured with the bolt provided and the vehicle corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may come loose. There is a risk of an accident. Rthe maximum permissible gross vehicle weight of both the towing vehicle and the Always install and secure the ball coupling as trailer described. Before every journey, ensure that the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and The applicable permissible values, which the corresponding spring cotter. must not be exceeded, can be found: Rin the vehicle documents G WARNING Ron the identification plates of the trailer tow If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while hitch, the trailer and the vehicle driving, the braking system can overheat. This If the values differ, the lowest value applies. increases the stopping distance and can even You will find the values approved by the manufacturer on the vehicle identification

Z 258 Towing atrailer

plates and those for the towing vehicle under vehicle for a maximum load; see the tire "Technical data" (Y page 449). pressure table in the fuel filler flap When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling (Y page 421). characteristics will be differentincomparison You will find installation dimensions and loads with when driving without atrailer. in the "Technical data" section The vehicle/trailer combination: (Y page 448). Ris heavier The maximum noseweight of the trailer Ris restricted in its acceleration and drawbar on the ball coupling is 600 lbs gradient-climbing capability (272 kg). d parking Rhas an increased braking distance The actual noseweight may not be higher than the value which is given. The value can be Ris affected more by strong crosswinds found on the trailer tow hitch or trailer Rdemands more sensitive steering identification plates. The lowest weight Rhas a larger turning radius applies. Driving an This could impair the handling Please note that when towing a trailer, characteristics. PARKTRONIC (Y page 217) and Blind Spot When towing a trailer, always adjust your Assist (Y page 237) are only available with speed to the current road and weather limitations, or not at all. conditions. Do not exceed the maximum permissible speed for yourvehicle/trailer Driving tips combination. i Observe the information on ESP® trailer stabilization (Y page 72) and on pulling General notes away with a trailer (Y page 166). RDo not exceed the legally prescribed The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/ maximum speed for vehicle/trailer trailer combinations depends on the type of combinations in the relevant country. trailer. Before beginning the journey, check This lowers the risk of an accident. the trailer's documents to see what the ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on maximum permissible speed is. Observe the your vehicle. legally prescribed maximum speed in the Further information on availability and on relevant country. installation is available from any authorized For certain Mercedes-Benzvehicles, the Mercedes-Benz Center. maximum permissible rear axle load is RThe bumpers of your vehicle are not increased when towing a trailer. See suitable for installing detachable trailer "Technical data" to find out whether this couplings. applies to your vehicle (Y page 449). If you utilize any of the added maximum rear axle RDo not install hired trailer couplings or other detachable trailer couplings on the load when towing a trailer, the vehicle/trailer bumpers of your vehicle. combination may not exceed a maximum speed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasons RIf you no longer need the ball coupling, concerning the operating permit.This also remove it from the ball coupling recess. applies in countries in which the permissible This will reduce the risk of damage to the maximum speed for vehicle/trailer ball coupling. combinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h). i When towing a trailer, set the tire pressure on the rear axle of the towing Towing atrailer 259

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handling Always install and secure the ball coupling as characteristics will be differentincomparison described. Before every journey, ensure that with when driving without atrailer. the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and On long and steep downhill gradients, you the corresponding spring cotter. must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. G WARNING i This also applies if you have activated cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS. If the ball coupling is not installed correctly or not secured with the bolt provided and the This will use the braking effect of the engine, corresponding spring cotter, the trailer may so that less braking will be required to come loose. There is a risk of an accident. d parking maintainthe speed, This relieves the load on Always install and secure the ball coupling as the brake system and prevents the brakes described. Before every journey, ensure that from overheating and wearing too quickly. If the ball coupling is secured with the bolt and you need additional braking, depress the the corresponding spring cotter. brake pedal repeatedly rather than Driving an continuously. G WARNING Driving tips If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly the trailer may come loose. There is If the trailer swings from side to side: a risk of an accident. X Do not accelerate. Install and secure the ball coupling as X Do not counter-steer. described in the ball coupling installation instructions. Make sure that the ball coupling X Brake if necessary. is installed and secured correctly before every RMaintain a greater distance from the journey. vehicle in front than when driving without a trailer. RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake gently at first to allow the trailer to run on. Then, increase the braking force rapidly. RThe values given for gradient-climbing capabilities from a standstill refer to sea level. When driving in mountainous areas, note that the power output of the engine and, consequently, the vehicle's gradient- climbing capability, decreases with increasing altitude. Cover cap X Pull protective cap : in the direction of the Installing the ball coupling arrow, out of the ball coupling recess. X Place protective cap : in the ball coupling G WARNING recess. If the ball coupling is not installed and secured correctly it can become detached while the vehicle is in motion and fall onto the road. There is a risk of accident and injury.

Z 260 Towing atrailer d parking

Ball coupling recess Bolt and spring cotter X Secure the boltusing spring cotter B. Driving an

Holes in the ball coupling and ball coupling recess

X Insert the ball coupling horizontally into ball Correctly installed and secured ball coupling coupling recess ; in the direction of the X Check the ball coupling, bolt and spring arrow until the holes in ball coupling = are cotter for correct installation. in line with the holes in ball coupling recess ?. If the ball coupling cannot be correctly mounted, remove the ball coupling. Under these circumstances, the ball coupling must not be used for trailer towing. If the ball coupling cannot be locked and the key cannot be removed, remove the ball coupling and clean it. If the ball coupling can still not be installed (locked) after it has been cleaned, remove the ball coupling. The trailer tow hitch must then not be used to tow a trailer, as safe operation cannot be guaranteed.

Bolt Have the entire trailer tow hitch checked at a qualified specialist workshop. X Slide bolt A into the hole in the ball coupling recess and the ball coupling to the stop. Coupling up a trailer ! Do not connect the trailer's brake system (if featured) to the hydraulic brake system Towing atrailer 261

of the towing vehicle, as the latter is Leave enough play in the chains to make equipped with an anti-lock brake system. tight cornering possible. Doing so will result in a loss of function of RAseparate brake system for certain types the brake systems of both the vehicle and of trailer. the trailer. RAsafety switch for braked trailers. Check X Make sure that the automatic transmission the specific legal requirements applicable is set to position P. to your state. X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. If the trailer detaches from the towing X Start the engine. vehicle, the safety switch applies the trailer's brakes. d parking X Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: select highway level. X Vehicles with ADS: set ADS to AUTO or Towing atrailer COMF. There are numerous legal requirements

X Switch off the engine. Driving an concerning the towing of a trailer, e.g.speed X Close all doors and the tailgate. restrictions. Make sure that your vehicle/ X Couple up the trailer. trailer combination complies with the local X Establish all electrical connections. requirements not only in your area of X Check that the trailer lighting system is residence but also at any location to which working. you are traveling. The police and local authorities can provide reliable information. i Vehicles with the AIRMATIC package: Please observe the following when towing a with a trailer attached, the vehicle will trailer: always remain at highway level. When coupling up a trailer, please observe the RTo acquaint yourself with driving with a following: trailer and with the resulting changes to RUnless highway level has been set handling, you should practice cornering, manually, the vehicle is automatically stopping and backing up in a traffic-free lowered to highway level. This is the case location. if a speed of 5mph (8 km/h) is reached. RBefore driving, check: RHigh-speed level is not available. - Trailer tow hitch These restrictions apply to all accessories - Safety switch for braked trailers powered through a connectionto the trailer - Safety chains power socket of your vehicle, e.g. a bicycle - Electrical connections carrier. - Lights Observe the maximum permissible trailer - the wheels dimensions (width and length). RAdjust the exterior mirrors to provide an Most U.S. states and all Canadianprovinces unobstructed view of the rear section of the require by law: trailer. RSafety chains between the towing vehicle RIf the trailer features electronically and the trailer. The chains should be cross- controlled brakes, pull away the vehicle/ wound under the trailer drawbar. They must trailer combination carefully, manually be fastened to the vehicle's trailer brake using the brake controller, and check coupling, not to the bumper or the axle. the brakes for correct function.

Z 262 Towing atrailer

RSecure any objects on the trailerto prevent Due to the length of your vehicle/trailer the cargo from slipping when the vehicle is combination, you will have to travel an in motion. additional distance beyond the vehicle you RIf you couple up a trailer, regularly check are overtaking before returning to the the cargo for secure fastening and make previous lane. sure that the trailer lamps and (if applicable) the trailer brakes are functioning correctly. Decoupling atrailer RBear in mind that the handling will be less G WARNING d parking stable when towing a trailer than when If you uncouple a trailer with the overrun driving without one. Avoid sudden steering brake engaged, you could trap your hand movements. between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. RThe vehicle/trailer combination is heavier, There is a risk of injury. accelerates more slowly, has a decreased Do not uncouple a trailer if the overrunbrake Driving an gradient climbing capability and a longer is engaged. braking distance. It is more susceptible to side winds and G WARNING requires more careful steering. Vehicles with level control: RIf possible, avoid abrupt braking. Depress The vehicle is lowered as soon as you the brake pedal moderately at first, so that disconnect the trailer cable. This could result the trailer can activate its own brakes. Then in yourlimbs or those of other people that are increase the pressure on the brake pedal. betweenthe vehicle body and tires or RIf the automatic transmission continues to underneath the vehicle being trapped. There shift back and forth between two gears is a risk of injury. when driving up or downhill, restrict the Make sure that nobody is in the immediate shift range. Select shift range 4, 3, 2, or 1. vicinity of the wheel housings or under the Alower gear and lower speed reduce the vehicle when you disconnectthe trailer cable. risk of engine failure. RWhen driving downhill, shift to a lower gear ! Do not disconnect a trailer with an to utilize the engine's braking effect. engaged overrun brake. Otherwise, your Avoid continuous brake application as this vehicle could be damaged by the may overheat the vehicle brakes and, if rebounding of the overrun brake. installed, the trailer brakes. X Make sure that the automatic transmission RIf the coolant temperature increases is set to position P. dramatically while the air-conditioning X Apply the vehicle's electric parking brake. system is switched on, switch off the air- X Start the engine. conditioning system. X Close all doors and the tailgate. Coolant heat can additionally be dissipated X Apply the trailer's parking brake. by opening the windows and by setting the blower fan and the interior temperature to X Detach the trailer cable and decouple the maximum. trailer. RWhen overtaking, pay particular attention X Switch off the engine. to the extended length of your vehicle/ trailer combination. Towing atrailer 263

Permissible trailer loads and drawbar i The weight of additional accessories, loads passengers, and cargo reduces the permissible trailer load and drawbar load Weight specifications for yourvehicle. Maximumpermissible gross vehicle Checking the vehicle and trailer weight weight rating The gross trailer weight is calculated by RTo checkthat the weights of the towing adding the weight of the trailer to the weight vehicle and the trailer comply with the of the load and equipment on the trailer. maximum permissible values, have the d parking Permissible gross weight:7,500 lb vehicle/trailer combination (including the (3,402 kg). driver, passengers, and cargo with a fully laden trailer) weighed on a calibrated Permissible noseweight weighbridge. The maximum permissible trailer drawbar RCheck the gross axle weight rating of the noseweight is the maximum weight with front and rear axles, the gross weight of the Driving an which the trailer drawbar can be loaded: trailer and trailer drawbarload. 600 lbs (272 kg). Limit for Mercedes-Benz-approved trailer couplings. Removing the ball coupling X Remove the spring cotter. Loading atrailer X Remove the bolt from the ball coupling RWhen loading the trailer, make sure that recess. neitherthe permissible gross weight of the X Remove the ball coupling from the ball trailer nor the gross vehicle weight is coupling recess. exceeded. The permissible gross vehicle X Clean the ball coupling if it is dirty. weight is indicated on the identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of Information on cleaning and care of the trailer the vehicle. tow hitch can be found at (Y page 376). You can find the maximum permissible values on the type plates of your vehicle Storing the ball coupling and the trailer. When calculating how much weight the vehicle and trailer may carry, G WARNING pay attention to the respective lowest Do not carry the ball coupling in the vehicle values. interior if it is not secured. RThe trailer drawbarload on the ball coupling Otherwise, you and others could be injured by must be added to the rear axle load to avoid the ball coupling being thrown around if you: exceeding the permissible gross axle Rbrake sharply weight. The permissible gross vehicle weight is indicated on the identification Rchange direction suddenly plate on the B-pillar on the driver's side of Rare involved in an accident the vehicle. i Mercedes-Benz recommends atrailer load where the trailer drawbar noseweight accounts for 8% to 15% of the trailer's permissible gross weight.

Z 264 Towing atrailer

Trailer power supply ! You can connect accessorieswith a maximum power consumption of 240 W to the permanent powersupply. You must notcharge a trailer battery using the power supply. The trailer socket of your vehicle is equipped at the factory with apermanentpower supply.

d parking The permanent power supply is supplied via trailer socket pin 4. The trailer's permanent power supply is switched off in the event of low vehicle supply voltage and after six hours at the latest. Driving an Aqualified specialist workshop can provide more information about installing the trailer electrics. 265

Useful information ...... 266 Important safety notes ...... 266 Displays and operation ...... 267 Menus and submenus ...... 270 Display messages ...... 286 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster ...... 320 On-board computer and displays 266 Important safety notes

Useful information multifunction display.You should therefore make sure your vehicle is operating safely at i This Operator's Manual describes all all times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is not models and all standard and optional operating safely may cause an accident. equipment of your vehicle available at the For an overview, see the instrument panel time of publication of the Operator's illustration (Y page 33). Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features described. This also applies to safety- related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 28).

Important safety notes On-board computer and displays G WARNING If you operate information systems and communication equipment integrated in the vehicle while driving, you will be distracted from traffic conditions. You could also lose control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. Only operate the equipment when the traffic situationpermits.Ifyou are not sure that this is possible, park the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions and operate the equipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNING If the instrument cluster has failed or malfunctioned, you may not recognize function restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the on-board computer. The on-board computer only shows messages or warnings from certain systems in the Displays and operation 267

Displays and operation Instrument cluster On-board computer and displays

Instrument cluster: miles : Speedometer with segments (Y page 268) ; Fuel gauge = Tachometer (Y page 268) ? Coolant temperature (Y page 267) A Multifunction display (Y page 269) B Instrumentcluster lighting (Y page 267)

Instrument cluster lighting In daylight, the displays in the instrument cluster are not illuminated. The lighting in the instrumentcluster, in the displays and the controls in the vehicle interior can be adjusted using the brightness Coolant temperature display control knob. The brightness control knob is located on the G WARNING bottom left of the instrument cluster Driving when your engine is overheated can (Y page 33). cause some fluids which may have leaked into X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise the engine compartment to catch fire. You or counter-clockwise. could be seriously burned. If the light switch is set to Ã, T or Steam from an overheated engine can cause L, the brightness is dependent upon serious burns which can occur just by opening the brightness of the ambientlight. the engine hood. Stay away fromthe engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. i The light sensor in the instrumentcluster Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from automatically controls the brightness of other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the the multifunction display.

Z 268 Displays and operation

vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until One or two segments in the set speed the engine has cooled down. range light up. RDISTRONIC PLUS detectsavehicle in front: ! Adisplay message is shown if the coolant The segments between the speed of the temperature is too high. vehicle in frontand the stored speed light If the coolant temperature is over up. 248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine will otherwise be damaged. The coolanttemperature gauge is in the Operating the on-board computer instrument cluster on the right-hand side Overview (Y page 33). Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

On-board computer and displays Tachometer ! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this could damage the engine. The red band in the tachometer indicates the engine's overrevving range. The fuel supply is interrupted to protectthe engine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display : Multifunctiondisplay You should pay special attention to road ; Switches on the Voice Control System; conditions when temperatures are around see the separate operating instructions freezing point. = Right control panel The outside temperature display is in the ? Left control panel multifunction display (Y page 269). A Back button Changes in the outside temperature are displayed after a short delay. X To activatethe on-board computer: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. Speedometer with segments You can control the multifunction display and The segments in the speedometer indicate the settings in the on-board computer using which speed range is available. the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. RCruise control activated (Y page 195): The segments light up from the stored speed to the maximum speed. RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 198): Displays and operation 269

Left control panel W RAdjusts the volume X = RCalls up the menu and menu bar ; 8 RMute 9 Press briefly: Back button : RScrolls in lists RSelects a submenu or function % Press briefly:

RIn the Audio menu: selects a RBack ter and displays stored station, an audio track or RSwitches off the Voice Control a video scene System; see the separate RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: operating instructions compu switches to the phone book and RHides display messages/calls selects a name or telephone up the last Trip menu function rd number used 9 Press and hold: RExits the telephone book/redial

memory On-boa : RIn the Audio menu: selects the previous/nextstation or selects % Press and hold: an audio track or a video scene RCalls up the standard display in using rapid scrolling the Trip menu RIn the Tel (Telephone) menu: starts rapid scrolling if the phone book is open Multifunction display a RConfirms a selection/display message RIn the Tel (telephone) menu: switches to the telephone book and starts dialing the selected number RIn the Audio menu: stops the station search function at the desired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a call RExits phone book/redial memory

6 RMakes or accepts a call : Time RSwitches to the redial memory ; Permanent display: outside temperature or speed (Y page 278) = Text field ? Menu bar

Z 270 Menus and submenus

A Drive program (Y page 169) Menus and submenus B Transmission position(Ypage 169) Menu overview X To show menu bar?: press the = Press the = or ; button on the or ; button on the steering wheel. steering wheel to call up the menu bar and Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds. selectamenu. Text field = shows the selected menu or Operating the on-board computer submenu as well as display messages. (Y page 268). Depending on the equipment installed in the i You can set the time using the audio vehicle, you can call up the following menus: system or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. RTrip menu (Y page 270) The following messages may appear in the RNavi menu (navigationinstructions) multifunction display: (Y page 272) R XjY Active Parking Assist Audio menu (Y page 273) R (Y page 221) Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 274) R On-board computer and displays CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 195) DriveAssist menu (assistance) (Y page 276) fDSR DSR (Y page 250) RService menu (Y page 277) Ç Off-road program (vehicles without the ON&OFFROAD RSettings menu (settings) (Y page 278) package) (Y page 252) RON&OFFROAD menu (Y page 282) Ç Off-road program (vehicles with RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 282) the ON&OFFROADpackage) (Y page 252) LOW LOW RANGE off-road gear Trip menu RANGE (Y page 254) Standard display _ Adaptive Highbeam Assist (Y page 130) À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 234) Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 239) Ã Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 245) X Press and hold the % button on the ë HOLD function (Y page 211) steering wheel until the Trip menu with Ä Distance warning function trip odometer : and odometer ; is (Y page 68) shown. Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) Menus and submenus 271

Trip computer "From Start" or "From Displaying the range and current fuel Reset" consumption

Example: trip computer "From Start" : Approximate range : Distance ; Current fuel consumption (not for AMG ; Time vehicles) = Average speed X Press the = or ; button on the ? Average fuel consumption steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X X Press the = or ; button on the Press the 9 or : button to select the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. current fuel consumption (not for AMG vehicles) and the approximate range. On-board computer and displays X Press 9 or : to select From Start or From Reset. The approximate range that can be covered depends on the fuel level and your current The values in the From Start submenu are driving style. If there is only a small amount calculated fromthe start of a journey, while of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display shows the values in the From Reset submenu are a vehicle being refueled C instead of the calculated from the last time the submenu range. was reset (Y page 272). The From Start trip computer is Digital speedometer automatically reset when: RThe ignition has been switched off for more than four hours. R999 hours have been exceeded. R9,999 miles have been exceeded. The From Reset trip computer is automatically reset if the value exceeds 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles. : Digital speedometer X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the digital speedometer.

Z 272 Menus and submenus

Resetting values Route guidance not active

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start" : Direction of travel X Press the = or ; button on the ; Current street steering wheel to select the Trip menu. X Press the 9 or : button to select the Route guidance active function that you wish to reset. No change of direction announced X Press the a button. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. On-board computer and displays You can reset the values of the following functions: Rtrip odometer R"From Start" trip computer : Distance to the destination R"FromReset" trip computer ; Distance to the next change of direction = Current street Navigation system menu ? Symbol "follow the road's course" Displaying navigation instructions Change of direction announced without a lane recommendation In the Navi menu, the multifunction display shows navigation instructions. For more information, see the separate operating instructions. X Switch on the audio system with Becker® MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the = or ; button on the : Road into which the change of direction steering wheel to select the Navi menu. leads ; Distance to change of direction and visual distance display = Change-of-direction icon When a change of direction has been announced, you will see visual distance display ; next to the symbol for change of direction =.This shortens from the bottom Menus and submenus 273 to the top of the display as you approach the Audio menu point of the announced change of direction. Selecting aradio station Change of direction announced with a lane recommendation

: Waveband ; Station frequency with memory position : Road into which the change of direction leads i Station ; is displayed with the station ; Distance to change of directionand visual frequency or station name. The memory distance display position is only displayed along with = Lane recommendation station ; if this has beenstored. On-board computer and displays ? New lane during a change of direction X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; see A Uninterrupted lane the separate operating instructions. B Change-of-direction icon X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. On multilane roads, the system can display lane recommendation = for the next change X To select astoredstation: briefly press of direction. During the change of direction, the 9 or : button. additional lanes may be displayed. X To select a station from the station Lane recommendations are only displayed if list: press and briefly hold the 9 the relevant data is availableonthe digital or : button. map. If no stationlist is received: X To select astation using the station Other status indicators of the search: press and briefly hold the 9 navigation system or : button.

RO:you have reached the destination or an i For informationonswitching waveband intermediate destination. and storing stations; see the separate RNew Route... or Calculating Route: operating instructions. calculating a new route i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a R Off Map or Off Mapped Road:the vehicle normal radio. position is outside the area of the digital map (off-map position). For more informationonsatellite radio operation, see the separate operating RNo Route:no route could be calculated to instructions. the selected destination.

Z 274 Menus and submenus

Operating an audio player or audio Video DVD operation media

Display CD/DVD changer (example) Display CD/DVD changer (example) : Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer : Current CD in the CD/DVD changer ; Current scene ; Current title X Switch on COMAND and select video DVD; Audio data from various audio devices or see the separate operating instructions. media can be played, depending on the X Press the = or ; button on the equipment installed in the vehicle. steering wheel to select the Audio menu. X Switch on COMAND and activate audio X To selectthe next/previous scene: On-board computer and displays CD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see the briefly press the 9 or : button. separate operating instructions. X To selectascene from the scene list X Press the = or ; button on the (rapid scrolling): press and hold the steering wheel to select the Audio menu. 9 or : buttonuntil desired X To select the next/previous track: scene ; has been reached. briefly press the 9 or : button. X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the Telephone menu 9 or : button until desired Introduction track ; has been reached. If you press and hold 9 or :, the G WARNING rapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all The driver's attentionto the road must always audio drives or data carriers support this be his/her primary focus when driving. For function. your safety and the safety of others, we If track information is stored on the audio recommend that you pull over to a safe device or medium, the multifunction display location and stop before placing or taking a will show the number and title of the track. telephone call. If you choose to use the The currenttrack does not appear in audio telephone while driving, please use the hands- AUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: external free device and only use the telephone when audio source connected). road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second. Menus and submenus 275

X Switch on the mobile phone (see the Dialing a number from the phone book separate operating instructions). X Press the = or ; button on the X Switch on COMAND (see the separate steering wheel to select the Tel menu. operating instructions). X Press the 9, : or a button to X ® Establish a Bluetooth connection to switch to the phone book. COMAND; see the separate operating instructions. X Press the 9 or : button to select the desired name. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Tel menu. or X To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold You will see one of the following display the 9 or : button for longer than messages in the multifunction display: one second. RPhone READY or the name of the network Rapid scrolling stops whenyou release the provider: the mobile phone has found a button or reach the end of the list. network and is ready to receive. X If only one telephone number is stored RTelephone No Service: there is no for a name: press the 6 or a button network available or the mobile phone is

to start dialing. On-board computer and displays searching for a network. or X If there is more than one number for a Accepting acall particular name: press the 6 or a button to display the numbers. X Press the 9 or : button to select the number you want to dial. X Press the 6 or a button to start dialing. or Example: incoming call X To exit the telephone book: press the If someone calls you whenyou are in the ~ or % button. Tel menu, a display message appears in the multifunction display. Redialing X Press the 6 button on the steering The on-board computer saves the last names wheel to accept an incoming call. or numbers dialed in the redial memory. You can accept a call even if you are not in X Press the = or ; button on the the Tel menu. steering wheel to select the Tel menu. X Press the 6 button to switch to the Rejecting or ending acall redial memory. X Press the ~ button on the steering X Press the 9 or : button to select the wheel. desired name or number. You can end or reject a call even if you are not X Press the 6 or a button to start in the Tel menu. dialing. or X To exit the redial memory: press the ~ or % button.

Z 276 Menus and submenus

Assistance menu Switching the distance warning function on and off Introduction X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press 9 or : to select Distance Warning. X Press the a button. The currentselection is displayed. In the DriveAssist menu, you have the X To activate/deactivate: press the a following options: button again. Rshowing the distance display When the distance warning function is (Y page 276) activated, the multifunction display shows Ractivating/deactivating thedistance the Ä symbol if the HOLD function is not warning function (Y page 276) activated (Y page 211).

On-board computer and displays Ractivating/deactivating the PRE-SAFE® Vehicles with the Active Parking Assist Brake (Y page 276) driving system: if PARKTRONIC is activated Ractivating/deactivating ATTENTION and you are driving at aspeed below ASSIST(Ypage 277) 22 mph (35 km/h), the j Active Parking Ractivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist Assist symbol is shown instead of the Ä or Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 277) symbol (Y page 221). Ractivating/deactivating Lane Keeping Further information on the distance warning Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist function (Y page 68). (Y page 277) Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Showing the distance display Brake ® X Press = or ; on the steering wheel PRE-SAFE Brake is only available in vehicles to select the DriveAssist menu. with DISTRONIC PLUS. X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Distance Display. to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display PRE-SAFE Brake. appears in the multifunction display X Press the a button. (Y page 205). The currentselection is displayed. If the Sensors Deactivated message X To activate/deactivate: press the a appears, the radar sensorsystem is button again. deactivated. When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, the X Activate the radarsensor system multifunction display shows the Ä symbol (Y page 281). as long as the HOLD function is not activated (Y page 211). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: if PARKTRONIC is activated and you are driving at a speed under 22 mph (35 km/h), the j Menus and submenus 277

Active Parking Assist symbol is shown instead X Activate the radar sensor system of the Ä symbol (Y page 221). (Y page 281). If the PRE-SAFE Brake: Sensors For further information about Blind Spot Deactivated message appears, the radar Assist, see (Y page 237). sensor system is deactivated. For further information about Active Blind X Activate the radarsensor system Spot Assist, see (Y page 241). (Y page 281). For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake, Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist see (Y page 73). X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Activating/deactivating ATTENTION to select the DriveAssist menu. ASSIST X Press the 9 or : button to select X Press = or ; on the steering wheel Lane Keep. Asst. to select the DriveAssist menu. X Press the a button. X Press the 9 or : button to select The currentselection is displayed.

Attention Asst. X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays X Press the a button. X Press : or 9 to set Off, Standard The currentselection is displayed. or Adaptive. X To activate/deactivate: press the a X Press the a button to save the setting. button again. When Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane When ATTENTION ASSIST is activated, the Keeping Assist is activated, the à symbol À symbol appears in the multifunction appears in the multifunction display when the display when the ignition is on. ignition is on. For further information about ATTENTION For further information about Lane Keeping ASSIST, see (Y page 234). Assist, see (Y page 239). For further information about Active Lane Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Keeping Assist, see (Y page 245). Assist

X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the DriveAssist menu. Maintenance menu X Press the 9 or : button to select Blind Spot Asst.. X Press the a button. The currentselection is displayed. X To activate/deactivate: press the a button again. If the Blind Spot Assist Sensors In the Serv menu, you have the following Deactivated or Active Blind Spot options: Assist Sensors Deactivated message Rcall up display messages in message appears, the radar sensor system is memory (Y page 286) deactivated. Rrestart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 408)

Z 278 Menus and submenus

Rcheck the tire pressure electronically X Press the : or 9 button to select the (Y page 408) Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: Rcall up service due date (Y page 371) function. You will see the selected setting: km or miles. Settings menu X Press the a button to save the setting. Introduction The selected unit of measurement for distance applies to: Rthe digital speedometer in the Trip menu Rthe odometer and the trip odometer Rthe trip computer Rcurrent consumption and the range Rthe navigation instructions in the Navi menu In the Sett. menu, you have the following options: Rcruise control On-board computer and displays RDISTRONIC PLUS Rchanging the instrument cluster settings R (Y page 278) ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rchanging the light settings (Y page 278) Selecting the permanent display function Rchanging the vehicle settings You can determine whether the multifunction (Y page 280) display permanently shows your speed or the Rchanging the convenience settings outside temperature. (Y page 281) X Press the = or ; button on the Rrestoring the factory settings steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. (Y page 282) X Press the : or 9 button to select the Inst. Cluster submenu. Instrumentcluster submenu X Press a to confirm. Selecting the unit of measurement for X Press the : or 9 button to select the distance Permanent Display: function. The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: You will see the selected setting: Outside function allows you to choose whether Temperature or Speedometer km/h certain displays appear in kilometers or miles (USA)/Speedometer mph (Canada). in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. You can determine whether the multifunction display shows some messages in miles or i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph kilometers. (Canada). X Press the = or ; button on the Light submenu steering wheel to selectthe Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Setting the daytime running lamps Inst. Cluster submenu. i This function is not available in Canada. X Press a to confirm. Menus and submenus 279

X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the : or 9 button to adjust the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. brightness to any level from Off to Level X Press the : or 9 button to select the 5 (bright). Lights submenu. X Press the a or % button to save the X Press a to confirm. setting. X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime Setting the ambient lighting color Running Lights: function. X Press the = or ; button on the If the Daytime Running Lights: have steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. been switched on, the cone of light and the W symbol in the multifunction display X Press the : or 9 button to select the are shown in red. Lights submenu. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press a to confirm. Further information on daytime running X Press the : or 9 button to select the Ambient Light Color function. lamps (Y page 124). X Press a to confirm. Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/ X Press the : or 9 button to set the off On-board computer and displays color to SOLAR, NEUTRAL or POLAR. X Press the = or ; button on the X Press the a or % button to save the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. setting. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. Surround lighting and exterior lighting X Press a to confirm. delayed switch-off X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the = or ; button on the Adaptive Highbeam function. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. If the Adaptive Highbeam function has X Press the : or 9 button to select the been switched on, the cone of light and the Light submenu. _ symbol in the upper multifunction X Press a to confirm. display are shown in red. X Press : or 9 to select the X Press the a button to save the setting. Surround Lighting function. For further information about Adaptive When the Surround Lighting function is Highbeam Assist, see (Y page 130). activated, the light cone and the area around the vehicle are displayed in red in Setting the brightness of the ambient the multifunction display. lighting X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting temporarily: X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the X Press a to confirm. SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Press the : or 9 button to select the ignition lock. Amb. Light +/-. function. The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is You will see the selected setting. deactivated. X Press a to confirm.

Z 280 Menus and submenus

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is displayed in red in the multifunction reactivated the next time you start the display. engine. X Press the a button to save the setting. If you have activated the Surround Lighting functionand the light switch is set Vehicle submenu to Ã, the following functions are activated when it is dark: Activating/deactivating the automatic RSurround lighting: the exteriorlighting door locking mechanism remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking If you activate the Automatic Door Lock with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, function, the vehicle is centrally locked above the surround lighting is switched off and a speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h). the automatic headlamp mode is activated X Press the = or ; button on the (Y page 124). steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle exterior lighting remains lit for submenu. 60 seconds after the engine is switched off. If you close all the doors and the tailgate, X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays the exterior lighting goes off after X Press : or 9 to select the 5seconds. Automatic Door Lock function. When the Automatic Door Lock function i Depending on your vehicle's equipment, is activated, the vehicle doors are displayed when the surround lighting and delayed in red in the multifunction display. switch-off exterior lighting are on, the following light up: X Press the a button to save the setting. RParking lamps For further information on the automatic RDaytime running lamps locking feature, see (Y page 86). RSide marker lamps Activating/deactivating the acoustic RSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors locking verification signal Activating/deactivating the interior If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, lighting delayed switch-off an acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehicle. If you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remains X Press the = or ; button on the on for 20seconds after you remove the steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle X Press the = or ; button on the submenu. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the : or 9 button to select the X Press the : or 9 button to select the Lights submenu. Acoustic Lock function. X Press a to confirm. If the Acoustic Lock function is activated, the & symbol in the multifunction X Press : or 9 to select the display lights up red. Interior Lighting Delay function. When the Interior Lighting Delay X Press the a button to save the setting. function is activated, the vehicle interior is Menus and submenus 281

Activating/deactivating the radarsensor X Press a to confirm. system X Press : or 9 to select the Easy X Press the = or ; button on the Entry/Exit function. steering wheel to selectthe Sett. menu. If the Easy Entry/Exit function is X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle activated, the vehicle steering wheel is submenu. displayed in red in the multifunction X Press a to confirm. display. X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the 9 or : button to select Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):. Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT You will see the selected setting: Enabled feature (Y page 117). or Disabled. Switching the belt adjustment on/off X Press the a button to save the setting. X Press the = or ; button on the The following systems are switched off when steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. the radar sensor system is deactivated: X Press the : or 9 button to select the RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198) Convenience submenu. RBAS PLUS (Y page 67) X Press a to confirm. On-board computer and displays RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73) X Press the : or 9 button to select the RBlind Spot Assist (Y page 237) Belt Adjustment function. RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 241) When the Belt Adjustment function is activated, the vehicle seat belt is displayed Convenience submenu in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting. Activating/deactivating the EASY- ENTRY/EXIT feature For further information on belt adjustment, see (Y page 57). G WARNING You must make sure no one can become Switching the fold-in mirrors with the trapped or injured by the moving steering locking feature on/off wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is This function is only available on vehicles with activated. the memory function (Y page 121). To stop steering wheel movement, move When you activate the Auto. Mirror steering wheel adjustment lever or press one Folding function, the exterior mirrors are of the memory position buttons. folded in when the vehicle is locked. If you Do not leave children unattended in the unlock the vehicle and then open a door, the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. exterior mirrors fold out again. Children could open the driver's door and X Press the = or ; button on the unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. feature, which could result in an accident X Press the : or 9 button to select the and/or serious personal injury. Convenience submenu. X X Press the = or ; button on the Press a to confirm. steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. X Press the : or 9 button to select the Convenience submenu.

Z 282 Menus and submenus

X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. ON&OFFROAD menu Mirror Folding function. If the Auto. Mirror Folding function is activated, the vehicle's exterior mirror is displayed in red in the multifunction display. X Press the a button to save the setting.

Multifunction display (example) X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the ON&OFFROAD menu. You can set the following currentsettings to appear in the ON&OFFROAD menu: ROn-road program (Y page 247) ROff-road program (Y page 252) On-board computer and displays

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out AMG menu in AMG vehicles If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrors AMG displays in using button : , they will not fold out automatically (Y page 119). You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors using button :.

Restoring the factory settings

X Press the = or ; button on the : Digital speedometer steering wheel to select the Sett. menu. ; Gear indicator X Press the : or 9 button to select the Factory Setting submenu. = Upshift indicator X Press a to confirm. ? Engine oil temperature The Reset All Settings? message A Coolant temperature appears. B Status indicator (indicator not available in X Press the : or 9 button to select USA/Canada) No or Yes. X Press = or ; on the steering wheel X Press a to confirm the selection. to select the AMG menu. If you select Yes, the multifunction display Upshift indicator UP = indicates that the shows a confirmation message. engine has reached the overrevving range For safety reasons, the Daytime Running when in the manual gearshift program. Lights function in the Lights submenu is Upshift indicator UP = fades out other only reset if the vehicle is stationary. messages until you have shifted up. If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡ (80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue. Menus and submenus 283

Avoid driving at full engine outputduring this You can start the RACETIMER when the time. engine is running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. SETUP X Press = or ; on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the RACETIMER is shown. X To start: press the a button to start the RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time : Drive program (C/S/M) ; ESP® mode (ON/OFF) = Suspension tuning (COMFORT/SPORT/ SPORT+) SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) mode and the On-board computer and displays suspension tuning. X Press the = or ; button to select X Press the = or ; button on the Interm. Time. steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 buttonrepeatedly until The intermediate time is displayed for five SETUP is displayed. seconds.

RACETIMER Starting a new lap

Displaying and starting RACETIMER The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a closed race circuit. Do not use the function on public roads.

: RACETIMER ; Fastestlap time (bestlap) = Lap

X Press a to confirm New Lap. : Lap i It is possible to store a maximum of ; RACETIMER sixteen laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with Finish Lap.

Z 284 Menus and submenus

Stopping the RACETIMER Overall statistics

X Press the % button on the steering : RACETIMER overall evaluation wheel. ; Total time driven X Press a to confirm Yes. = Average speed The RACETIMER interrupts timing when you ? Distance covered stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to A Maximum speed position 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn the This function is shown if you have stored at SmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then press least one lap and stopped the RACETIMER. a to confirm Start, timing is continued.

On-board computer and displays X Press the = or ; button on the Resetting the current lap steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Stop the RACETIMER. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the X Press the = or ; button to select overall evaluation is shown. Reset Lap. X Press a to reset the lap time to "0". Lap statistics

Deleting all laps

: Lap ; Lap time If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are = Average lap speed deleted. ? Lap length You cannot delete individual stored laps. If A Top speed during lap you have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not have to be reset. X Reset the current lap. X Press a to confirm Reset. Reset Race Timer? appears in the multifunction display. X Press the : button to select Yes and press the a button to confirm. All laps are deleted. Menus and submenus 285

This function is only available if you have stored at least two laps and have stopped the RACETIMER. X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the AMG menu. X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the lap evaluation is shown. Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :. X Press the 9 or : button to select a different lap evaluation. On-board computer and displays

Z 286 Display messages

Display messages Introduction General notes Display messages appear in themultifunction display. Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified forminthe Operator's Manual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display. Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this Operator's Manual. Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone. When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:

RHOLD function (Y page 211) RParking (Y page 183)

Hiding display messages On-board computer and displays X Press the a or % button on the steering wheel to hide the display message. The display message is cleared. The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages have been remedied.

Message memory The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory.You can call up the display messages: X Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages, for example. X Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages. X Press a to confirm. X Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages. When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high- priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted. Display messages 287

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions !÷ ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function, hill Currently start assist, the adaptive brake lights, crosswind driving Unavailable See assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily Operator's Manual unavailable. COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.

Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. On-board computer and displays G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. !÷ ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable Inoperative See due to a malfunction. Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and ! warning lamps in the instrumentcluster also light up. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

Z 288 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lockifyou brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a

On-board computer and displays Currently malfunction. Unavailable See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster. The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above are available again. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 289

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ÷ ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a Inoperative See malfunction. Operator's Manual COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps lightup in the instrument cluster. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus

increase. On-board computer and displays If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. T! EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance ÷ and ESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction. Inoperative See COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and Operator's Manual PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 290 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicatorlamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic only)!(Canada release of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 184). only) You are driving with the electric parking brake applied. Release Parking X Release the electric parking brake manually. Brake The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes and a warning tone sounds. You are making an emergency stop using the electric parking brake (Y page 184).

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. only)!(Canada To apply: only) On-board computer and displays X Switch the ignition off. Parking Brake See Operator's Manual X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds. X Shift the transmission to P. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp and the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. or X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 184). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Do not drive on. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 291

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicatorlamp flashes and the yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. To release: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Release the electric parking brake manually. To apply: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp continues to flash: X Do not drive on.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 424). On-board computer and displays X Shift the transmission to P. X Turn the frontwheels towards the curb. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then goes out or remains lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Apply the electric parking brake. If it is not possible to engage the electric parking brake: X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If it is not possible to release the electric parking brake:

X Release the electric parking brake automatically (Y page 184). If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 292 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or release the electric parkingbrake, the red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop.

F(USA The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about ten only)!(Canada seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or only) released. It then goes out or remains lit. Parking Brake The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because of Inoperative overvoltage or undervoltage.

On-board computer and displays X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by charging the battery or restarting the engine. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parking brake: X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on. X Engage or release the electric parking brake. If the electric parking brake still cannot be released: X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion. The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and the red F (USA only)/ ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes. It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually. X Shift the transmission to P. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA The red F (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights up. only)!(Canada You attempted to release the electric parking brake while the only) ignition was switched off. Turn On the X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock. Ignition to X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition. Release the Parking Brake Display messages 293

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$(USA There is notenough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. In addition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamp only)J(Canada lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds. only) G WARNING Check Brake Fluid Level The braking effect may be impaired. There is a riskofanaccident. X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

# The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit. On-board computer and displays X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Check Brake Pad Wear G USA only: one or more of the main functions in the mbrace system are malfunctioning. mbrace Inoperative Canada only: one or more of the main functions of the TELEAID system are malfunctioning. X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at aqualified specialist workshop. X Canada only: have the TELEAIDsystem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

PRE-SAFE Important functionsof PRE-SAFE® have failed.All other occupant Inoperative See safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available. Operator's Manual X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Z 294 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Functions Brake Assistis temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Limited Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Rthe sensor in the bumper is dirty. Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Adaptive Brake Assist is operational again.

On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Cleanthe bumpers (Y page 375). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 72). Display messages 295

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions PRE-SAFE Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: Functions PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Limited Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. See Operator's Rthe sensors in the radiatorgrill and the bumper are dirty. Manual Rthe radarsensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.

If the display message does not disappear: On-board computer and displays X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 375). X Restart the engine. X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 72).

PRE-SAFE Vehicles without the Active Driving Assistance package: Adaptive Functions Limited Brake Assist is faulty. The distance warning function may also have See Operator's failed. Manual Vehicles with the Active Driving Assistance package: PRE-SAFE® Brake is faulty. BAS PLUS or the distance warning function may also have failed. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint System). SRS Malfunction The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Service Required G WARNING The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Further information on occupant safety (Y page 43).

Z 296 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster. Front Left Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be or Front Right triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not Malfunction be triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 SRS has malfunctionedat the rear on the left or right. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Left SRS Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The airbags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be

On-board computer and displays or Rear Right SRS triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not Malfunction be triggered. Service Required There is an increased riskofinjury. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. 6 SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster. Rear Center SRS Malfunction G WARNING Service Required The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 6 There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the Left Side Curtain instrument cluster. Airbag Malfunction Service Required G WARNING or Right Side The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered Curtain Airbag unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be Malfunction triggered. Service Required There is an increased risk of injury. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 297

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, even Airbag Enabled See though: Operator's Manual Ra child, a small adult or an objectweighing less than the system's weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat or Rthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied The system may detectobjects or forces applying additional weight on the seat. G WARNING The air bag may deploy unintentionally. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Switch the ignition off. X Open the front-passenger door. X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front- passenger seat. X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the weight. The system may otherwise detectthe additional weight and interpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe ^a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appearinthe multifunction display.

Z 298 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again.Whether the ^a indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Front Passenger The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, even Airbag Disabled though: See Operator's Ran adult Manual or Ra person larger than a certain size is occupying the front- passenger seat If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may

On-board computer and displays interpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is. G WARNING The front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident. There is an increased risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Switch the ignition off. X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle. X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and switch on the ignition. X Observe the ^a indicator lamp in the center console and the multifunction display and check the following: Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on: Rthe ^a indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. When the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 48). Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction display. X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system checks have been completed. X Make sure that the display messages do not appearinthe multifunction display. Display messages 299

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occupied again.Whether the ^a indicator lamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant. If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Lights i Display messages about LEDs: This display message will only appearifall LEDs have failed.

Displaymessages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The left or right-hand cornering light is defective. b On-board computer and displays X Checkwhether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left (Y page 133). Cornering Light or Check Right or Cornering Light X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Low (Y page 133). Beam or Check Right Low Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself. Check Trailer Left Turn Signal or or Check Trailer X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Right Turn Signal b The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Rear Left (Y page 133). Turn Signal or Check Rear Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 300 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective. X Checkwhether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 133). Turn Signal or Check Front Right or Turn Signal X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror is defective. Check Left Mirror X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Turn Signal (Y page 133). or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.

On-board computer and displays X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Center Brake (Y page 133). Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Brake (Y page 133). Lamp or Check Right Brake Lamp or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Tail (Y page 133). and Brake Lamps or Check Right Tail or and Brake Lamps X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right-hand high beam is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left High (Y page 133). Beam or Check Right High Beam or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 301

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The leftorright-hand license plate lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself License Plate Lamp (Y page 133). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 133). Parking Lamp or Check Front or Right Parking Lamp X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The backup lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Backup Light On-board computer and displays (Y page 133). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left or right front side marker lamp is defective. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Front Left (Y page 133). Sidemarker Lamp or Check Front or Right Sidemarker X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Lamp b The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective. or Check Left Tail Lamp or Check The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective. Right Tail Lamp X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself (Y page 133). or X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. b The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty. X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself Check Left Daytime (Y page 133). Running Light or Check Right or Daytime Running X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Light

Z 302 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions b The active lightfunction is defective. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. Active Headlamps Inoperative b The exterior lighting is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunction See Operator's Manual Vehicles with trailer tow hitch: a fuse may have blown.

X Check the fuses (Y page 396). X If necessary, replace the blown fuse. Observe the warning notes. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The light sensoris defective.

On-board computer and displays b X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Auto Lamp Function Inoperative b The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. A warning tone also sounds. Switch Off Lights X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive Highbeam Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily Assist Currently inoperative. Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. X Cleanthe windshield. If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed. Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again. Display messages 303

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions + The coolant level is too low. Check Coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine Level See cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Operator's Manual X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so (Y page 369). X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ? The fan motor is faulty. X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †) drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engineto heavy loads, e.g. driving in On-board computer and displays mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic. ? The coolant is too hot. Awarning tone also sounds. Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn G WARNING Engine Off Do notdrive when yourengine is overheated. Thiscan cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartmentto catch fire. Steamfrom the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Waituntil the engine has cooled down. X Make sure thatthe air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display. X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Z 304 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions # The battery is notbeing charged. Awarning tone also sounds. Possible causes are: Ra defective alternator Ra torn poly-V-belt Ra malfunction in the electronics X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Openthe hood. X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn. If the poly-V-belt is torn: ! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.

On-board computer and displays X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. If the poly-V-belt is not damaged: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 4 The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level. Awarning tone also sounds. Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling X Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 368). X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 368). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Display messages 305

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions 4 AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. X Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at the latest Check Engine Oil (Y page 368). Level (Add 1 quart) X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 368). X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if engine oil needs to be added more often than usual. ! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will otherwise be damaged. Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http:// bevo.mercedes-benz.com. 8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Fuel Level Low On-board computer and displays C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank. X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail. 8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking. Gas Cap Loose X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: X Close the fuel filler cap. If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. 8 Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel level has fallen below the reserve range. Ultra Low-sulfur X Refuel at the nearest gas station. Diesel Fuel Only X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM). ¸ Vehicles with a diesel engine: the engine air filter is dirty and must be replaced. Replace Air Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. ! Vehicles with a diesel engine: there is water in the fuel filter. The water must be drained off. Check Fuel Filter X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 306 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Ø The DEF tank is almost empty. X Have the DEFtank filled as soon as possible at aqualified Check Additive See specialist workshop (Y page 181). Operator's Manual Ø The DEFlevel has fallen to a minimum. You can start the engine a further 16 times. Remaining Starts: X Have the DEFtank filled immediately at a qualified specialist 16 workshop (Y page 181). i You can start the engine a further 16 times. If DEFis not added, it will then not be possible to restart the engine. Refill the DEF tank with approximately 1 gal (3.8 l) DEF (Y page 181).

Driving systems On-board computer and displays Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions À Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or alack of concentration on thepart of thedriver. A warning tone Attention Assist: also sounds. Take a Break! X If necessary, take a break. During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get enough rest. À ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop. Attention Assist Inoperative Á You cannot change the vehicle level. Possible causes are: R Drive More Slowly you are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. Ryou are towing a trailer. Rthe trailer-coupling socket is being used, e.g. for a bicycle rack. X Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again. RVehicles with the ON&OFFROADpackage (Y page 207) RVehicles with the AIRMATIC package (Y page 213) X Observe the notes on towing a trailer (Y page 257). Display messages 307

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Á You have selected a higher vehicle level. The compressor first needs to cool down because of frequentlevel changes. Compressor Is X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level. Cooling X Make sure that there is sufficientground clearance. X Allow the compressorto cool down. When the compressor has cooled down, the display message disappears. The vehicle then continues rising to the selected level. Á AIRMATIC is malfunctioning. X Drive in a manner appropriate for the current vehicle level, but Malfunction no faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance. X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays Á You are exceeding the speed permissible for the selected off-road level. Max. Speed 12 mph In addition, the vehicle level display appears between the vehicle icon and the display message, and a warning tone sounds. G WARNING The vehicle could tip and rollover. There is a risk of an accident. X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics. X Only make slight steering movements and avoid fast steering movements. X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2 has been reached.

ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve Systemis faulty. The vehicle's handling SYSTEM characteristics may be affected. Malfunctioning X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h). X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 308 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ACTIVE CURVE The Active Curve Systemis faulty. The vehicle's handling SYSTEM Malfunction characteristics are severely impaired.Awarning tone also sounds. See Operator's G WARNING Manual There is a riskofanaccident. X Drive on carefully. X Adjust your driving style to the altered handling characteristics. X Avoid suddenacceleration in tightbends and fast steering movements. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately. g The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3to off-road level 2. The display message informs you of the maximum speed Lowering Max. permissible for off-road level 3. On-board computer and displays Speed 12 mph X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) until off-road level 2 has been reached. 8 The differential lockis malfunctioning. X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). Different. Lock Sys. Malfunction X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. 8 The differential lock is too hot and has been disengaged. X Drive on carefully. Different. Locking Sys. Cooling Down X Allow the differential lock to cool down. Please Wait The differential lock reengages as soon as it has cooled down. LOW RANGE Stop Agearshift process has been canceled. LOW RANGE is in the Apply Parking Brake neutral position.There is no connection between the engine and the drive wheels. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Apply the electric parking brake. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Repeatthe gearshift process.

LOW RANGE LOW RANGE is malfunctioning. Malfunction To X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80km/h). Park, Apply Brake X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Display messages 309

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed forthe gearshift process. Speed 25 mph X Drive more slowly. The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Max. You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process. Speed 40 mph X Drive more slowly. The gear change is made.

LOW RANGE Shift to You have reduced the vehicle speed, but the automatic Position N Briefly transmission is not in position N. X Briefly shift the automatic transmission to position N.

LOW RANGE Shifting The gearshift process has been canceled. Canceled Please X Repeatthe gearshift process. Reactivate On-board computer and displays à DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) is deactivated due to a malfunction. Inoperative X Have DSR checked at a qualified specialist workshop. ë The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding. Awarning tone also sounds. Off X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 211).

Radar Sensors The radar sensor system is deactivated. Deactivated See X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 281). Operator's Manual

Z 310 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Lane Keeping Lane Keeping AssistorActive Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated Assist Currently and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are: Unavailable See Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty. Operator's Manual Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog. or Active Lane Keeping Assist Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period. Currently Rthe lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow. Unavailable See When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display Operator's Manual message disappears. Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational again. If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

On-board computer and displays X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Clean the windshield.

Lane Keeping Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective. Assist X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative or Active Lane Keeping Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily Currently inoperative. Unavailable See You have established the electrical connection between the trailer Operator's Manual and your vehicle. or Active Blind X Press a on the steering wheel to confirm the display Spot Assist message. Currently Unavailable See Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated while Operator's Manual towing a trailer. Display messages 311

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Rthe sensors are dirty. Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Rthe radarsensor system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again. On-board computer and displays If the display message does not disappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Clean the sensors (Y page 375). X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective. Inoperative or The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior Active Blind Spot mirrors. Assist Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been Canceled fastened. X Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the driver's door closed.

You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while steering intervention was active. X While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunction steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.

The vehicle has started to skid and ESP® has intervened. X Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 221).

Z 312 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Park Assist You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking Inoperative maneuvers. Active Parking Assistwill become available again after approximately ten minutes (Y page 221). X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Switch off and restart the engine. If the display message continues to be displayed: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

PARKTRONIC is defective. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Park Assist The vehicle is parked. Awarning tone also sounds. On-board computer and displays Finished The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUShas been deactivated (Y page 198). If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUS Now DISTRONIC PLUSis operational againafter having been Available temporarily unavailable.You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198). DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are: Currently Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow. Unavailable See Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty. Operator's Manual Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation. Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range. Rthe on-board voltage is too low. Awarning tone also sounds. When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message disappears. DISTRONIC is operational again. If the display message does notdisappear: X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper (Y page 375). X Restartthe engine. Display messages 313

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions DISTRONIC PLUS DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. Inoperative BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may be inoperative as well. Awarning tone also sounds. X Visitaqualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUS You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no Inactive longer controlling the speed of the vehicle. X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled. --- mph X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198).

Cruise Control Cruise control is defective. On-board computer and displays Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise Control Acondition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled. --- mph You have tried to store aspeed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example. X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store the speed. X Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 195).

Z 314 Display messages

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tire The tire pressure loss warningsystem has detected a significant Pressure Soon loss in pressure. Awarning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a riskofthe following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. On-board computer and displays There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 383). X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pressure is correct (Y page 408).

Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display Pressure Then message and has not been restarted since. Restart Run Flat X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires. Indicator X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 408).

Run Flat Indicator The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty. Inoperative X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Correct Tire The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire Pressure pressure difference between the wheels is too great. X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 408). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 411). Display messages 315

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display. Awarning tone also sounds. G WARNING With tire pressures which are too low, there is a riskofthe following hazards: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking On-board computer and displays maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 383). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 408). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The Malfunction wheel position is shown in the multifunction display. G WARNING If you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards: RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. RYou could lose control of the vehicle. RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build- up and possibly a fire. There is a risk of an accident. X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 383).

Z 316 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Tire Press. Due to a source of radiointerference, no signals can be received Monitor Currently from the wheel sensors.The tire pressure monitor is temporarily Unavailable malfunctioning. X Drive on. The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the problem has been solved.

TirePress. There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several Sensor(s) Missing wheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in the multifunction display. X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. Monitor The tire pressure monitor is deactivated. On-board computer and displays Inoperative No X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors. Wheel Sensors The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. The tire pressure monitor is faulty. Monitor X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Shift to 'P' or You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in 'N' to Start Engine position R or D. X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longer Malfunction being charged. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity. X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before you switch off the engine. X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183).

Apply Brake to You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to Shift from 'P' position D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal. X Depress the brake pedal. Display messages 317

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions Transmission Not The driver's dooris open and the transmission is in position R, N in P Risk of or D. Vehicle Rolling Awarning tone also sounds. Away X Shift the transmission to position P. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183).

Service Required You cannotchange the transmission position due to a malfunction. Do Not Shift Gears Awarning tone also sounds. Visit Dealer If transmission position D is selected: X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the transmission from position D. If transmission position R, N or P is selected: X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service. On-board computer and displays Only Shift to 'P' The vehicle is moving. when Vehicle is X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying Stationary attention to road and traffic conditions. X Shift the transmission to position P. A The tailgate is open. G WARNING When the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicle interior if the tailgate is open. There is a risk of poisoning. X Close the tailgate. ? The hood is open. G WARNING The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion. There is a risk of an accident. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Close the hood. C At least one door is open. Awarning tone also sounds. X Close all the doors.

Z 318 Display messages

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions _ The second row of seats is notengaged on the left-hand or right- hand side. 2nd Seat Row, Left X Fold back the second row of seats until it engages. Not Locked or 2nd Seat Row, Right Not Locked _ The third row of seats is not engaged on the left-hand or right-hand side. 3rd Seat Row, Left X Fold back the third row of seats until it engages. Not Locked or 3rd Seat Row, Right Not Locked Ð The powersteering is malfunctioning. Awarning tone also sounds. Power Steering On-board computer and displays Malfunction See G WARNING Operator's Manual You will need to use more force to steer. There is a riskofanaccident. X Check whetheryou are able to apply the extra force required. X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified specialist workshop. X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/ receiver range. X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears in the multifunction display. ¥ The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Check Washer Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 370).

Wiper The windshield wipers are malfunctioning. Malfunctioning X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard Warning The hazard warning lamps are faulty. Flashers X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Malfunctioning Display messages 319

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock. X Use the correct SmartKey. Key Does Not Belong to Vehicle  The SmartKey is in the ignition lock. X Remove the SmartKey. Take Your Key from Ignition  The SmartKey needs to be replaced. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Obtain a New Key  The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.

X Change the batteries (Y page 81). On-board computer and displays Replace Key Battery  This display message is displayed for a maximum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder. Don't Forget Your You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. Key The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave the vehicle.  The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds. Key Not Detected (red display message) If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lockthe vehicle centrally or start the engine. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is running because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves. Awarning tone also sounds. X Pull overand stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Z 320 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions  The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present. X Change the location of the SmartKey withthe KEYLESS-GO Key Not Detected functions in the vehicle. (white display message) If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected: X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.  The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle during locking. Key Detected in X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle. Vehicle  KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning tone also sounds. Remove 'Start' X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the Button and Insert desired position. On-board computer and displays Key X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.  At least one door is open. Awarning tone also sounds. X Close all doors and lockthe vehicle again. Close Doors to Lock Vehicle

Warning and indicator lamps in the ! Electric parking brake instrument cluster (yellow) (Y page 328) 6 SRS (Y page 328) Overview ; Check Engine (Y page 329) L Low-beam headlamps 8 Reserve fuel (Y page 329) (Y page 125) ? Coolant (Y page 330) T Parking lamps (Y page 126) · Distance warning function K High-beam headlamps (Y page 332) (Y page 128) % Diesel engine: preglow #! Turn signal (Y page 127) (Y page 165) ü Seat belts (Y page 321) h Tire pressure monitor $ (USA) Brakes (Y page 322) (Y page 333) J (Canada)Brakes (Y page 322) ! ABS (Y page 323) ÷ ESP®(Y page 325) å ESP® OFF (Y page 325) F (USA) Electric parking brake (red) (Y page 328) ! (Canada)Electric parking brake (red) (Y page 328) Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 321

Safety Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ü The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and frontpassenger After starting the to fasten their seat belts. engine, the red seat X Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 56). belt warning lamp lights up for 6seconds.

ü The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

After starting the X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). engine, the red seat The warning tone ceases. belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a warning tone sounds On-board computer and displays for up to six seconds.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.

The red seat belt X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). warning lamp lights up The warning lamp goes out. after the engine starts, as soon as the driver's There are objects on the front-passenger seat. or the front-passenger X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow door is closed. them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out.

ü The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. You The red seat belt are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven warning lamp flashes faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). and an intermittent X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 56). audible warning The warning lamp goes out and the intermittentwarning tone sounds. ceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.You are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or have briefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h). X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure place. The warning lamp goes out and the intermittentwarning tone ceases.

Z 322 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only) G WARNING J (Canada only) The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking The red brake system characteristics may be affected. warning lamp comes on There is a risk of an accident. while the engine is X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying running. A warning tone attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving also sounds. under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.

On-board computer and displays $ (USA only) There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. J (Canada only) G WARNING The red brake system The braking effect may be impaired. warning lamp comes on while the engine is There is a risk of an accident. running. A warning tone X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying also sounds. attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy the malfunction. X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 323

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ! ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to a The yellow ABS warning malfunction. For this reason, BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, lamp is lit while the ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® engine is running. Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are also deactivated, for example. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. On-board computer and displays If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.

Z 324 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! ABS is temporarily unavailable. Therefore, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, The yellow ABS warning EBD (electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®, lamp is lit while the PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD engine is running. function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are also deactivated. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. Possible causes are: Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete. Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example.

On-board computer and displays The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 325

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, The yellow ABS warning PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, lamp is lit while the the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving assistance engine is running. A and ESP® trailer stabilization, for example, are also not available. warning tone also ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. sounds. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-board computer and displays X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only) ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. For this reason, BAS,BAS J (Canada only) PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, COLLISION PREVENTION ÷å! ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, crosswind driving ® The red brake warning assistance and ESP trailer stabilization, for example, are also not available. lamp, the yellow ESP® and ESP® OFF warning ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. lamps and the yellow G WARNING ABS warning lamp are The brake system continuesto function normally, but without the lit while the engine is functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore running. lock if you brake hard, for example. The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 326 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷ ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk of The yellow ESP® skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin. warning lamp flashes Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. while the vehicle is in X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as motion. necessary. X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. X Do not deactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®.

å ESP® is deactivated. ® The yellow ESP OFF G WARNING warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. On-board computer and displays There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Reactivate ESP®. In rare cases (Y page 71), it may be best to deactivate ESP®. X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions. If ESP® cannot be activated: X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

÷å ESP®,BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE® Brake,COLLISION The yellow ESP® and PREVENTION ASSIST, the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® OFF warning crosswind driving assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are not lamps are lit while the available due to a malfunction. engine is running. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle. There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 327

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷å ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, HOLD, hill start assist, crosswind driving The yellow ESP® and assistance and ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily ESP® OFF warning unavailable. lamps are lit while the COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST, BAS PLUS and engine is running. PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed. ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated. self-diagnosis is not yet complete. G WARNING The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed above. The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase. If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.

There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident. On-board computer and displays X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h). The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes out. If the warning lamp is still on: X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Drive on carefully. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 328 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

F (USA only) X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction ! (Canada only) display. The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or lights up and/or ! warning lamp for the electric parking brake lights up.

6 There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental Restraint The red SRS warning System). lamp is lit while the G WARNING

On-board computer and displays engine is running. The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered. There is an increased risk of injury. X Drive on carefully. X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

For further information about SRS, see (Y page 43). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 329

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ; There may be a malfunction, for example: The yellow Check Rin the engine management Engine warning lamp Rin the fuel injection system lights up while the Rin the exhaust system engine is running. Rin the ignition system (for vehicles with a gasoline engine) Rin the fuel system The emission limit values may be exceeded and the enginemay be running in emergency mode. X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified specialist workshop. i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified

specialist workshop as soon as the yellow CheckEngine warning On-board computer and displays lamp lights up.This is due to the legal requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.

Vehicles with a diesel engine: the fuel tank has been run dry (Y page 180). X Start the engine three to four times after refueling. If the yellow Check Engine warning lamp goes out, emergency running mode is canceled. The vehicle need not be checked.

8 The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range. The yellow reserve fuel X Refuel at the nearest gas station. warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.

8 The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closed The yellow reserve fuel correctly or the fuel system is leaking. warning lamp flashes X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed. while the vehicle is in X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler motion. cap. In addition, the ; X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist Check Engine warning workshop. lamp may light up.

Z 330 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is The red coolant defective. warning lamp lights up The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a while the engine is risk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high. running and the coolant X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, temperature gauge is paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue at the start of the scale. driving under any circumstances. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Consult a qualified specialist workshop. On-board computer and displays Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 331

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions ? The coolant level is too low. The red coolant ! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine warning lamp comes on cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged. while the engine is running. If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently. X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183).

X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until On-board computer and displays the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 369). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is under 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

? The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). The The red coolant airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant level warning lamp comes on may be too low. while the engine is G WARNING running. A warning tone also sounds. The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged. Do not drive whenyour engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire. Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the hood. There is a risk of injury.

Z 332 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has cooled down. X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes (Y page 369). X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine coolant system checked. X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice. X At coolant temperatures under 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the next

On-board computer and displays qualified specialist workshop. X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions · You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in yourline The red distance of travel at too high a speed. warning function X Be prepared to brake immediately. warning lamp comes on X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to while the vehicle is brake or take evasive action. moving. A warning tone also sounds. Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 198). Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 73). Further information on the distance warning function (Y page 68). Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 333

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions h The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at USA only: leastone of the tires. The yellow tire pressure G WARNING monitor warning lamp With tire pressures which aretoo low, there is a risk of the (pressure loss/ following hazards: malfunction) is lit. Canada only: Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly (pressure loss) is lit. impair tire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. On-board computer and displays X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so. X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 183). X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display. X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire (Y page 383). X Check the tire pressure (Y page 408). X If necessary, correct the tire pressure. h The tire pressure monitor is faulty. USA only: G WARNING The yellow tire pressure The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire monitor warning lamp pressure. (pressure loss/ malfunction) flashes for There is a risk of an accident. approximately one X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction minute and then display. remains lit. X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Z 334 335

Useful information ...... 336 Stowage areas ...... 336 Features ...... 344 Stowage and features 336 Stowage areas

Useful information never be exceeded. The gross load limit and the GVWR are specified on the vehicle i This Operator's Manual describes all identification plate on the B-pillar of the models and all standard and optional driver's door (Y page 412). equipment of your vehicle available at the The load must also be distributed so that the time of publication of the Operator's weight on each axle never exceeds the gross Manual. Country-specific differences are axle weight rating (GAWR) for the front and possible. Please note that your vehicle may rear axles. The specifications for GVWR and not be equipped with all features GAWR are on the vehicle identification plate described. This also applies to safety- on the B-pillar of the driver's door related systems and functions. (Y page 412). i Read the information on qualified Observe the notes on the loading the vehicle (Y page 412). specialist workshops: (Y page 28). The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle are dependent on the distribution of Stowage areas the load within the vehicle. For this reason, you should observe the following notes when Loading guidelines transporting a load: G WARNING RNever exceed the maximum permissible Stowage and features If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or gross vehicle weight or the gross axle not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip weight rating of the vehicle (including over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle occupants). occupants. There is a risk of injury, RThe cargo compartment is the preferred particularly in the eventofsudden braking or place to carry objects. a suddenchange in direction. RPosition heavy loads as far forwards as Always store objects so that they cannot be possible and as low down in the cargo flung around. Secure objects, luggage or compartmentas possible. loads against slipping or tipping before the RThe load must not protrude above the journey. upper edge of the seat backrests. RAlways place the load against the rear or G WARNING front seat backrests. Make sure that the Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust seat backrests are securely locked into gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate place. is open when the engine is running, RAlways place the load behind unoccupied particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust seats if possible. fumes could enter the passenger RUse the cargo tie down rings and the parcel compartment. There is a risk of poisoning. nets to transport loads and luggage. Turn off the engine before opening the RUse cargo tie-down rings and fastening tailgate. Never drive with the tailgate open. materials appropriate for the weight and The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicle size of the load. weight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, spare RHook in the cargo net when loading. wheel, installed accessories, vehicle RSecure the load with sufficiently strong and occupants and luggage/cargo. wear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edges The gross load limit and the gross vehicle for protection. weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle must Stowage areas 337

Stowage space Important safety notes G WARNING If objects in the passenger compartment are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. RAlways stow objects so that they cannot be 1 Glove box unlocked thrown around in such situations. 2 Glove box locked RAlways make sure that objects do not The glove box can be locked and unlocked protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets using the mechanical key. or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy,

hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too Stowage and features large in the cargo compartment.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 336).

Glove box

Partition : for stowing flat objects is located in the upper section of the glove box. It can be removed to increase the stowage space in the glove box. X To remove: pull partition : forwards and out X To install: insert partition : and push it back until it engages.

X To open: pull handle : and open glove box flap ;. X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until it engages. i The glove box can be cooled and ventilated (Y page 159).

Z 338 Stowage areas

Stowage compartment under the X To open: press marking :. armrest The eyeglasses compartmentopens downwards. X To close: press marking : again and eyeglasses compartment returns upwards and engages. Make sure that the eyeglasses compartment is always closed while the vehicle is in motion.

Stowage compartment in the front center console

X To open: pull handle : up. The armrest folds out. In the stowage compartment, there is a stowage tray. i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a

Stowage and features USB connection and an AUX IN connection or a Media Interface are installed in the stowage compartment. Media Interface is a universal interface for mobile audio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® X To open: slide cover : forwards. or MP3 Player. Stowage compartment ; appears. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will i There is a removable stowage tray in the go. storage compartment, in which objects such as an iPod® can be stored. Stowage compartment in the rear Eyeglasses compartment center console

X To open: briefly press the stowage compartment marking. The stowage compartment opens. Stowage areas 339 i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, there may be open stowage spaces above and below the stowage compartment.

Stowage nets G WARNING Vehicles with the Occupant Classification System(OCS): If the gross weight of the objects in the stowage net on the back of the front- : Stowage net in cargo compartment passenger seat is greater than 4.4 lb (2 kg), Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 336) OCS cannot correctly assess the occupant's and the safety notes regarding stowage weight category. The front-passenger front air spaces (Y page 337). bag could deploy without cause, or may fail to deploy in the event of an accident. This poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. Through-loading facility in the rear Never exceed the permissiblegross weight of If objects or loads are not secured when being 4.4 lb (2 kg). Stow and secure heavy objects transported in the through-loading facility, Stowage and features in the cargo compartment. they could slip or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 336) and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces (Y page 337).

: Stowage net in front-passenger footwell

The through-loading facility is opened from the cargo compartment. X Release the seat backrests in the second row of seats and tilt them in the cargo/load position (Y page 107). X Fold downthe rear seat armrest.

: Stowage net on the back of the front seats

Z 340 Stowage areas

X Pull the center head restraint on the rear forward. Otherwise, the backrests may be bench seat into the uppermost position damaged. (Y page 104). When the backrest is folded forwards, the X Slide release catch : to the left and swing front seats cannot be moved to their flap ; to the left until it is lying on the rear rearmost position. Otherwise, the front side of the rear bench seat. seats and the rear bench seat could be damaged.

Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 336). The left-hand and right-hand backrests in the second row of seats can be folded forwards separately to increase the cargo compartment capacity. On vehicles with a 3rd row of seats, you must fold down the 3rd row of seats beforehand (Y page 107) to obtain maximum cargo compartment enlargement.

X Push cover = forward until it is lying on the Folding the rear bench seat forwards rear seat armrest.

Stowage and features ! The backrest is heavy. Therefore, take care when folding it down. Make sure that the head restraints are pushed all the way Cargo compartment enlargement in so that the backrests and seat cushions Important safety notes are not damaged. G WARNING If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged they could fold forwards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the event of an accident. RThe vehicle occupant would thereby be pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest.The seat belt can no longer offer the intended level of protection and could even cause injuries. i If the driver's or front-passenger seat is RObjects or loads in the trunk/cargo set for a larger person, it may not be compartment cannot be restrained by the possible to fold the rear bench seat seat backrest. forwards. In this case, move the front seats There is an increased risk of injury. as far forward as possible. Before every trip, make sure that the seat X Move the head restraints to the lowest backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat position (Y page 106). are engaged. X Pull release loop : of seat cushion ;. X Fold seat cushion ; upwards. ! Release and fold the seat cushion upwards before folding the rear bench seat Stowage areas 341

X Fold seat backrest ; back until it engages. Make sure not to trap the seat belt while doing so. X Swing seat cushion : back. X Pull up and adjust the head restraints if necessary (Y page 106).

Securing cargo Cargo tie-down rings X Pull release handle = in the direction of the arrow. General notes The backrest is released. G WARNING X Fold the backrest forwards until it reaches The Top Tether anchorages cannot secure a the cargo compartment position. load. If you secure a load with the Top Tether anchorages, the Top Tether anchorages could be pulled out during braking, abrupt changes in direction or in the event of an accident.The

load could slip, tip over or be flung around and Stowage and features thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury. Only use the cargo tie down rings when securing a load.

Observe the following notes on securing loads: X Guide seat belts ; under respective RSecure the load using the cargo tie-down clips :. rings. RDistribute the load on the cargo tie down Folding the rear bench seat back rings evenly. RDo not use elastic straps or nets to secure a load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip protection for light loads. RDo not route tie-downs across sharp edges or corners. RPad sharp edges for protection.

Z 342 Stowage areas

Cargo compartment Cargo compartment cover Important safety notes G WARNING On its own, the cargo compartment cover cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage and heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load during sudden changes in direction, braking or in the event of an accident. There is an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury. There are four cargo tie-down rings : in the Always store objects so that they cannot be flung around. Secure objects, luggage or cargo compartment. loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using tie downs, even if you are using the Bag hook cargo compartment cover. G WARNING ! When loading the vehicle, make sure that The bag hooks cannotrestrain heavy objects you do not stack the load in the cargo

Stowage and features or items of luggage. Objects or items of compartment higher than the lower edge of luggage could be flung around and thereby hit the side windows. Do not place heavy vehicle occupants when braking or abruptly objects on top of the cargo compartment changing directions. There is a risk of injury. cover. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. The cargo compartment cover may be Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile installed behind the 2nd or 3rd row of seats. objects on the bag hooks.

! The bag hook can bear a maximum load Extending/retracting the cargo of 6.6lbs (3kg) and should not be used to compartment cover secure a load.

There is a bag hook in the cargo compartment on the right-hand side. X Press bag hook marking :. X Turn bag hook : until it engages. Stowage areas 343

X To extend: pull the cargo compartment coverback by grab handle : and clip it into retainers ; on the left and right. X To retract: unhook the cargo compartment cover from left-hand and right-hand retainers ;. X Guide cargo compartment cover forwards by grab handle : until it is completely rolled up.

The TIREFIT kit, tire-change tool kit, etc. are Coat hooks on the tailgate located in the stowage compartment. X To open: holding the ribbing, press handle : downwards ;. Handle : folds up. X Swing the cargo compartment floor upwards using handle : until it rests against the cargo compartment cover. Stowage and features

: Coat hook

Stowage well under the cargo compartment floor G WARNING If you drive when the cargo compartmentfloor X Fold out hook = on the underside of the is open, objects could be flung around, thus cargo compartmentfloor in the direction of striking vehicle occupants. There is a risk of the arrow. injury, particularly in the eventofsudden braking or a suddenchange in direction. Always close the cargo compartmentfloor before a journey.

Z 344 Features

X Attach hook = to the cargo Positionthe load on the roof carrier in such compartment's upperseal ?. a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion. X To close: detach hook = from the cargo compartment's upper seal ?. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof carrier is X Fasten hook = to the bracket on the installed you can: underside of the cargo compartment floor. Rraise the sliding sunroof fully X Fold the trunk floor down. Ropen the panorama roof with power tilt/ X Press the cargo compartment floor sliding panel fully down ; until it engages. Ropen the tailgate fully The maximum roof load is 220 lbs(100 kg).

Attaching the roof carrier Stowage and features

1 Cargo compartment floor unlocked 2 Cargo compartment floor locked The cargo compartment floor can be locked and unlocked using the mechanical key. X Secure the roof carrier to roof rails :. In doing so, observe the manufacturer's Roof carrier installation instructions. Important safety notes Features G WARNING When you load the roof, the center of gravity Cup holder of the vehicle rises and the driving characteristics change. If you exceed the Important safety notes maximum roof load, the driving G WARNING characteristics, as well as steering and If objects in the passenger compartment are braking, will be greatly impaired. There is a stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be risk of an accident. thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. Never exceed the maximum roof load and There is a risk of injury, particularly in the adjust your driving style. event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. ! Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use roof carriers that have been tested and approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This helps to preventdamage to the vehicle. Features 345

RAlways stow objects so thatthey cannot be Temperature-controlled cup holder in thrown around in such situations. the front-compartment center console RAlways make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or stowage nets. RClose the lockable stowage spaces while driving. RStow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or too large in the cargo compartment.

! Only use the cup holders for containers of the right size and which have lids. The drinks could otherwise spill. : Cup holder ; Residual heat indicator lamp The stowage compartments in the doors provide space for bottles with a capacity of = Switch up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 liter). The temperature-controlled cup holder can The bottles are not secured or prevented from be used to keep cold drinks cool and warm tipping over. Therefore, do not place any open drinks warm. Stowage and features drink containers in the stowage X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the compartments. ignition lock. X To switch on the cooling function: press Cup holder in the front-compartment and hold button = until the blue indicator center console lamp on the button lights up. X To switch on the heating function: press and hold button = until the red indicator lamp on the button lights up. X To switch off the function: press and hold button = until the indicator lamp on the button goes out. When the heating function is used, the metal insert of the cup holder is heated. Once a certain temperature is reached, residual heat indicator lamp ; lights up. This means that : Cup holder the metal insert of the cup holder is hot.For ; Cover this reason, you must not reach into the cup holder metal insert. X To open: slide cover ; to its foremost position. Do not use hard or sharp objects to clean the cup holder. Use only a soft cloth to clean it. X To close: pull cover ; back as far as it will go. Cup holder in the rear seat armrest You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for cleaning. Cleanwith clear, lukewarm ! Do not sit on or support your body weight water only. on the rear seat armrest when it is folded down, as you could otherwise damage it.

Z 346 Features

X Fold downthe rear seat armrest. : Mirror light Cup holder : is located in the rear seat ; Bracket armrest. = Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket ? Vanity mirror Cup holder in the third row of seats A Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visor Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor Stowage and features is clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has been folded up.

Glare from the side

: Cup holder The cup holders are located in the side trim on the left and right-hand sides.

Sun visors Overview G WARNING X Fold down sun visor :. If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded X Pull sun visor : out of retainer =. up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be X Swing sun visor : to the side. blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an X Slide sun visor : horizontally as required. accident. X Fold down additional sun visor ; to the Always keep the mirror cover folded down while driving. windshield. Features 347

Rollersunblinds on the rear side X Tilt pull-out profile : as illustrated. windows X Slip guide bush ; into open area of guide ! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand. rail =. Do not let it snap back suddenly as this X Straighten up pull-out profile : again. would damage the automatic roller mechanism. ! Do not drive the vehicle with the roller Ashtray sunblind hooked in and the side windows Front ashtray opened simultaneously. The roller sunblind can jump out of the retainers and spring ! The holder under the ashtray is not heat back suddenly whendriving at high speeds, resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in the e.g. when driving on the freeway.This could ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is damage the inertia reel. Therefore, either properly engaged. Otherwise, the holder close the side window or retract the roller could be damaged. sunblind before driving at high speeds. Stowage and features

X To open: slide cover : to its foremost position. X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out by tab : and hook it onto retainers ; at the X Fold cover = of the insert upwards. back of the window. X To remove the insert: push insert = to the left ?. Insert = slides out slightly to the right. X Lift insert = up ; and out. X To re-install the insert: place insert = into the holder and press it down on the right until it engages. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.

Rear-compartment ashtray The roller sunblind can be hooked back into ! Close the ashtray when it is not in use and place should it pop out from the top of the before you fold the rear seats forward. You guide rail. can otherwise damage the ashtray.

Z 348 Features

X To open: briefly press cover ; at the top. Your attention must always be focused on the The ashtray opens. traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette X To remove the insert: push into recess lighter when road and traffic conditions = from the right. permit. Ashtray insert : slides outslightly to the X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the right. ignition lock (Y page 163). X Lift insert : up and out. X To open: slide cover : to its foremost position. X To re-install the insert: place insert : Stowage and features into the holder and press down on the right X Press in cigarette lighter ;. until it engages. Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically when the heating element is Vehicles without a Rear Seat Entertainment red-hot. System have an ashtray in the center console in the rear compartment. X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will go.

Cigarette lighter 12 Vsockets G WARNING You can burn yourself if you touch the hot General notes heating elementorthe socket of the cigarette X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the lighter. ignitionlock (Y page 163). In addition, flammable materials can ignite if: With the exception of the socket in the front Rthe hot cigarette lighter falls center console, all socketscan be used for Ra child holds the hot cigarette lighter to accessories with a maximum currentdraw of objects, for example 240 W (20 A). The socket in the front center There is a risk of fire and injury. console can be used for accessories with a Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob. maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A). Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is Accessories include such items as lamps or out of reach of children. Never leave children chargers for mobile phones. unsupervised in the vehicle. If you use the sockets for long periods when the engine is switched off, the battery may ! The cigarette lighter in the center console discharge. in the front compartment is not intended i An emergency cut-out ensures that the for operating the tire inflation compressor. on-board voltage does not drop too low.If Features 349

the on-board voltage is too low, the power Socket in the cargo compartment to the sockets is automatically cut. This ensures thatthere is sufficient power to start the engine.

Socket in the front-compartment center console ! The socket is not suitable for operating the tire inflation compressor.

X Lift up the cover of socket :.

115 Vsocket Important safety notes G DANGER Stowage and features When a suitable device is connected, the X To open: slide cover : to its foremost 115Vpower socket will be carrying a high position. voltage. You could receive an electric shock X Lift up the cover of socket ;. if the connector cable or the 115 V power X To close: pull cover : back as far as it will socket is pulled out of the trim or is damaged go. or wet. There is a risk of fatal injury. RUse only connector cables that are dry and Socket in the rear-compartment center free of damage. console RWhen the ignition is off, make sure that the 115 V power socket is dry. RHave the 115 V power socket checked or replaced immediately at a qualified specialized workshop if it is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim. RNever plug the connector cable into a 115 Vpower socket that is damaged or has been pulled out of the trim.

G DANGER If you reach into the power socket or plug X Lift up the cover of socket :. inappropriate devices into the power socket, you could receive an electric shock. There is Vehicles with the Rear Seat Entertainment a risk of fatal injury. System have two sockets in the center Only connect appropriate devices to the console in the rear compartment. power socket.

Z 350 Features

! Note that work and repairs on the 115 V X Insert the plug of the electronic device into power socket should only be carried out by 115 V power socket :. qualified specialist personnel. Indicator lamp ; lights up. X To turn off: disconnect the plug from General notes 115 V power socket :. 115 V power socket provides an alternating Ensure that you do not pull on the cord. voltage of 115 V so that small electronic devices can be connected. These devices, such as games consoles, chargers and laptops, should not consume more than a maximum of 150 watts altogether. Requirements for operation of these devices: Rthe electronic device that you connect has a suitable connector and conforms to standards specific to the country you are in. Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged correctly into 115 V power socket.

Stowage and features Rthe maximum wattage of the device to be connected must not exceed 150 watts. Rthe on-board power supply is within a permissible voltage range. Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment and the cargo compartment are operational.

Using the 115 Vpower socket

X To switch on: switch the ignitionon. X Openflap =. Features 351

Problems with the 115 Vpower socket

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions The warning lamp on The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak. the 115Vpower socket X Start the engine. is not lit. or X Charge the battery (Y page 390). If the indicator lamp still does not light up: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

The temperature of the DC/AC converter is temporarily too high. X Remove the electronic device connector from the 115 V socket. X Let the DC/AC converter cool down. If the indicator lamp still does not light up after cooling down the converter: X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

You have connected an electronic device that has a constant Stowage and features nominal power of less than 150 watts, but a very high switch-on current. This device will not work. If you connect such a device, the 115 Vpower socket will not supply it with power. X Connect a suitable device.

mbrace Shortly after successfully registering with the mbrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user ID Important safety notes and password will be sent to you by post. USA ! You must have a license agreement to only: you can use this password to log onto activate the mbrace service. Make sure the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at that your system is activated and ready for http://www.mbusa.com. use. To register, press the ï MB Info call The mbrace system is available if: button. If any of the steps mentioned are Rit has been activated and is operational not carried out, the system may not be Rthe corresponding mobile phone network activated. is available for transmitting data to the If you have questions about the activation, Customer Center contact one of the following telephone Ra service subscription is available hotlines: Rthe starter battery is sufficiently charged RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at i Determining the location of the vehicle on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes a map is only possible if: (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 RGPS reception is available. RCanada: Customer Service at Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded to 1-888-923-8367 the Customer Assistance Center.

Z 352 Features

The mbrace system If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above, the system may not operate as To adjustthe volume during an mbrace call, expected. In the event of an emergency, help proceed as follows: will have to be summoned by other means. X Press the W or X button on the Have the system checked at the nearest multifunction steering wheel. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact or the following service hotlines: X Use the volume controller of the audio RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance system/COMAND. Center at The mbrace system provides various 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) res services, e.g.: or 1-866-990-9007 Rautomatic and manual emergency call RCanada: Customer Service at 1-888-923-8367 RRoadside Assistance call RMB Info call Emergency call USA only: you can find information and a description of all available features under Important safety notes "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. ! You must have a license agreement to activate the mbrace service. Make sure Stowage and featu System self-test that your system is activated and ready for After you have switched on the ignition, the use. To register, press the ï MB Info call system carries out a self-diagnosis. button. If any of the steps mentioned are not carried out, the system may not be Amalfunction in the system has been activated. detected if one of the following occurs: If you have questions about the activation, RThe indicator lamp in the SOSbutton does contact one of the following telephone not come on during the system self-test. hotlines: RThe indicator lamp in the F Roadside RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance buttondoes not light up during Assistance Center at self-diagnosis of the system. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 button does not light up during self- RCanada: Customer Service at diagnosis of the system. 1-888-923-8367 RThe indicator lamp in one or more of the following buttons continues to light up red General notes after the system self-diagnosis: An emergency call is dialed automatically if - SOS button an air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is - the F Roadside Assistance call triggered. button i You cannot end an automatically - the ï MB Info call button triggered emergency call yourself. RThe mbrace Inoperative or mbrace An emergency call can also be initiated Service Not Activated message manually. appears in the multifunction display after As soon as the emergencycall has been the system self-diagnosis. initiated, the indicator lamp in the SOSbutton Features 353 flashes. The Connecting Call message Making an emergency call appears in the multifunction display. G WARNING The audio outputis muted. It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle, Once the connection has been made, the even if you have pressed the SOS button in an Call Connected message appears in the emergency if: multifunction display. Ryou see smoke inside or outside of the All important information on the emergency vehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after an is transmitted, for example: accident RCurrent location of the vehicle (as Rthe vehicle is on a dangerous section of determined by the GPS system) road RVehicle identification number Rthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be RInformation on the severity of the accident seen by other road users, particularly when Shortly after the emergency call has been dark or in poor visibility conditions initiated, a voice connection is automatically There is a risk of an accident and injury. established between the Mercedes-Benz Leave the vehicle immediately in this or Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle similar situations as soon as it is safe to do occupants. so. Move to a safe location along with other RIf the vehicle occupants respond, the vehicle occupants. In such situations, secure

Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance the vehicle in accordance with national Stowage and features Center attempts to get more information regulations, e.g. with a warning triangle. on the emergency. RIf there is no response from the vehicle occupants, an ambulance is immediately sent to the vehicle. The mbrace system has not been able to initiate an emergency call if no voice connection to the Response Center has been established.This can occur, for example, if the relevant mobile phone network is not available. The indicator lamp in the SOS button flashes continuously. The Call Failed message appears in the X To initiate an emergency call multifunction display and must be confirmed. manually: press cover : briefly to open. In this case, seek assistance by other means. X Press SOS button ; briefly. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes until the emergency call is concluded. X Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistance Center. X After the emergency call, close cover :.

i If the mobile phone network is not available, mbrace is not able to make an emergency call. If you leave the vehicle

Z 354 Features

immediately after pressing the SOS button, Assistance center can ascertain the nature of you do not know if mbrace has successfully the problem (Y page 358). made the emergency call. In this situation, The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance seek additional assistance by other means. Center either sends a qualified Mercedes- Benz technician or arranges for your vehicle Roadside Assistance button to be transported to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You may be charged for services such as repair work and/or towing. Further details are available in your mbrace manual. res i The mbrace system failed to initiate a Roadside Assistance call if: Rthe indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance call button : is flashing continuously. Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- X Press Roadside Assistance button :. Benz Customer Assistance Center was This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz established.

Stowage and featu Customer Assistance Center. The indicator This may be because the corresponding lamp in Roadside Assistance button : mobile phone network is not available. flashes while the call is active. The The Call Failed message appears in the Connecting Call message appears on multifunction display. the multifunction display. The audio output X To end acall: press the ~ button on the is muted. multifunctionsteering wheel. If a connection can be made, the Call or Connected message appears in the X Press the corresponding button for ending multifunction display. a phone call on the audio systemoron If a cellular phone network is available and COMAND. there is sufficientGPS reception, the mbrace system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz MB Info call button Customer Assistance Center, for example: RCurrent location of the vehicle RVehicle identification number i The display of the audio system or COMAND shows that an mbrace call is active. During the call, you can change to the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI button on COMAND, for example. Voice output is not available. Avoice connection is established between the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center and the vehicle occupants. From the vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Features 355

X Press MB Info call button :. The Call Failed message appears in the This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz multifunction display. Customer Assistance Center. The indicator X To end acall: press the ~ button on the lamp in MB Info call button : flashes while multifunctionsteering wheel. the connection is being made. The or Connecting Call message appears on the multifunction display. The audio system X Press the corresponding button for ending is muted. a phone call on the audio systemoron COMAND. If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in the Call priority multifunction display. If a cellular phone network is available and When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside there is sufficient GPS reception, the mbrace Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency system transmits data to the Mercedes-Benz call can still be initiated. In this case, an Customer Assistance Center, for example: emergency call will take priority and override all other active calls. RCurrent location of the vehicle The indicator lamp of the respective button RVehicle identification number flashes until the call is ended. An emergency i The display of the audio system or call can only be terminated by the Mercedes-

COMAND shows that an mbrace call is Benz Customer Assistance Center. Stowage and features active. During the call, you can change to All other calls can be ended by pressing: the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI Rthe ~ button on the multifunction button on COMAND, for example. steering wheel Voice output is not available. Rthe corresponding buttononthe audio Avoice connection is established between system or on COMAND for ending a the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance telephone call Center and the vehicle occupants. You can obtain information on how to operate your i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio output vehicle's systems, on the location of the is muted. The mobile phone is no longer nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, connected to COMAND. However, if you and on further products and services offered would like to use your mobile phone, do so by Mercedes-Benz USA. only when the vehicle is stationary and in a safe location. USA only: you can find further information on the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com. Downloading destinations in COMAND i The mbrace system failed to initiate an Downloading destinations MB Info call if: Destination Download gives you access to a Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info call data bank with over 15 million Points of button : is flashing continuously. Interest (POIs). These can be downloaded on the navigation system in your vehicle. If you Rno voice connection to the Mercedes- know the destination, the address can be Benz Customer Assistance Center was downloaded.Alternatively, you can obtain the established. location of Points of Interest (POIs)/ This may be because the corresponding importantdestinations in the vicinity. mobile phone network is not available.

Z 356 Features

Furthermore, you can download routes with mbrace directly to your vehicle's navigation up to 20 way points. system. You are prompted to confirmroute guidance Specifying and sending the destination to the address entered. address The system calculates the route and X Go to the website http:// subsequently starts the route guidance with www.maps.google.com and enter a the address entered. destination address into the entry field. i If you select No, the address can be stored X To send the destination address to the in the address book. e-mail address of your mbrace

res i The Destination Download function is account: click on the corresponding available if the corresponding mobile button. phone network is available and data i Example: transfer is possible. If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then 'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address i You can only use the Destination will be sent to your vehicle. Download function if the vehicle is equipped with a navigation system. X When the "Send" dialog window appears: In the relevant field, enter the e-mail Route Assistance address which you specified when Stowage and featu This service is part of the mbrace PLUS activating your mbrace account. Package and cannot be purchased X Click "Send". separately. i You can also use the Route Assistance i Information on specific commands such function if your vehicle is not equipped with as "Address entry" or "Sending" can be a navigation system. found on the website. Within the framework of this service, you Calling up destination addresses receive a professional and reliable form of X Switch on the ignition. navigation support without having to leave The destination address is loaded into the your vehicle. vehicle's navigation system. The customer service representative finds a Adisplay message appears, asking suitable route depending on your vehicle's whether navigation should be started. current position and the desired destination. X Select Yes by sliding XVY and turning You will then be guided live through the cVd the COMAND controller and press current route section. W to confirm. The system calculates the route and Search &Send subsequently starts the routeguidance General notes with the address entered. i To use "Search &Send", your vehicle i If you select No, the address can be stored must be equipped with mbrace and a in the address book. navigation system. You must also have an i mbrace service subscription. If you have sent more than one destination address, each individual "Search & Send" is a destination entry destination must be confirmed separately. service. Adestination address which is found on Google Maps® can be transferred via i Destination addresses are loaded in the same order as the order in which they were Features 357

sent. If you have multiple Mercedes-Benz Vehicle remote closing vehicles with mbrace and active mbrace The remote closing feature can be used when accounts: you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you if multiple vehicles are registered under the are no longer nearby. The vehicle can then be same e-mail address, the destination will locked by the Mercedes-Benz Customer be sent to all the vehicles. Assistance Center. The vehicle can be immediately remotely Vehicle remote opening locked within four days of the ignition being You can use the vehicle remote opening if you turned off. After this time, the remote closing have unintentionally locked your vehicle and may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After a replacement SmartKey is not available. The 30 days the vehicle can no longer be closed vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz remotely. Customer Assistance Center. X Contact the following service hotlines: The vehicle can be immediately opened RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer remotely within four daysofthe ignition being Assistance Center at turned off. After this time, the remote opening 1-800-FOR-MERCedes may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 30 days the vehicle can no longer be opened RCanada: Customer Service at remotely.

1-888-923-8367 Stowage and features X Contact the following service hotlines: You will be asked for your PIN. RUSA: Mercedes-BenzCustomer The next time you are inside the vehicle and Assistance Centerat you switch on the ignition, the Doors 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Locked Remotely message appears in the (1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007 multifunction display. RCanada: Customer Service at USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be 1-888-923-8367 locked via: You will be asked for yourpassword. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" X Return to your vehicle at the time agreed section upon with the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. Rthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®, Blackberry) USAonly:alternatively, the vehicle can be To do this, you will need your identification opened via: number and password. Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online" section i The vehicle remote closing feature is available when the relevant mobile phone Rthe telephone application (e.g.iPhone®, network is available and data connection is Blackberry) possible. To do this, you will need your identification number and password. i Vehicle remote opening is only possible if the corresponding mobile phone network is accessible.

Z 358 Features

Stolen vehicle recovery service X Press Yes to confirm the message. If your vehicle has been stolen: X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please switch on ignition. message appears: X Notify the police. turn the key to position 2 in the ignition The police will issue a numbered incident lock. report. X If the Please follow the X This number will be forwarded to the instructions received by phone and Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance move your vehicle to a safe Center together with your PIN. position. message appears: follow the The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance instructions of the customer service Center then attempts to locate the mbrace representative. system. The Mercedes-Benz Customer The message in the display disappears. Assistance Center contacts you and the local law enforcement agency if the vehicle If you select Cancel, the vehicle remote is located. However, only the law malfunction diagnosis is canceled enforcement agency is informed of the completely. location of the vehicle. The vehicle operating state check begins. Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis i If the anti-theft alarm system is activated activated message appears. for longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes- When the check is finished, the Sending Stowage and features Benz Customer Assistance center is vehicle diagnosis data...(Voice automatically informed. connection may be interrupted during data transfer.) message Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis appears. The vehicle data can now be sent to With the vehicle remote malfunction the Customer Assistance center. diagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), the X Press OK to confirm the message. Customer Assistance center can provide The voice connection with the Customer improved support for problems with your Assistance center is terminated. vehicle. During an existing call, vehicle data The Vehicle Diagnosis: is transferred to the Customer Assistance Transferring data... appears. center. The customer service representative can use the received data to decide what kind The vehicle data is sent to the Customer of assistance is required. You are then, for Assistance center. example, guided to the nearest Mercedes- Depending on what the customer service Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle is representative agreed with you, the voice called. connection is re-established after the transfer If vehicle data needs to be transferred during is complete. If necessary, you will be an MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, contacted at a later time by another means, this is initiated by the Customer Assistance e.g. by E-Mail or telephone. center. You will see the Roadside Further functions of the vehicle remote Assistance Connected message in the malfunction diagnosis include, for example: COMAND display.Ifthe vehicle remote Rtransfer of service data to the Customer malfunction diagnosis is able to be started, Assistance center. If aservice is overdue, the Request for vehicle diagnosis the COMAND display shows a message received. Start vehicle diagnosis? message appears in the display. Features 359

about various special offers at your Speed alert workshop. You can define the upper speed limit, which Rmonthly status informationE-Mail on oil must not be exceeded by the vehicle. If this level, airpressure, maintenance, brakes, selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, a etc. If applicable, you will receive message will be sent to the Customer information on special offers in the E-Mail. Assistance center. The Customer Assistance USA only: this information can also be center then forwards this information to you. called up under "Owners Online" at http:// You can select the way in which you receive www.mbusa.com. this information beforehand. Possible options Information on the data stored in the vehicle include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. (Y page 29). The data which is sent to the Customer Information on roadside assistance Assistance center contains the following (Y page 25). information: Rthe location where the speed limit was Downloading routes exceeded Downloading routes allows you to transfer Rthe time at which the speed limit was and save predefined routes in the navigation exceeded system. To do this, an SD memory card must Rthe selected speed limit which was

be inserted into the COMAND system. If no exceeded Stowage and features SD memory card is inserted, you must insert the card into the card slot on the COMAND Geo fencing system before saving. Geo fencing allows you to select areas which Aroute can be prepared and sent either by a the vehicle should not enter or leave. You will customer service representative or via the be informed if the vehicle crosses the mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route can boundaries of the selected areas. You can include up to 20 way points. When a route has select the way in which you receive this been received by the navigation system, the information beforehand. Possible options 'Route name' has been saved to include SMS, E-Mail or an automated call. memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message appears on the The area can be determined as either a circle COMAND display.The route is saved to the or a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. SD memory card. You can specify up to ten areas simultaneously.Differentsettings are X To start route guidance: select Yes. possible for each area. An overview of the route is shown in the USA only: these settings can be called up display. under "Owners Online" at http:// i If you select No, the saved route can be www.mbusa.com. called up later in the navigation menu. Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call X Select Start. and inform the customer service Route guidance is started. representative that you wish to activate geo fencing. i Downloaded and saved data can be called up again in COMAND. Currently inactive areas can be activated by SMS. You can find further information in the separate COMAND operating instructions.

Z 360 Features

Triggering the vehicle alarm door opener. If you have difficulty programming the integrated garage door With this function, you can triggerthe opener, contact an authorized Mercedes- vehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarm Benz Center. sounds and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on the setting, the panic alarm Alternatively, you can call the following lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, the telephone assistance services: alarm switches off. RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Garage door opener RCanada: Customer Service at Important safety notes 1-800-387-0100 RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515 G WARNING (free of charge) When you operate or program the garage door More information on HomeLink® and/or with the integrated garage door opener, compatible products is also available persons in the range of movement of the online at http://www.homelink.com. garage door can become trapped or struck by the garage door. There is arisk of injury. i Notes on the declaration of conformity (Y page 27). When using the integrated garage door Stowage and features opener, always make sure that nobody is within the range of movement of the garage Programming door. Programming buttons G WARNING Observe the "Important safety notes" (Y page 360). Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust gases such as carbonmonoxide. Inhaling these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave the engine running in enclosed spaces without sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up to three different door and gate systems. Only operate garage doors using the Integrated garage door opener in the rear-view integrated garage door opener if: mirror Rthey are equipped with a safety stop and Garage door remote control A is not part of reverse feature, and the integrated garage door opener. Rthey conform to the current U.S. safety X The first time before programming, clear standards. the integrated garage door opener memory When programming a garage door opener, (Y page 362). park vehicle outside the garage. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the i Certain garage door drives are ignition lock. incompatible with the integrated garage Features 361

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on Synchronizing the rolling code the integrated garage door opener. Observe the "Important safety notes" After a short time, indicator lamp : lights (Y page 360). up yellow. Your vehicle must be within reach of the i Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon garage door or exterior gate drive. Make sure as button ;, = or ? is programmed for that neither your vehicle nor any persons/ the first time. If the selected button has objects are present within the sweep of the already been programmed, indicator door or gate. lamp : will only light up yellow after ten X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the seconds have elapsed. ignition lock. X Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator X Press the program button of the door or lamp : flashes yellow. gate drive (see the door or gate drive operating instructions, e.g. under X Point garage door remote control A "programming of additional remote towards buttons ; to ? on the rear-view controls"). mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to i Usually, you now have 30seconds to 20 cm). initiate the next step. i The required distance between remote control A and the integrated garage door X Press previously programmed button ;, opener depends on the garage door drive = or ? of the integrated garage door Stowage and features system. Several attempts might be opener until the door closes. necessary. You should test every position The rolling code synchronization is then for at least 25 seconds before trying complete. another position. Notes on programming the remote X Press and hold button B on remotecontrol control A until indicator lamp : lights up green. Canadianradio frequency laws require a If indicator lamp : lights up green or "break" (or interruption) of the transmission flashes, then programming has been signals after broadcasting for a few seconds. successful. Therefore, these signals may notlast long X Release button B on remote control A for enough for the integrated garage door the garage door drive system. opener. The signal is notrecognized during programming. Comparable with Canadian X If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat law, some U.S.garage door openers also the programming procedure for the feature a "break". corresponding button on the rear-view mirror. When doing so, vary the distance Proceed as follows: between remote control A and the rear- Rif you live in Canada view mirror. Rif you have difficulties programming the garage door opener (regardless of where i If the indicator lamp flashes green after you live) when using the programming successful programming, the garage door steps system is using a rolling code. After programming, you must synchronize the garage door opener integrated in the rear- view mirror with the receiver of the garage door system.

Z 362 Features

X Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on same programming steps with this remote the integrated garage door opener. control. Before performing these steps, After a short time, indicator lamp : lights make sure that new batteries have been up yellow. installed in garage door drive remote control A. X Release the button. Indicator lamp : flashes yellow. RNote that some remote controls only transmit for a limited amount of time (the X Press button B of garage door remote indicator lamp on the remote control goes control A for two seconds, then release it out). Press button B on remote control for two seconds. A again before transmission ends. X Press button B again for two seconds. RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door X Repeat this sequence on button B of opener unit. This can improve signal remote control A until indicator lamp : reception/transmission. lights up green. If indicator lamp : turns red, repeat the Opening/closing the garage door process. After it has been programmed, the integrated X Continue with the other programming garage door opener performs the function of steps (see above). the garage door system remote control. Please also read the operating instructions Stowage and features Problems when programming for the garage door system. If you are experiencing problems programming the integrated garage door X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the opener on the rear-view mirror, take note of ignition lock. the following instructions: X Press button ;, = or ? which you have RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage programmed to operate the garage door. door drive remote control A.This can Garage door system with a fixed code: usually be found on the back of the remote indicator lamp : lights up green. control. Garage door system with a rolling code: The integrated garage door opener is indicator lamp : flashes green. compatible with devices that have units i The transmitter will transmit a signal as which operate in the frequency range of long as the button is pressed. The 280to 433MHz. transmission is halted after a maximum of RReplace the batteries in garage door ten seconds and indicator lamp : lights remote control A.This increases the up yellow. Press button ;, = or ? again likelihood that garage door remote control if necessary. A will transmit a strongand precise signal to the integrated garage door openerinthe Clearing the memory rear-view mirror. X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the RWhen programming, hold remote control ignition lock. A at varying distances and angles from the X Press buttons ; and ?. button that you are programming. Try The indicator lamp lights up yellow. various angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same angle X Press and hold buttons ; and ? until the but at varying distances. indicator lamp turns green. RIf another remote control for the same garage door drive is available, repeat the Features 363 i Make sure that you clear the memory of X To remove: pull the floormat from the integrated garage door opener before retainers ;. selling the vehicle. X Remove the floormat.

Compass Infrared reflective windshield Calling up the compass Information on operating the compass can be found in the separate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Floormats G WARNING Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal. The operating and road safety of the vehicle The infrared reflecting glass prevents the is jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident. vehicle interior frombecoming too hot. It also Stowage and features Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are blocks radio waves up into the gigahertz stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter range. the driver's footwell. Install the floormats To enable operation of radio-controlled securely and as specified in order to ensure equipment, e.g. toll recording systems, areas sufficientclearance for the pedals. Do not use on the windshield are permeable to radio loose floormats. waves :.Inthese areas, you can install radio-controlled systems. These areas can best be seen from outside the vehicle by observing the light reflected off the windshield.

Floormat on the driver's side (example) X Driver's seat/front-passenger seat: slide the respective seat back. X Rear seats: slide the respective seat forwards. X To install: place the floormat in the footwell. X Press studs : onto retainers ;.

Z 364 365

Useful information ...... 366 Engine compartment ...... 366 Maintenance ...... 370 Care ...... 371 Maintenance and care 366 Engine compartment

Useful information G WARNING Opening the hood when the engine is i This Operator's Manual describes all overheated or when there is a fire in the models and all standard and optional engine compartmentcould expose you to hot equipment of your vehicle available at the gases or other service products. There is a time of publication of the Operator's risk of injury. Manual. Country-specific differences are Let an overheated engine cool down before possible. Please note that your vehicle may opening the hood. If there is a fire in the not be equipped with all features engine compartment, keep the hood closed described. This also applies to safety- and contact the fire department. related systems and functions. i Read the information on qualified G WARNING specialist workshops: (Y page 28). The engine compartment contains moving components. Certain components, such as the radiator fan, may continue to run or start Engine compartment again suddenly when the ignition is off. There is a risk of injury. Hood If you need to do any work inside the engine Important safety notes compartment, Rswitch off the ignition G WARNING Rnever reach into the area where there is a If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when Maintenance and care risk of danger from moving components, the vehicle is in motion and block your view. such as the fan rotation area There is a risk of an accident. Rkeep clothing away from moving parts Never unlatch the hood while driving. WARNING G WARNING G The ignition system and the fuel injection When opening and closing the hood, it may system work under high voltage. If you touch suddenly fall into the closed position.There is components which are under voltage, you a risk of injury to persons within range of could get an electric shock. There is a risk of movement of the hood. injury. Open and close the hood only when no one is Never touch components of the ignition within its range of movement. system or fuel injection system when the ignition is switched on. G WARNING Certain components in the engine compartment, such as the engine, radiator Opening the hood and parts of the exhaust system, can become G WARNING very hot. Working in the engine compartment When the hood is open and the windshield poses a risk of injury. wipers are set in motion,you can be injured Where possible, let the engine cool down and by the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury. touch only the components described in the Always switch off the windshield wipers and following. the ignition before opening the hood. Engine compartment 367

! Make sure that the windshieldwipers are Radiator not folded away fromthe windshield. You could otherwise damage the windshield Vehicles with adiesel engine: do not cover wipers or the hood. the radiator, for example with a winter front or bug cover. The readingsofthe on-board- diagnostic system may otherwise be inaccurate. Some of these readings are required by law and must be accurate at all times.

Engine oil General notes Depending on the driving style, the vehicle consumes up to 0.9 US qts (0.8 l) of oil over X Make sure that the windshield wipers are a distance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oil turned off. consumption may be higher than this when X Pull release lever : on the hood. the vehicle is new or if you frequently drive at The hood is released. high engine speeds. Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be in a different location.

When checking the oil level: Maintenance and care Rpark the vehicle on a level surface. Rthe engine should be switched off for approximately five minutes if the engine is at normal operating temperature. Rif the engine is not at normal operating temperature, e.g. if the engine was only started briefly: wait about 30 minutes X Reach into the gap, pull hood catch before carrying out the measurement. handle ; up and lift the hood. If you lift the hood approximately 15 inches (40cm) the hood is opened and held open automatically by the gas-filled struts.

Closing the hood

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of approximately 8 in (20 cm). X Check that the hood has engaged properly. If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not properly engaged. Open it again and close it with a little more force.

Z 368 Engine compartment

Checking the oil level using the oil and thoroughly clean the engine oil off the dipstick components before starting the engine.

H Environmental note When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters that have been approved for vehicles with a service system. You can obtain a list of the engine oils and oil filters tested and approved in accordance with the Example:vehicles with a gasoline engine Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz Service center. Damage to the engine or exhaust system is caused by the following: Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have not been specifically approved for the service system R

Maintenance and care replacing engine oil and oil filters after the interval for replacementspecified by the service system has been exceeded Example: vehicles with a diesel engine Rusing engine oil additives. X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide ! Do not add too much oil. adding too much tube. engine oil can result in damage to the X Wipe off oil dipstick :. engine or to the catalytic converter. Have X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide excess engine oil siphoned off. tube to the stop, and take it out again. If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX mark ;, the oil level is correct. X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.

Adding engine oil G WARNING If engine oil comes into contact with hot components in the engine compartment, it may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to the filler neck. Let the engine cool down Engine compartment 369

Example: engine oil cap X Park the vehicle on a level surface. X Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove Only checkthe coolant level when the it. vehicle is on a level surface and the engine X Add engine oil. has cooled down. If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the on the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ignition lock (Y page 163). of engine oil. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the X Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn Start/Stop button twice (Y page 163). clockwise. X Check the coolant temperature gauge in Ensure that the cap locks into place the multifunction display. securely. The coolant temperature must be below

X Check the oil level againwith the oil 158 ‡ (70 †). Maintenance and care dipstick (Y page 368). X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 163) in the ignition lock. Further information on engine oil (Y page 443). X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter- clockwise to allow excess pressure to escape. Additional service products X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and remove it. Checking coolant level If the coolant is at the level of marker bar G WARNING = in the filler neck when cold, there is The engine cooling system is pressurized, enough coolant in coolant expansion particularly when the engine is warm. When tank ;. opening the cap, you could be scalded by hot If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in coolantspraying out. There is a risk of injury. (1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fuel Let the engine cool down before opening the filler neck when warm, there is enough cap. Wear eye and hand protection when coolant in expansion tank ;. opening the cap. Open the cap slowly half a X If necessary, add coolant that has been turn to allow pressure to escape. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as it will go. For further information on coolant, see (Y page 445).

Z 370 Maintenance

Adding washer fluid to the windshield Maintenance washer system/headlamp cleaning system ASSYST PLUS G WARNING Service message Windshield washer concentrate is highly The ASSYST PLUS service interval display flammable. If it comes into contact with hot informs you of the nextservice due date. engine components or the exhaust system it Information on the type of service and service could ignite. There is a riskoffire and injury. intervals (see the separate Maintenance Make sure that no windshield washer Booklet). concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). i The ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display does not show any informationonthe engine oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil level (Y page 367). The multifunction display shows a service message for several seconds, e.g.: RNext Service A in .. Days RService A Due Maintenance and care Example: washer fluid reservoir RService A Exceeded by ... Days Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date is displayed. The letter A or B, possibly in connection with a number or another letter, shows the type of service. A stands for a minor service and B for a major service. You can obtain further information from an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display Example: washer fluid reservoir in AMG vehicles does not take into accountany periods of X To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab. time during which the battery is disconnected. X Add the premixed washer fluid. Maintaining the time-dependent service X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck schedule: until it engages. X Note down the service due date displayed The washer fluid reservoir is used for both the in the multifunctiondisplay before windshield washer system and the headlamp disconnecting the battery. cleaning system. or Further information on windshield washer X After reconnecting the battery, subtract fluid/antifreeze (Y page 446). the battery disconnection periods fromthe service date shown on the display. Care 371

Hiding aservice message Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces X Press the % or a button on the steering wheel. Rif the engine is often left idling for long periods Under these or similar conditions, have, for Displaying service messages example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter X Switch on the ignition. replaced or changed more frequently. Under X Press the = or ; button on the arduous operating conditions, the tires must steering wheel to selectthe Serv. menu. be checked more often. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist X Press the 9 or : button to select the workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz ASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm by Center. pressing the a button. The service due date appears in the Driving abroad multifunction display. An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is also available in other countries. You can Information about Service obtain further information from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service interval display ! If the ASSYST PLUS service interval Care display has been inadvertently reset, this General notes setting can be corrected at a qualified Maintenance and care specialist workshop. H Environmental note Have service work carried out as described Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning in the Maintenance Booklet. This may cloths in an environmentally responsible otherwise lead to increased wear and manner. damage to the major assemblies or the vehicle. ! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any Aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. an of the following: authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter, will reset Rdry, rough or hard cloths the ASSYST PLUS service interval display Rabrasive cleaning agents after the service work has been carried out. Rsolvents You can also obtain further information on maintenance work, for example. Rcleaning agents containing solvents Do not scrub. Special service requirements Do not touch the surfaces or protective The specified maintenance interval takes only films with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice the normal operation of the vehicle into scraper. You could otherwise scratch or account. Under arduous operating conditions damage the surfaces and protective film. or increased load on the vehicle, maintenance work must be carried out more ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended frequently, for example: period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel Rregular city driving with frequent cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause intermediate stops increased corrosion of the brake discs and Rif the vehicle is primarily used to travel brake pads/linings. For this reason, you short distances

Z 372 Care

should drive for a few minutes after is in transmission position N, otherwise the cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and vehicle could be damaged. the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. RVehicles with a SmartKey: The vehicle can then be parked. Do not remove the SmartKey from the Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for ignition lock. Do not open the driver's retaining the quality in the long term. door or front-passenger door when the Use care products and cleaning agents engine is switched off.Otherwise, the recommended and approved by Mercedes- automatic transmission selects park Benz. position P automatically and locks the wheels.You can prevent this by shifting the automatic transmission to N Washing the vehicle and cleaning the beforehand. paintwork RVehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Automatic car wash Do not open the driver's door or front- passenger door when the engine is G WARNING switched off. Otherwise, the automatic Braking efficiency is reduced after washing transmission selects park position P the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident. automatically and locks the wheels. After the vehicle has been washed, brake Observe the following to make sure that the carefully while paying attention to the traffic automatic transmission stays in position N: conditions until full braking power is restored. X Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the Maintenance and care ignition is switched off. ! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function X Turn the SmartKey to position is activated, the vehicle brakes 2 (Y page 163) in the ignition lock. automatically in certain situations. To Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/ prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate Stop button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO. DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in the following or other similarsituations: X Depress and hold the brake pedal. X Shift the automatic transmission to Rwhen towing the vehicle position N. Rin the car wash X Release the brake pedal. ! Neverclean your vehicle in a Touchless X Release the electric parking brake. Automatic Car Wash as these use special X Switch off the ignition and leave the cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can SmartKey in the ignition lock. damage the paintwork or plastic parts. You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car ! Make sure that: wash from the very start. Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroof If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before are fully closed. cleaning it in an automatic car wash. Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off After using an automatic car wash, wipe off (the OFF button has been pressed). wax from the windshield and the wiper Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position blades. This will prevent smears and reduce 0. wiping noises caused by residue on the Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged. windshield. ! In car washes with a towing mechanism, make sure that the automatic transmission Care 373

Washing by hand Do not aim directly at any of the following: In some countries, washing by hand is only Rtires allowed at specially equipped washing bays. Rdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc. Observe the legal requirements in all Relectrical components countries concerned. Rbattery X Do not use hot water and do not wash the Rconnectors vehicle in direct sunlight. Rlights X Use a soft sponge to clean. Rseals X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car Rtrim shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz. Rventilation slots X Thoroughly hose downthe vehicle with a gentle jet of water. Damaged seals or electrical components can lead to leaks or failures. X Do not point the water jet directly towards the air inlets. Cleaning the paintwork X Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge frequently. ! Do not affix: X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry Rstickers thoroughly with a chamois. Rfilms X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the Rmagnetic plates or similar items paintwork. to painted surfaces. You could otherwise When using the vehicle in winter, remove all damage the paintwork. Maintenance and care traces of road salt deposits carefully and as Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected soon as possible. by corrosion and damage caused by inadequate care cannot always be completely Powerwashers repaired. In such cases, visit a qualified G WARNING specialist workshop. The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt X Remove dirt immediately, where possible, blasters) can cause invisibleexterior damage while avoiding rubbing too hard. to the tires or chassis components. X Soak insect remains with insect remover Components damaged in this way may fail and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. unexpectedly.There is a risk of an accident. X Soak bird droppings with water and rinse Do not use power washers with circular jet off the treated areas afterwards. nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, tires or chassis components replaced oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gently immediately. with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. ! Always maintain a distance of at least X Use tar remover to remove tar stains. 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. Information about X Use silicone remover to remove wax. the correct distance is available from the If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint equipment manufacturer. surface, use the paint care products Move the power washer nozzle around recommended and approved by Mercedes- when cleaning your vehicle. Benz.This is the case approximately every

Z 374 Care

three to five months, depending on the i Use only insect remover and car shampoo climate conditions and the care product used. from the range of recommended and If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if approved Mercedes-Benz care products. the paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recommended and approved by Mercedes- Benz should be used. Cleaning the vehicle parts Do not use these care products in the sunor Cleaning the wheels on the hood while the hood is hot. ! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage to to remove brake dust. This could damage the paintwork quickly and provisionally. wheel bolts and brake components. ! Do not park the vehicle for an extended Matte finish care period straight after cleaning it, particularly after having cleaned the wheels with wheel ! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause wheels. Polishing causes the finish to increased corrosion of the brake discs and shine. brake pads/linings. For this reason, you ! The following may cause the paint to should drive for a few minutes after become shiny and thus reduce the matte cleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and effect: the brake pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle can then be parked. RVigorous rubbing with unsuitable

Maintenance and care materials. Cleaning the windows RFrequent use of car washes. RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight. G WARNING You could become trapped by the windshield ! Never use paint cleaner, buffing or wipers if they start moving while cleaning the polishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g. windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of wax. These products are only suitable for injury. high-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish leads to considerable Always switch off the windshield wipers and surface damage (shiny, spotted areas). the ignition before cleaning the windshield or wiper blades. Always have paintwork repairs performed at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an ! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products, authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. solvents or cleaning agents containing ! Do not use wash programs with a hot wax solvents to clean the inside of the windows. treatment under any circumstances. Do not touch the insides of the windows with hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or Observe these notes if your vehicle has a ring. There is otherwise a risk of damaging clear matte finish. This will help you to avoid the windows. damage to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment. ! Clean the water drainage channels of the These notes also apply to light alloy wheels windshield and the rear window at regular with a clear matte finish. intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and pollen may under certain i The vehicle should preferably be washed circumstances prevent water from draining by hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of water. Care 375

away. This can lead to corrosiondamage Mirror turn signals and damage to electronic components. ! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean the inside and outside of the cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses. windows with a damp cloth and a cleaning Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning product that is recommended and cloths could scratch or damage the plastic approved by Mercedes-Benz. lenses of the mirror turnsignals. X Clean the plasticlenses of the mirror turn Cleaning wiper blades signals in the exterior mirror housing using G WARNING a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benzcar shampoo or cleaning You could become trapped by the windshield cloths. wipers if they start moving while cleaning the windshield or wiper blades.There is a risk of injury. Cleaning the sensors Always switch off the windshield wipers and ! If you clean the sensorswith a power the ignition before cleaning the windshield or washer, make sure that you keep a wiper blades. distance of at least 11.8in(30 cm) between the vehicle and the power washer nozzle. ! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, Information about the correct distance is the wiper blade could be damaged. available from the equipment ! Do not clean wiper blades too often and manufacturer.

do not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the Maintenance and care graphite coating could be damaged. This could cause wiper noise. ! Hold the wiper arm securely when folding back. The windshield could be damaged if the wiper arm smacks against it suddenly. X Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the windshield. X Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. X Fold the windshield wiper arms back again before switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting

! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning X Clean sensors : of the driving systems cloths which are suitable for plastic light with water, car shampoo and a soft cloth. lenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could scratch or damage Cleaning the rear view camera the plastic light lenses. ! X Cleanthe plastic lenses of the exterior Do not cleanthe camera lens and the area lighting using a wet sponge and a mild around the rear view camera with a power cleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benzcar washer. shampoo or cleaning cloths.

Z 376 Care

i If you are traveling faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) or the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock, the cover of the 360° camera closes automatically.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe ! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid- based cleaning agents such as sanitary cleansers or wheel cleaners. Impurities combined with the effects of road X Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean grit and corrosive environmental factors may camera lens :. cause flash rust to form on the surface. You can restore the original shine of the exhaust Cleaning the 360° camera pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and after washing. ! Do not clean the camera lens and the area X Cleanthe exhaust pipe with a chrome care around the 360° camera with a power product tested and approved by Mercedes- washer.360 Benz.

Cleaning the trailer tow hitch

Maintenance and care H Environmental note Dispose of rags soaked in oil and grease in an environmentally responsible manner.

! Do not clean the ball coupling with a power washer. Do not use solvents. ! Observe the note on care provided by the X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and trailer manufacturer. that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition lock. X To open the cover of the 360° camera: with COMAND activated, press the W button. X Select System by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. X Select 360° Camera and press W to confirm. X Select Open Camera Cover and press W to confirm. The cover of the 360° camera opens. X To clean the 360° camera: clean camera lens : with clean water and a soft cloth. Care 377

The ball coupling must be cleaned if it camera lens is dirty, visit a qualified becomes dirty or corroded. specialist workshop. X Remove rust on the ball of the ball coupling, e.g. with a wire brush. X Remove dirt with a clean, lint-free cloth or a brush. X After cleaning, lightly oil or grease ball coupling :. X Check that the vehicle's trailer tow hitch is working properly. i You can also have the maintenance work on the ball coupling and the trailer tow hitch carried out by a qualified specialist X Fold down the camera cover by recess :. workshop.

Interior care Cleaning the display ! For cleaning, do not use any of the following: Maintenance and care Ralcohol-based thinner or gasoline Rabrasive cleaning agents R commercially-available household X Use a soft cloth to clean the windshield in cleaning agents front of camera ;. These may damage the display surface. Do not put pressure on the display surface Cleaning the plastic trim when cleaning. This could lead to irreparable damage to the display. G WARNING X Before cleaning the display, make sure that Care products and cleaning agents containing it is switched off and has cooled down. solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to X Clean the display surface using a become porous. As a result, plastic parts may commercially available microfiber cloth come loose in the event of air bag and TFT/LCD display cleaner. deployment. There is a risk of injury. X Dry the display surface using a dry Do not use any care products and cleaning microfiber cloth. agents to clean the cockpit. ! Do not affix the following to plastic Cleaning Night View Assist Plus surfaces: ! Never clean the camera lens. When Rstickers cleaning the field of vision of the driving Rfilms systems, make sure that you do not spray Rscented oil bottles or similar items glass cleaner on the camera lens. If the You can otherwise damage the plastic.

Z 378 Care

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent Cleaning the seat covers or sunscreen to come into contact with the plastic trim. This maintains the high-quality General notes look of the surfaces. ! Do not use microfibercloths to clean genuine leather, artificial leatheror X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth. Alcantara® covers. If used often, these can damage the cover. X Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning products recommended and approved by i Note thatregular care is essential to Mercedes-Benz. ensure that the appearance and comfort of The surface may change color temporarily. the covers is retained over time. Wait until the surface is dry again. Genuine leather seat covers ! To retain the natural appearance of the Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or leather, observe the following cleaning selector lever instructions: X Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use RClean genuine leather covers carefully leather care agents that have been with a damp cloth and then wipe the recommended and approved by Mercedes- covers down with a dry cloth. Benz. RMake sure that the leather does not become soaked. It may otherwise Cleaning genuine woodand trim become rough and cracked. elements

Maintenance and care ROnly use leather care agents that have ! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents been tested and approved by Mercedes- such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, Benz. You can obtain these from a polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a risk qualified specialist workshop. of damaging the surface. Leather is a natural product. ! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces. It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for The trim pieces have a chrome look but are example: mostly made of anodized aluminum and RDifferences in the texture can lose their shine if chrome polish is RSigns of stretching and marking used. Use a damp, lint-free cloth instead RSlight nuances of color when cleaning the trim pieces. These are characteristics of leather and not If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very material defects. dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are unsure as to whether the trim pieces Seat covers of other materials are chrome-plated or not, consult an ! Observe the following when cleaning: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. RClean artificial leather covers with a cloth X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with moistened with a solution containing a damp, lint-free cloth,e.g. a microfiber 1% detergent(e.g. dish washing liquid). cloth. RClean cloth covers with a microfiber X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning cloth moistened with a solution products recommended and approved by containing 1% detergent(e.g. dish Mercedes-Benz. washing liquid). Rub carefully and always wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave the seat to dry Care 379

afterwards. Cleaning results depend on the type of dirt and how long it has been there. RClean Alcantara® covers with a damp cloth.Make sure that you wipe entire seat sections to avoid leaving visible lines.

Cleaning the seat belts G WARNING Seat belts can become severely weakened if bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of an accident. This posesanincreased risk of injury or fatal injury. Never bleach or dye the seatbelts.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemical cleaning agents.Do not dry the seat belts by warming them above 176 ‡ (80 †) or placing them in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soap Maintenance and care solution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpets

X Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or dry shampoo. X Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning agents recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Z 380 381

Useful information ...... 382 Where will I find...? ...... 382 Flat tire ...... 383 Battery(vehicle) ...... 387 Jump-starting ...... 391 Towing and tow-starting ...... 393 Fuses ...... 396 Breakdown assistance 382 Where will I find...?

Useful information changing a wheel are specific to the vehicle. For more information on which i This Operator's Manual describes all tools are required to perform a wheel models and all standard and optional change on your vehicle, consult a qualified equipment of your vehicle available at the specialist workshop. time of publication of the Operator's Tools required for changing awheel may Manual. Country-specific differences are include, for example: possible. Please note that your vehicle may RJack not be equipped with all features RWheel chock described. This also applies to safety- related systems and functions. RLug wrench RRatchet wrench i Read the information on qualified RAlignment bolt specialist workshops: (Y page 28). Vehicles with aTIREFIT kit Where will I find...? First-aid kit Breakdown assistance

: Lug wrench ; Towing eye = Ratchet wrench X Open the tailgate. ? Alignmentbolt X Remove first-aid kit : from the parcel net. A Tire sealant filler bottle i Check the expiration date on the first-aid B Tire inflation compressor kit at least once a year. Replace the contents if necessary, and replace missing C Folding wheel chock items. D Jack E Wheel bolts

Vehicle tool kit X Lift the cargo compartment floor up (Y page 343). General notes X Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page 385). The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor. i Apart from certain country-specific variations, the vehicles are not equipped with a tire-change tool kit.Some tools for Flat tire 383

Vehicles with a"Minispare" emergency X Secure the vehicle against rolling away spare wheel (Y page 183). X If possible, bring the frontwheels into the straight-ahead position. X Vehicles with the ON&OFFROAD package: make sure that highway level is selected (Y page 207). X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door. : Alignment bolt The on-board electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the key having been ; Velcro fastener removed. = Folding wheel chock X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the ? Ratchet wrench Start/Stop button from the ignition lock A Lug wrench (Y page 163). B Jack X All occupants must get out of the vehicle. C Wheel bolts Make sure that they are not endangered as they do so. D Towing eye X Make sure that no one is near the danger X Lift the cargo compartment floor up area while a wheel is being changed. (Y page 343).

Anyone who is not directly assisting in the Breakdown assistance wheel change should, for example, stand behind the barrier. Flat tire X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to Preparing the vehicle traffic conditions when doing so. X Close the driver's door. Yourvehicle may be equipped with: X Unload heavy luggage. RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flat properties) (Y page 384) i Only operate the tire inflation compressor Vehicle preparation is not necessary on using a 12 V socket, even if the ignition is vehicles with MOExtended tires. turned off (Y page 348). Ra TIREFIT kit (Y page 382) An emergency cut-out ensures that the on- board voltage does not drop too low. If the Ran emergency spare wheel (only for certain on-board voltage is too low, the power to countries) (Y page 434) the sockets is automatically cut. This Information on changing/mounting a wheel ensures that there is sufficient power to (Y page 423). start the engine. X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and level ground, as far away as possible from traffic. X Switch on the hazard warning lamps. 384 Flat tire

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat You must not exceed a maximum speed of properties) 50 mph (80 km/h). General notes i When replacing one or all tires, make sure that you use only tires: With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat Rof the size specified for the vehicle and characteristics), you can continue to drive yourvehicle even if there is a total loss of Rmarked "MOExtended" pressure in one or more tires. The affected If a tire has gone flat and cannot be tire must not show any clearly visible damage. replaced with a MOExtended tire, a You can recognize MOExtended tires by the standard tire may be used as a temporary MOExtended marking which appears on the measure. Make sure that you use the sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking proper size and type (summer or winter nextto the tire size designation, the load- tire). bearing capacity and the speed index i Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not (Y page 417). equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. MOExtended tires may only be used in It is therefore recommended that you conjunction with an active tire pressure loss additionally equip your vehicle with a warning system or with an active tire pressure TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not monitor. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. If the pressure loss warning message A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from a appears in the multifunction display: qualified specialist workshop. RObserve the instructions in the display Important safety notes messages (Y page 314). RCheck the tire for damage. Breakdown assistance G WARNING RIf driving on, observe the following notes. When driving in emergency mode, the driving The maximum driving distance is characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the cornering, accelerating quickly and when vehicle is partially laden and approximately braking. There is a risk of an accident. 18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fully Do not exceed the stated maximum speed. laden. Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers, In addition to the vehicle load, the driving and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes, distance possible depends upon: off-road). This applies in particular to a laden vehicle. Rspeed Stop driving in emergency mode if: Rroad condition Routside temperature Ryou hear banging noises. The driving distance possible in run-flat mode Rthe vehicle starts to shake. may be reduced by extreme driving Ryou see smoke and smell rubber. conditions/maneuvers, or it can be increased RESP® is intervening constantly. through a moderate style of driving. Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire. The maximum permissible distance which After driving in emergency mode, have the can be driven in run-flat mode is counted from wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist the moment the tire pressure loss warning workshop with regard to their further use. The appears in the multifunction display. defective tire must be replaced in every case. Flat tire 385

TIREFITkit The tire inflation compressor can be operated again once it has cooled down. Important safety notes Using the TIREFIT kit G WARNING In the following situations,the tire sealant is TIREFIT is a tire sealant. unable to provide sufficient breakdown TIREFIT can be used to seal small punctures assistance, as it is unable to seal the tire of up to 0.16 inches (4 mm), particularly on properly: the tire tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire larger temperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †). than those mentioned above. Rthe wheel rim is damaged. Ryou have driven at very low tire pressures or on a flat tire. There is a risk of an accident. Do not drive any further. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING The tire sealant is harmful and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with TIREFIT sticker, 2-part your skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. X Do not remove any foreign objects which Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant have penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or away from children. There is a risk of injury. nails. Breakdown assistance If you come into contact with the tire sealant, X Remove the tire sealant bottle, the observe the following: accompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tire RRinse off the tire sealant from your skin inflation compressor from the stowage well immediately with water. underneath the cargo compartment floor RIf the tire sealant comes into contact with (Y page 382). your eyes, immediately rinse them X Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker within thoroughly with clean water. the driver's field of vision. RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediately X Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink valve on the wheel with the defective tire. plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting, and seek medical attention immediately. RImmediately change out of clothing which has come into contact with tire sealant. RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflation compressor for longer than eight minutes at a time without a break. It may otherwise overheat.

Z 386 Flat tire

X Pull plug ? with the cable and hose A out If atire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) of the housing. has not beenattained after five minutes: X Screw hose A onto flange B of tire (Y page 386). sealant bottle :. i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry.It X Place tire sealant bottle : head can then be removed like a layeroffilm. downwards into recess ; of the tire If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, inflation compressor. have themcleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

Tire pressure not reached If apressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not beenachieved afterfive minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose fromthe valve of the faulty tire. X Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approximately 30 ft (10 m). X Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty X Pump up the tire again. tire. After a maximum of five minutes the tire X Screw filler hose D onto valve C. pressure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/ 26 psi). X Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket in your vehicle. G WARNING Breakdown assistance Observe the notes on sockets If the required tire pressure is not reached (Y page 348). after the specified time, the tire is too badly X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the ignition lock (Y page 163). tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly X Press on/offswitch = on the tire inflation impair the vehicle's braking and driving compressor to I. characteristics. There is a risk of accident. The tire inflationcompressor is switched on. The tire is inflated. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The pressure can briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi). Tire pressure reached Do not switch off the tire inflation G WARNING compressor during this phase. Atire temporarily sealed with tire sealant X Allow the tire inflation compressor to run impairs the driving characteristics and is not for five minutes. The tire should then have suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa accident. (1.8 bar/26 psi). You should therefore adapt your driving style If atire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed has beenattained after five minutes: the specified maximum speed with a tire that (Y page 386). has been repaired using tire sealant. Battery (vehicle) 387

! Residue from the tire sealant may come placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side out of the filler hose after use. This could or tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap). cause stains. X To increase the tire pressure: switch on Therefore, place the filler hose in the plastic the tire inflation compressor. bag which contained the TIREFIT kit. H Environmental note Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at aqualified specialist workshop.

If a tire pressure of 180kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has been attained after five minutes: X Switch off the tire inflation compressor. X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the faulty tire. E Pressure release button X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire F Pressure gauge inflation compressor. X To reduce the tire pressure: press X Pull away immediately. pressure release button E on the filler The maximum speed for a tire sealed with hose. tire sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire to the instrument cluster in the driver's inflation compressor. field of vision. X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist

X Stop after driving for approximately ten workshop and have the tire changed there. Breakdown assistance minutes and check the tire pressure with X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as the tire inflation compressor. soon as possible at a qualified specialist The tire pressure must now be at least workshop. 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every four years at a qualified specialist WARNING G workshop. If the required tire pressure is not reached after driving for a short period, the tire is too badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair Battery (vehicle) the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire pressure that is too low can significantly Important safety notes impair the vehicle's braking and driving Special tools and expert knowledge are characteristics. There is a risk of accident. required when working on the battery, e.g. Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified removal and installing. You should therefore specialist workshop. have all work involving the battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values, G WARNING see the Tire and Loading Information Work carried out incorrectly on the battery can, for example, lead to a short circuit and damage your vehicle's electronic system. This

Z 388 Battery (vehicle)

can disrupt driving safety systems such as RMake sure that the positive terminal of a ABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP® connected battery does not come into (Electronic Stability Program). contact with vehicle parts. RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock RNever place metal objects or tools on a during braking. This limits the steerability battery. of the vehicle whenbraking and the braking RIt is important that you observe the distance may increase.There is a risk of described order of the battery terminals accident. when connecting and disconnecting a RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be battery. stabilized if it starts to skid or a wheel starts RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the to spin. There is a risk of accident. battery poles with identical polarity are You should therefore have all work involving connected. the battery carried out at a qualified specialist RIt is particularly important to observe the workshop. described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. G WARNING RNever connect or disconnect the battery Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation terminals while the engine is running. of sparks, which could ignite the highly explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk of G WARNING an explosion. Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. body to remove any existing electrostatic Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean build-up. over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with Breakdown assistance The highly flammable gas mixture forms when water and seek medical attention. charging the battery as well as when jump- starting. H Environmental note Always make sure that neither you nor the Batteries contain dangerous battery is electrostatically charged. There is substances. It is against the a build-up of electrostatic charge, e.g.: law to dispose of them with Rby wearing clothing made from synthetic the household rubbish. They fibers must be collected separately Rdue to friction between clothing and seats and recycled to protect the Rif you push or pull the battery across the environment. carpet or other synthetic materials Dispose of batteries in an Rif you wipe the battery with a cloth. environmentally friendly manner. Take discharged G WARNING batteries to a qualified During the charging process, a battery specialist workshop or a produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit special collection point for occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen used batteries. gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. ! Have the battery checked regularly at a qualified specialist workshop. Battery (vehicle) 389

Observe the service intervals in the Immediately rinse acid splashes Maintenance Booklet or contact a qualified off with clean water. Consult a specialist workshop for more information. doctor if necessary. ! You should have all work involving the Wear eye protection. battery carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. In the exceptional case that it is necessary for you to disconnect the battery Keep children away. yourself, make sure that: Ryou switch off the engine and remove the SmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS- GO, ensure that the ignition is switched Observe this Operator's Manual. off.Check that all the indicator lamps in the instrumentcluster are off.Otherwise, electroniccomponents, such as the For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz alternator, may be damaged. recommends that you only use batteries Ryou first remove the negative terminal which have been tested and approved for clamp and then the positive terminal your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. These clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps. batteries provide increased impact Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic protection to prevent vehicle occupants from system may be damaged. suffering acid burns should the battery be Rthe transmission is locked in position P damaged in the event of an accident. after disconnecting the battery. The In order for the battery to achieve the vehicle is secured against rolling away. maximum possible service life, it must always You can then no longer move the vehicle. be sufficiently charged. Breakdown assistance The battery and the cover of the positive The vehicle battery, like other batteries, can terminal clamp must be installed securely discharge over time if you do not use the during operation. vehicle. In this case, have the battery Comply with safety precautions and take disconnected at a qualified specialist protective measures when handling workshop. You can also charge the battery batteries. with a charger recommended by Mercedes- WARNING Benz.Contact a qualified specialist workshop for further information. Have the battery charge level checked more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for Fire, open flames and smoking are short trips or if you leave it standing idle for prohibited when handling the a lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist battery. Avoid creating sparks. workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle Battery acid is caustic. Avoid parked for a long period of time. contact with the skin, eyes or i Remove the SmartKey if you park the clothing. vehicle and do not require any electrical Wear suitable protective clothing, consumers. The vehicle will then use very in particular gloves, an apron and little energy, thus conserving battery a face mask. power.

Z 390 Battery (vehicle)

i If the powersupply has been interrupted, Never charge a battery still installed in the e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you will vehicle unless a battery charger unit have to: approved by Mercedes-Benzis being used. A battery charger unit specially adapted for Rset the clock. Information on setting the clock can be found in the separate Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested and operating instructions. approved by Mercedes-Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the charging of the On vehicles with COMAND and a battery in its installed position. Contact an navigation system, the clock is set authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further automatically. information and availability. Charge the Rreset the function for folding the exterior battery in accordance with the separate mirrors in/out automatically, by folding instructions for the battery charger. the mirrors out once (Y page 119). The jump-starting connection point is in the engine compartment (Y page 391). Charging the battery Read the battery charger's operating instructions before charging the battery.

G WARNING X Open the hood (Y page 366). During charging and jump-starting, explosive X Connect the battery charger to the positive gases can escape from thebattery. There is a terminal and ground point in the same risk of an explosion. order as when connecting the donor Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating battery in the jump-starting procedure sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient (Y page 391). ventilationwhile charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery. Breakdown assistance G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point.When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with a maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. ! Only charge the battery using the jump- starting connection point. Jump-starting 391

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of a positive terminal and an earth point, in the engine compartment. G WARNING Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water and seek medical attention.

G WARNING During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNING During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion. RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with vehicle parts. RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery. RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting and disconnecting a battery. Breakdown assistance RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected. RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting the jumper cables. RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNING Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point.When jump-starting the vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion. Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

G WARNING Non-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by the non-combusted fuel.

Z 392 Jump-starting

Do not start the vehicleusing a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables. Observe the following points: RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or ajump-starting device. RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold. RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first. ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating. ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficientcross-section and insulated terminal clamps. RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly. RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch. Make sure that: Rthe jumper cables are not damaged. Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections. Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan. These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running. X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake. X Shift the transmission to position P. X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignitionlock and remove it (Y page 163). On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure the ignition is switched off (Y page 163). All indicator lamps

Breakdown assistance in the instrument cluster must be off. X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.). X Open the hood (Y page 366).

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump- starting device. Towing and tow-starting 393

X Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow. X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the jumper cable, always beginwith positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first. X Start the engine of the donorvehicle and run it at idling speed. X Connectnegative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first. X Start the engine. X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the enginerun for several minutes. X First, remove the jumper cables from earth point A and negative terminal ?, then from positive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first. X Close cover : of positive terminal ; after removing the jumper cables. X Have the battery checkedataqualified specialist workshop. i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition. i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting There is a risk of an accident. Important safety notes When towing or tow-starting another vehicle, its weight should not be greater than the

G WARNING permissible gross weight of your vehicle. Breakdown assistance Functions relevant to safety are restricted or no longer available if: G WARNING The vehicle is braked when the HOLD function Rthe engine is not running. or DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore, Rthe brake system or the power steering is deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if the malfunctioning. vehicle is to be towed. Rthere is a malfunction in the voltage supply or the vehicle's electrical system. ! Make sure that the electric parking brake If your vehicle is being towed, much more is released. If the electric parking brake is force may be necessary to steer or brake. faulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop. There is a risk of an accident. ! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing, towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could make sure that the steering moves freely. be damaged.

G WARNING ! Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, If the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow- recover the vehicle with acrane. started is greater than the permissible gross weight of your vehicle: ! When towing, pull away slowly and Rthe towing eye could detach itself smoothly.Ifthe tractive power is too high, the vehicles could be damaged. Rthe vehicle/trailer combination could rollover.

Z 394 Towing and tow-starting

! When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, locked out when pushing or towing the use the key instead of the Start/Stop vehicle. button. Otherwise, the automatic transmission may shift to position P when the driver's or front-passenger door are Installing/removing the towing eye opened, which could lead to damage to the transmission. Installing the towing eye ! Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This could damage the vehicle. ! Vehicles with differential locks: make sure the differential locks are in automatic mode. When towing, the differential locks must not be switched on. The transmission may otherwise be damaged. ! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of 30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded. If the vehicle has to be towed more than 30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be raised and transported. ! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its weight must not exceed the maximum Example: towing eye mounting covers permissible gross vehicle weight of your : Front cover Breakdown assistance vehicle. ; Back cover Information on your vehicle's gross vehicle Vehicles with a trailer tow hitch: if possible, weight rating can be found on the vehicle connect the towbar to the trailer tow hitch identification plate (Y page 438). (Y page 257). It is better to have the vehicle transported The brackets for the screw-in towing eyes are than to have it towed. located in the bumpers. They are at the front If the vehicle has suffered transmission and at the rear, under the covers. damage, have it transported on a transporter X Remove the towing eye from the vehicle or trailer. tool kit (Y page 382). The automatic transmission must be in X To open the cover at the front: press the position N when the vehicle is being towed. mark on cover : inwards in the direction The battery must be connected and charged. of the arrow. Otherwise, you: X To open the cover at the rear: insert a Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in flat, blunt object into the cutout and lever the ignition lock cover ; out of the bumper. Rcannot release the electric parking brake X Take cover : or ; off the opening. Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to the position N stop and tighten it. i Deactivate the automatic locking feature (Y page 280). You could otherwise be Towing and tow-starting 395

Removing the towing eye combination switch, the hazard warning lamp starts flashing again. X Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it. X Attach cover : or ; to the bumper and press until it engages. Transporting the vehicle X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit. ! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehicle such as axle or steering components. Towing avehicle with both axles on Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. the ground The towing eyes or trailer tow hitch can be It is importantthat you observe the safety used to pull the vehicle onto a trailer or instructions when towing away your vehicle transporter if you wish to transport it. (Y page 393). X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the The automatic transmission automatically ignition lock. shifts to position P when you open the driver's X Shift the automatic transmission to or front-passenger door or when you remove position N. the SmartKey from the ignition lock. In order to ensure that the automatic As soon as the vehicle is loaded: transmission stays in position N when towing X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by the vehicle, you must observe the following applying the electric parking brake. points: X Shift the automatic transmission to X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and position P. the SmartKey in the ignition lock is in X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the position 0. ignition lock and remove it. Breakdown assistance X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the X Secure the vehicle. ignition lock. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button Information on 4MATIC vehicles (Y page 163). ! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed X Depress and hold the brake pedal. with either the front or the rear axle raised, X Shift the automatic transmission to as doing so will damage the transmission. position N. If the vehicle has transmission damage or X Release the brake pedal. damage to the front or rear axle, have it X Release the electric parking brake. transported on a transporter or trailer. X Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the In the event of damage to the electrical ignition lock. system X Switch on the hazard warning lamps If the battery is defective, the automatic (Y page 128). transmission will be locked in position P. To i In order to signal a change of direction shift the automatic transmission to position when towing the vehicle with the hazard N, you must provide power to the vehicle's warning lamps switched on, use the electrical system in the same way as when combination switch as usual. In this case, jump-starting (Y page 391). only the indicator lamps for the direction of Have the vehicle transported on a transporter travel flash. After resetting the or trailer.

Z 396 Fuses

Recovering avehicle that has become Otherwise, components or systems could stuck be damaged. ! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in a The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down straightline when pulling out a vehicle that faulty circuits. If afuse blows, all the has become stuck. Excessive tractive components on the circuit and their functions power could damage the vehicles. stop operating. Blown fuses must be replacedwith fuses of If the drive wheels get trapped on loose or the same rating, which you can recognize by muddy ground, recover the vehicle with the the color and value. The fuse ratings are listed utmost care, especially so if the vehicle is in the fuse allocation chart. laden. If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the Never attempt to recover a vehicle with a cause traced and rectified at a qualified trailer attached. specialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible, Mercedes-BenzCenter. using the tracks it made when it became stuck. Before changing a fuse Tow-starting (emergency engine X Secure the vehicle against rolling away starting) (Y page 183). X Switch off all electrical consumers. ! Vehicles with an automatic transmission must not be tow-started. You could X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the otherwise damage the automatic ignition lock and remove it (Y page 163). transmission. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make sure

Breakdown assistance the ignition is switched off (Y page 163). You can find information on "Jump-starting" All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster at (Y page 391). must be off. The fuses are located in various fuse boxes: Fuses Rfuse box on the front-passenger side of the dashboard Important safety notes Rfuse box in the engine compartment on the G WARNING right-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed Only use fuses that have been approved for in the direction of travel Mercedes-Benzvehicles and that have the RFuse box under the rear bench seat correct fuse rating for the systems The fuse allocation chart is located in the fuse concerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridge box under the rear bench seat (Y page 397). faulty fuses. Using fuses that have not been approved or attempting to repair or bridge faulty fuses could cause the fuse to be Dashboard fuse box overloaded and result in afire. Have the cause ! traced and rectified at a qualified specialist Do not use a pointed objectsuch as a workshop. screwdriver to open the cover in the dashboard. You could damage the ! For the fuse boxes in the engine dashboard or the cover. compartment and under the rear bench ! Make sure that no moisture can enterthe seat, only use fuses with the suffix "S". fuse box when the cover is open. Fuses 397

! When closing the cover, make sure that it X To open: open clamps ;. is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture X Fold up cover : in the direction of the seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair arrow and remove it. the operation of the fuses. X To close: check whether the seal is seated correctly in cover :. X Insert cover : at the side of the fuse box into the retainers. X Fold down cover : and close clamps ;. X Close the hood.

Fuse box under the rear bench seat ! Make sure that no moisture can enter the X To open: pull cover : outwards in the fuse box when the cover is open. direction of the arrow and remove it. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it X To close: clip in cover : on the front of is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture the dashboard. seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair X Fold cover : inwards until it engages. the operation of the fuses or the cover could be damaged by the rear bench seat. X Fold the left-hand rear bench seat forward Fuse box in the engine compartment (Y page 340).

! Make sure that no moisture can enter the Breakdown assistance fuse box when the cover is open. ! When closing the cover, make sure that it is lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seeping in or dirt could otherwise impair the operation of the fuses.

X To open: reach into recesses ; on each side of fuse box cover :. X Fold cover : up in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the fuse box. i The fuse allocation chart is located in a recess at the side of the fuse box. X Open the hood. X To close: place cover : on the fuse box. X Remove any existing moisture from the fuse box using a dry cloth.

Z 398 Fuses

X Press cover : down until you feel the clamps engage. X Fold back the left-hand rear bench seat (Y page 340). Breakdown assistance 399

Useful information ...... 400 Important safety notes ...... 400 Operation ...... 400 Winter operation ...... 402 Check ...... 404 Loading the vehicle ...... 412 All about wheels and tires ...... 415 Changing awheel ...... 423 Wheel and tire combinations ...... 428 Emergency spare wheel ...... 434 Wheels and tires 400 Operation

Useful information Tires with run-flat characteristics: Rpay attention to the information and i This Operator's Manual describes all warning notices on MOExtended tires (tires models and all standard and optional with run-flat characteristics). equipment of your vehicle available at the time of publication of the Operator's Accessories that are not approved for your Manual. Country-specific differences are vehicle by Mercedes-Benzorare not being possible. Please note that your vehicle may used correctly can impair the operating not be equipped with all features safety. described. This also applies to safety- Before purchasing and using non-approved related systems and functions. accessories, visitaqualified specialist i Read the information on qualified workshop and inquire about: specialist workshops: (Y page 28). Rsuitability Rlegal stipulations Important safety notes Rfactory recommendations Information on the dimensions and types of wheels and tires for your vehicle can be found G WARNING in the "Wheel/tire combinations" section If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used, (Y page 428). the wheel brakes or suspension components Information on air pressure for the tires on may be damaged. There is arisk of an your vehicle can be found: accident. Always replace wheels and tires with those Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading that fulfill the specifications of the original Information placard on the B-pillar part. (Y page 412) When replacing wheels, make sure to use the Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

Wheels and tires correct: flap (Y page 178) Rin the "Tire pressure" section Rdesignation Runder "Tire pressure" (Y page 404) Rmodel When replacing tires, make sure to use the correct: Operation Rdesignation Information on driving Rmanufacturer Rmodel If the vehicle is heavily loaded, checkthe tire pressures and correct them if necessary. G WARNING While driving, pay attention to vibrations, Aflat tire severely impairs the driving, noises and unusual handling characteristics, steering and braking characteristics of the e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate that vehicle. There is a risk of accident. the wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that a tire is defective, reduce your Tires without run-flat characteristics: speed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soon Rdo not drive with aflat tire. as possible to check the wheels and tires for Rimmediately replace the flat tire with your damage. Hidden tire damage could also be emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or causing the unusual handling characteristics. consult a qualified specialist workshop. If you find no signs of damage, have the tires Operation 401 and wheels checked at a qualified specialist Regularly check the pressure of all the tires workshop. particularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire When parking your vehicle, make sure that pressure as necessary (Y page 404). the tires do notget deformed by the curb or Observe the notes on the emergency spare other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive over wheel (Y page 434). curbs, speed humps or similar elevations, try The service life of tires depends on the to do so slowly and at an obtuse angle. following factors amongst other things: Otherwise, the tires, particularly the RDriving style sidewalls, may be damaged. RTire pressure RDistance covered Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNING Tire tread Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pressure loss. As a result, you could lose G WARNING control of your vehicle. There is a risk of Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction. accident. The tire is no longer able to dissipate water. Check the tires regularly for signs of damage This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk and replace any damaged tires immediately. of hydroplaning increases, in particular where speed is not adapted to suit the driving Regularly checkthe wheels and tires of your conditions. There is a risk of accident. vehicle for damage at least once a month, as If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires well as after driving off-road or on rough may exhibit different levels of wear at roads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss of different locations on the tire tread. Thus, you tire pressure. Pay particular attention to should regularly check the tread depth and damage such as: the condition of the tread across the entire

Rcuts in the tires width of all tires. Wheels and tires Rpunctures Minimum tire tread depth for: Rtears in the tires RSummer tires: â in (3 mm) Rbulges on tires RM+S tires: ã in (4 mm) Rdeformation or severe corrosion on wheels For safety reasons, replace the tires before Regularly check the tire tread depth and the the legally prescribed limit for the minimum condition of the tread across the whole width tire tread depth is reached. of the tire (Y page 401). If necessary, turn the front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the inner side of the tire surface. All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount anything onto the valve other than the standard valve cap or other valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle. Do not use any other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.

Z 402 Winter operation

Bar indicator : for tread wear is integrated Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with into the tire tread. a flat tire (Y page 384). Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by i Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires law. Six indicators are positioned on the tire are not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the tread. They are visible once the tread depth factory. It is therefore recommended that is approximately á in (1.6 mm). If this is the you additionally equip your vehicle with a case, the tire is so worn that it mustbe TIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do not replaced. feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop. Selecting, mounting and replacing tires ROnly mount tires and wheels of the same Winter operation type and make. General notes Exception: it is permissible to install a different type or make in the event of a flat Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualified tire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires specialist workshop at the onset of winter. with run-flat characteristics" section Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel" (Y page 384). section (Y page 423). ROnly mount tires of the correct size onto the wheels. Driving with summer tires RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds for the first 60 miles (100 km).They only reach At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer their full performance after this distance. tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and RDo not drive with tires which have too little braking power. Change the tires on your tread depth, as this significantly reduces vehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires at

Wheels and tires the traction on wet roads (hydroplaning). very cold temperatures could cause cracks to form, thereby damaging the tires RReplace the tires after six years at the permanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot accept latest, regardless of wear. responsibility for this type of damage. Observe the notes on the emergency spare wheel (Y page 434). M+S tires MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat G WARNING properties) M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter characteristics), you can continue to drive and do not provide sufficient traction. There your vehicle even if there is a total loss of is a risk of an accident. pressure in one or more tires. M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã MOExtended tires may only be used in in (4 mm) must be replaced immediately. conjunction with an active tire pressure loss warning system or with an active tire pressure At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), use monitor and on wheels specifically tested by winter tires or all-season tires. Both types of Mercedes-Benz. tire are identified by the M+S marking. Winter operation 403

Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake if you have installed snow chains. The symbol in addition to the M+S marking vehicle may otherwise be damaged. provide the best possible grip in wintry road ! On some tire sizes there is not enough conditions. space for snow chains. To avoid damage to Only these tires will allow driving safety the vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel and systems such as ABS and ESP® to function tire combinations" section under "Tires and optimally in winter. These tires have been wheels". developed specifically for driving in snow. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on recommends that you only use snow chains all wheels to maintain safe handling that have been specially approved for your characteristics. vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of a Always observe the maximum permissible corresponding standard of quality. speed specified for the M+S tires you have If you intend to mount snow chains, please mounted. bear the following points in mind: Once the winter tires are mounted: ROnly use snow chains when driving on X Check the tire pressures (Y page 407). roads completely covered by snow. X Restart the tire pressure monitor Remove the snow chains as soon as (Y page 408). possible when you come to aroad that is X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire not snow-covered. pressure loss warning system RDo not exceed the maximum permissible (Y page 408). speed of 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information on driving with the RLocal regulations may restrict the use of emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 434). snow chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if you wish to mount snow chains. Snow chains RSnow chains may not be mounted on all Wheels and tires wheel/tire combinations. Permissible G WARNING wheel-tire combinations (Y page 428). If snow chains are installed to the front i ® wheels, they may drag against the vehicle You may wish to deactivate ESP when body or chassis components. This could pulling away with snow chains installed cause damage to the vehicle or the tires. (Y page 72). This way you can allow the There is a risk of an accident. wheels to spin in a controlled manner, achieving an increased driving force To avoid hazardous situations: (cutting action). Rnever install snow chains to the front For more information on driving with an wheels emergency spare wheel, see (Y page 434). Ralways install snow chains in pairs to the rear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level (height 1) if snow chains have been installed. The vehicle may otherwise be damaged. ! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System (ADS): do not use the sports mode

Z 404 Check

Check Operation with a trailer: the applicable value for the rear tires is the maximum tire Tire pressure specifications pressure value stated in the table inside the Important safety notes fuel filler flap. Further information on tire pressures can be G WARNING obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the following risks: Tire and Loading Information placard Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase. Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impairtire traction. Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly impaired. There is a risk of an accident. Follow recommended tire inflation pressures and checkthe pressure of all the tires : Recommended tire pressures including the spare wheel: The Tire and Loading Information placard is Rmonthly, at least on the B-pillar on the driver's side Rif the load changes (Y page 412). Rbefore beginning a long journey The Tire and Loading Information placard Runder different operating conditions, e.g. contains the recommended tire pressures for off-road driving cold tires. The recommended tire pressures

Wheels and tires If necessary, correct the tire pressure. are valid for the maximum permissible load and up to the maximum permissible vehicle i The specifications on the sample Tire and speed. Loading Information placard and tire pressure tables are examples. Tire Tire pressure table pressure specifications are vehicle-specific The tire pressure table is on the inside of the and may deviate from the data shown here. fuel filler flap. The tire pressure specifications that are valid for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard and tire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notes The recommended tire pressures for the tires mounted at the factory can be found on the labels described here. Operation with the emergency spare wheel(Y page 434). Example: tire pressure table for all tires permitted for this vehicle by the factory Check 405

The tire pressure table contains the i The tire pressures for increased loads recommended pressures for cold tires for and/or higher road speeds, shown in the various operating conditions, i.e. differing tire pressure table, may have a negative load and speed conditions. effect on driving comfort. If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can lead to an excessivebuild up of heat and a suddenloss of pressure. For more information, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure G WARNING If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tire pressure that is too low may result in a tire pressure information following is only valid blow-out. There is a risk of an accident. for that tire size. The load conditions "partially RCheck the tire for foreign objects. laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the table for different numbers of occupants and valve is leaking. amounts of luggage. The actual number of If you are unable to rectify the damage, seats may differ. contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNING If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire

valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and Wheels and tires malfunction, which can cause tire pressure loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pressure monitors keep the tire valve open. This can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a risk of an accident. Only screw the standard valve cap or other Some tire pressure tables show only the rim valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. your vehicle onto the tire valve. R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire size Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the and can be found on the tire sidewall tire pressure. The outer appearance of a tire (Y page 417). does not permit any reliable conclusion about If the tire pressures have been set to the the tire pressure. On vehicles equipped with lower values for lighter loads and/or lower the electronic tire pressure monitoring road speeds, the pressures should be reset system, the tire pressure can be checked to the higher values: using the on-board computer. Rif you want to drive with an increased load The tire temperature and pressure increase and/or when the vehicle is in motion.This is Rif you want to drive at higher road speeds dependent on the driving speed and the load.

Z 406 Check

Therefore, you should only correcttire Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the pressures when the tires are cold. tires, including the spare wheel. The tires are cold: Underinflated tires may: Rif the vehicle has been parked without directsunlight on the tires for at least three Roverheat, leading to tire defects hours and Rhave an adverse effect on handling Rif the vehicle has notbeen driven further characteristics than 1 mile (1.6 km) Rwear quickly and unevenly The tire temperature changes depending on Rhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption the outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the tire load. If the tire temperature Overinflation changes by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressure changes by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/ G WARNING 1.5 psi). Take this into accountwhen Tires with excessively high pressure can burst checking the pressure of warm tires. Only because they are damaged more easily by correct the tire pressure if it is too low for the road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they current operating conditions. If you check the also suffer from irregular wear, which can tire pressure when the tires are warm, the severely impair the braking properties and the resulting value will be higher than if the tires driving characteristics. There is a risk of an were cold. This is normal. Do not reduce the accident. tire pressure to the value specified for cold Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the tires. The tire pressure would otherwise be tires, including the spare wheel. too low. Observe the recommended tire pressures for Overinflated tires may: cold tires: Rincrease the braking distance Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard Rhave an adverse effect on handling

Wheels and tires on the B-pillar on the driver's side characteristics Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of Rwear quickly and unevenly the fuel filler flap Rhave an adverse effect on ride comfort Rprinted in yellow on the rim of the Rbe more susceptible to damage emergency/collapsible spare wheel (depending on vehicle equipment) Maximum tire pressures

Underinflated or overinflated tires Underinflation G WARNING Tires with pressure that is too low can overheat and burst as a consequence. In addition, they also suffer from excessive and/ or irregular wear, which can severely impair the braking properties and the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. : Example: maximum permissible tire pressure Check 407

Never exceed the maximum permissible tire Tire pressure loss warning system inflation pressure. Always observe the (Canada only) recommended tire pressure for yourvehicle when adjusting the tire pressure General notes (Y page 404). While the vehicle is in motion, the tire i The actual values for tires are vehicle- pressure loss warning system monitors the specific and may deviate from the values in set tire pressure using the rotational speed of the illustration. the wheels. This enables the system to detect significant pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of a wheel changes as a result of Checking the tire pressures a loss of pressure, a corresponding warning message will appearinthe multifunction Important safety notes display. Observe the notes on tire pressure You can recognize the tire pressure loss (Y page 404). warning by the Run Flat Indicator Information on air pressure for the tires on Active Press 'OK' to Restart message your vehicle can be found: which appears in the Serv. menu of the multifunction display. Information on the Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading message display can be found under Information placard loading information "Restarting the tire pressure loss warning table on the B-pillar (Y page 412) system" (Y page 408). Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler flap Important safety notes Rin the "Tire pressure" section The tire pressure warning system does not R under "Tire pressure" (Y page 404) warn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the notes on the recommended tire Checking tire pressures manually

pressure (Y page 404). Wheels and tires To determine and set the correct tire The tire pressure loss warning does not pressure, proceed as follows: replace the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An even loss of pressure on several X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be checked. tires at the same time cannot be detected by the tire pressure loss warning system. X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto the valve. The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the X Read the tire pressure and compare it with tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the the recommended value on the Tire and event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the Loading Information placard (Y page 404). vehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoid X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it to abrupt steering maneuvers. the recommended value. The function of the tire pressure loss warning X If the tire pressure is too high, release air system is limited or delayed if: by pressing down the metal pin in the valve. Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then, Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle's checkthe tire pressure again using the tire tires. pressure gauge. Rroad conditions are wintry. X Screw the valve cap onto the valve. Ryou are driving on sand or gravel. X Repeatthese steps for the other tires.

Z 408 Check

Ryou adoptavery sporty driving style If you wish to confirm the restart: (cornering at high speeds or driving with X Press the a button. high rates of acceleration). The Tire Pressure Now OK? message Ryou are towing a very heavy or large trailer. appears in the multifunction display. R you are driving with a heavy load (in the X Press the 9 or : button to select vehicle or on the roof). Yes. X Press the a button. Restarting the tire pressure loss warning system The Run Flat Indicator Restarted message appears in the multifunction Restart the tire pressure loss warning system display. if you have: After a teach-in period, the tire pressure Rchanged the tire pressure loss warning system will monitor the set Rchanged the wheels or tires tire pressures of all four tires. Rmounted new wheels or tires If you wish to cancel the restart: X Before restarting, make sure that the tire X Press the % button. pressures are set properly on all four tires or for the respective operating conditions. X If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message The recommended tire pressures can be appears, use the 9 or : button to found on the Tire and Loading Information select Cancel. placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side or the tire pressure table on the fuel filler X Press the a button. flap. The tire pressure values stored at the last The tire pressure loss warning system can restart will continue to be monitored. only give reliable warnings if you have set the correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tire Tire pressure monitor

Wheels and tires pressure is set, these incorrect values will be monitored. General notes X Also observe the notes in the section on tire pressures (Y page 404). If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehicle's wheels have sensors that monitor X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position the tire pressures in all four tires. The tire 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 163). pressure monitor warns you if the pressure X Press the = or ; button on the drops in one or more of the tires. The tire steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. pressure monitor only functions if the correct X Press the 9 or : button to select sensors are installed on all wheels. Tire Pressure. Information on tire pressures is displayed in X Press the a button. the multifunction display.After a few minutes The Run Flat Indicator active of driving, the current tire pressure of each Restart with OK message appears in the tire is showninthe Serv. menu of the multifunction display. multifunction display. For further information on displaying this message, refer to the "Checking the tire pressure electronically" section (Y page 410). Check 409

system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the warning lamp will flash for approximately a minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will be repeated every time the Example: current tire pressure display vehicle is started as long as the malfunction exists. Important safety notes When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, G WARNING the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS Each tire, including the spare (ifprovided), malfunctions may occur for a variety of should be checked at least once a month reasons, including the installation of when cold and inflated to the pressure incompatible replacement or alternate tires recommended by the vehicle manufacturer or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the on the Tire and Loading Information placard TPMS from functioning properly. Always on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after pressure label on the inside of the fuel filler replacing one or more tires or wheels on your flap.Ifyour vehicle has tires of a different size vehicle to ensure that the replacement or than the size indicated on the Tire and Loading alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to Information placard or the tire pressure label, continue to function properly. you should determine the proper tire pressure for those tires. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire As an added safety feature, your vehicle has pressure to that recommended for cold tires been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring which is suitable for the operating situation system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire (Y page 404). Note that the correct tire pressure telltale when one or more of your pressure for the currentoperating situation Wheels and tires tires are significantly underinflated. must first be taught-in to the tire pressure Accordingly, when the low tire pressure monitor. If there is a substantial loss of telltale illuminates, you should stop and check pressure, the warning threshold for the your tires as soon as possible, and inflate warning message is aligned to the reference them to the proper pressure. Driving on a values taught-in.Restart the tire pressure significantly underinflated tire causes the tire monitor after adjusting the pressure of the to overheat and can lead to tire failure. cold tires (Y page 411). The current Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency pressures are saved as new reference values. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's As a result, a warning message will appear if handling and stopping ability. the tire pressure drops significantly. Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute The tire pressure monitor does not warn you for proper tire maintenance, and it is the of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe driver's responsibility to maintain correcttire the notes on the recommended tire pressure pressure, even if underinflation has not (Y page 404). reached the level to trigger illumination of the The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn TPMS low tire pressure telltale. you of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the USA only: tire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if the

Z 410 Check

vehicle to a haltby braking carefully. Avoid Checking the tire pressure abrupt steering maneuvers. electronically

The tire pressure monitor has a yellow X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position warning lamp in the instrument cluster for 2 in the ignition lock (Y page 163). indicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA) X Press the = or ; button on the or pressure loss (Canada). Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates steering wheel to select the Service whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire menu. pressure monitor is malfunctioning: X Press the 9 or : button to select Tire Pressure. Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire pressure on one or more tires is X Press the a button. significantly too low. The tire pressure The current tire pressure of each tire is monitor is not malfunctioning. shown in the multifunction display. RUSAonly:ifthe warning lamp flashes for If the vehicle has been parked for longer than around a minute and then remains lit 20 minutes, the Tire pressure will be constantly, the tire pressure monitor is displayed after driving a few malfunctioning. minutes message appears. USA only: if there is a malfunction with the After a teach-in process, the tire pressure tire pressure monitor it can take more than monitor automatically detects new wheels or ten minutes until the malfunction is shown by new sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire pressure warning lamp flashing for the tire pressure value to the individual approximately one minute and then lighting wheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure up continuously.When the malfunction has Monitor Active display message is shown been rectified, the tire pressure warning lamp instead of the tire pressure display. The tire goes out after a few minutes of driving. pressures are already being monitored. The tire pressure values indicated by the on- i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,

Wheels and tires board computer may differ from those the system may continue to show the tire measured at a gas station with a pressure pressure of the wheel that has been gauge. The tire pressures shown by the on- removed for a few minutes. If this occurs, board computer refer to those measured at note that the value displayed for the sea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressure position where the spare wheel is mounted values indicated by a pressure gauge are is not the same as the current tire pressure higher than those shown by the on-board of the emergency spare wheel. computer. In this case, do not reduce the tire pressures. The operation of the tire pressure monitor can be affected by interference from radio transmitting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way radios) that may be being operated in or near the vehicle. Check 411

Tire pressure monitorwarning X Set the tire pressure to the value messages recommended for the corresponding driving situation on the Tire and Loading If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure Information placard on the B-pillar on the loss in one or more tires, a warning message driver's side (Y page 404). is showninthe multifunction display. A warning tone also sounds and the tire Additional tire pressure values for different pressure warning lamp lights up in the loads can also be found on the tire pressure instrument cluster. Each tire that is affected table on the inside of the fuel filler flap by a significant loss of pressure is highlighted (Y page 178). in the pressure display. X Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on all four wheels. RIf the Correct Tire Pressure message appears in the multifunction display, the X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position tire pressure in at least one tire is too low 2 in the ignition lock. and must be corrected at the next X Press the = or ; button on the opportunity. steering wheel to select the Serv. menu. RIf the Check Tires message appears in the X Press the 9 or : button to select multifunction display, the tire pressure in Tire Pressure. one or more tires has dropped significantly X Press the a button. and the tires must be checked. The multifunction display shows the RIf the Warning Tire Malfunction current tire pressure for the individual tires message appears in the multifunction or the Tire pressure will be display, the tire pressure in one or more displayed after driving a few tires has dropped suddenly and the tires minutes message. must be checked. X Press the : button. i If the wheel positions on the vehicle are The Use current pressures as new rotated, the tire pressures may be reference values message appears in displayed for the wrong positions for a the multifunction display. Wheels and tires short time. This is rectified after a few If you wish to confirm the restart: minutes of driving, and the tire pressures are displayed for the correct positions. X Press the a button. The Tire Press. Monitor Restarted Restarting the tire pressure monitor message appears in the multifunction display. When you restart the tire pressure monitor, After driving for a few minutes, the system all existing warning messages are deleted and checks whether the current tire pressures the warning lamps go out. The monitor uses are within the specified range. The new tire the currently set tire pressures as the pressures are then accepted as reference reference values for monitoring. In most values and monitored. cases, the tire pressure monitor will automatically detect the new reference If you wish to cancel the restart: values after you have changed the tire X Press the % button. pressure. However, you can also define The tire pressure values stored at the last reference values manually as described here. restart will continue to be monitored. The tire pressure monitor then monitors the new tire pressure values.

Z 412 Loading the vehicle

Loading the vehicle Instruction labels for tires and loads G WARNING Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a blowout.Overloaded tires can also impair the steering and driving characteristics and lead to brake failure. There is a risk of accident. Observe the load rating of the tires. The load rating must be at least halfofthe GAWR of your vehicle. Never overload the tires by exceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the maximum possible load. (1) The Tire and Loading Information placard : B-pillar, driver's side is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire and Loading Information placard shows the maximum permissible number Maximum permissible gross vehicle of occupants and the maximum weight rating permissible vehicle load. It also contains details of the tire sizes and corresponding pressures for tires mounted at the factory. (2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle

Wheels and tires identification plate informs you of the gross vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the fuel and the cargo. You can also find information about the maximum gross axle weight rating on the X Specification for maximum gross vehicle front and rear axle. weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading The maximum gross axle weight rating is Information placard: "The combined weight the maximum weight that can be carried of occupants and cargo should never by one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs." exceed the maximum load or the The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, maximum gross axle weight rating for the load and luggage must not exceed the front or rear axle. specified value. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The maximum permissible gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific and may differ from that in the illustration.You can find the valid Loading the vehicle 413

maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight your vehicle’s Tire and Loading Information rating for your vehicle on the Tire and placard. Loading Information placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. Number of seats X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX lbs. X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of Maximum number of seats : indicates the luggage and cargo being loaded on the maximum number of occupants allowed to vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed travel in the vehicle. This information can be the available cargo and luggage load found on the Tire and Loading Information capacity calculated in step 4. placard. i The specifications shown on the Tire and Loading Information placard in the illustration are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-specific and can differ from the details shown. The number of seats in Wheels and tires your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit Step-by-step instructions The following steps have been developed as required of all manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966". X Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on

Z 414 Loading the vehicle

Example: steps 1 to 3 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (Y page 412). The greaterthe combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load. Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 257). Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Combined maximum 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Number of people in 5 3 1 the vehicle (driver and occupants) Distribution of the Front: 2 Front: 1 Front: 1 occupants Rear: 3 Rear: 2 Wheels and tires Weight of the Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1: occupants 150 lbs (68 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 2: Occupant 2: 180 lbs (82 kg) 190 lbs (86 kg) Occupant 3: Occupant 3: 160 lbs (73 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) Occupant 4: 140 lbs (63 kg) Occupant 5: 120 lbs (54 kg) Gross weight of all 750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg) occupants All about wheels and tires 415

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 Permissible load 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) (maximumgross Ò750 lbs (340 kg) = Ò540 lbs (245 kg) Ò150 lbs (68 kg) = vehicle weight rating 750 lbs (340 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg) 1350 lbs (612 kg) from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

Vehicle identification plate All about wheels and tires Even if you have calculated the total cargo Uniform Tire Quality Grading carefully, you should still make sure thatthe Standards gross vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight rating are not exceeded. Details can Overview of Tire Quality Grading be found on the vehicle identification plate on Standards the B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle (Y page 412). Permissible gross vehicle weight: the gross weight of the vehicle, all passengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if applicable) must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

Gross axle weight rating: the maximum Wheels and tires permissible weight that can be carried by one axle (front or rear axle). To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the maximum permissible values (gross Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are vehicle weight and maximum gross axle U.S. government specifications. Their weight rating), have your loaded vehicle purpose is to provide drivers with uniform (including driver, occupants, cargo, and full reliable information on tire performance data. trailer load if applicable) weighed on a Tire manufacturers have to grade tires using suitable vehicle weighbridge. three performance factors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and = temperature grade. These regulations do not apply to Trailer load/noseweight Canada.Nevertheless, all tires sold in North America are provided with the corresponding The trailer load/noseweight affects the gross quality grading markings on the sidewall of weight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached, the tire. the trailer load/noseweight is included in the load along with occupants and luggage. The Where applicable, the tire grading trailer load/noseweight is usually information can be found on the tire sidewall approximately 8% of the gross weight of the between the tread shoulder and maximum trailer and its cargo. tire width.

Z 416 All about wheels and tires

Example: The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy RTreadwear grade: 200 road is always lower than on dry road surfaces. RTraction grade: AA You should pay special attention to road R Temperature grade: A conditions when temperatures are around All passenger car tires must conform to the freezing point. statutory safety requirements in additionto Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum these grades. tread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tires. Observe the legally required minimum specificand may deviate from the values in tire tread depth (Y page 401). Winter tires can the illustration. reduce the braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in comparison with summer tires. Treadwear The braking distance is still much further than on surfaces that are not icy or covered with The treadweargrade is a comparative rating snow. Take appropriate care when driving. based on the wearrate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified Further information on winter tires (M+S U.S. government course. For example, a tire tires) (Y page 402). graded 150 would wear one and one-half times as well on the government test track as Temperature a tire graded 100. G WARNING The relative performance of tires depends The temperature grade for this tire is upon the actual conditions of their use, established for a tire that is properly inflated however, and may depart significantly from and not overloaded. Excessive speed, the norm, due to variations in driving habits, underinflation, or excessive loading, either service practices and differences in road separately or in combination, can cause characteristics and climate conditions. excessive heat build-up and possible tire Wheels and tires failure. Traction The temperature grades are A(the highest), G WARNING B, and C. These represent the tire's The traction grade assigned to this tire is resistance to the generationofheat and its based on straight-ahead braking traction ability to dissipate heat when tested under tests, and does not include acceleration, controlled conditions on a specified indoor cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction laboratory test wheel. Sustained high characteristics. temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage excessive temperature can lead to sudden to the drive train. tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level The traction grades, from highest to lowest, of performance which all passenger car tires are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle the tire's ability to stop on a wet surface as Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A measured under controlled conditions on represent higher levels of performance on the specified government test surfaces of asphalt laboratory test wheel than the minimum and concrete. Atire marked C may have poor required by law. traction performance. All about wheels and tires 417

Tire labeling Therefore, only use tire types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the Overview tire load rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.

: Tire width ; Nominal aspect ratio in % = Tire code : UniformTire Quality Grading Standard ? Rim diameter (Y page 421) A Load bearing index ; DOT, Tire Identification Number B Speed rating (Y page 420) = Maximum tire load (Y page 419) General: depending on the manufacturer's standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall ? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 406) may not contain any letters or may contain A Manufacturer one letter that precedes the size description.

B Tire material (Y page 420) If there is no letter preceding the size Wheels and tires C Tire size designation, load-bearing description (as shown above): these are capacity and speed index (Y page 417) passenger vehicle tires according to D Load index (Y page 419) European manufacturing standards. E Tire name If "P" precedes the size description:these are passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. The markings described above are on the tire manufacturing standards. in additionto the tire name (sales designation) and the manufacturer's name. If "LT" precedes the size description: these are light truck tires according to U.S. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may manufacturing standards. deviate from the data in the example. If "T" precedes the size description: these are compact emergency spare wheels at high tire Tire size designation, load-bearing pressure, to be used only temporarily in an capacity and speed rating emergency. G WARNING Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing tire width in millimeters. capacity and the approved maximum speed Height-width ratio: aspect ratio ; is the could lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. size ratio between the tire height and tire There is a risk of accident. width and is shown in percent.The aspect

Z 418 All about wheels and tires

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width by Index Speed rating the tire height. Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type. S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) "R" represents radial tires; "D" represents T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) diagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radial tires. H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) Optionally, tires with a maximumspeed of V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in the size description, depending on the W up to 168 mph (270 km/h) manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18). Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead seat, not the diameter ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h) of the rim flange. The rim diameter is ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h) specified in inches (in). Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h) is a numerical code that specifies the maximum load-bearing capacity of a tire. ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed of Do not overload the tires by exceeding the over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" specified load limit. The maximum in the size description, depending on the permissible load can be found on the manufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18). vehicle's Tire and Loading Information The service specification is made up of placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side load-bearing index A and speed rating (Y page 412). B. Example: RIf the size description of your tire includes Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum "ZR" and there are no service load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can specifications, ask the tire manufacturer in

Wheels and tires bear. For further information on the maximum order to find out the maximum speed. tire load in kilograms and lbs, see If a service specification is available, the (Y page 419). maximum speed is limited according to the For further information on the load bearing speed rating in the servicespecification. index, see "Load index" (Y page 419). Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the example, "97 Y" is the service specification. approved maximum speed of the tire. The letter "Y" represents the speed rating. The maximum speed of the tire is limited to i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may 186 mph (300 km/h). deviate from the data in the example. RThe size descriptionfor all tires with Regardless of the speed rating, always maximum speeds of over 186 mph observe the speed limits. Drive carefully and (300 km/h) must include "ZR", and the adapt your driving style to the traffic service specification must be given in conditions. parentheses. Example: Summer tires 275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indicates that the maximum speed of the Index Speed rating tire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire manufacturer about the maximum Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) speed. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h) All about wheels and tires 419

All-weather tires and winter tires Load index

Index Speed rating Q M+S2 up to 100 mph (160 km/h) T M+S2 up to 118 mph (190 km/h) H M+S2 up to 130 mph (210 km/h) V M+S2 up to 149 mph (240 km/h) i Not all tires with the M+S marking provide the driving characteristics of winter tires. In addition to the M+S marking, wintertires In addition to the load bearing index, load also have the i snowflake symbol on index : may be imprinted after the letters the tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfill that identify the speed index B on the the requirements of the Rubber sidewall of the tire (Y page 417). Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) example above), represents astandard regarding the tire traction on snow. They load (SL) tire have been especially developed for driving RXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced on snow. tire An electronic speed limiter prevents your RLightLoad: represents a light load tire vehicle fromexceeding the following speeds: RC, D, E: represents a load range that Rall vehicles (exceptAMG vehicles): depends on the maximum load that the tire 130 mph (210 km/h) can carry at a certain pressure RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h) i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may Wheels and tires RAMG vehicles with increased top speed: deviate from the data in the example. 174 mph (280 km/h) The speed rating of tires mounted at the Maximum load rating factory may be higher than the maximum speed that the electronic speed limiter permits. Make sure that your tires have the required speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The required speed rating for your vehicle can be found in the "Tires" section (Y page 428). Further information about reading tire data can be obtained from any qualified specialist workshop.

Maximum tire load : is the maximum permissible weight for which the tire is approved.

2 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Z 420 All about wheels and tires

Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size. specified load limit. The maximum Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used permissible load can be found on the by the manufacturer as acode to describe vehicle's Tire and Loading Information specific characteristics of the tire. placard on the B-pillar on the driver's side Date of manufacture: date of manufacture (Y page 412). A provides information about the age of a i The actual values for tires are vehicle- tire. The first and second positions represent specific and may deviate fromthe values in the week of manufacture, starting with "01" the illustration. for the first calendar week. Positions three and four represent the year of manufacture. DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) For example, a tire that is marked with "3208", was manufactured in week 32 in U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tire 2008. manufacturer or retreader must imprint aTIN in or on the sidewall of every tire produced. i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

The TIN is a unique identification number. The

Wheels and tires TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it This information describes the type of tire possible for the purchaser to easily identify cord and the number of layers in the affected tires. sidewall : and under tire tread ;. The TIN is made up of manufacturer identification code ;, tire size =, tire type i Tire data is vehicle-specific and may code ? and manufacturing date A. deviate from the data in the example. DOT (Department of Transportation): tire Definition of terms for tires and loading symbol : indicates that the tire complies with the requirements of the U.S. Department Tire ply composition and material used of Transportation. Describes the number of plies or the number Manufacturer identification code: of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire manufacturer identification code ; provides tread and sidewall. These are made of steel, details on the tire manufacturer. New tires nylon, polyester and other materials. have a code with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code with four symbols. Bar For further information aboutretreaded tires, Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and see (Y page 428). All aboutwheels and tires 421

100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on 1 bar. the driver's side. DOT (Department of Transportation) Speed rating DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements of The speed rating is part of the tire the United States Department of identification. It specifies the speed range for Transportation. which the tire is approved. Normal occupant weight GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) The numberofoccupants which the vehicle The GTW is the weight of a trailer including is designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms the weight of the load, luggage, accessories (150 lb). etc. on the trailer. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) Auniform standard to grade the quality of The gross vehicle weight includes the weight tires with regards to tread quality, tire traction of the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare and temperature characteristics. Ratings are wheel, accessories installed, occupants, determined by tire manufacturers using U.S. luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if government testing procedures. The ratings applicable. The gross vehicle weight must not are molded into the sidewall of the tire. exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehicle identification plate Recommended tire pressure on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The recommended tire pressure applies to the tires mounted at the factory. GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The Tire and Loading Informationplacard The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross contains the recommended tire pressures for weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of cold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the the vehicle including all accessories, maximum permissible vehicle speed. occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbar

The tire pressure table contains the noseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicle Wheels and tires recommended pressures for cold tires for weight rating is specified on the vehicle various operating conditions, i.e. differing identification plate on the B-pillar on the load and speed conditions. driver's side. Increased vehicle weight due to optional Maximumloaded vehicle weight equipment The maximum weight is the sum of: This is the combined weight of all standard Rthe curb weight of the vehicle and optional equipmentavailable for the Rthe weight of the accessories vehicle, regardless of whetheritis actually Rthe load limit installed on the vehicle or not. Rthe weight of the factory installed optional Rim equipment This is the part of the wheel on which the tire Kilopascal (kPa) is mounted. Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) corresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight pressure is bar. There are 100kilopascals rating. The actual load on an axle must never (kPa) to 1bar. exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross axle weight rating can be found on the

Z 422 All about wheels and tires

Load index Cold tire pressure In addition to the load-bearing index, the load The tires are cold: indexmay also be imprinted on the sidewall Rif the vehicle has been parked without of the tire. This specifiesthe load-bearing direct sunlight on the tires for at least three capacity more precisely. hours and Curb weight Rif the vehicle has been driven for less than The weight of a vehicle with standard 1 mile (1.6 km). equipment including the maximum capacity Tread of fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air- The part of the tire that comes into contact conditioning system and optional equipment with the road. if these are installed in the vehicle, but does not include passengers or luggage. Bead Maximum load rating The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely on the wheel. There are several steel The maximum tire load is the maximum wires in the bead to prevent the tire from permissible weight in kilograms or lbs for coming loose from the wheel rim. which a tire is approved. Sidewall Maximum permissible tire pressure The part of the tire between the tread and the Maximum permissible tire pressure for one bead. tire. Weight of optional extras Maximum load on one tire The combined weight of those optional extras Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated that weigh more than the replaced standard by dividing the maximum axle load of one axle parts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs). by two. These optional extras, such as high- performance brakes, level control, a roof rack

Wheels and tires PSI (pounds per square inch) Astandard unitofmeasure for tire pressure. or a high-performance battery, are not included in the curb weight and the weight of Aspect ratio the accessories. Relationship between tire height and tire TIN (Tire Identification Number) width in percent. This is a unique identifier which can be used Tire pressure by a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for This is pressure inside the tire applying an example for a product recall, and thus identify outward force to each square inch of the tire's the purchasers. The TIN is made up of the surface. The tire pressure is specified in manufacturer's identity code, tire size, tire pounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal type code and the manufacturing date. (kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should only Load bearing index be corrected when the tires are cold. The load bearing index (also load index) is a code that contains the maximum load bearing capacity of a tire. Changing awheel 423

Traction Rotating the wheels Traction is the result of friction between the tires and the road surface. G WARNING Interchanging the front and rear wheels may TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) severely impair the driving characteristics if The TWR specifies the maximumpermissible the wheels or tires have different dimensions. weight that the ball coupling of the trailer tow The wheel brakes or suspension components hitch can support. may also be damaged. There is a risk of accident. Treadwear indicators Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are and tires are of the same dimensions. distributed over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level with the bars, the wear limit of á in ! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure (1.6 mm) has been reached. monitor, electronic components are located in the wheel. Occupant distribution Tire-mounting tools should not be used The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at near the valve. This could damage the their designated seating positions. electronic components. Total load limit Only have tires changed at a qualified Rated cargo and luggage load plus specialist workshop. 68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by the Always observe the instructions and safety number of seats in the vehicle. notes in the "Mounting awheel" section (Y page 424). The wear patterns on the front and rear tires Changing awheel differ, depending on the operating conditions. Flat tire Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern has formed on the tires. Front tires typically Wheels and tires You can find information on whatto do in the wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires event of a flat tire in the "Breakdown in the center. assistance" section (Y page 383). If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, you Information on driving with MOExtended tires can rotate the wheels according to the in the event of a flat tire can be found under intervals in the tire manufacturer's warranty "MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat book in your vehicle documents. If this is not characteristics" (Y page 384). available, the tires should then be rotated The "Breakdown assistance" section every 3000 to 6000 miles (5000 to (Y page 383) contains information and notes 10,000 km), or earlier if the tire wear requires on how to deal with a flat tire. Information on this. Do not change the direction of wheel driving with MOExtended tires in the event of rotation. a flat tire can be found under "MOExtended Cleanthe contact surfaces of the wheel and tires (tires with run-flat characteristics" the brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel (Y page 384). is interchanged. Check the tire pressure and, Vehicles with an emergency spare if necessary, restart the tire pressure loss wheel: in the event of a flat tire, mount the warning system or the tire pressure monitor. emergency spare wheel according to the description under "Mounting a wheel" (Y page 424).

Z 424 Changing awheel

Direction of rotation X Switch off the engine. X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove Tires with a specified direction of rotation the SmartKey from the ignition lock. have additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydroplaning.You will only gain these X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open the benefits if the correct direction of rotation is driver's door. observed. The on-board electronics have status 0, An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates which is the same as the SmartKey having its correct direction of rotation. been removed. X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop button from the ignition lock Storing wheels (Y page 163). X If included in the vehicle equipment, take Store wheels that are not being used in a cool, the tire-change tool kit out of the vehicle. dry and preferably dark place. Protectthe tires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel. X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away. i Apart from certain country-specific Cleaning the wheels variations, vehicles are not equipped with G WARNING a tire-change tool kit. For information on which tools are required to perform a wheel The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt change on your vehicle, consult an blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. to the tires or chassis components. Components damaged in this way may fail Necessary wheel-changing tools can unexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident. include, for example: Do not use power washers with circular jet RJack nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged RWheel chock

Wheels and tires tires or chassis components replaced RLug wrench immediately. Securing the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away Mounting awheel Preparing the vehicle

X Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: whenmounting the emergency spare wheel in the event of a flat tire, follow the additional notes on vehicle preparation under "Flat tire" (Y page 383). X Park the vehicle on firm, non-slippery and level ground. X Unload heavy luggage. X Apply the electric parking brake manually. If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, X Bring the front wheels into the straight- it can be found in the tire-change tool kit ahead position. (Y page 382). X Shift the transmission to position P. Changing awheel 425

The folding wheel chock is an additional jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. securing measure to prevent the vehicle from There is a risk of injury. rolling away, for example when changing a Only position the jack at the appropriate wheel. jacking point of the vehicle. The base of the X Fold both plates upwards :. jack must be positioned vertically, directly X Fold out lower plate ;. under the jacking point of the vehicle. X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into ! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" the openings in base plate =. emergency spare wheel: use the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only on the rear axle. If you mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the front axle, this could result in damage to the brake system. If a tire on the front axle is defective, an intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. The defective wheel on the front axle can then be replaced with the intact wheel from the rear Securing the vehicle on level ground axle. X On level ground: place chocks or other Make sure to note the placard on the suitable items under the frontand rearof "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. the wheel thatis diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. ! The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the vehicle at the jacking points. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raising Wheels and tires the vehicle: Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle- specific jack that has been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Ifused incorrectly, the jack could tip over with the vehicle raised. Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold the vehicle for a short time while a wheel Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradients is being changed. It is not suited for X On light downhill gradients: place performing maintenance work under the chocks or other suitable items in front of vehicle. the wheels of the front and rear axle. Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and downhill slopes. Raising the vehicle Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from rolling away by applying the parking brake G WARNING and inserting wheel chocks. Never If you do not position the jack correctly at the disengage the parking brake while the appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the vehicle is raised.

Z 426 Changing awheel

Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be used, e.g.rubber mats. Rdo notuse wooden blocks or similar objects as a jack underlay.Otherwise, the jack will not be able to achieve its load- bearing capacity due to the restricted height. Rmake sure thatthe distance between the underside of the tires and the ground does The jacking points are located just behind the not exceed 1.2 in (3 cm). front wheel housings and just in front of the rear wheel housings (arrows). Rnever place your hands and feet under the raised vehicle. X Take the ratchet wrench out of the vehicle tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of Rnever lie under the raised vehicle. the jack so that the letters AUF are visible. Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is raised. Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate when the vehicle is raised. Rmake sure that no persons are present in the vehicle when the vehicle is raised. Wheels and tires ; Jacking points = Jack ? Crank

X Position jack = at jacking point ;. The alignment bolt on the jack must be X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts on inserted into the intended jacking point the wheel you wish to change by about one hole. full turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely. Changing awheel 427

Mounting anew wheel G WARNING Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel bolts to come loose.As a result, you could lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of accident. Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately.Have the Example damaged wheel bolts or hub threads X Make sure the foot of the jack is directly replaced/renewed. Do notcontinue driving. beneath the jacking point. G WARNING X Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits completely on jacking point ; and the If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip over. There is a risk of injury. X Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts raised amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)from the when the vehicle is on the ground. ground. ! To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold Removing awheel the wheel securely against the wheel hub while screwing in the first wheel bolt. ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. The boltand wheel hub Always pay attention to the instructions and threads could otherwise be damaged when safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" you screw them in. section (Y page 423). Only use wheel bolts that have been designed Wheels and tires for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use wheel bolts which have been approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective wheel. ! Always use wheel bolts ; to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. Using other wheel bolts to mount the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel could damage the brake system. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely. X Screw alignment bolt : into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. X Unscrew the remaining wheelbolts fully. X Remove the wheel.

Z 428 Wheel and tire combinations

: Wheel bolts for all wheels supplied by the X Place the ratchet wrenchonto the hexagon factory nut of the jack so that the letters AB are ; Wheel bolts for the "Minispare" visible. emergency spare wheel X Turn the ratchetwrench until the vehicle is once again standing firmly on the ground. X Place the jack to one side. X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A). The tightening torque must be 110 lb-ft (150 Nm). X Turn the jack back to its initial position. X Stow the jack and the rest of the tire- change tool kit in the stowage well under the cargo compartment floor again. X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact X Check the tire pressure of the newly

Wheels and tires surfaces. installed wheel and adjust it if necessary. X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the Observe the recommended tire pressure alignment bolt and push it on. (Y page 404). X Tighten the wheel bolts until they are i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: all finger-tight. wheels mounted must be equipped with X Unscrew the alignment bolt. functioning sensors. X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger- tight. Wheel and tire combinations Lowering the vehicle General notes G WARNING ! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts recommends that you only use tires and and bolts are not tightened to the specified wheels which have been approved by tightening torque. There is a risk of accident. Mercedes-Benz specifically for your Have the tightening torque immediately vehicle. checked at a qualified specialist workshop after a wheel is changed. Wheel and tire combinations 429

These tires have been specially adapted for The recommended pressures for various use with the control systems, such as ABS operating conditions can be found: ® or ESP , and are marked as follows: Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard RMO =Mercedes-Benz Original with the recommended tire pressures on RMOE =Mercedes-Benz Original Extended the B-pillar on the driver's side (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) Rin the tire pressure table on the inside of RMO1 =Mercedes-BenzOriginal (only the fuel filler flap certain AMG tires) Observe the notes on recommended tire Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires pressures under various operating conditions may only be used on wheels that have been (Y page 404). specifically approved by Mercedes-Benz. Check tire pressures regularly, and only when Only use tires, wheels or accessories the tires are cold. Comply with the tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. maintenance recommendations of the tire Certain characteristics, e.g. handling, manufacturer in the vehicle document wallet. vehicle noise emissions or fuel Notes on the vehicle equipment –always consumption, may otherwise be adversely equip the vehicle with: affected. In addition, when driving with a Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/ load, tire dimension variations could cause right) the tires to come into contact with the Rthe same type of tires at a given time bodywork and axle components. This could (summer tires, winter tires, MOExtended result in damage to the tires or the vehicle. tires) Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for Vehicles with MOExtended tires are not damage resulting from the use of tires, equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It wheels or accessories other than those is therefore recommended that you tested and approved. additionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT Information on tires, wheels and approved kit if you mounttires that do not feature run- combinations can be obtained from any flat properties, e.g. winter tires. ATIREFIT kit Wheels and tires qualified specialist workshop. may be obtained from a qualified specialist ! Retreaded tires are neither tested nor workshop. recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since i Not all wheel and tire combinations are previous damage cannot always be available at the factory for all countries. detected on retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehicle i On the following pages, you can find safety if retreaded tires are mounted. Do information on approved wheelrims and not mount used tires if you have no tire sizes for equipping your vehicle with information about their previous usage. winter tires. Winter tires are not available at the factory as standard equipmentor Overview of abbreviations usedinthe optional extras. following tire tables: If you would like to equip your vehicle with RBA: both axles approved winter tires, you may also, in RFA: front axle certain circumstances, require rims of the RRA: rear axle appropriate size. The sizes of the approved winter tires may deviate from that of the standard tires. This is dependent on the model and the equipment installed at the factory.

Z 430 Wheel and tire combinations

The tires and wheel rims, as well as further information, can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Wheels and tires Wheel and tire combinations 431

Tires GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC

All-weather tires R 19

Tires Alloywheels BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

All-terrain tires R 18

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+S BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm) Wheels and tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires R 18

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/60 R 18 110 H M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2 Wheel offset: 2.22 in (56.5 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor.

Z 432 Wheel and tire combinations

R 19

Tires Alloywheels BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

GL 450 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

All-weather tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

All-terrain tires R 19 Wheels and tires Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flatcharacteristics) only in combination with an activated tire pressure loss warning system or tire pressure monitor. Wheel and tire combinations 433

GL 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

All-weather tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/50 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 20

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm) BA: 275/50 R 20 109 H M+SMOExtended3, 4 BA: 8.5 J x 20 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

R 21

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 295/40 R 21 111 V XL M+S3 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2 Wheel offset: 1.81 in (46 mm)

All-terrain tires R 19 Wheels and tires Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/55 R 19 111 H M+S3 BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

Winter tires R 19

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 265/55 R 19 109 H M+Si BA: 8.5 J x 19 H2 Wheel offset: 2.44 in (62 mm)

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". 4 MOExtended tires (tires featuring run-flat characteristics) only in combinationwith an activated tire pressure loss warning systemortire pressure monitor.

Z 434 Emergency spare wheel

GL 63 AMG 4MATIC

Summer tires R 21

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 295/40 ZR 21 111 Y XL3 BA: 10.0 J x 21 H2 ET 46

Winter tires R 20

Tires Alloy wheels BA: 275/45 R 20 110 V XL M+Si BA: 9.0 J x 20 H2 ET 41

Emergency spare wheel front axle, this could resultindamage to the brake system. Important safety notes If a tire on the front axle is defective, an G WARNING intact wheel from the rear axle must first be replaced with the "Minispare" The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type emergency spare wheel.The defective of the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel wheel on the front axle can then be and the wheel to be replaced may differ. replaced with the intact wheel from the rear Mounting an emergency spare wheel may axle. severely impair the driving characteristics. There is a risk of an accident. Make sure to note the placard on the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel. To avoid hazardous situations: Wheels and tires When using an emergency spare wheel or Radapt yourdriving style accordingly and spare wheel of a different size, you must not drive carefully. exceed the maximum speed of 50 mph Rnever mount more than one spare wheel or (80 km/h). emergency spare wheel that differs in size. Snow chains must not be mounted on Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare emergency spare wheels. wheel of a different size briefly. Rdo not switch ESP® off. Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare General notes wheel of a different size replaced at the Mounting the emergency spare wheel is nearest qualified specialist workshop. described under "Mounting a wheel" Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions (Y page 424). as well as the tire type must be correct. You should regularly check the pressure of ! AMG vehicles with "Minispare" the emergency spare wheel, particularly prior emergency spare wheel: use the to long trips, and correct the pressure as "Minispare" emergency spare wheel only necessary (Y page 404). The applicable value on the rear axle. If you mount the can be found on the wheel or under "Minispare" emergency spare wheel on the "Technical data" (Y page 436).

3 Use of snow chains not permitted. Observe the notes under "Snow chains". Emergency spare wheel 435

An emergency spare wheel may also be mounted against the direction of rotation. Observe the time restrictiononuse as well as the speed limitation specified on the emergency spare wheel. Replace the tires after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. This also applies to the emergency spare wheel.

Removing the emergency spare wheel In vehicles with a Bang &Olufsen sound system, the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel is stored in a bag. The bag is secured to the cargo tie-down rings in the cargo compartment. To stow the "Minispare" emergency spare wheel, the rear seats in the third row must be folded in (Y page 107). X To remove the emergency spare wheel: open the tailgate. X Loosen tensioning straps ; on both sides. Emergency spare wheel (example: vehicle without lockable cargo compartment floor) X Unhook retaining spring hooks : and = : Emergency spare wheel retainer on tensioning straps ; fromthe cargo tie- down rings. ; Stowage well X Remove the bag with the "Minispare" = "Minispare" emergency spare wheel

emergency spare wheel. Wheels and tires The "Minispare" emergency spare wheel can X Open the bag and remove the "Minispare" be found in the stowage well under the cargo emergency spare wheel. compartment floor. X To stow the emergency spare wheel: X Lift the cargo compartment floor up place the "Minispare" emergency spare (Y page 343). wheel in the bag and close the bag. X Vehicles with alockable cargo X Place the bag with the "Minispare" compartment floor: remove the stowage emergency spare wheel in the cargo tray. compartment. X Release the Velcro fastener(Ypage 382). X Hook retaining spring hooks : and = on X Take out the jack. tensioning straps ; in the cargo tie-down X Turn emergency spare wheel retainer : rings. counter-clockwise and remove it. X Tighten tensioning straps ; on both sides. X Remove stowage well ;. For further information on changing and X Remove "Minispare" emergency spare mounting a wheel, see (Y page 424). wheel =.

Z 436 Emergencyspare wheel

Technical data "Minispare"emergency spare wheel

Tires Alloywheels T 165/90 R19 119 M 4.5 B x 19 H2 Tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi) Wheel offset: 1.58 in (40 mm) Wheels and tires 437

Useful information ...... 438 Information regarding technical data ...... 438 Warranty ...... 438 Identification plates ...... 438 Service products and filling capaci- ties ...... 439 Vehicle data ...... 446 Trailer tow hitch ...... 448 Technical data 438 Identification plates

Useful information Accessories warranties. These are available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. i This Operator's Manual describes all i If you lose the Service and Warranty models and all standard and optional Information booklet, contact an authorized equipment of your vehicle available at the Mercedes-Benz Center to arrange a time of publication of the Operator's replacement.Itwill be mailed to you. Manual. Country-specific differences are possible. Please note that your vehicle may not be equipped with all features Identification plates described. This also applies to safety- related systems and functions. Vehicle identification plate with vehicle identification number (VIN) i Read the information on qualified specialist workshops: (Y page 28).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers to a vehicle with standard equipment.Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.

X Open the driver's door. Warranty You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the warranties printed in the Service and Warranty Information booklet.

Technical data Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will replace and repair all factory-installed parts in accordance with the following warranty terms and conditions: RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty REmission Systems Warranty REmission Performance Warranty Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only) RCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine, ; Paint code Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania, = VIN Rhode Island and Vermont Emission Control System Warranty RState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon Laws) Replacement parts and accessories are covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Service products and filling capacities 439

Engine number

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only) ; Paint code : Emission control information plate, = VIN including the certification of both federal i The data shown on the vehicle and Californian emissions standards identificationplate is used only as an ; Engine number (stamped into the example. This data is differentfor every crankcase) vehicle and can deviate from the data = VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield) shown here. You can find the data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle's identification plate. Service products and filling capacities

VIN Important safety notes G WARNING Service products may be poisonous and hazardous to health. There is a risk of injury. Comply with instructions on the use, storage and disposal of service products on the labels of the respective original containers. Always Technical data store service products sealed in their original containers. Always keep service products out of the reach of children.

H Environmental note X Open the front right-hand door. Dispose of service products in an X Open cover : in the direction of the arrow environmentally responsible manner. and remove it. You will see the VIN. Service products include the following: The VIN can also be found in the following Rfuels (e.g. gasoline, diesel) locations: Rexhaust gas aftertreatmentadditives, e.g. Ron the lower edge of the windshield DEF (Y page 439) Rlubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil) Ron the vehicle identification plate Rcoolant (Y page 438) Rbrake fluid

Z 440 Service products and filling capacities

Rwindshield washer fluid If you or others come into contact with fuel, Rclimate control system refrigerant observe the following: Comply with all valid regulations with respect RWash away fuel from skin immediately to handling, storing, and disposing of service using soap and water. fluids. RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes, Components and service products must be immediately rinse them thoroughly with matched. You should therefore only use clean water. Seek medical assistance products that have been tested and approved without delay. by Mercedes-Benz. RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical Information on tested and approved products assistance without delay. Do not induce can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes- vomiting. Benz Center or on the Internet at RImmediately change out of clothing which http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. has come into contact with fuel. You can recognize service products approved by Mercedes-Benzby the following Tank capacity inscription on the containers: RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) Model Total RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51) capacity Other designations or recommendations All models 26.4 US gal indicate a level of quality or a specification in (100.0 l) accordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g. MB 229.5). Theyhave notnecessarily been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Model Of which reserve All models Approx. Fuel 3.2 US gal Important safety notes (12.0 l)

Technical data G WARNING GL 63 AMG 4MATIC Approx. 3.7 US gal Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel (14.0 l) incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explosion. You must avoid fire, open flames, creating Gasoline sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine Fuel grade and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before refueling. ! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a gasoline engine. Do not switch on the G WARNING ignition if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enter Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health. the fuel system. Even small amounts of the There is a risk of injury. wrong fuel could result in damage to the You must make sure that fuel does not come fuel system and the engine. Notify a into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing qualified specialist workshop and have the and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel fuel tank and fuel lines drained completely. vapors. Keep fuel away from children. Service products and filling capacities 441

! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline with Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is not a minimum octane rating of 91. permitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleaded gasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can be ! Only use the fuel recommended. used. Operating the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine failure. You will usually find information about the fuel grade on the pump. If you cannot find the ! Do not use the following: label on the pump, ask the staff for RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol) assistance. RE100 (100% ethanol) i For further information, consult a RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol) qualified specialist workshop or on the RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol) Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only). RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol) RM100 (100% methanol) Information on refueling (Y page 178). RGasoline with metalliferous additives Additives RDiesel ! Operating the engine with fuel additives Do not mix such fuels with the fuel added later can lead to engine failure. Do recommended for your vehicle. Do not use not mix fuel additives with fuel. This does additives. This can otherwise lead to engine not include additives for the removal and damage.This does not include cleaning prevention of residue buildup. gasoline additives for the removal and prevention of must only be mixed with additives residue build-up. gasoline may only be recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Comply mixed with cleaning additives with the instructions for use on the product recommended by Mercedes-Benz; see label.More information about "Additives". You can obtain further recommended additives can be obtained information from any authorized Mercedes- from any authorized Mercedes-Benz Benz Center. Center. ! To ensure the longevity and full Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use performance of the engine, only premium- fuel brands that have the additives. grade unleaded gasoline must be used. The quality of the fuel available in some Technical data If standard premium-grade unleaded countries may not be sufficient.Residue gasoline is unavailable and unleaded could build up as a result. In such cases, and gasoline of a lower grade is used for in consultation with an authorized Mercedes- refueling, observe the following BenzCenter, the gasoline may be mixed with precautions: the cleaning additive recommended by Mercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512). Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with You must observe the notes and mixing ratios regular unleaded gasoline and fill the rest specified on the container. with premium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as possible. Diesel Rdo not drive at the maximum speed. Ravoid sudden acceleration and engine Fuel grade speeds above 3000 rpm. G WARNING Rnever refuel using fuel with an octane If you mix diesel fuel with gasoline, the flash number lower than 87. Otherwise, point is lower than that of pure diesel fuel. engine failure could occur. When the engine is running, exhaust system

Z 442 Service products and filling capacities

components could overheatwithout being Low outside temperatures noticed. There is a risk of fire. i Diesel fuel with improved cold flow Never refuel with gasoline. Never mix gasoline properties is available during the winter with diesel fuel. months. Further information about fuel properties can be obtained from oil ! Only use commercially available vehicular companies, e.g. at gas stations. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm maximum sulfur content) that Flow improver meets the ASTM D975 standard. If you do To improve the low-temperature resistance of not refuel with ULSD, you may damage the diesel fuel, a flow improver can be attached. BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment The effectiveness of a flow improver is not system of the vehicle. guaranteed for every fuel. Only use flow improvers tested and approved ! Do not use gasoline to refuel vehicles with by Mercedes-Benz. Duringuse, please a diesel engine. Do not mix diesel fuel with observe the information on operation. gasoline, kerosene or paraffin. This may otherwise result in damage to the fuel Correct dosage and sufficient mixing are system and engine. decisive in improving low-temperature resistance with the flow improver. You will usually find information about the fuel Overdosage can potentially even decrease grade on the pump. If you cannot find the low-temperature resistance and must label on the pump, ask the stafffor therefore be avoided.Follow the assistance. manufacturer's guidelines on dosage. i For further information, consult a Mix the additive into the diesel in good time, qualified specialist workshop or on the before the flow characteristics of the diesel Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA become insufficient. Otherwise, malfunctions only). can arise through heating the fuel system, e.g. through parking in a heated garage. Information on refueling (Y page 178). More information about recommended flow Bio-diesel -FAME (fattyacid methyl ester) improvers can be obtained from any qualified

Technical data Mercedes-BenzUSA approves the use of bio- specialist workshop. diesel B5 for all BlueTEC diesel engines. The concentration of bio-diesel in the ULSD may not exceed 5% by volume. DEF Pure bio-diesel and diesel fuel with a higher Important safety notes percentage of bio-diesel, such as B20, can damage the engine and the fuel system. For Comply with the important safety notes for this reason, they are not approved. service products when handling DEF For more information, consult the gas station (Y page 439). staff. The bio-diesel B5 label on the gasoline DEFis a water-soluble fluid for the exhaust pump mustclearly state that the standard for gas aftertreatmentofdiesel engines.Itis: ULSDhas been fulfilled. If the label is not Rnot poisonous clear, do notrefuel the vehicle. Rcolorless and odorless Do not refuel your vehicle with fuels unless Rnot flammable they have been approved by Mercedes-Benz. When you open the DEF container, small Information on refueling (Y page 178). amounts of ammonia vapor may be released. Service products and fillingcapacities 443

Ammonia vapors have a pungent odor and are Filling capacities particularly irritating to the skin, to mucous membranes and to the eyes. You may Model Total capacity experience a burning sensation in your eyes, GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATI 8.2 US gal nose and throat. Coughing and watering of C (31.2 l) the eyes are possible. Do not inhale ammonia vapors. Fill the DEF tank only in well-ventilated areas. Engine oil Low outside temperatures General notes DEF freezes at a temperature of ! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a approximately 12 ‡(-11 †). The vehicleis specificationotherthan is necessary to delivered from the factory equipped with a fulfill the prescribed service intervals. Do DEFpreheating system. Winter operation can not change the engine oil or oil filter in thus be guaranteed even at temperatures order to achieve longer replacement below 12 ‡ (-11 †). intervals than those prescribed. You could otherwise cause engine damage or damage Additives to the exhaust gas aftertreatment. ! Only use DEF in accordance with ISO Follow the instructions in the service 22241. Do not use additives with DEF and interval display regarding the oil change. do not dilute DEF with water. This may Otherwise, you may damage the engine and destroy the BlueTEC exhaust gas the exhaust gas aftertreatment. aftertreatment system. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling engine oil Purity (Y page 439). The engine oils are matched to the ! Impurities in DEF (e.g. due to other performance of Mercedes-Benz engines and service products, cleaning agents or dust) service intervals. You should therefore only lead to: use engine oils and oil filters that are Technical data Rincreased emission values approved for vehicles with maintenance Rdamage to the catalytic converter systems. Rengine damage For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters, Rmalfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz aftertreatment system Center. Or visit the website http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Assuring the purity of DEF is particularly important with respect to avoiding The table shows which engine oils have been malfunctions in the BlueTEC exhaust gas approved for your vehicle. aftertreatment system. If DEF is pumped out of the DEF tank, e.g. during repair work, it must not be returned to the tank. The purity of the fluid can no longer be guaranteed.

Z 444 Service products and fillingcapacities

Model Engine MB Engine oil viscosity model Approval GL 450 4MATIC 278 229.5 BlueEFFICIENCY GL 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY GL 63 AMG 157 229.5 4MATIC GL 350 BlueTEC 642 228.51, 4MATIC 229.31, 229.51 Viscosity describes the flow characteristics of a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity, Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils this means that it is thick; a low viscosity for AMG vehicles. means that it is thin. Select an engine oil with an SAE classification i MB approval is indicated on the oil (viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outside containers. temperatures. The table shows you which SAE classifications are to be used. The low- Filling capacities temperature characteristics of engine oils The following values refer to an oil change can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a result including the oil filter. of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is therefore strongly recommended that you carry out Model Capacity regular oil changes using an approved engine GL 450 4MATIC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) oil with the appropriate SAE classification. BlueEFFICIENCY GL 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY Brake fluid Technical data GL 63 AMG Withoutexternal oil G WARNING 4MATIC cooler: 9.0 US qt The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture (8.5 l) from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake GL 350 BlueTEC 4 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the MATIC brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This would impair braking efficiency. Additives There is a risk of an accident. ! Do not use any additivesinthe engine oil. You should have the brake fluid renewed at This could damage the engine. the specified intervals. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling brake fluid (Y page 439). The brake fluid change intervals can be found in the Maintenance Booklet. Service products and filling capacities 445

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes- The coolant is a mixture of water and Benz according to MB Approval 331.0. antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs Information aboutapproved brake fluid can the following tasks: be obtained at any qualified specialist Rcorrosionprotection workshop or on the Internet at Rantifreeze protection http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Rraising the boiling point i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at If the coolant has antifreeze protection down a qualified specialist workshop and have to -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the this confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet. coolant during operationis approximately 266 ‡ (130 †). The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor Coolant concentration in the engine cooling system Important safety notes should: Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine WARNING G cooling system against freezing down to If antifreeze comes into contact with hot approximately -35 ‡ (-37 †). components in the engine compartment, it Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection may ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heat Let the engine cool down before you add will not be dissipated as effectively. antifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equal spilled nextto the filler neck.Thoroughly amounts of water and antifreeze/corrosion clean the antifreeze from components before inhibitor. starting the engine. Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/ ! Only add coolant that has been premixed corrosion inhibitor concentrate in with the desired antifreezeprotection. You accordance with MB Specifications for could otherwise damage the engine. Service Products 310.1. Further information on coolants can be The coolant is checked with every found in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications maintenance interval at a qualified specialist for Service Products, MB Specifications for workshop. Technical data Service Products 310.1, e.g. on the i When the vehicle is first delivered, it is Internet at filled with a coolant mixture that ensures http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Or adequate antifreeze and corrosion contact a qualified specialist workshop. protection. ! Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even in countries where high temperatures prevail. Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not sufficiently protected from corrosion and overheating. Comply with the important safety precautions for service products when handling coolant (Y page 439).

Z 446 Vehicle data

Filling capacities At temperatures above freezing: X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture Model Capacity of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. GL 450 4MATIC Approx. 12.7 US qt MB SummerFit. BlueEFFICIENCY (12.0 l) Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water. GL 550 4MATIC At temperatures below freezing: BlueEFFICIENCY X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture GL 63 AMG Approx. 12.5 US qt of water and washer fluid, e.g. MB 4MATIC (11.8 l) WinterFit. GL 350 BlueTEC 4 Approx. 12.2 US qt Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside MATIC (11.5 l) temperature. RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosion WinterFit to 2 parts water. inhibitor/antifreeze. RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB WinterFit to 1 part water. RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB Windshield washer system WinterFit to 1 part water. Important safety notes i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer G WARNING fluid all year round. Windshield washerconcentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot engine components or the exhaust system it Vehicle data could ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury. Make sure that no windshield washer General notes concentrate is spilled next to the filler neck. Please note that for the specified vehicle data:

Technical data ! Only use washer fluid that is suitable for plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or Rthe heights specified may vary as a result MB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid of: could damage the plastic lenses of the - Tires headlamps. - Load ! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water to - Condition of the suspension the washer fluid container. Otherwise, the - Optional equipment level sensor may be damaged. ! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit washer fluid should be mixed together. The spray nozzles may otherwise become blocked. Comply with the important safety notes for service products when handling washer fluid (Y page 439). Vehicle data 447

Dimensions andweights All models (except for AMG vehicles) Wheelbase 121.1 in (3075 mm) Maximum ground 10.9 in clearance (276 mm) Maximum ground 12.0 in clearance (ON&OFFROAD (306 mm) package) Minimum ground 7.9 in Missing values were notavailableattime of clearance going to print. (201 mm) : ; Turning radius 40.7 ft (12.40 m) Opening Maximum height headroom Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) Models 83.9 in - 76.1 in - without 86.9 in 79.1 in ON&OFFROAD (2132 mm - (1934 mm - GL 450 4MATIC package 2207 mm) 2009 mm) BlueEFFICIENCY GL 350 BlueTEC 4MATIC Models with 83.9 in - 76.1 in - ON&OFFROAD 88.1 in 80.3 in Vehicle length 201.6 in package 2132 mm - (1934 mm - (5120 mm) 2237 mm 2039 mm) AMG vehicles 84.1 in - GL 550 4MATIC BlueEFFICIENCY

86.6 in Technical data 2136 mm - Vehicle length 202.6 in 2199 mm (5146 mm)

All models (except for GL 63 AMG 4MATIC AMG vehicles) Vehicle length 202.6 in Vehicle widthincluding 84.3 in (5146 mm) exterior mirrors (2141 mm) Vehicle width including 84.3 in Maximum vehicle height 75.2 in exterior mirrors (2141 mm) (1910 mm) Vehicle width without 78.0 in Maximum vehicle height 76.4 in exterior mirrors (1982 mm) (ON&OFFROAD package) (1940 mm) Maximum vehicle height 74.9 in Minimum vehicle height 72.8 in (1902 mm) (highway driving level) (1850 mm)

Z 448 Trailer tow hitch

GL 63 AMG 4MATIC Minimum vehicle height 72.4 in (1839 mm) Wheelbase 121.1 in (3075 mm) Maximum ground 9.9 in clearance (251 mm) Minimum ground 7.4 in clearance (188 mm) Turning radius 40.8 ft (12.45 m) Maximum roof load 220 lb (100 kg) Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch (example) : Anchorage points Trailer tow hitch ; Rearaxle centerline Mounting dimensions ! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, changes to the cooling system and drive train may be necessary, depending on the vehicle type. If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted, observe the anchorage points on the chassis frame. Technical data Trailer tow hitch 449

Trailer loads Trailer loads, trailer drawbar noseweights and axle loads Missing values were not availableattime of going to print. All models Permissible trailer load,unbraked Permissible trailer load, braked (at aminimumgradient- 7500 lbs (3402 kg) climbing capability of 12% fromastandstill) Maximum drawbar noseweight (the drawbar 600 lbs (272 kg) noseweight is notincluded in the trailer load) Permissible rear axle load when towing atrailer 3970 lbs (1800 kg)

Ball position

Ball positionofthe ball coupling When choosing a ball coupling, the dimensions stated in the illustration must not Technical data be exceeded.

Z 450 451 452